JP2018166809A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To enhance fun of a game.SOLUTION: Signal determination means determines a signal outputted by signal output means. Based on determination of a predetermined signal by the signal determination means, movable means can move a movable member movable within a predetermined movable range. Movable signal output means outputs a movable signal for varying a movable amount for allowing the movable means to vary the movable member within a unit period. Based on determination of the predetermined signal by the signal determination means, selection means selects a type of the movable signal outputted by the movable signal output means. Thus a type of a movable signal is selected and the movable amount of the movable member is varied, based on operation of operation means, thus diversifying the movable mode of the movable member. As a result, fun of a game can be enhanced.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 217

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine is known in which an effect of operating a decorative body from a standby position to a predetermined operating position is performed by a player operating an operating means (such as an effect button) ( Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2015-097827

  However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the interest of games.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the game.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes an operation means that can be operated by a player, and a signal output means that outputs a predetermined signal based on the operation of the operation means. A signal discriminating unit for discriminating a signal output from the signal output unit, a movable member movable in a predetermined movable range, and the predetermined signal is discriminated by the signal discriminating unit. Movable means for moving the movable member, and a movable signal output means for outputting a movable signal for changing a movable amount by which the movable member can be moved in a unit period by the movable means, and the signal determining means Selection means for selecting the type of the movable signal output by the movable signal output means based on the determination of the predetermined signal.

  A gaming machine according to a second aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the first aspect, further comprising an interval determining unit that determines an interval at which the predetermined signal is determined by the signal determining unit, and the selecting unit is configured to determine the interval When the interval at which the predetermined signal is determined by the means is equal to or shorter than the predetermined interval, a movable signal having a smaller movable amount than that in the case where the predetermined interval is equal to or larger than the predetermined interval is selected.

  According to a third aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect, when the specific condition is satisfied, the selection unit determines that the interval determined by the predetermined signal is determined by the interval determination unit. A movable signal having a large movable amount is selected even if it is equal to or shorter than a predetermined interval.

  A gaming machine according to claim 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the movable means is composed of at least a stepping motor, and the movable signal is composed of a signal composed of a predetermined frequency. It is what has been.

  The gaming machine according to claim 5 is the gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein the movable signal has a larger movable amount due to a signal having a higher frequency and a smaller movable amount due to a signal having a lower frequency.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 1, operation means that can be operated by the player, signal output means for outputting a predetermined signal based on the operation of the operation means, and the signal output means A signal discriminating means for discriminating a signal output by the control unit; a movable member capable of moving within a predetermined movable range; and the movable member based on the fact that the predetermined signal is discriminated by the signal discriminating means. A movable signal output means for outputting a movable signal for changing a movable amount by which the movable member can be moved in a unit period by the movable means, and the predetermined signal is determined by the signal determining means. And selecting means for selecting the type of the movable signal output by the movable signal output means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be further improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the following effect can be obtained. That is, it has interval determining means for determining an interval at which the predetermined signal is determined by the signal determining means, and the selecting means has an interval at which the predetermined signal is determined by the interval determining means being equal to or less than a predetermined interval. In some cases, a movable signal having a smaller movable amount than that in a case where the distance is equal to or greater than the predetermined interval is selected. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be further improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect, the selection unit is configured to perform the predetermined determination by the interval determination unit when a specific condition is satisfied. Even if the signal-determined interval is equal to or less than the predetermined interval, the movable signal having a large movable amount is selected. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be further improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the fourth aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects, the movable means is composed of at least a stepping motor, and the movable signal is at a predetermined frequency. It is composed of configured signals. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be further improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the fifth aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine of the fourth aspect, the movable signal has a larger movable amount due to a signal having a higher frequency, and the movable amount has a smaller signal due to a signal having a lower frequency. It will be smaller. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be further improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is the disassembled front perspective view of the operation unit which looked at the disassembled operation unit from the front. It is the disassembled front perspective view of the operation unit which looked at the disassembled operation unit from the front. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. (A) And (b) is a front perspective view of a rocking | fluctuation operation | movement unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a rocking | fluctuation operation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a swing operation unit. (A) is a front view of the swing operation unit, and (b) is a rear view of the swing operation unit. (A) is a front view of the swing operation unit, and (b) is a rear view of the swing operation unit. (A) is a front view of the swing operation unit, and (b) is a rear view of the swing operation unit. (A) is a front view of the swing operation unit, (b) is a rear view of the swing operation unit, and (c) is a bottom view of the swing operation unit. (A) to (d) are partial front enlarged views of the swing operation unit on the base end side of the arm member. (A) And (b) is a front perspective view of a 1st slide operation | movement unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a 1st slide operation | movement unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of the first slide operation unit. It is a front view of the 1st slide operation unit. (A) is a front view of a 1st slide operation unit, (b) is a rear view of a 1st slide operation unit. (A) is a front view of a 1st slide operation unit, (b) is a rear view of a 1st slide operation unit. It is sectional drawing of the 1st slide operation | movement unit in the XXVII-XXVII line of Fig.26 (a). It is a front perspective view of a reversal operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a reversal operation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a reversal operation unit. (A) is a partial side view of the reversal operation unit, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the reversal operation unit along the line XXXIb-XXXIb in FIG. 31 (a). FIG. 32A is a partial front view of the reversing operation unit, FIG. 32B is a partial cross-sectional view of the reversing operation unit along the line XXXIIb-XXXIIb in FIG. 32A, and FIG. FIG. 32 is a partial cross-sectional view of the reversal operation unit taken along line XXXIIc-XXXIIc in FIG. 32D, and FIG. 33D is a partial cross-sectional view of the reversal operation unit taken along line XXXIId-XXXIId in FIG. (A) to (c) are partial front views of the reversing operation unit, and (d) to (f) are partial side views of the reversing operation unit. It is a partial side view of a reflection member and a transmission member. (A) And (b) is a front perspective view of a 2nd slide operation | movement unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a 2nd slide operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a 2nd slide operation unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of the second slide operation unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of the second slide operation unit. (A) to (c) is a front view of the second slide operation unit. (A) to (c) is a front view of the second slide operation unit. It is a partial rear view of the 2nd slide operation unit. It is a front view of the drive gear, transmission device, and L-shaped lever in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of a drive gear, a transmission device, and an L-shaped lever. (A) And (b) is a front view of a rocking | fluctuation operation | movement unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a rocking | fluctuation operation | movement unit. (A) is a front view of a 1st slide operation unit, (b) is a rear view of a 1st slide operation unit. (A) to (c) is a partial front view of the second slide operation unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of a 1st variable prize-winning apparatus. (A) is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning apparatus of a La-La cross section, (b) is Lb-Lb sectional drawing, (c) is a top view of a 1st variable winning apparatus. (A)-(b) is a partial rear view of a 1st variable prize-winning apparatus. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of the various counters in the 1st control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 2nd random number counter C4 in a 1st control example, and the hit in a normal symbol, (b) is in the main controller in a 1st control example. FIG. 2C is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in FIG. 2C, and FIG. 3C is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a RAM in the main controller in the first control example. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the sound lamp control device in the first control example, and (b) shows an electrical configuration of a RAM in the sound lamp control device in the first control example. FIG. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the fluctuation pattern selection table in a 1st control example, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the long press production | presentation lottery table. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the display data table in a 1st control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the transfer data table in a 1st control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the drawing list | wrist in the 1st control example. (A)-(b) is an example of the alerting | reporting aspect displayed with a 3rd symbol display apparatus. (A)-(b) is an example of the long press effect displayed with a 3rd symbol display apparatus. (A)-(b) is an example of the long press effect displayed with a 3rd symbol display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol change start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation | movement setting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the ending process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the alerting | reporting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and production | presentation process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the command interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the V interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the stop classification command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. (A) is the flowchart which showed the back image change command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the error command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the long press presentation process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the warning image setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of ROM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example, (b) is the electric structure of RAM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. (C) is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the capture production | presentation lottery table. (A)-(b) is an example of the display mode of the capture effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and effect process 2 performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 2 performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed SW production | presentation process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process 2 performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed SW production | presentation display setting processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of RAM in the main controller in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process 2 performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the time change processing which is performed by MPU in a main controller. (A)-(b) is an example of the display mode of the temporary stop effect displayed with a 3rd symbol display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the display setting process 3 performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the symbol temporary stop setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the elements on larger scale of the game board 13 in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 5th control example. It is the elements on larger scale of the game board 13 in the 5th control example. (A)-(b) is a rear view of a part of the V winning device in the fifth control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in the 5th control example. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of the various counters in the 5th control example. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the main controller in the fifth control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a RAM in the main controller in the fifth control example. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table in the fifth control example, and (b) is a jackpot determination in the first random number counter C1 and the first special symbol in the fifth control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence with a value, (c) typically showed the correspondence between the 1st random number counter C1 in a 5th control example, and the jackpot judgment value in a 2nd special symbol. It is a schematic diagram, and (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second random number counter C4 in the fifth control example and the hit in the normal symbol. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 1st category selection table in a 5th control example, (b) is the 1st category counter C2 and a 1st special symbol in a 5th control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence with the jackpot type in (c), and (c) typically shows the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 in the fifth control example and the jackpot type in the second special symbol. It is the shown schematic diagram. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the small hit type selection table in a 5th control example, (b) is the small hit type counter C5 in a 5th control example, and the small in a 1st special symbol. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence with a hit type, (c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence between the small hit type counter C5 and the small hit type in the 2nd special symbol. . (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the fluctuation | variation pattern selection table in a 5th control example, (b) is a response | compatibility with the fluctuation | variation classification counter CS1 and fluctuation | variation classification at the time of big hit in the 5th control example. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation type at the time of deviation (normal) in the fifth control example, (D) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the fluctuation classification counter CS1 and the fluctuation classification in time saving in the 5th control example. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows typically the structure of ROM in the voice lamp control apparatus in a 5th control example, (b) is typically the structure of RAM in the voice lamp control apparatus in a 5th control example. It is a schematic diagram shown. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the game flow in the 5th control example. (A) is a time chart showing from the winning of the game ball to the second winning opening in the fifth control example to the occurrence of the big hit based on the passing of the game ball to the V winning switch, (b) is the fifth control It is the time chart which showed from the winning of the game ball to the 2nd winning a prize mouth in the example to the occurrence of the jackpot by the special design. (A) is the display screen displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 5th control example, Comprising: It is a schematic diagram which showed the special figure 2 non-change state among special figure 2 gaming states, (b) These are the display screens displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 5th control example, Comprising: It is the schematic diagram which showed the special figure 2 fluctuation state among special figure 2 game states. (A) is the display screen displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 5th control example, Comprising: It is the schematic diagram which showed the small hit game state among special figure 2 game states, (b) 5 is a display screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the 5 control example, and is a schematic diagram showing a state in which a jackpot based on the passing of the game ball to the V winning switch is generated among the special figure 2 game states. It is. (A) is the display screen displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 5th control example, Comprising: It is the schematic diagram which showed the state at the time of jackpot start among special figure 2 game states, (b) Is a display screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, and is a schematic diagram showing that, among the special figure 2 game states, a state where a short-time game is given after the jackpot, ( c) is a display screen displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the fifth control example, and is a schematic diagram showing that, in the special figure 2 gaming state, the state shifts to the special figure 1 gaming state after the big hit. FIG. (A) is a display screen displayed at the timing of FIG. 125 (b), and is a schematic diagram showing that the jackpot D has occurred, and (b) is the timing of FIG. 125 (b). It is a display screen that is displayed, and is a schematic view showing a state where there is a jackpot C in the hold. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation start process 2 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the normal fluctuation start process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the time-short fluctuation start process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the small hitting start setting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in a 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in a 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the V entrance passage process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the V passage process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 2 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit end process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the hit related process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the V passage process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the hit related command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 5th control example. (A) is a flowchart which shows the jackpot start command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 5th control example, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows round number command processing. (A) is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 5th control example, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows a small hitting start command process. (A) is a flowchart showing a small hit end command process executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the fifth control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the fifth control example. It is a flowchart which shows V entrance passage command processing. (A) is a flowchart which shows 3V production command processing performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 5th control example, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows 2V production command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the V production command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 5th control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the game flow of the modification in a 5th control example. It is a perspective enlarged view of a detour member in the 6th control example. It is a rear view of a part of the first variable winning device in the sixth control example. It is the schematic diagram which looked at the flow-path opening apparatus in the 6th control example. (A)-(c) in a 7th control example is the schematic diagram typically shown about the execution system of a continuous chance effect. (A) And (b) in the 7th example of control is a mimetic diagram showing typically an example of the display mode of a continuous chance effect. (A) And (b) in the 7th example of control is a mimetic diagram showing typically an example of the display mode of a continuous chance effect. (A) is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of ROM in the main control apparatus in a 7th control example, (b) is a block which shows the electrical structure of RAM in the main control apparatus in a 7th control example FIG. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the fluctuation | variation classification counter CS1 and the fluctuation | variation classification at the time of the big hit in the 7th control example, (b) is the time of losing in the 7th control example (normal) FIG. 10C is a schematic diagram schematically showing a correspondence relationship between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation type in FIG. 6C, and FIG. 8C is a correspondence relationship between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation type at the time of failure (probability variation) in the seventh control example It is the schematic diagram which showed typically. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the continuous chance frequency table at the time of winning in a 7th control example, (b) is the content of the continuous chance frequency table at the time of failure in a 7th control example. It is the schematic diagram shown typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the latent frequency lottery table in the 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process 2 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the winning information process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in a 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in a 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the prognostic setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 7th control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in the 8th control example. (A) is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of ROM in the main control apparatus in an 8th control example, (b) is a schematic diagram which shows typically the content of the 1st classification table in an 8th control example. FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of RAM in the main controller in the 8th control example. (A) And (b) shows the relationship between the gaming state, the passing state of the game ball to the probability change switch, and the output of each terminal of the external output terminal plate when the jackpot game in the eighth control example is executed. It is a timing chart. (A) and (b) are the game state, the passing state of the game ball to the probability change switch, and the output of each terminal of the external output terminal plate when the big hit game in the eighth control example is continuously executed. 3 is a timing chart showing the relationship. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 8th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the external output process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 8th control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of RAM in the main controller in the ninth control example. (A) And (b) shows the relationship between the gaming state, the passing state of the game ball to the probability change switch, and the output of each terminal of the external output terminal plate when the jackpot game in the eighth control example is executed. It is a timing chart. It is a flowchart which shows the external output process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 9th control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the accessory A in a 10th control example. (B) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the accessory B in the 10th control example. (C) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the accessory C in the 10th control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the accessory arrangement | positioning in a 10th control example. (B) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the accessory operation | movement in the 10th control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the standby position of the accessory A in a 10th control example. (B) is the figure which showed operation | movement of the normal drive pattern of the accessory A in a 10th control example. (C) is the figure which showed operation | movement of the shortening drive pattern of the accessory A in a 10th control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in the 10th control example. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the accessory operation | movement in the button repeated striking effect in a 10th control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 10th control example, (b) is the structure of RAM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 10th control example. It is the schematic diagram shown typically. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the continuous striking effect selection table in a 10th control example, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the operation scenario table in a 10th control example. It is. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the accessory A scenario table in a 10th control example, (b) shows typically the content of the accessory B scenario table in a 10th control example. (C) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the accessory C scenario table in a 10th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 10th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 10th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and effect process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 10th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the consecutive hit button processing which is executed by MPU inside the sound lamp control device in the 10th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the button timer subtraction process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 10th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory A operation | movement setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 10th control example. (A) is the flowchart which showed the accessory B operation | movement setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 10th control example, (b) is in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 10th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory C operation | movement setting process performed by MPU. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory operation | movement process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 10th control example. (A)-(c) is the figure which showed the operation | movement of the delay process in the 11th control example. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the accessory operation | movement in the button repeated striking effect in the 11th control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in an 11th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the continuous hit button process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in an 11th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the delay timer subtraction process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in an 11th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the accessory A operation | movement setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in an 11th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory B operation | movement setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in an 11th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory C operation | movement setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in an 11th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the accessory operation process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in an 11th control example. (A)-(c) is the schematic diagram which showed the flow of the repetition operation | movement in the 12th control example. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the accessory operation | movement in the button repeated striking effect in the 12th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the consecutive hit button processing 3 which is executed by MPU inside the sound lamp control device in the 12th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory A operation | movement setting process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 12th control example. (A) is the flowchart which showed the accessory B operation | movement setting process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 12th control example, (b) is the inside of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 12th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory C operation | movement setting process 3 performed by MPU of. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed operation | movement of the accessory in the 13th control example. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the accessory operation | movement in the button repeated striking effect in the 13th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the continuous hit button process 4 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 13th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the accessory A operation | movement setting process 4 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 13th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the accessory B operation | movement setting process 4 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 13th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the accessory C operation | movement setting process 4 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in a 13th control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the weak operation | movement of the accessory in the 14th control example. (B) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the strong operation | movement of the accessory in the 14th control example. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the accessory operation | movement in the button repeated striking effect in the 14th control example. It is a block diagram which shows in detail the drive motor in the 14th control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 14th control example, (b) is the structure of RAM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 14th control example. It is the schematic diagram shown typically. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the 2nd operation scenario table in a 14th control example, (b) is the content of the accessory A 2nd scenario table in a 14th control example typically. It is the schematic diagram shown in. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous hit button processing 5 which is executed by MPU inside the sound lamp control device in the 14th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the interval timer subtraction process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 14th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the accessory A operation | movement setting process 5 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 14th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory operation | movement process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 14th control example. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 15th control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in the 15th control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the solenoid drive circuit in the 15th control example. It is a timing chart which showed the operation of the ordinary electric solenoid in the 15th control example. It is a timing chart which showed the contents of operation of the ordinary electric solenoid in the 15th control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM in the main controller in a 15th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in a 15th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol control process performed by MPU in the main controller in a 15th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in a 15th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the general electric operation setting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 15th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the general power switching process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 15th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the general power timer subtraction process performed by MPU in the main controller in a 15th control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the solenoid drive circuit in the modification of a 15th control example. (B) is a timing chart showing an output signal in a modification of the fifteenth control example. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of operation | movement of the utility power (electrical-powered article) 640a in the modification of the 15th control example. (A)-(c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the flow of operation | movement of a driven member.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 42, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is played when a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13. In the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shot that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the front upper side and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes to the front side and opens the upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the contents of the effect of super reach. The

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light emission mode by turning on or blinking according to the change of the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 (see FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of movement (rotation position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The resistance value of the variable resistor The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (launch strength), and the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of balls for nails (not shown) and a windmill (movable member 310 are shown, and the others are (Not shown), rails 61, 62, general winning port 63, first winning port 64, second winning port 640, first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device (not shown), normal symbol start A mouth (through gate) 67, a variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device (not shown), and the variable display device unit 80 are formed on the base plate 60 by router processing. It is arrange | positioned by the made through-hole, and is being fixed with the tapping screw etc. from the front side of the game board 13. FIG.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the band-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed in front of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and fired). Area where the falling sphere flows).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each having a plurality of LEDs and a 7-segment display as light emitting means are disposed in the lower left portion of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37 </ b> A and 37 </ b> B are configured to be selectively used depending on whether the ball has won the first prize opening 64 or the second prize opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate, by means of LEDs, whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing the probability, in the short time, or in the normal state by a lighting state, or whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing or not by a lighting state. , Indicating whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot or a symbol that is out of place, by a lighting state, indicating the number of held balls by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device, Displays numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured to have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to winning of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the type of the big hit if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but if it is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, the “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and “4R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of four. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds and hits a short time during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

  In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability change is in progress (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to the special game state. It is a state of. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The “low probability state” refers to a time when the probability of jackpot change is not occurring, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that at the time of probability change. The short time state (short time medium) of the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains as it is, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second prize opening 640 is obtained. It means the state of the game where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state is a game state (a state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased) which is neither probabilistic nor short in time.

  During probability change and time reduction, not only does the probability of winning the second symbol increase, but also the time for opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640 is changed, and the time is longer than normal. Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the opened state (open state), the ball wins the second winning opening 640 as compared to the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). Easy state. Therefore, during the probability change or the short time, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during the probability change or during the short time, it is not necessary to change the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, It is good also as what changes the frequency | count that the accessory 640a opens more than usual. In addition, the probability of winning the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or in the short time, and the electric accessory 640a is released at the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and once. It is good also as what changes at least one of the frequency | counts. In addition, during the probability change or in the short time, the time of opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per time is not counted, and the second symbol hit Only the probability may be changed so as to increase compared to the normal rate.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is synchronized with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B by using a winning (start winning) at the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 as a trigger. The third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display, and the second symbol is variablely displayed with the passage of a sphere at a normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 as a trigger. And a second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4). One symbol row is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). The decorative display according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

  Each time the sphere passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, the second symbol display device displays a symbol “○” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)). Fluctuation display in which the lights are alternately turned on for a predetermined time is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the second symbol is displayed. Further, if the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the third symbol is displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is displayed for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in an activated state (opened) only.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player a lot of opportunities for the electric winning component 640a of the second winning opening 640 to be in an open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the short time.

  It is to be noted that the probability of winning is increased during probability change or time reduction, and other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a per hit are also used to reach the second prize opening 640 during probability change or time reduction. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during probability change or short time, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, The opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the lower region of the variable display unit 80, and the ball that flows down to the right side of the game board among the balls fired on the game board. Is configured to be able to pass through. When the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, the lottery of the second symbol is performed. After winning the lottery, the 2nd symbol display device displays a variation, and if the winning lottery results, the symbol “○” is displayed as the variable display stop symbol, and the winning lottery result may be off For example, the symbol “x” is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

  The total number of passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 of the sphere is retained up to a total of four times, and the number of retained spheres is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the second symbol retention lamp. (Not shown) is also lit up. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol. A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the maximum number of balls to be held for the passage of the ball of the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to 4 times, but is set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). You may do it. Further, the number of normal symbol start ports (through gates) 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, but may be plural (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be the left side of the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol hold lamp may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 through which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball wins the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the first winning port switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, a second winning port 640 through which a ball can win is disposed on the right side of the first winning port 64 in front view. When a ball wins the second prize opening 640, a second prize opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the second prize opening switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  Each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is also one of winning ports from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball is won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize slot 640 are configured to be the same. The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 is different from the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second prize opening 640, for example, the ball to the first prize opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize opening 640 may be five.

  The second winning opening 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for the ball to win the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, if the symbol “○” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball to the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, 640a is in the open state (enlarged state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that during normal change during the probability change and the short time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. "Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is opened (enlarged) is increased. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a also becomes longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state where the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the short time compared to the normal time.

  Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins the first winning port 64 and when the ball wins the second winning port 640. However, the probability that a 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won is higher when the ball wins the second winning slot 640 than when the ball wins the first winning slot 64. Is set. On the other hand, the first winning port 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning port 640, and is in a state where the ball can always win.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric winnings associated with the second winning opening 640 are often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and a lot of opportunities for lottery wins are obtained by winning at the first winning opening 64, and the jackpot It is advantageous for the player to aim for this.

  On the other hand, during probability change and time reduction, the ball is passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, so that the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning port 640 is easily opened, and the second winning port 640 is opened. Since it is easy to win, the ball is fired toward the second winning port 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and the normal symbol starting port (through gate) ) It is advantageous for the player to pass 67 to open the electric accessory and to aim for a 15R probability variation big win by winning the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  A first variable winning device 65 is disposed on the lower right side of the first winning port 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning port (large opening port) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed, The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the first variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening-port solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing the front side with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. )). The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big win, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downwards in the front, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins into the specific winning port 65a while the specific winning port 65a is opened. You may make it form as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first For example, the left side of the variable display unit 80 is not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64.

  A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate paper, an identification label or the like is provided at the lower right corner of the gaming board 13, and the certificate paper or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A sphere that flows down in the game area and does not win any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out port 71. The first out port 71 is disposed below the first winning port 64.

  A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill are arranged. In the present embodiment, one of the windmills (referred to as a movable member 310) is disposed on the upper left side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front, and is illustrated in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control device 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device are performed by the MPU 201. Execute.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing on the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 includes a switch group (not shown), various switches 208 including a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other device 228, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive devices 340, 464, 560 and drive motors 441, 771, 772, 773, 774.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the production contents at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the rear image is an image displayed on the rear surface side of the third symbol which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display command received from the display control device 114, The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 has a variation effect of the third symbol, etc. The display is controlled. In addition, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7, a housing structure for the units 300 to 700 in the back case 210 will be described.

  FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIGS. 6 and 7 are exploded front perspective views of the operation unit 200 as viewed from the front. FIG. 7 illustrates a state where the second slide operation unit 700 is attached to the back case 210.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 to 7, the operation unit 200 is opened on one side (the front side in FIG. 6) from the bottom wall portion 211 and the outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 211. A back case 210 formed in a box shape is provided. The rear case 210 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front by forming a rectangular opening 211a at the center of the bottom wall portion 211 thereof. The opening 211a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the third symbol display device 81 can be disposed).

  In the operation unit 200, a swing operation unit 300, a first slide operation unit 400, a reversal operation unit 500, a decoration operation unit 600, and a second slide operation unit 700 are accommodated in the internal space of the back case 210. Configured as a unit.

  Specifically, the second slide operation unit 700 is formed with an outer shape slightly smaller than the shape formed by the inner surface of the outer wall portion 212 of the back case 210, and is in contact with the inner surface of the outer wall portion 212 while being in contact with the outer wall portion 212. It is arrange | positioned by the bottom wall part 211 in the aspect enclosed by (refer FIG. 7). In the assembled state (see FIG. 5), the second slide operation unit 700 is formed with a rectangular opening at a position that coincides with the opening 211a of the rear case 210 when viewed from the front.

  In contrast to the state shown in FIG. 7, the swing operation unit 300, the first slide operation unit 400, the reversal operation unit 500, and the decoration unit 600 are stacked on the front side of the second slide operation unit 700. It is arrange | positioned and accommodated in the back case 210 (refer FIG. 5).

  Thus, in the present embodiment, in a stacked state in which another operation unit (for example, the first slide operation unit 400) is superimposed on the front side with respect to a predetermined operation unit (for example, the second slide operation unit 700). Since it is disposed, the predetermined operation unit can be shielded by another operation unit in the front view.

  In other words, when the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) is formed of a light-transmitting material and the player can visually recognize the operation unit disposed on the back side of the game board 13, a predetermined operation unit is provided. It is possible to allow the player to visually recognize only the necessary part and to shield the other part from the player by another operation unit. Thereby, since it is not necessary to design the predetermined effect member shielded by the other operation unit on the assumption that the whole is visually recognized by the player, the degree of freedom in the design can be improved. .

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 8 to 10, an outline of operation modes of the swing operation unit 300, the first slide operation unit 400, and the second slide operation unit 700 will be described. In the description of FIGS. 8 to 10, FIGS. 5 to 7 are appropriately referred to.

  8 to 10 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG. In FIG. 8, the state in which the standing member 330 and the arm member 320 of the swing operation unit 300 are arranged at the extended position is shown in FIG. 9, and the tilting member 460 and the suspension member 430 of the first slide operation unit 400 are shown in FIG. FIG. 10 illustrates a state in which the slide members 720 and 740 of the second slide operation unit are disposed in the extended position.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the swing operation unit 300 swings on an arm member 320 that is pivotally supported on the base end side so as to swing, and on the swing end side that is opposite to the base end side of the arm member 320. The arm member 320 and the standing member 330 are operated between a retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and an extended position shown in FIG. 8. In the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the arm member 320 and the upright member 330 are retracted below the opening 211a of the back case 210 and are invisible to the player (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, in the extended position shown in FIG. 8, the arm member 320 is lifted, and the upright member 330 is disposed at the center of the opening 211a of the back case 210 (that is, in front of the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2). .

  As shown in FIG. 9, the first slide operation unit 400 swings on a suspension member 430 (see FIG. 22) that is slid and moved obliquely downward, and a bent arm portion 433 (see FIG. 22) of the suspension member 430. A tilting member 460 that is pivotally supported is provided, and the suspension member 430 and the tilting member 460 are operated between a retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and an extended position shown in FIG. 9. In the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the suspending member 430 and the tilting member 460 are retracted to the right of the opening 211a of the back case 210 and are not visible to the player (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, in the overhang position shown in FIG. 9, the suspension member 430 is disposed at the end in the sliding direction (left side), and the tilting member 460 is located at the center of the opening 211a of the back case 210 (ie, the front of the third symbol display device 81). , See FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 10, the second slide operation unit 700 includes a pair of slide members 720 and 740 formed to be slidable, and the slide members 720 and 740 are retracted as shown in FIG. It moves between the position and the overhang position shown in FIG. In the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the pair of first slide members 720 are retracted to the left and right outward of the opening 211 a of the back case 210, and the pair of second slide members 740 are positioned above and below the opening 211 a of the back case 210. It is evacuated to the outside and cannot be seen by the player (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, in the overhang position shown in FIG. 10, the slide members 720 and 740 are arranged at the center of the opening 211a of the back case 210 (that is, the front of the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2).

  The second slide operation unit 700 is formed so that the shape of the “heart” can be seen in front view when the slide members 720 and 740 are overhanging.

  As will be described later, the reversing operation unit 500 includes a rectangular plate-like reflecting member 520 (see FIG. 28), and is formed so that the surface of the reflecting member 520 viewed from the player can be reversed (turned over). The The reversing operation unit 500 does not have a member that protrudes to the center of the opening 211a of the back case 210 (that is, the front of the third symbol display device 81) as provided in the other operation units 300, 400, and 700. Therefore, the reversing operation unit 500 is always operated on the left side of the opening 211a of the back case 210 (see FIG. 5).

  Each of these operation units 300 to 700 is formed so as to be able to operate independently, and as described above, the operation units 300 to 700 are arranged in a stacked state (stacked). Those having different layers may be operated at the same time even if the operating member projects inward from the opening 211a of the back case 210. That is, as illustrated in FIG. 8 to FIG. 10, the operation units 300 to 700 can be operated not only independently, but also these operations can be combined, so that the production effect can be enhanced. In addition, each operation | movement unit 300-600 is arrange | positioned in the same layer, and each of these operation | movement units 300-600 and the 2nd slide operation | movement unit 700 are arrange | positioned in a different layer (refer FIG. 7).

  FIG. 11 is a front view of the operation unit 200. In FIG. 11, the tilt member 460 of the first slide operation unit 400 is disposed at the extended position, and the slide members 720 and 740 of the second slide operation unit 700 are disposed at the extended position.

  Here, since the second slide operation unit 700 is disposed between the first slide operation unit 400 and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), the first slide operation unit 400 and the third symbol display are displayed. A gap corresponding to the second slide operation unit 700 is generated between the device 81 and the apparatus 81. Therefore, when only the tilting member 460 of the first slide operation unit 400 is disposed at the overhang position, a part of the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81 is shielded from being visible in front view. Although it is possible, it is difficult to prevent the player from viewing the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 by looking through the gap from an oblique direction (for example, a direction inclined in the left-right direction from the front view).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11, the tilting member 460 of the first slide operation unit 400 and the slide members 720 and 740 of the second slide operation unit 700 are both arranged at the extended position, so that the player Can be filled with the slide members 720 and 740. Thereby, it can shield reliably so that a part of display area P of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 cannot be visually recognized, and the production effect of the operation unit 200 can be improved.

  FIG. 12 is a front view of the operation unit 200. In FIG. 12, the upright member 330 of the swing operation unit 300 is disposed at the extended position, and the slide members 720 and 740 of the second slide operation unit 700 are disposed at the extended position.

  Here, since the second slide operation unit 700 is disposed between the swing operation unit 300 and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), the swing operation unit 300 and the third symbol display device 81 are disposed. A gap of 700 minutes for the second slide operation unit is generated between the two. Therefore, when only the upright member 330 of the swinging operation unit 300 is disposed at the extended position, a part of the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81 is shielded from being visible in front view. Although it is possible, it is difficult to prevent the player from viewing the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 by looking through the gap from an oblique direction (for example, a direction inclined in the left-right direction from the front view).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12, the rising member 330 of the swing operation unit 300 and the slide members 720 and 740 of the second slide operation unit 700 are both arranged at the extended position, so that the player can A gap seen from an oblique direction can be filled with the slide members 720 and 740. Thereby, it can shield reliably so that a part of display area P (refer FIG. 2) of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 cannot be visually recognized, and the effect effect of the operation unit 200 can be improved.

  The swing operation unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 20. 13A and 13B are front perspective views of the swing operation unit 300. FIG. In FIG. 13A, the arm member 320 and the standing member 330 are disposed at the retracted position, and in FIG. 13B, the arm member 320 and the standing member 330 are disposed at the protruding position.

  As shown in FIG. 13, the arm member 320 of the swing motion unit 300 is swung around the swing shaft 312 and the posture of the upright member 330 relative to the arm member 320 is changed before and after the swing (the tension is changed). Stand up as you go out). Next, the overall configuration of the swing operation unit 300 will be described.

  14 is an exploded front perspective view of the swing operation unit 300, and FIG. 15 is an exploded rear perspective view of the swing operation unit 300.

  As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the swing operation unit 300 includes a base member 310 formed in a plate shape, an arm member 320 pivotally supported on the base end side by the base member 310, and the arm member 320. Standing member 330 that is internally fitted to the swing end side that is the end opposite to the base end side of the base member 310, and a drive device that is disposed on the back surface of the lower right portion of the base member 310 (see FIG. 14). 340, a transmission device 350 meshed with the drive gear 341 of the drive device 340 and coupled to the arm member 320, a torsion spring 360 that applies a biasing force to the arm member 320, and a lower right portion of the base member 310 when viewed from the front And a cover member 370 attached to the front surface of the main body.

  The base member 310 is a member that matches the thickness direction and the front-rear direction and serves as a skeleton of the swing operation unit 300, and is fixed to the fitting hole 311 that is drilled in the thickness direction and the fitting hole 311. A cylindrical rocking shaft 312, a transmission shaft 313 projecting in the thickness direction below the fitting hole 311, a drive gear insertion hole 314 drilled adjacent to the transmission shaft 313, and a fitting hole A guide hole 315 that is a pair of long holes extending concentrically with 311 and formed on the left side of the guide hole 315 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 14), and bent to the opposite side of the guide hole 315 A standing hole 316 that is a long hole that is extended and a hook part 317 that protrudes like a bowl on the front side on the right side of the fitting hole 311 when viewed from the front.

  The arm member 320 is a member for projecting the swinging operation unit 330 inward of the opening 211a (see FIG. 5) of the back case 210, and includes a main body portion 321 formed in a long plate shape, A penetrating cylindrical tubular portion 322 disposed on the base end side of the main body portion 321; a sliding ring portion 323 opened in the same direction as the tubular portion 322 on the swing end side of the main body portion 321; A plate-shaped front contact portion 324 which is raised and arranged on the front side of the main body portion 321; a long hole-like release hole 325 extending along a straight line drawn radially from the cylindrical portion 322; A pair of sliding portions 326 formed on the back surface side of the portion 321 and projecting toward the base member 310, and projecting toward the front side in the left side of the cylindrical portion 322 (see FIG. 14). A projecting portion 327.

  The cylindrical portion 322 is a portion that is externally fitted to the swing shaft 312 of the base member 310. That is, the arm member 310 is swung around the cylindrical portion 322 that is pivotally supported by the swing shaft 312.

  The sliding ring portion 323 is a portion that supports the upright member 330 by internal fitting. It is formed in a large diameter and suppresses the wobbling of the upright member 330.

  The front contact portion 324 is fastened and fixed to the main body portion 321 near the base end side, and is not fastened near the swing end side. Therefore, in a state where a gap is formed between the front contact portion 324 and the main body portion 321 and the arm member 320 is disposed at the retracted position, the portion on the protruding end side of the standing member 330 is the front contact portion 324 and the main body portion. It accommodates in the clearance gap between 321 (refer FIG. 16).

  The release hole 325 is a long hole connected to the regulation sliding portion 351 of the transmission device 350, and the action of regulating the swing of the arm member 320 by the positional relationship of the transmission device 350, the cylindrical portion 322, and the release hole 325. The details will be described later.

  Since the pair of sliding portions 326 are inserted through the pair of guide holes 315 of the base member, the pair of sliding portions 326 are slid into the pair of guide holes 315 while the arm member 320 is swinging. Thus, rattling of the arm member 320 is suppressed and the swinging of the arm member 320 is stabilized. Since the ring-shaped collar member is fastened and fixed to the tip of the sliding portion 326 in a rotatable manner, the sliding portion 326 is prevented from falling off the guide hole 315 and the swinging operation of the arm member 320 is stabilized. Can be made.

  The protruding portion 327 is a portion where the moving end side arm portion 362 of the torsion spring 360 is locked, and is a portion to which the urging force of the torsion spring 360 is transmitted.

  The standing member 330 is a member disposed on the front side of the opening 211a (see FIG. 5) of the rear case 210 by swinging the arm member 320 in the upward direction, and includes a plate-like main body portion 331 and its main body portion. A projecting ring portion 332 projecting in a large-diameter ring shape from the rear surface side of 331, a change sliding portion 333 projecting on the rear surface side on the base end side, and a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the projecting ring portion 332 And a retaining portion 334 that is fastened and fixed to the changing sliding portion 333.

  The main body 331 is formed in an elliptical plate shape having a major axis direction D1 (see FIG. 16) and a minor axis direction D2 (see FIG. 16).

  The overhang ring portion 332 is formed with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the sliding ring portion 323 of the arm member 320. Therefore, the standing member 330 is pivotally supported so that the outer surface of the overhanging ring portion 332 is in contact with the inner surface of the sliding ring portion 323 over a wide range (large area). Therefore, even when the large upright member 330 is pivotally supported at one place, the wobbling of the upright member 330 accompanying the swing of the arm member 320 can be suppressed.

  The change sliding portion 333 is a portion that is inserted into the upright hole 316 of the base member 310 and has a role of changing the posture of the upright member 330 as the arm member 320 is swung. The details will be described later. In addition, since a ring-shaped collar member is fastened and fixed to the tip of the changing sliding portion 333, the changing sliding portion 333 is prevented from falling off the standing hole 316 and the arm member 320 is swung. Can be stabilized.

  The retaining portion 334 is formed with an outer shape slightly larger than the inner diameter of the sliding ring portion 323 of the arm member 320, and is fastened and fixed to the main body portion 331 of the upright member 330, and the back surface of the sliding ring portion 323 of the arm member 320. Abutted on the side. Therefore, the standing member 330 can be formed so as not to be pulled out from the arm member 320 by the retaining portion 334.

  The drive device 340 is a motor that is disposed on the back side of the base member 310 and drives the arm member 320, and includes a drive gear 341 that is rotationally driven. The drive gear 341 is inserted into the drive gear of the base member 310. It is disposed on the front side of the base member 310 through the hole 314 (see FIG. 20).

  The transmission device 350 is a member to which the driving force of the driving device 340 is transmitted first, and is supported on the transmission shaft 313 of the base member 310 on the proximal end side and meshed with the driving gear 341 of the driving device 340. The Moreover, the rocking | fluctuation end which is an edge part on the opposite side to a base end side is provided with the control sliding part 351 which protrudes toward the front side.

  The restriction sliding portion 351 is inserted into the release hole 325 of the arm member 320, and the restriction slide portion 351 is slid into the release hole 325 of the arm member 320 during the swinging operation of the arm member 320. In particular, when the arm member 320 is swung from the extended position toward the retracted position, the arm member 320 is swung by the driving force of the driving device 340 transmitted through the transmitting device 350.

  The torsion spring 360 is an elastic spring serving as a power source in the swinging operation of the arm member 320, particularly when the arm member 320 is swung from the retracted position to the extended position. A proximal end arm portion 361 that is supported (pressed downward) and a movable end side arm portion 362 supported (pressed downward) by the projecting portion 327 of the arm member 320.

  Next, the swing operation of the swing operation unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 18. 16 (a), 17 (a) and 18 (a) are front views of the swing operation unit 300 illustrating the swing operation of the arm member 320 and the posture change of the standing member 330 in time series. FIGS. 16B, 17B, and 18B are rear views of the swing operation unit 300 illustrating the swing operation of the arm member 320 and the posture change of the standing member 330 in time series. 16 shows a state in which the arm member 320 is arranged at the retracted position, and FIG. 17 shows a state in which the change sliding portion 333 of the upright member 330 is arranged at a point where the curvature of the upright hole 316 changes. 18, the state in which the arm member 320 is disposed at the extended position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 16, in the state where the arm member 320 is disposed at the retracted position, the upright member 330 takes a posture in which the major axis direction D1 (left and right direction in FIG. 16) is tilted horizontally. At this time, the portion on the protruding end side of the standing member 330 is accommodated between the main body portion 321 and the front contact portion 324 of the arm member 320.

  That is, in a state where the arm member 320 is disposed at the retracted position, the standing member 330 can be shielded from the player using a space necessary for shielding the arm member 320 from the player. Therefore, the limited space outside the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81 can be used effectively.

  In addition, the pair of sliding portions 326 of the arm member 320 is disposed at the lower end of the guide hole 315, and the change sliding portion 333 of the standing member 330 is disposed at the lower end of the standing hole 316. As a result, the pair of sliding portions 326 and the changing sliding portion 333 can function as a stopper when the arm member 320 is swung downward.

  As shown in FIG. 17, when the arm member 320 is swung toward the extended position, the standing member 330 is changed in a posture (standing posture) in which the major axis direction D1 is directed in the vertical direction.

  The dimension (plate thickness) along the thickness direction of the wall surface (wall surface formed in the thickness direction of the base member 310) of the guide hole 315 of the base member 310 is larger in the vicinity of the upper end than in the vicinity of the lower end of the guide hole 315. The In the vicinity of the upper end of the guide hole 315, the wall surface of the guide hole 315 is formed with a dimension slightly shorter than the length of the sliding part 326 sandwiched between the main body part 321 of the arm member 320 and the collar member. That is, the gap formed between the main body portion 321 and the collar member of the arm member 320 and the base member 310 is larger near the lower end than near the upper end of the guide hole 315. In addition, in this embodiment, it forms in the aspect from which the clearance gap formed changes gradually.

  The gap formed between the main body portion 321 and the collar member of the arm member 320 and the base member 310 is larger near the lower end than near the upper end of the guide hole 315. Therefore, the resistance that the arm member 320 receives from the guide hole 315 when starting from the retracted position can be suppressed, and the high speed when starting the arm member 320 can be ensured.

  Further, in the vicinity of the upper end of the guide hole 315, the dimension (plate thickness) of the wall surface of the guide hole 315 in the thickness direction of the base member 310 is longer than the length of the sliding portion 326 sandwiched between the main body portion 321 of the arm member 320 and the collar member. It is formed with a slightly short dimension (the length of the sliding part 326 and the plate thickness of the base member 310 are formed substantially equal). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the arm member 320 disposed near the upper end of the guide hole 315 from wobbling in the thickness direction of the base member 310.

  In the present embodiment, the standing member 330 is disposed above the sliding portion 326 of the arm member 320 in a state where the arm member 320 is disposed at the extended position (see FIG. 18). Therefore, when the arm member 320 tilts forward with the weight of the upright member 330 (falls to the front side of the sheet of FIG. 18A), the sliding portion 326 serves as a fulcrum for forward tilting. Here, the dimension (plate thickness) of the wall surface of the guide hole 315 in the thickness direction of the base member 310 is slightly shorter than the length of the sliding part 326 sandwiched between the main body part 321 of the arm member 320 and the collar member. Therefore, the arm member 320 can be supported by being brought into contact with the base member 310 on the surface, and the resistance force against the forward tilting of the arm member 320 can be improved.

  Here, the standing hole 316 includes a posture changing portion 316a formed near the lower end and a concentric circular portion 316b formed near the upper end.

  The posture changing portion 316a is a portion in which the extending direction of the long hole is directed to the cylindrical portion 322 (see FIG. 14) that is the swing axis of the arm member 320. When the change sliding portion 333 of the upright member 330 is slid on the posture changing portion 316a, the degree of change in the posture of the upright member 330 with respect to the swing angle of the arm member 320 is maximized. This is because the posture changing portion 316a is in a perpendicular relationship with the circle formed by the movement locus of the sliding ring portion 323.

  Thereby, the posture change of the standing member 330 is completed in a short period from the start, and the posture change between the standing member 330 and the arm member 320 can be reduced when the standing member 330 is visually recognized by the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of visually recognizing the standing member 330 and the arm member 320 as a unit at the extended position while suppressing the vertical shielding space of the standing member 330 at the retracted position.

  Further, when the arm member 320 is started from the retracted position, the resistance related to the standing member 330 is suppressed. That is, when the standing member 330 is disposed at the retracted position, the direction in which the changing sliding portion 333 is rotated about the cylindrical portion 322 is orthogonal to the posture changing portion 316a. Therefore, when the arm member 320 is started from the retracted position, the work that the rotational force about the cylindrical portion 322 is applied to the change sliding portion 333 becomes zero (force × distance = 0). Therefore, the resistance given to the arm member 320 at the time of starting from the retracted position can be suppressed. Thereby, the high speed at the time of starting of the arm member 320 is securable.

  The concentric circle part 316 b is a part in which the extending direction of the long hole is directed in a direction along a circle centering on the cylindrical part 322 of the arm member 320. When the change sliding part 333 of the standing member 330 slides on the concentric circle part 316b, the relative positional relationship between the sliding ring part 323 of the arm member 320 and the change sliding part 333 of the standing member 330 does not change. The posture of the upright member 330 with respect to the arm member 320 is maintained. Thereby, the standing member 330 and the arm member 320 can be visually recognized as one body, and an effect of performing the standing member 330 and the arm member 320 together can be easily realized.

  As shown in FIG. 18, when the arm member 320 is disposed at the extended position, the pair of sliding portions 326 of the arm member 320 are disposed at the upper end of the guide hole 315 and the sliding portion of the standing member 330 is changed. 333 is disposed at the upper end of the standing hole 316. Thus, when the arm member 320 is swung upward, the pair of sliding portions 326 can function as stoppers. In particular, as will be described later, since the arm member 320 is swung in the upward direction by the biasing force of the torsion spring 360, the necessity of a stopper at the end is greater than when driven by a motor or the like. Further, since the sliding portion 326 is formed as a pair, the force generated when the sliding portion 326 functions as a stopper can be dispersed. Thereby, durability of the sliding part 326 can be improved.

  In addition, although the change sliding part 333 of the standing member 330 can be functioned as a stopper, since the standing member 330 is a member pivotally supported by the arm member 320, a strength problem arises. On the other hand, since the pair of sliding portions 326 are formed integrally with the arm member 320, they have sufficient strength. More suitable for use as a stopper.

  As shown in FIG. 18, when the arm member 320 is disposed at the protruding position, the protruding end side (upper side in FIG. 18) of the standing member 330 protrudes upward from the sliding ring portion 323 of the arm member 320. Formed. Therefore, even if the swinging angle of the arm member 320 is reduced, it is possible to ensure the action of protruding the standing member 330 to the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2). The degree of freedom in designing the moving angle can be improved.

  Further, since the moving distance on the protruding end side of the standing member 330 can be ensured while the swing angle of the arm member 320 is kept small, the effect of increasing the moving speed of the standing member 330 can be improved. it can. This effect becomes prominent in the vicinity of the retracted position (see FIG. 16) in which the degree of change in the posture of the standing member 330 with respect to the swing of the arm member 320 is significant (see FIG. 16), and thus the effect of increasing the starting speed of the arm member 320 is significant. It can be.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19, a state immediately before the upright member 330 is housed between the arm member 320 and the front contact portion 324 will be described. 19A is a front view of the swing operation unit 300, FIG. 19B is a rear view of the swing operation unit 300, and FIG. 19C is a bottom view of the swing operation unit 300. FIG. FIGS. 19A to 19C show a state in which the arm member 320 is disposed at an intermediate position between the extended position and the retracted position. Specifically, the arm member is in the extended position. The state in which the protruding end side of the upright member 330 starts to be accommodated between the main body portion 321 and the front contact portion 324 of the arm member 320 is illustrated in the case of swinging from the retracted position to the retracted position.

  As shown in FIG. 19C, the front contact portion 324 is disposed on the front side of the upright member 330 (above FIG. 19C). Accordingly, even when the standing member 330 swings around the sliding ring portion 323 on the fulcrum when the arm member 320 is swung (FIG. 19 (c) swings up and down), the standing member 330 is brought into contact with the front contact portion 324. The wobbling of the standing member 330 can be suppressed.

  Here, the position A where the standing member 330 and the front contact portion 324 of the arm member 320 start to overlap in front view is higher than the lower edge B of the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81. Formed. Therefore, when the arm member 320 is swung from the extended position to the retracted position, the pre-stage where the wobbling of the upright member 330 becomes large (the stage where it is arranged inside the display area P of the third symbol display device 81). Thus, the movement trajectory of the standing member 330 and the front contact portion 324 can be overlapped in the front-rear direction, and the standing member 330 is brought into contact with the front contact portion 324 of the arm member 320 to suppress the wobbling of the standing member 330. it can.

  20 (a) to 20 (d) are diagrams illustrating the process of swinging the arm member 320 of the swing operation unit 300 from the retracted position to the extended position in time series. It is the partial front enlarged view of the rocking | fluctuation operation unit 300 in an end side. 20B shows a state in which the arm member 320 is swung by a predetermined amount from the retracted position to the extended position, and FIG. 20C shows the state from the state of FIG. The state in which the arm member 320 is swung by a predetermined amount toward the extended position is illustrated, and the cover member 370 is not illustrated in FIGS. 20 (a) to 20 (d).

  First, the case where the arm member 320 is swung from the extended position to the retracted position (change in posture from FIG. 20D to FIG. 20A) will be described. The transmission device 350 meshed with the drive gear 341 is rotated by the rotation of the drive gear 341 of the drive device 340 (see FIG. 14) from the extended position of the arm member 320 shown in FIG. When the regulating sliding portion 351 of the device 350 pushes the release hole 325 of the arm member 320, the arm member 320 is moved via the states of FIG. 20C and FIG. 20 (a)). That is, when the arm member 320 is swung from the extended position to the retracted position, the arm member 320 is swung by the driving force of the driving device 340.

  In this case, since the arm member 320 is swung downward (see FIGS. 16 to 18), the required capacity of the driving device 340 can be suppressed. For example, if it is an electric motor, motor capacity can be suppressed.

  Further, in a state where the arm member 320 is disposed at the overhang position, the guide hole 315 and the standing hole 316 are extended vertically downward (see FIG. 18B). Thereby, the resistance given to the arm member 320 and the standing member 330 from the guide hole 315 and the standing hole 316 at the time of the start of swinging from the extended position can be suppressed.

  Next, the case where the arm member 320 is swung from the retracted position to the extended position (posture change from FIG. 20A to FIG. 20D) will be described. A biasing force of a torsion spring 360 is applied to the arm member 320. In a state where the arm member 320 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 20A), the proximal end side arm portion 361 of the torsion spring 360 is pressed by the flange portion 317 of the base member 310 from the upper side, and the moving end side end portion 362 is pressed in the lower right direction by the protruding portion 327 of the arm member 320.

  As a result, the torsion spring 360 has the cylindrical portion 322 as a fulcrum and the distance between the base end side arm portion 361 and the moving end side arm portion 362 is shortened, and the torsion spring 360 is elastic in the direction in which the arm member 320 is lifted (upper left). The force is most accumulated. The swing of the arm member 320 due to the elastic force is restricted by the mechanical positional relationship between the release hole 325 of the arm member 320 and the transmission device 350. Hereinafter, the mechanical positional relationship between the release hole 325 and the transmission device 350 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 20A, when the arm member 320 is disposed at the retracted position, the direction X connecting the cylindrical portion 322 as the rotation shaft of the arm member 320 and the regulating sliding portion 351 of the transmission device 350 is The direction Y is perpendicular to the direction connecting the transmission shaft 313 of the base member 310 that pivotally supports the transmission device 350 and the regulating sliding portion 351 of the transmission device 350.

  In this case, the regulation sliding portion 351 can be positioned at the dead point in the relationship between the arm member 320 and the transmission device 350. Thereby, even if the driving force from the driving device 340 is not required, the arm member 320 can be mechanically held at the retracted position, so that the energy consumption of the driving device 340 can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, even when the arm member 320 is disposed at the extended position, the regulation sliding portion 351 is positioned at the dead point in the relationship between the arm member 320 and the transmission device 350. Thereby, even if the driving force from the driving device 340 is not required, the arm member 320 can be mechanically held at the extended position, so that the energy consumption of the driving device 340 can be suppressed.

  An operation mode of the driving device 340 when the arm member 320 is swung from the retracted position to the extended position will be described. First, from the state where the arm member 320 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 20A), the drive device 340 is used to release the regulating sliding portion 351 from the dead center in the relationship between the arm member 320 and the transmission device 350. The drive gear 341 is rotated by a predetermined amount in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front (ON state). Then, the transmission device 350 meshed with the drive gear 341 is also rotated, and the regulation sliding portion 351 is released from the dead point in the relationship between the arm member 320 and the transmission device 350 (see FIG. 20B).

  Here, in the state where the arm member 320 is disposed at the retracted position, the torsion spring 360 has the distance between the proximal side arm portion 361 and the moving end side arm portion 362 reduced with the cylindrical portion 322 as a fulcrum. The elastic force in the direction of lifting the member 320 (upper left direction) is in the most accumulated state.

  From this state, when the regulating sliding portion 351 is released from the dead center in the relationship between the arm member 320 and the transmission device 350, the arm member 320 is swung by the elastic force of the torsion spring 360. As a result, the arm member 320 can be swung at a high speed from the start.

  For example, in a mode in which the driving force is gradually increased like a driving motor, it is difficult to apply a large driving force to the arm member 320 from the beginning, and the speed at the start of the arm member 320 tends to be slow. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since a large elastic force can be applied from the time of starting, a large acceleration at the time of starting of the arm member 320 can be ensured. Therefore, the arm member 320 can be swung at a high speed from the start.

  When the drive gear 341 is rotated by a predetermined amount, the drive device 340 is stopped (OFF state), and the drive gear 341 is allowed to idle. The arm member 320 is swung in the upward direction by the elastic force accumulated in the torsion spring 360 (see FIG. 20C).

  When the arm member 320 reaches the vicinity of the overhang position (see FIG. 20C), the drive gear 341 of the drive device 340 is again rotated by a predetermined amount clockwise (in an ON state), and the regulating sliding portion 351 is armed. It is arranged at the dead point in the relationship between the member 320 and the transmission device 350.

  That is, when the arm member 320 is swung from the retracted position toward the extended position, the driving force of the driving device 340 is not always generated in the arm member 320, but the arm member 320 is near the retracted position and the extended position. The drive device 340 is driven (ON state) only in the case of being disposed in the position, and the drive device 340 is stopped (OFF state) between the retracted position and the extended position. Thereby, compared with the case where the driving force of the constant drive device 340 is applied to the arm member 320, the period during which the drive device 340 is driven can be reduced, so that the life of the drive device 340 can be improved.

  As shown in FIGS. 20A and 20D, when the arm member 320 is disposed at the retracted position or the extended position, the regulation sliding portion 351 and the transmission shaft 313 that pivotally supports the transmission device 350 are connected. The direction orthogonal to the straight line and the extending direction of the release hole 325 are arranged to coincide.

  As a result, the rotation direction of the restricting sliding portion 351 coincides with the extending direction of the release hole 325 at the time of starting to rotate the arm member 320 from the state where it is arranged at the retracted position or the extended position. Sometimes, the resistance that the regulation sliding portion 351 receives from the release hole 325 can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the driving force required at the start of the operation that requires the greatest force.

  Next, the first slide operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 21A and 21B are front perspective views of the first slide operation unit 400. FIG. 21A shows a state in which the hanging member 430 and the tilting member 460 are arranged at the retracted position, and in FIG. 21B, the hanging member 430 and the tilting member 460 are arranged at the extended position. The resulting state is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 21, the suspension member 430 of the first slide operation unit 400 is slid from the retracted position in an obliquely downward direction (from the upper right to the lower left when viewed from the front), and the posture of the tilting member 460 is changed during the sliding movement. Change (tilts toward the overhang position). Next, the overall configuration of the first slide operation unit 400 will be described.

  FIG. 22 is an exploded front perspective view of the first slide operation unit 400, and FIG. 23 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first slide operation unit 400.

  As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the first slide operation unit 400 includes a base member 410 formed in an L shape in front view, a cover member 420 attached to the base member 410 from the front side, and the cover member. Front-side substantially T-shaped suspension member 430 that is sandwiched between 420 and base member 410 and that is slid along the front side surface of base member 410, and a drive that slides the suspension member 430 A driving device 440 for generating a force, a long plate-like auxiliary member 450 whose one end is pivotally supported on the base end side of the suspension member 430 and the other end is coupled to the base member 410, The suspension member 430 mainly includes a tilting member 460 that is pivotally supported on the projecting end side that is the end opposite to the base end side, and a connecting member 470 that connects the auxiliary member 450 and the tilting member 460. Composed of Te.

  The base member 410 is a member that is formed in an L-shaped plate shape when viewed from the front and forms the skeleton of the first slide operation unit 400. A plate-like main body vertically long portion 412 extending vertically downward from the front, and a guide rib portion extending slightly inclined with respect to the left-right direction on the front side of the main body horizontal long portion 411 and projecting in a straight rib shape 413, an insertion hole 414 that is drilled in a substantially central portion of the main body laterally long portion and through which the drive shaft of the driving device 441 is inserted, and a lower portion of the main body longitudinally long portion 412 from the lower right to the upper left as viewed from the front. It mainly includes a guide hole 415 formed in the shape of a long hole that extends, and a pair of rotating shafts 416 on which various gears of the driving device 440 are pivotally supported.

  The main body horizontally long portion 411 includes an outer frame 411a that protrudes in a wall shape toward the front side on the upper and left and right edges. The outer frame 411a is a portion where the cover member 420 is brought into contact with the front side, and is slightly longer than the length of the slide body 431 of the suspension member 430 in the thickness direction (the vertical direction of the slide plane of the suspension member 430). Long formed.

  The sliding plane of the suspension member 430 means a plane parallel to the front surface of the base member 410.

  The guide hole 415 extends from the lower right to the upper left of the base member 410.

  The cover member 420 is a member that is attached from the front side of the base member 410 and that forms a gap with the base member 410. The main body is formed in a plate shape that is substantially the same shape as the main body laterally long portion 411 in front view. It mainly includes a portion 421 and a communication hole 422 formed in a long hole shape along the direction in which the guide rib portion 413 of the base member 410 extends.

  Since the main body portion 421 is formed in substantially the same shape as the main body laterally long portion 411 of the base member 410, even if the suspension member 430 is slid in the front-rear direction, the suspension member 430 remains in the front-rear direction. Regardless of this, the contact area between the main body laterally long portion 411 of the base member 410 and the main body portion 421 of the cover member 420 can be ensured uniformly.

  The suspension member 430 is a member that is disposed in a gap formed by the base member 410 and the cover member 420 and that is slid along the guide rib portion 413 of the base member 410. A rack gear is provided on the upper side surface. A horizontally long plate-shaped slide main body 431 to be engraved, a concave groove 432 which is recessed in the shape of a groove on the back side of the slide main body 431 and abuts against the guide rib 413 of the base member 410, and a slide A plate-like bent arm portion 433 that is suspended from the substantially central portion of the main body portion 431 and bent toward the protruding position in the middle, and a slide main body portion 431 at a portion where the bent arm portion 433 of the slide main body portion 431 starts to be suspended. A pivot shaft 434 that protrudes from the front side toward the front side, and a cylindrical hanging cylinder 435 that extends toward the front side at the tip (extended end) of the bent arm portion 433.

  The slide main body 431 is formed slightly thinner than the gap formed by the base member 410 and the cover member 420. Therefore, the suspension member 430 can slide between the base member 410 and the cover member 420 and is prevented from moving in the thickness direction (direction in which the cover member 420 is fastened to the base member 410).

  The concave groove 432 is a concave groove formed with a width slightly larger than the width of the guide rib portion 413, and the suspension member 430 slides obliquely downward as the concave groove 432 slides on the guide rib portion 413. Moved.

  The bent arm portion 433 extends along the longitudinal direction of the auxiliary member 450 in a state where the hanging member 430 is disposed in the extended position, and the base member 410 in a state where the hanging member 430 is disposed in the retracted position. A thickened portion 433a formed with an increased thickness on the front side is provided in a portion formed below the main body laterally long portion 411. The thickness of the bent arm 433 closer to the slide main body 431 than the thickened portion 433a is smaller than that of the slide main body 431 and the thickened portion 433a. Thereby, the bending arm part 433 is formed in such a manner that deformation in the thickness direction locally occurs at the bending arm part 433 on the slide body part 431 side with respect to the thickening part 433a. The thickness direction of the bent arm portion 433 is formed perpendicular to the direction in which the rack gear is engraved (slide direction).

  The swing shaft 434 is a shaft that extends through the communication hole 422 of the cover member 420 and projects to the front side of the cover member 420, and is inserted into the swing hole 452 of the auxiliary member 450.

  The suspension cylinder 435 extends beyond the thickness of the auxiliary member 450. Thereby, when the hanging member 430 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIGS. 21A and 25A), the auxiliary member 450 can be stored between the hanging member 430 and the tilting member 460. Become.

  The driving device 440 is a device in which each member is formed in such a manner that the base member 410 is sandwiched from the front and rear, and generates a driving force necessary for the movement of the suspension member 430. The driving device 440 is inserted into the insertion hole 414 of the base member 410 from the back side. A drive motor 441 having a drive shaft that passes therethrough, a drive gear 442 that is pivotally supported by the drive shaft of the drive motor 441 and disposed in front of the base member 410, and meshed with the drive gear 442 And a pair of transmission gears 443 respectively supported by the pair of rotating shafts 416.

  One of the pair of transmission gears 443 is engaged with a rack gear carved on the upper side surface of the slide main body 431 of the suspension member 430 (see FIG. 25). Therefore, when the drive gear 442 and the pair of transmission gears 443 are rotated by the driving force of the drive motor 441, the suspension member 430 engaged with the transmission gear 443 is slid.

  The auxiliary member 450 is a member disposed on the front side of the cover member 420, one end of which is pivotally supported by the suspension member 430 and the other end is slid into the guide hole 415 of the base member 410. A main body portion 451 that is connected to be formed in a long plate shape, a swing hole 452 that is formed in one end portion, a slide shaft 453 that protrudes in the back direction at the other end portion, And a suspension shaft 454 that protrudes from the intermediate position of the main body 451 in the back direction.

  The auxiliary member 450 is pivotally supported by the suspension member 430 and the other end thereof is slidably connected to the guide hole 415 of the base member 410 so that the auxiliary member 450 cannot move in the thickness direction (perpendicular to FIG. 25). Formed. Further, the auxiliary member 450 is formed so as to approach (swing) the tip of the thickened portion 433a of the bent arm portion 433 as the suspension member 430 slides to the retracted position. Thereby, even if the hanging member 430 wobbles in the thickness direction, the hanging member 430 can be prevented from wobbling by contacting the auxiliary member 450.

  The swing hole 452 is pivotally supported on the swing shaft 434 of the suspension member 430. Thereby, the auxiliary member 450 is formed so as to be swingable about the swing shaft 434. That is, as the suspension member 430 is slid, the auxiliary member 450 is swung (tilted) about the swing shaft 434.

  The slide shaft 453 is slidably connected to the guide hole 415 of the base member 410. As a result, the other end portion of the auxiliary member 450 (the lower right end portion in front view) is slid along the extending direction of the guide hole 415. When the suspension member 430 is disposed at the extended position (see FIG. 26), the slide shaft 453 is disposed at the upper end (left upper end) of the guide hole 415, and the suspension member 430 is at the retracted position (see FIG. 25). The slide shaft 453 is disposed at the lower end (lower right end) of the guide hole 415.

  The tilting member 460 is a member that is pivotally supported by the suspension cylinder 435 of the suspension member 430 and has an independent drive source (drive device 464), and is pivotally supported by the suspension member 430 and has a long plate shape. A base member 461 formed on the base member 461, a first cover member 462 that is fastened to the lower portion of the base member 461 from the front side and forms a gap between the base member 461, the first cover member 462, and the base member A transmission device 463 disposed in a gap formed between the transmission device 461, a drive device 464 that generates a driving force transmitted to the transmission device 463, and a longitudinal direction of the base member 461 connected to the transmission device 463. Moving base member 465 formed to be slidable in the direction, and a second cover disposed on the front side of the moving base member 465 and fastened and fixed to the moving base member 465 And wood 466, a mainly includes.

  The base member 461 is a member that is formed in a long plate shape, and projects from the back side in a columnar shape and is supported by a suspended shaft 461a that is fitted in the suspended cylinder 435 of the suspended member 430. A connecting shaft 461b provided side by side with the suspension shaft 461a, a storage portion 461c adjacent to the connection shaft 461b and having an opening directed to the back side, and a front above the storage portion 461c. It mainly includes a pair of rotating shafts 461d projecting on the side and a plurality of elongated slide holes 461e provided side by side along the longitudinal direction of the base member 461.

  The storage portion 461c forms a space for storing the drive device 464, and a hole through which the drive shaft 464a of the drive device 464 passes is formed at the bottom.

  The transmission device 463 includes a drive gear 463a that is pivotally supported by the drive shaft 464a, a pair of transmission gears 463b that are meshed with the drive gear 463a and are pivotally supported by the pair of rotation shafts 461d, and the pair of transmission gears. A crank pin 463c that mainly protrudes at a position eccentric from the transmission gear 463b disposed on the moving base member 465 side among the 463b is mainly provided.

  The crank pin 463c is rotated about the rotation shaft 461d as the drive gear 463a is rotated and the transmission gear 463b is rotated.

  The moving base member 465 is a member formed in a long plate shape, and a plurality of (three in the present embodiment) projecting from the back side and being inserted into the plurality of slide holes 461e, are posture maintaining pins 465a. And a long hole-like slide hole 465b extending in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction and a pair of bulky upper portions 465c protruding from the front side.

  The slide hole 465b is connected to the crank pin 463c of the transmission gear 463b. Therefore, as the transmission gear 463b is rotated and the position of the crank pin 463c is changed, the moving base member 465 moves along the extending direction of the slide hole 461e. The slide is moved.

  The second cover member 466 includes a pair of fastening portions 466a fastened and fixed to the pair of bulky portions 465c. Therefore, in a state where the second cover member 466 is fastened to the moving base member 465, the second cover member 466 is also slid as the moving base member 465 is slid.

  The connecting member 470 connects the auxiliary member 450 and the tilting member 460 and is formed of a resin material. The connecting member 470 is formed in the upper end portion and pivoted on the suspension shaft 454 of the auxiliary member 450. A suspension hole 471 that is supported, and a cylindrical portion 472 that is formed in a cylindrical shape at the lower end portion and that is pivotally supported on the connecting shaft 461b of the tilting member 460 so as to be swingable.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 24, a driving mode of the tilting member 460 will be described. FIG. 24 is a front view of the first slide operation unit 400 in a state where the suspension member 430 is disposed at the extended position. A state in which the first cover member 466 is slid obliquely upward is illustrated by a broken line, and the cover member 420 is partially omitted.

  The tilting member 460 of the first slide operation unit 400 is driven by the driving device 464 (see FIG. 23), so that the second cover member 466 is slid, and the outer shape of the tilting member 460 in front view (see FIG. 24). It is possible to produce an effect that changes.

  Here, since the tilting member 460 is pivotally supported on the distal end side of the bending arm portion 433 of the suspension member 430, vibration and wobble are likely to occur when the outer shape of the tilting member 460 changes. In this embodiment, since there are a plurality of configurations that suppress the vibration and wobble, this will be described below.

  With reference to FIG. 25, the structure of the 1st slide operation unit 400 in the state (refer FIG. 21A) in which the suspending member 430 is arrange | positioned in the retracted position is demonstrated in detail. FIG. 25A is a front view of the first slide operation unit 400, and FIG. 25B is a rear view of the first slide operation unit 400. 25A and 25B show a state in which the suspension member 430 is disposed at the upper end position (retraction position) of the moving path on which the sliding movement is performed, and the cover member 420 is partially illustrated. Omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 25A, the auxiliary member 450 and the tilting member 460 that are pivotally supported by the hanging member 430 are arranged in the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2) to the right outside of the display area P.

  At this time, the auxiliary member 450 is housed in a position on the front side of the hanging member 430 and the back side of the tilting member 460. That is, since the suspension member 430, the auxiliary member 450, and the tilting member 460 are stacked in the thickness direction (FIG. 25A, the direction perpendicular to the paper surface), the suspension member 430, the auxiliary member 450, and the tilting member 460 are viewed in the thickness direction. It can arrange | position compactly compared with the total area of each member in. Therefore, the space on the right outside of the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) can be suppressed, and the display area P can be secured large.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 25, most of the bent arm portion 433 of the suspension member 430 is housed between the base member 410 and the cover member 420, and a base is provided on the back surface of the overhang end side (front end side). A main body vertically long portion 412 of the member 410 is disposed. Thereby, wobbling in the thickness direction of the suspension member 430 at the retracted position can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, the auxiliary member 450 is pivotally supported by a swing shaft 434 formed near the bent arm portion 433 of the suspension member 430, and the suspension member 430 is disposed at the extended position. In this case, the longitudinal direction of the auxiliary member 450 is formed along the extending direction of the bent arm portion 433, and the auxiliary member 450 increases in the number of the bent arm portion 433 as the suspension member 430 slides from the retracted position to the extended position. It is formed so as to approach (swing) the tip of the thick portion 433a.

  Therefore, compared to the case where the suspension member 430 is disposed at the overhanging position, the amount of protrusion (the overhanging length) from the auxiliary member 450 to the distal end of the thickened portion 433a of the bent arm portion 433 is greater when the suspension member 430 is disposed at the overhanging position. Is shortened. Accordingly, even when the hanging member 430 is wobbled by driving the tilting member 460, the length from the contact position between the hanging member 430 and the auxiliary member 450 to the tip of the hanging member 430 is formed short. Therefore, wobbling in the thickness direction of the suspension member 430 at the retracted position (wobble at the tip of the bent arm portion 433) can be suppressed.

  Here, the sliding movement of the suspension member 430 will be described. Since the suspension member 430 sandwiches the guide rib portion 413 of the base member 410 with a recessed groove 432 (see FIG. 23) formed on the back side, the suspension member 430 is slid along the extending direction of the guide rib portion 413. As described above, the guide rib portion 413 extends in a straight line from a diagonally downward direction (from the upper right in FIG. 25 (a) to the lower left in FIG. 25 (a)).

  The sliding movement of the suspension member 430 occurs when the driving force of the driving device 440 is transmitted. For example, when the suspension member 430 is slid from the retracted position to the extended position, the drive gear 442 is driven by the driving force of the drive motor 441 from the state where the suspension member 430 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 25). Is rotated clockwise, the pair of transmission gears 443 are rotated by the rotation, and the rack gear engaged with one of the pair of transmission gears 443 (left side in FIG. 25A) is moved. The suspension member 430 provided with the rack gear on the upper surface side is slid to the extended position.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the configuration of the first slide operation unit 400 in a state where the hanging member 430 is disposed at the extended position (see FIG. 21B) will be described in detail. FIG. 26A is a front view of the first slide operation unit 400, and FIG. 26B is a rear view of the first slide operation unit 400. 26A and 26B show a state in which the suspension member 430 is disposed at the lower end position (extension position) of the moving path on which the sliding movement is performed, and the cover member 420 is partially illustrated. Is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 26 (a), the lower end (left lower end in FIG. 26 (a)) of the slide main body 431 in the moving direction is the outer frame of the base member 410 in the state where the suspension member 430 is disposed at the extended position. 411a is contacted. Further, as described above, the suspension member 430 moves downward toward the extended position. Therefore, even if the transmission of the driving force of the drive device 440 to the suspension member 430 is canceled, the position of the suspension member 430 is changed. It can be reliably maintained in the overhang position.

  For example, when the direction of the sliding movement of the suspension member 430 is the horizontal direction, even if the suspension member 430 is arranged at the extension position, no gravity is applied to the direction of the slide movement. It is necessary to add another force to maintain the position.

  On the other hand, according to the suspension member 430 of the present embodiment, even if the transmission of the driving force of the drive device 440 to the suspension member 430 is canceled, the force component of gravity is applied in the direction of slide movement. The lower member 430 can be maintained in the overhang position. Therefore, power consumption of the driving device 440 can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 26, when the suspension member 430 is disposed at the extended position, the suspension member 430 is retracted in the portion where the bent arm portion 433 is accommodated between the base member 410 and the cover member 420. It becomes smaller than the case where it is arranged at the position (see FIG. 25B). Therefore, it is difficult to suppress wobbling of the bent arm portion 433 in the thickness direction of the suspension member 430 by the base member 410 and the cover member 420.

  On the other hand, the base side of the bent arm portion 433 is extended toward the extending direction of the auxiliary member 450 (the lower left direction in FIG. 26B) in a state where the hanging member 430 is disposed at the protruding position. Thereby, when the suspending member 430 is disposed at the protruding position, the overlapping area of the auxiliary member 450 and the bent arm portion 433 in the thickness direction of the suspending member 430 is formed wide.

  As described above, the auxiliary member 450 is formed to be separated from the bent arm portion 433 of the suspension member 430 by the thickness of the cover member 420 and the bent arm portion 433 is staggered in the thickness direction of the suspension member 430. It is formed so that it can contact | abut. Since the thin portion (the portion closer to the slide body 431 than the thickened portion 433a) of the bent arm portion 433 is formed so as to protrude from the base member 410 and the cover member 420 in a state where the suspension member 430 is disposed at the extended position. The wobbling of the bent arm portion 433 of the suspension member 430 due to the driving of the tilting member 460 can be easily caused in the thickness direction (the wobbling in the thickness direction is dominant). Thereby, the wobbling of the suspension member 430 in the sliding direction can be suppressed.

  Further, a thin portion of the bent arm portion 433 (a portion closer to the slide main body 431 than the thickened portion 433a) is a short direction (slide) of the slide main body 431 that is slid between the base member 410 and the cover member 420. In a direction perpendicular to the direction). As a result, the wobbling caused by driving the tilting member 460 can be absorbed by the bending of the bending arm 433, and the slide main body 431 can be prevented from wobbling in the thickness direction (perpendicular to the plane of FIG. 26). it can. Thereby, it can suppress that the slide main-body part 431 is pressed on the base member 410 and the cover member 420, and can suppress the abrasion of the slide main-body part 431 in the thickness direction.

  For example, it is also conceivable that an arm portion having a thickness equivalent to that of the slide main body portion 431 is extended toward the short direction of the slide main body portion 431 and the tip end side of the arm portion is formed thin. However, in this case, even if the thin portion absorbs the deflection, the arm portion having the same thickness as the slide main body portion 431 wobbles, and the wobble of the arm portion is transmitted to the slide main body portion 431. There is a risk that the slide main body 431 may become wobbled.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the thickness of the bent arm portion 433 extending from the slide main body portion 431 is thinned, the wobble generated at the tip of the bent arm portion 433 is used for bending of the thin thickness portion. The effect of preventing the portion 431 from wobbling can be made remarkable.

  FIG. 27 is a sectional view of the first slide operation unit 400 taken along line XXVII-XXVII in FIG. As shown in FIG. 27, the bent arm portion 433 includes a thickened portion 433a that is thickened toward the auxiliary member 450. Therefore, when the bent arm portion 433 wobbles in the thickness direction of the suspension member 430, the wobbling occurs. The bending arm 433 can be easily brought into contact with the auxiliary member 450 from when the amplitude of is small.

  Returning to FIG. Since the auxiliary member 450 is connected to the swing shaft 434 of the suspension member 430 and the guide hole 415 of the base member 410, movement in the thickness direction is restricted. Therefore, the auxiliary member 450 serves as a stopper that blocks the bent arm portion 433 of the suspension member 430 from moving toward the front side. Thereby, the wobble to the thickness direction of the suspension member 430 when the suspension member 430 is arrange | positioned in the overhang | projection position can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 26 (a), when the suspension member 430 is disposed at the extended position, the lower end of the tilting member 460 is lower than the lower end of the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2). It is arranged slightly above. Here, when the tilting member 460 does not change its posture with respect to the hanging member 430 (when it is fixed), the hanging member 430 is slid down and tilted toward the extended position. Therefore, in order to arrange the lower end of the tilting member 460 at the same position as the lower end of the tilting member 460 of the present embodiment in a state where the hanging member 430 is arranged at the extended position, the hanging member 430 is arranged at the retracted position. In this case, the tilting member 460 needs to be disposed at a position offset upward by a distance L1 corresponding to the downward tilt.

  Therefore, an extra space on the right outside of the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is required, or the design freedom of the size of the tilting member 460 is reduced.

  However, in this embodiment, as the suspension member 430 moves toward the extended position, the tilting member 460 is changed in posture in a manner of being lifted by the connecting member 470 connected to the auxiliary member 450, and the lower end of the tilting member 460 is suspended. Lifted relative to member 430. Accordingly, the lower end position of the tilting member 460 when the hanging member 430 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 25A) and the case where the hanging member 430 is disposed at the extended position (FIG. 26A The lower end position of the tilting member 460 in FIG. 25) is positioned at substantially the same height (the vertical direction in FIGS. 25 and 26).

  Therefore, when the suspending member 430 is disposed at the retracted position, it is not necessary to dispose the tilting member 460 at a position offset upward by the distance L1 corresponding to the descending tilt, and to the right of the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 The outer space can be used effectively, and the degree of freedom in designing the size of the tilting member 460 can be improved.

  Here, the center of gravity of the tilting member 460 is formed on the lower end side where the driving device 464 is disposed. Therefore, when the lower end side of the tilting member 460 is lifted and tilted, the position of the center of gravity of the tilting member 460 is moved upward. Therefore, since the distance from the upper edge of the display area P of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 (refer FIG. 2) used as the fulcrum of the hanging member 430 to the gravity center of the tilting member 460 is shortened, the hanging member The wobbling of the bent arm portion 433 in the thickness direction of 430 can be suppressed.

  Further, since the tilting member 460 has a center of gravity formed in the vicinity of the driving device 464 (see FIG. 22), a force R in the rotational direction about the suspended cylinder 435 is applied downward by gravity. With this force R, the auxiliary member 450 is pulled by the connecting member 470. At that time, the slide shaft 453 of the auxiliary member 450 receives a force in a direction along the width direction of the guide hole 415. Therefore, since the frictional force between the slide shaft 453 and the guide hole 415 can be improved and the sliding movement of the auxiliary member 450 can be prevented, the wobbling of other members connected to the auxiliary member 450 can be suppressed. it can.

  As described above, the lower end side of the tilting member 460 is connected to the connecting member 470 that is pivotally supported by the auxiliary member 450. As a result, resistance to wobbling that occurs when the tilting member 460 is driven is generated from the suspension member 430 and the auxiliary member 450, so that wobbling of the tilting member 460 can be suppressed. That is, when the tilting member 460 is connected only to the suspension member 430, all vibrations and wobbles generated by the tilting member 460 are transmitted to the suspension member 430, but in this embodiment, the vibrations and wobbles of the tilting member 460 are suppressed. The suspension member 430 and the connecting member 470 can be transmitted separately. Thereby, it is not necessary to set the rigidity of the suspension member 430 and the connection member 470 excessively, and the design freedom of the suspension member 430 and the connection member 470 can be improved.

  Next, the reversing operation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 28 is a front perspective view of the reversing operation unit 500. FIG. 28 shows a closed state in which the reflecting members 520 are in contact with each other in the rotational direction. The reversing operation unit 500 is configured to be able to form a closed state (see FIG. 28) and an open state (see FIG. 33B) by rotating the reflecting member 520. Next, the overall configuration of the reversing operation unit 500 will be described.

  FIG. 29 is an exploded front perspective view of the reversing operation unit 500, and FIG. 30 is an exploded rear perspective view of the reversing operation unit 500.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the reversing operation unit 500 includes a frame-shaped base member 510 that forms a skeleton, a reflecting member 520 that is pivotally supported by the shaft supporting grooves 512 a and 513 a of the base member 510, and a reflection thereof. A first lid member 530 having a shaft support hole 531 into which the rotation shaft 522 of the member 520 is fitted, and a second lid member 540 attached to the second wall portion 513 of the base member 510 on the driving portion side of the reflection member 520. The transmission member 550 engraved with the first rack gear 553 meshed with the rotation gear 523 of the reflection member 520, the drive device 560 that generates a drive force for moving the transmission member 550, and the transmission of the drive device 560 And a cover member 570 that is disposed on the back side of the gear group 562 and is fastened and fixed to the base member 510.

  The base member 510 has a rectangular opening at the center and a bottom surface portion 511 formed in a plane frame shape, and extends vertically from the right end of the bottom surface portion 511 toward the front side and the back side of the bottom surface portion 511. A first wall portion 512 and a second wall portion 513 extending vertically from the left end of the bottom surface portion 511 toward the front side of the bottom surface portion 511. Note that the opening of the bottom surface portion 511 is an opening for disposing a base (not shown) having a light source such as an LED, and light is irradiated from the light source toward the reflecting member 520 in the assembled state (see FIG. 28). The

  The bottom surface portion 511 includes a long hole-like slide hole 511a that guides the transmission member 550 and extends in the vertical direction at the right side portion of the bottom surface portion 511 in the rear view (see FIG. 30).

  The slide holes 511a are formed by arranging a plurality (four in this embodiment) in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 30) of the bottom surface portion 511 in a manner in which the extending directions coincide with each other, and are formed at both upper and lower ends. The slide hole 511a is a long hole extending from the lower end of the slide hole 511a in the extending direction of the slide hole 511a and is narrower than the slide hole 511a and guides the rib portion 555 of the transmission member 550. Rib portion slide holes 511b are formed.

  Further, the bottom surface portion 511 includes a rotation shaft 511c on which a plurality of projections are provided toward the back side below the opening and on which the transmission gear group 562 of the driving device 560 is supported.

  The first wall portion 512 is a groove that is cut in a U shape from the front side to the back side, and a plurality of shaft support grooves 512a having a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the rotating shaft portion of the reflecting member are formed. In addition, the arrangement | positioning space | interval of the axial support groove | channel 512a is equal intervals, and is formed in the space | interval shorter than the width dimension (rotation axis direction view longitudinal dimension) of the reflection member 520. FIG.

  The second wall portion 513 is disposed opposite to the shaft support groove 512a and has a plurality of shaft support grooves 513a formed in the same manner as the shaft support groove 512a, and an adjacent shaft support among the plurality of shaft support grooves 513a. And an extending portion 513b that is formed between the grooves 513a and extends from the outer wall surface of the second wall portion 513 toward the front side (the front side in FIG. 29).

  The extending portion 513b is formed in a stepped shape in which the width dimension (dimension in the vertical direction in FIG. 29) decreases toward the front side. In the assembled state (see FIG. 28), the positioning protruding portion 543 of the second lid member 540 is formed. Fitted.

  The reflecting member 520 is a member that changes the traveling direction of light emitted from the light source. The reflecting member 520 is in a straight line from the long plate-like main body 521 formed of an opaque resin material and the left and right ends of the main body 521. A pair of rotating shafts 522 projecting from each other, and a rotating gear 523 that is fastened with the shafts aligned with the rotating shaft 522 of the pair of rotating shafts 522 on which the transmission member 550 is disposed. Prepare.

  The main body portion 521 includes a chamfered portion 521a (see FIG. 34) formed by chamfering on the end surface in the width direction.

  The rotation shaft 522 is formed at the center position of the main body 521 in the width direction (vertical direction in FIG. 29). In addition, the rotation shaft 522 on the side where the transmission member 550 is disposed of the pair of rotation shafts 522 is elongated so that the second wall portion is interposed between the rotation gear 523 and the main body 521. 513 is formed so that it can be disposed.

  The rotation gear 523 includes expansion teeth 523a that are connected to adjacent teeth and that are longer in diameter than the other teeth. The overexpanding of the reflecting member 520 can be prevented by the expansion teeth 523a.

  The first lid member 530 is a long plate-like member fastened and fixed from the thickness direction of the first wall portion 512 (the left-right direction in FIG. 29), and a plurality of shafts through which the rotation shaft 522 of the reflection member 520 is inserted. A portion extending vertically to the first wall portion 512 along the front surface (front surface in FIG. 29) of the first lid member 530 and the front side of the plurality of shaft support holes 531 An extending lid portion 532 (see FIG. 31) having an end surface circumscribing the edge of the.

  Here, for example, when the first lid member 530 is fastened and fixed from the front side of the first wall portion 512, the first wall portion 512 needs to have a thickness greater than the diameter of the head of the fastening screw. In this case, as in the present embodiment, when the reversal operation unit 500 is adjacent to the outer edge of the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81 with the first wall portion 512 interposed therebetween, the first wall The thickness of the part 512 becomes an obstacle, and it is difficult to make the reversing operation unit 500 and the effect of the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81 visible as a unit.

  On the other hand, since the first lid member 530 is fastened and fixed from the thickness direction of the first wall portion 512 (the left-right direction in FIG. 29), the thickness of the right wall of the reflecting member 520 is set regardless of the diameter of the head of the fastening screw. Can be thinned. Therefore, the thickness of the first wall portion 512 does not get in the way, and the reversing operation unit 500 and the effect in the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81 can be easily seen as one unit. The effect can be improved.

  Note that at least two assembling methods can be performed for assembling the base member 510, the reflecting member 520, and the first lid member 530. For example, first, there is a method in which the first lid member 530 is fastened and fixed to the base member 510 in a state where the rotation shaft 522 of the reflecting member 520 is fitted in the shaft support grooves 512 a and 513 a of the base member 510. With this method, the reflecting member 520 can be inserted through the shaft support hole 531 of the first lid member 530 at a time.

  Second, in the state in which the first lid member 530 is fastened and fixed to the base member 510 first, the rotating shaft 522 opposite to the drive portion side of the reflecting member 520 is connected to the shaft support hole 531 of the first lid member 530. There is a method in which the rotation shaft 522 on the drive unit side is fitted into the shaft support groove 513a of the second wall portion 512 after being inserted in an oblique direction (a direction from the front side toward the diagonally right back).

  With reference to FIG. 31, the fitting relationship between the shaft support groove 512a of the first wall portion 512, the first lid member 530, and the reflection member 520 will be described. FIG. 31A is a partial side view of the reversing operation unit 500, and FIG. 31B is a partial cross-sectional view of the reversing operation unit 500 taken along the line XXXIB-XXXIb of FIG. FIG. 31A illustrates a side surface on the side where the first lid member 530 is fastened.

  As shown in FIG. 31A, the depth of the shaft support groove 512 a of the first wall portion 512 is formed to be substantially the same as the diameter of the rotation shaft 522 of the reflection member 520. Therefore, for example, even if the shaft support hole 531 is not formed in the first lid member 530, the reflecting member 520 has the shaft support groove 512 a of the first wall portion 512 and the extended lid portion 532 of the first lid member 530. And is pivotally supported.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, the depth of the shaft support groove 512a of the first wall portion 512 and the diameter of the shaft support hole 531 of the first lid member 530 are formed to be the same. Therefore, as described above, the rotating shaft 522 of the reflecting member 520 is pivotally supported between the pivot groove 512a of the first wall portion 512 and the extended lid portion 532 of the first lid member 530, and the first lid. It is also supported by the shaft support hole 531 of the member 530 (see FIG. 31B).

  Therefore, a large area for supporting the rotating shaft 522 of the reflecting member 520 can be ensured. This is particularly effective in the configuration of the present embodiment in which the thickness of the first wall portion 512 is suppressed by fastening and fixing the first lid member 530 to the first wall portion 512 from the right side.

  That is, since the thickness of the first wall portion 512 is suppressed, it may be difficult to ensure a sufficient area of the shaft support groove 512a that supports the reflection member 520 as it is. Therefore, a shaft support hole 531 is formed in the first lid member 530, and the reflection member 520 is also supported by the shaft support hole 531. Thereby, the space which the 1st cover member 530 and the 1st wall part 512 occupy for the axial direction of the reflective member 520 can be utilized effectively, and the area which pivotally supports the reflective member 520 can fully be ensured.

  Returning to FIG. The second lid member 540 is a member for pivotally supporting the drive portion side of the reflecting member 520 to the base member 510, and is a long plate-like base member 541 disposed on the most front side, and the base member 541. Projecting toward the back side and extending in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 30), and projecting in such a manner that the extended shaft support 542 and the base member 541 are connected to each other. Positioning protrusions 543.

  With reference to FIG. 32, the engagement between the second lid member 540 and the base member 510 will be described. 32A is a partial front view of the reversing operation unit 500, and FIG. 32B is a partial cross-sectional view of the reversing operation unit 500 taken along the line XXXIIb-XXXIIb in FIG. 32A. FIG. 32C is a partial cross-sectional view of the inversion operation unit 500 taken along the line XXXIIc-XXXIIc of FIG. 32B, and FIG. 32D is a part of the inversion operation unit 500 taken along the line XXXIId-XXXIId of FIG. It is sectional drawing.

  As shown in FIG. 32 (b), the plurality of positioning protrusions 543 of the second lid member 540 are respectively fitted between the adjacent extending portions 513 b of the base member 510. Thus, the second lid member 540 can be accurately aligned with respect to the base member 510 in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 32B).

  Here, since the second wall portion 513 is formed in a long plate shape, the rigidity in the thickness direction tends to be low, and the second wall portion 513 is bent in the thickness direction so that the reflecting member 520 is axially moved. May be applied, and the rotation of the reflecting member 520 may be hindered.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 32 (c), in the present embodiment, the extending shaft support portion 542 of the second lid member 540 is contacted from the thickness direction of the extending portion 513b of the base member 510 (the left-right direction in FIG. 32 (c)). Touched. Thereby, the rigidity of the thickness direction of the 2nd wall part 513 can be improved.

  The end portion of the extending shaft support portion 542 of the second lid member 540 in the extending direction is in contact with the end portion of the base member 510 where the shaft support groove 513a is formed, and the open end of the shaft support groove 513a is closed ( (See FIG. 32D). Thereby, the rotating shaft 522 of the reflecting member 520 is pivotally supported by the hole formed by the pivotal support groove 513a and the extended pivotal support portion 542 of the second lid member 540 (see FIG. 32B).

  Returning to FIG. The transmission member 550 is a member for transmitting the driving force of the driving device 560 to the reflection member 520, and is formed in a long plate shape and is in contact with the back surface of the bottom surface portion 511 of the base member 510. 551, an elongated plate-shaped extending wall portion 552 extending from the end surface of the main body portion 551 (the left end surface in FIG. 29) to the front side, and an end surface on the front side of the extending wall portion 552 intermittently. A first rack gear 553 that is engraved and meshed with the rotary gear 523 of the reflecting member 520, and a plurality (four in this embodiment) are disposed on the front side of the main body 551, and the base member 510 slides. A slide shaft 554 connected to the hole 511a, and a rib portion slide hole 511b (see FIG. 30) of the base member 510 that extends downward from the upper and lower slide shafts 554 of the slide shafts 554. It includes a rib portion 555 which is protruded in a small width dimension slightly larger than the width dimension, a second rack gear 556 which is meshed with the transmission gear group of the driving device 560 while being engraved on the side surface of the main body portion 551, a.

  In the first rack gear 553, a plurality of tooth groups in which four teeth are continuously arranged are arranged with an interval slightly shorter than an interval when one tooth is omitted. This space that is spaced can prevent over-rotation of the rotating gear 523 of the reflecting member 520, but will be described in detail later.

  The drive device 560 is a device that generates a drive force, and is engaged with a drive gear 561 that is pivotally supported by the drive shaft, a gear meshed with the drive gear 561, and the second rack gear 556 of the transmission member 550. A transmission gear group 562 that meshes with the plurality of rotation shafts 511c.

  When the driving gear 561 of the driving device 560 is rotated, the transmission gear group 562 is rotated and the driving force of the driving device 560 is transmitted to the transmission member 550 via the second rack gear 556. The transmission member 550 is slid in the extending direction of the slide hole 511a of the base member 510 by the driving force of the driving device 560. Since the first rack gear 553 of the transmission member 550 is meshed with the rotation gear 523 of the reflection member 520, the reflection member 520 is rotated about the rotation shaft 522 as the transmission member 550 is slid.

  33 (a), 33 (b), and 33 (c) are partial front views of the reversing operation unit 500 illustrating the rotation operation of the reflecting member 520 in time series, and FIG. 33 (d) and FIG. FIG. 33E and FIG. 33F are partial side views of the reversing operation unit 500 illustrating the rotation operation of the reflecting member 520 in time series. FIG. 34 illustrates the reflecting member 520 in the posture of FIG. It is a partial side view of a transmission member 550.

  33, illustration of the second lid member 540 is omitted, and FIGS. 33 (a) and 33 (d) show a state in which the main body portions 521 of the reflecting member 520 are in contact with each other (closed state). 33 (b) and 33 (e) illustrate a state in which the reflecting member 520 has been rotated a predetermined amount from the state of FIGS. 33 (a) and 33 (d) (open state), and FIG. 33 (f) and 33 (f), the reflecting member 520 is directed to the front side opposite to the surface facing the front side in FIGS. 33 (a) and 33 (d), and the main body of the reflecting member 520. A state (closed state) in which 521 are brought into contact with each other is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 33 (d), in the closed state, the rotation gear 523 of the reflection member 520 is engaged with the first rack gear 553 of the transmission member 550, and the rotation is restricted.

  The rotation operation of the reflecting member 520 will be described. When the first rack gear 553 of the transmission member 550 is slid upward (leftward in FIG. 33 (d)) by the driving device 560 (see FIG. 29) from the state of FIG. 33 (d), the rotating gear 523 of the reflecting member 520 is moved. Is rotated, the main body 521 of the reflecting member 520 is rotated (see FIG. 33E). Further, when the first rack gear 553 is slid to the left, the reflecting member 520 is rotated until the surfaces in the thickness direction come into contact with each other, and the transmission member 550 is stopped (see FIG. 33F).

  Here, at the end position of the sliding movement of the transmission member 550, the reflecting member 520 is brought into contact with the end portion to correct the posture (see FIG. 34). Therefore, even if the rotation gear 523 of the reflection member 520 and the first rack gear 553 of the transmission member 550 are not meshed with high accuracy, the posture of the reflection member 520 in a state where the transmission member 550 is disposed at the end position of the slide movement. Can be stabilized.

  In the closed state, the reflecting member 520 abuts the end of the main body 521 in the thickness direction. At this time, since the region between the first wall portion 512 and the second wall portion 513 of the base member 510 is closed by the reflecting member 520, the light emitted from the light source can be blocked by the reflecting member 520. it can.

  Here, suppression of light leakage can also be achieved by, for example, sliding a plate-shaped shutter member and disposing the shutter member between the light irradiated to the player and the player. In this case, when the shutter member is fully opened, the player can visually recognize the entire light emitted to the player. However, in the middle of the sliding movement of the shutter member from the state where the shutter member is disposed between the light irradiated to the player and the player, the light overlapping the shutter member cannot be visually recognized. That is, the period until the player visually recognizes the entire light becomes longer.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the reflection member 520 allows light irradiated to the player to pass through by rotating the reflection member 520 from the closed state while suppressing light leakage in the closed state. Here, the plurality of reflecting members 520 can have the same role as the single shutter member described above as an example. That is, each reflecting member 520 can be formed smaller than the shutter member. Therefore, compared with the case where the shutter member is slid, the time until the player visually recognizes the entire light can be shortened when the reflecting member 520 is rotated.

  In the present embodiment, the light source formed on the back side of the reflecting member is reduced by rotating the reflecting member 520 to reduce the area occupied by the reflecting member 520 in the front view (see FIG. 32A). Can be visually recognized. Therefore, it is possible to save the installation space of the reflection operation unit 500.

  The chamfered portions 521a are in contact with each other in the closed state of the reflecting member 520 (see FIG. 34). Thereby, the space | interval of the thickness direction of the reflection members 520 in the thickness direction can be shortened, and the surface formed with the some reflection member 520 can be planarized more.

  For example, when a pattern that is recognized as a single unit on the surface in the thickness direction of the plurality of reflecting members 520 is formed on the surface in the thickness direction of the plurality of reflecting members 520, the boundary between the adjacent reflecting members 520 is made inconspicuous, Can be suppressed. Therefore, the pattern can be recognized more beautifully.

  The distance from the rotation shaft 522 of the reflection member 520 to the outer end of the expansion tooth 523a is longer than the distance from the rotation shaft 522 to the main body 551 of the transmission member 550. Therefore, if the rotation gear 523 is to be rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 33 (d) from the state of FIG. 33 (a), the expansion teeth 523a are blocked by the main body portion 551 and cannot be rotated. Thereby, the overrotation of the reflection member 520 can be prevented, and it is possible to prevent the reflection member 520 from being damaged due to excessive pressure generated on the contact surface of the reflection member 520.

  Further, as described above, the first rack gear 553 is arranged with a gap slightly shorter than the interval when the tooth group in which the four teeth are continuously provided omits one tooth, FIG. ), When the rotation gear 523 of the reflecting member 520 is rotated clockwise in FIG. 33 (f), the distance between the teeth of the rotation gear 523 formed between the teeth of the first rack gear 553 of the transmission member 550. Get stuck. In this case, the rotation gear 523 cannot be rotated any further. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reflecting member 520 from being damaged at the chamfered portion 521a that is the contact surface due to the excessive rotation of the reflecting member 520.

  Next, the second slide operation unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 42. FIG. 35A and FIG. 35B are front perspective views of the second slide operation unit 700. 35A shows a state in which the pair of first slide members 720 and the pair of second slide members 740 are disposed at the retracted position, and FIG. 35B shows the pair of first slide members 720. In addition, a state in which the pair of second slide members 740 are disposed at the extended position (the front side of the display area P of the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2) is illustrated.

  In the second slide operation unit 700, the pair of first slide members 720 and the pair of second slide members 740 project to the front side of the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81, so that the display area P is formed so as to be divided into a lattice shape. Next, the overall configuration of the second slide operation unit 700 will be described.

  36 and 37 are exploded front perspective views of the second slide operation unit 700, and FIGS. 38 and 39 are exploded rear perspective views of the second slide operation unit 700. FIG. 36 and 38, the base member 710 and the member disposed on the front side of the base member 710 are illustrated in an exploded state. In FIGS. 37 and 39, the base member 710 and the back surface of the base member 710 are illustrated. The state in which the member disposed on the side is disassembled is shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 36 to 39, the second slide operation unit 700 has a rectangular plate-shaped base member having a rectangular opening forming a display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81 in the center. 710, a first slide shaft bar S1 that is fixed to the base member 710 at a predetermined distance from the front surface of the base member 710 and that has a longitudinal direction coinciding with the horizontal direction, and slides along the first slide shaft bar S1. A pair of first slide members 720 that are moved, and a front side cover member 730 that is fastened and fixed to the base member 710 from the front side of the pair of first slide members 720 and that is formed as a pair of upper and lower sides. Prepare.

  The second slide operation unit 700 is fixed to the base member 710 at a predetermined distance from the back surface of the base member 710, and has a second slide shaft bar S2 whose longitudinal direction matches the vertical direction, and its second slide shaft. A pair of second slide members 740 that are slid along the rod S2, a transmission device 750 in which a plurality of gears engaged with the second slide members 740 are disposed, and a pair of second slide members 740 And the back side cover member 760 which is fastened and fixed to the base member 710 from the back side of the transmission device 750 and is formed on the left and right and the top, and the first slide member 720 and the back side cover member 760 which are disposed on the back side cover member 760 And a driving device 770 for generating a driving force for slidingly moving the second slide member 740.

  As shown in FIG. 36, the first slide member 720 is composed of a pair of members having substantially the same shape, so one side (left side in FIG. 36) will be described here, and the other description will be omitted.

  The first slide member 720 includes a main body 721 formed in an L-shaped plate shape when viewed from the front, a cart 722 fastened and fixed to the main body 721, and extends downward from the lower end of the cart 722. And a decoration unit 723.

  The main body portion 721 is formed in a long plate shape extending in the left-right direction, and a rack portion 721a in which a rack gear is engraved on the upper surface, and is provided continuously below the rack portion 721a and the rack portion 721a. A plate-shaped carriage receiving portion 721b disposed on the left side of the front view.

  The trolley part 722 is fastened and fixed to the back side of the trolley receiving part 721b with the left end aligned with the left end of the trolley receiving part 721b. The trolley part 722 is disposed on the inside of the trolley body part 722a and a trolley body part 722a formed in a U-shaped cross-section by projecting wall parts from the upper and lower ends of the plate-shaped bottom surface to the front side. And a rotating body group 722b in which a pair of upper and lower rotating bodies formed with a rotation axis perpendicular to the bottom surface is disposed in a pair of left and right.

  In the rotating body group 722b, a pair of upper and lower rotating bodies are disposed in parallel to the left and right, and the length of the vertical interval is slightly longer than the diameter of the first slide shaft rod S1. The rotating body group 722b is arranged so as to protrude slightly outward from the longitudinal side surface (left and right side surfaces in FIG. 36) of the carriage main body 722a.

  The first slide shaft S1 includes a pair of fastening plate portions S1a fastened and fixed to the base member 710 at both ends, and is formed of a metal material such as stainless steel.

  The arrangement | positioning aspect to the base member 710 of the 1st slide member 720 is demonstrated. First, the slide shaft S1 is inserted between the rotating body groups 722a of the first slide member 720, and the fastening plate portion S1a is fastened and fixed to the base member 710 in this state. As a result, the carriage unit 722a is disposed between the base member 710 and the first slide shaft rod S1. Further, the base member 710 is reinforced by the rigidity of the first slide shaft rod S1.

  Next, the carriage receiving part 721 b and the carriage part 722 of the main body part 721 are fastened and fixed. Thus, the first slide member 720 is pivotally supported by the first slide shaft rod S1 so as to be slidable.

  In this state, the rack portion 721a of the first slide member 720 is meshed with a transmission gear meshed with the drive gears 711a and 712a. Therefore, the driving force of the driving device 770 (see FIG. 35) is transmitted to the first slide member 720 via the drive gears 711a and 712a and the transmission gear, so that the first slide member 720 is slid to the left and right.

  When the first slide member 720 is slid, the rotating body group 722b sandwiches the first slide shaft rod S1, so that the contact area between the first slide member 720 and the first slide shaft rod S1 can be reduced, and friction is reduced. Further, since the pair of upper and lower rotating bodies are arranged in a pair on the left and right and they are in contact with the first slide shaft rod S1, wobbling of the first slide member 720 can be suppressed at a plurality of points. Therefore, the posture of the first slide member 720 with respect to the first slide shaft rod S1 can be stabilized.

  The front cover member 730 is fastened and fixed to the base member 710 after the first slide member 720 is disposed on the base member 710. The lower cover member 730 is disposed on the front side of the lower end of the decorative portion 723. Accordingly, when the first slide member 720 wobbles in the front-rear direction (the left front direction in FIG. 36) about the first slide shaft rod S1, wobbling of the first slide member 720 can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 38, the base member 710 is fastened and fixed to the back surface of the base member 710 on the left side when viewed from the rear, and the transmission cylinders 711 and 712 that are arranged to penetrate in the front-rear direction and are rotatable. A fixed gear portion 713 that extends along the vertical direction and has a gear engraved on a wall surface facing inward (rightward in FIG. 38), and meshed with the fixed gear portion 713 and rack gear 754 (see FIG. 39) and a guide wall portion 715 that protrudes from the back surface of the base member 710 and extends in the vertical direction on the right side in the rear view. And mainly.

  The transmission cylinders 711 and 712 include drive gears 711a and 712a (see FIG. 36) on the front side of the base member 710, respectively. The transmission cylinders 711 and 712 are members to which the drive shafts of the drive motors 771 and 772 of the drive device 770 are fixed, and are members that transmit the drive force of the drive device 770 to the first slide member 720.

  The guide wall portion 715 includes a receiving gear portion 715a engraved on the wall surface facing inward (left side in FIG. 38).

  As shown in FIG. 37, since the second slide member 740 is constituted by a pair of members having substantially the same shape, one side (upper side in FIG. 37) will be described here, and the other description will be omitted.

  The second slide member 740 has a main body portion 741 formed in a long plate shape, a cart portion 742 fastened and fixed to the main body portion 741, and extends leftward from the left end in front view of the cart portion 742. A decorative portion 743.

  The main body 741 is formed in a long plate shape extending in the vertical direction, and a rack gear is engraved on the right surface.

  The carriage part 742 is fastened and fixed to the back side of the main body part 741 with the upper end coincident with the upper end of the main body part 741. The carriage part 742 includes a carriage main body part 742a that is formed in a U-shaped cross section by projecting a wall part from the left and right ends of the plate-like bottom surface to the front side, and is perpendicular to the bottom surface inside the carriage main body part 742a. A rotating body group 742b in which a pair of left and right rotating bodies formed with a rotating shaft is disposed in a pair.

  In the rotating body group 742b, a pair of left and right rotating bodies are arranged in parallel vertically, and the length of the left-right interval is formed slightly longer than the diameter of the second slide shaft rod S2.

  The decorative portion 743 includes a pair of upper and lower deflection suppressing gears 743a that are pivotally supported by a shaft that protrudes toward the rear surface at the left end of the front view.

  The second slide shaft rod S2 includes a pair of fastening plate portions S2a fastened and fixed to the base member 710 at both ends.

  The arrangement | positioning aspect to the base member 710 of the 2nd slide member 740 is demonstrated. First, the slide shaft S2 is inserted between the rotating body groups 742a of the second slide member 740, and the main body portion 741 is fastened and fixed to the front side of the carriage portion 742. Accordingly, the second slide member 740 is pivotally supported by the second slide shaft rod S2 so as to be slidable. Further, the base member 710 is reinforced by the rigidity of the second slide shaft rod S2.

  Next, the fastening plate portion S2a of the second slide shaft rod S2 is fastened and fixed to the back surface of the base member 710. Accordingly, the main body portion 741 is disposed between the base member 710 and the second slide shaft rod S2.

  Here, the rack gear carved from the main body portion 741 of the second slide member 740 is meshed with the rolling gear 714 of the base member 710. Therefore, when the rolling gear 714 is rotated, the second slide member 740 is slid up and down.

  When the second slide member 740 slides, the rotating body group 742b sandwiches the second slide shaft rod S2, so that the contact area between the second slide member 740 and the second slide shaft rod S2 can be reduced, and friction is reduced. In addition, since the pair of left and right rotating bodies are arranged in a pair in the upper and lower directions and abut against the second slide shaft rod S2, wobbling of the second slide member 740 can be suppressed at a plurality of points. Therefore, the posture of the second slide member 740 with respect to the second slide shaft rod S2 can be stabilized.

  Here, the main body portion 741 having a rack gear meshed with the rolling gear 714 (drive portion side) and the carriage portion 742 sandwiching the second slide shaft rod S2 are the same in the extending direction of the second slide member 740. Formed at the end. Therefore, the degree to which the bending of the second slide member 740 with the second slide shaft S2 as a fulcrum affects the meshing state between the rack gear and the rolling gear 714 can be reduced. Therefore, the resistance which the 2nd slide member 740 receives by the shift | offset | difference of a meshing state can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 39, the transmission device 750 is a device that transmits the driving force of the driving device 770 to the second slide member 740, and has a long plate-shaped main body portion 751 and a back surface side of the main body portion 751. A drive gear 752 to which the drive shafts 773a and 774a of the drive device 770 are fixed, a transmission gear 753 meshed with the drive gear 752, and a tooth meshed with the transmission gear; And a rack gear 754 that is a long plate-like member extending in the direction and is slid up and down along the slide long hole 751a of the main body 751.

  In the description of the configuration of the transmission device 750, only one (upper) of the pair of upper and lower parts (see FIG. 39) is described, and the other description is omitted.

  The main body 751 includes a slide long hole 751a that is formed in a long hole shape with the longitudinal direction in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 39).

  The rack gear 754 includes a cylindrical shaft support portion 754a (see FIG. 37) that protrudes vertically from the front and penetrates the slide long hole 751a of the main body 751. The shaft support portion 754 a is inserted through the shaft support hole of the rolling gear 714.

  Here, a transmission mode of the driving force to the second slide member 740 will be described. First, when the drive shaft 773a of the drive device 773 is rotated, the drive gear 752 fixed to the drive shaft 773a is rotated, and the rack gear 754 is rotated via the rotation of the transmission gear 753 meshed with the drive gear 752. It is slid up and down along the longitudinal direction of the slide long hole 751a.

  Since the shaft support portion 754a (see FIG. 37) of the rack gear 754 is inserted into the shaft support hole of the rolling gear 714, when the rack gear 754 is slid up and down, the rolling gear 714 is also slid up and down. .

  At this time, the rolling gear 714 is meshed with the teeth of the fixed gear portion 713 of the base member 710 and is also meshed with the main body portion 741 of the second slide member 740 disposed to face the fixed gear portion 713. That is, the double rack and pinion mechanism is formed by the fixed gear portion 713, the rolling gear 714, and the main body portion 741, and the second slide member 740 is moved at a double speed with respect to the rack gear 754.

  The back-side cover member 760 includes a back-side drive unit cover member 761 disposed on the drive unit side of the second slide member 740, a back-side upper cover member 762 disposed on the top, and the back-side drive unit cover member 761. And a rear retaining cover member 763 that is opposed to the direction.

  The back drive unit cover member 761 is fastened and fixed to the back side of the transmission device 750, and among the drive motors of the drive device 770, drive motors 773 and 774 for driving the second slide member 740 are fastened and fixed to the back.

  The back upper cover member 762 is fastened and fixed to the back surface of the base member 710, and drive motors 771 and 772 for driving the first slide member 720 among the drive motors of the drive device 770 are fastened and fixed to the back surface.

  The back surface retaining cover member 763 is formed on the back surface on the extending end side of the decorative portion 743, and prevents the second slide member 740 from rotating out from the back surface with the second slide shaft S <b> 2 as a fulcrum.

  The drive device 770 mainly includes drive motors 771 and 772 that drive the first slide member 720 and drive motors 773 and 774 that drive the second slide member 740. These drive motors 771, 772, 773, and 774 are provided with drive shafts 771a, 772a, 773a, and 774a, respectively.

  With reference to FIG. 40, an example of the movement mode of the pair of first slide members 720 will be described. FIG. 40 is a front view of the second slide operation unit 700 illustrating an example of a change in the arrangement of the first slide member 720 in time series.

  40A, the pair of first slide members 720 are disposed at the retracted positions, and in FIG. 40B, the main body portion 721 and the carriage portion 722 of the pair of first slide members 720 40 (c) shows a state in which the pair of first slide members 720 are moved by a predetermined amount from the position of FIG. 40 (b) to the right in the front view. 40 (a) to 40 (c), the upper front cover member 730 of the pair of upper and lower front cover members 730 is not shown.

  Here, transmission of the driving force to the drive gears 711a and 712a when the pair of first slide members 720 slide is described. When the drive gears 711a and 712a are rotated from the retracted position shown in FIG. 40A (the drive gear 711a is clockwise when viewed from the front and the drive gear 712a is counterclockwise when viewed from the front), the pair of first slide members 720 Are slid and moved toward the overhanging position, and contacted at the overhanging position (see FIG. 40B).

  A drive motor 772 (see FIG. 35) that generates a driving force for slidingly moving the first slide member 720 disposed on the right side of the pair of first slide members 720 is in the state of FIG. It is controlled to stop the generation of the driving force immediately before reaching. In the present embodiment, since the contact of the pair of first slide members 720 occurs between the carriage receiving portion 721b and the carriage main body portion 722a of the carriage portion 722, it is unnecessary to consider the bending of the decoration portion 723 in the sliding direction. Thus, the contact position of the pair of first slide members 720 can be accurately calculated.

  The pair of first slide members 720 are arranged such that the rotating body group 722b protrudes slightly outward from the longitudinal side surface (the left and right side surfaces in FIG. 36) of the carriage main body 722a. When rotating, the rotating bodies of the rotating body group 722b projecting outward from the contact surface side are first brought into contact with each other, and thereafter, the carriage receiving portion 721b and the carriage main body portion 722a of the carriage portion 722 are pressed against each other. It is done. That is, while the carriage receiving portion 721b and the carriage main body 722a are in contact with each other, pressure is applied to the rotating bodies that protrude outward from the contact surface side in the rotating body group 722b. Accordingly, the rotation of the rotating body group 722b can be braked in a state where the pair of slide members 720 are in contact with each other, so that the impact at the time of contact between the pair of first slide members 720 can be reduced.

  After the pair of first slide members 720 are brought into contact with each other, a drive motor 771 that generates a driving force for sliding the first slide member 720 disposed on the left side of the front view of the pair of first slide members 720. A pair of first slides (by pressing the first slide member 720 disposed on the right side of the front view by the first slide member 720 disposed on the left side of the front view) by the driving force (see FIG. 35). The member 720 is slid to the right (see FIG. 40C).

  That is, after the pair of first slide members 720 come into contact with each other, the pair of first slide members 720 can be slid without causing the drive motors 771 and 772 to operate in a coordinated manner. Thereby, the electric power consumption in the whole drive motor 771, 772 (refer FIG. 35) can be suppressed.

  Further, for example, when the pair of first slide members 720 is driven only by the drive motor 771 (see FIG. 35), the motor load increases compared to driving only the first slide member 720 on one side. However, since the first slide member 720 is moved in the horizontal direction, there is no need to consider the gravity load as in the case of moving in the vertical direction, and the amount of increase in the motor load is the drive motors 771 and 772 (see FIG. 35). It occurs equally in each.

  Therefore, the motor life of the drive motors 771 and 772 (see FIG. 35) can be easily adjusted, and the replacement timing of the drive motors 771 and 772 can be easily adjusted. Thereby, the maintenance frequency of the drive motors 771 and 772 can be reduced.

  With reference to FIG. 41, an example of the movement aspect of a pair of 2nd slide member 740 is demonstrated. FIG. 41 is a front view of the second slide operation unit 700 illustrating an example of a change in the arrangement of the second slide member 720 in time series.

  41A shows a state in which the pair of second slide members 740 are disposed at the retracted positions, and FIG. 41B shows a state in which the main body portions 741 of the pair of second slide members 740 are in the extended position. 41 (c) shows a state in which the pair of second slide members 740 have been moved a predetermined amount upward from the position in FIG. 41 (b).

  Here, transmission of the driving force to the driving gear 752 (see FIG. 39) during the sliding movement of the pair of second slide members 740 will be described. From the retracted position shown in FIG. 41A, the drive gear 752 is rotated by the drive motors 773 and 774 (see FIG. 35) (the drive motor 773 is clockwise when viewed from the front and the drive motor 774 is counterclockwise when viewed from the front). Then, the pair of second slide members 740 are slid and moved toward the extended position, and contacted at the extended position (see FIG. 41B).

  A drive motor 773 (see FIG. 35) that generates a driving force for slidingly moving the second slide member 740 disposed above the front view of the pair of second slide members 740 reaches the state shown in FIG. Control is performed to stop the generation of the driving force immediately before.

  After the pair of second slide members 740 are in contact with each other, a drive motor 774 that generates a drive force that slides the second slide member 740 disposed below the front view of the pair of second slide members 740 ( The pair of second slide members 740 is driven by the driving force (see FIG. 35) (the second slide member 740 disposed above the front view is pushed by the second slide member 740 disposed below the front view). The slide is moved upward (see FIG. 41C).

  In other words, after the pair of second slide members 740 are brought into contact with each other, the pair of second slide members 740 can be slid without causing the drive motors 773 and 774 (see FIG. 35) to cooperate. Thereby, the power consumption seen in the drive motor 773,774 whole can be suppressed.

  Here, when the member that moves downward changes the direction of movement upward, the load on the drive motor may increase due to the influence of gravity, which may reduce the motor life. In addition, since the deceleration time for changing the direction takes a long time, there is a possibility that the degree of freedom of production is reduced.

  However, in the present embodiment, when the upper member of the pair of second slide members 740 changes the movement direction from the downward movement to the upward direction, the lower member of the pair of second slide members 740 is raised. The momentum of movement can be used. As a result, the motor load generated when the direction of the second slide member 740 is changed due to the influence of gravity can be reduced, and the motor life can be extended. Moreover, the deceleration time for the direction change of the 2nd slide member 740 can be shortened, and the freedom degree of production can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the operation of the bending suppression gear 743a of the second slide member 740 will be described. FIG. 42 is a partial rear view of the second slide operation unit 700. In addition, illustration of the back surface retaining cover 763 (see FIG. 39) of the back side cover member 760 is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 42, in the second slide member 740, the end portion opposite to the end portion supported by the second slide shaft rod S2 contacts the receiving gear portion 715a of the base member 710 via the deflection suppressing gear 743a. Touched.

  Here, when the second slide member 740 is started, the meshing relationship between the bending suppression gear 743a and the receiving gear portion 715a is optimized and the bending suppression gear 743a rotates smoothly. Therefore, the second sliding member 740 and the receiving gear are rotated. Resistance generated between the portion 715a is suppressed. Therefore, the driving force required when starting the second slide member 740 can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, when the pair of second slide members 740 are brought into contact with each other between the carriage parts 742, the impact at the time of contact is transmitted to the decoration part 743, and the side where the bending suppression gear 743a of the decoration part 743 is disposed. Are inclined with respect to the guide wall 715. Thereby, the load from the bending suppression gear 743a to the receiving gear part 715 increases. More specifically, for example, when the decorative portion 743 of the second slide member 740 is inclined downward (downward in FIG. 42) with the carriage portion 742 as a fulcrum, the upper deflection suppression gear 743a of the pair of deflection suppression gears 743a is the receiving gear. Pressed against the part 715.

  As a result, a force in a direction to return the inclination of the second slide member 740 is applied to the second slide member 740, so that the inclination of the posture of the decorative portion 743 generated by the contact of the pair of second slide members 740 is suppressed. can do.

  Further, since the contact between the second slide member 740 and the guide wall portion 715 is configured by the gear meshing, the contact surface can be increased. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of slipping between the second slide member 740 and the guide wall portion 715 when the pair of second slide members 740 come into contact with each other, and thus the inclination of the posture of the decoration portion 743 is suppressed. The effect to do can be improved.

<About the first variable winning device in the first embodiment>
The details of the first variable winning device 65 in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 51. FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the first variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 49, the first variable prize-winning device 65 is combined with the opening portion forming member 65b that is arranged to protrude to the front side of the game board 13 and the back side of the opening portion forming member 65b, so that the first variable A base member 65c for screwing the winning device 65 to the game board 13, and a LED disposed on the back side of the base member 65c to light the LED from the back side of the base member 65c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. LED board 65d in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged, a back cover body 65e that holds the LED board 65d with a base member 65c, and an open / close for opening / closing a specific winning opening 65a formed in the opening forming member 65d An opening / closing unit 65f having a door 65f1, a flow path cover body 65g combined with the back side of the back cover body 65e to form a flow path, and the back cover body 65e and the flow A switching member 65h that projects into the flow path formed by the cover body 65g and switches the flow path of the game ball, a link member 65i that is locked to the switching member 65h, and a rear surface side of the flow path cover body 65g. A back cover body 65j, a flow path solenoid 65k that is fixed to the back side of the back cover body 65j and operates the link member 65i, covers the flow path solenoid 65k from the back side, and is attached to the back cover body 65j with screws. It is comprised with the cover body 65m for fixation for fixing.

  FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 65. FIG. 50C is a top view of the first variable winning device 65, and FIG. 50B is an Lb-Lb sectional view of the first variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 50B, the first variable winning device 65 is formed with a specific winning port 65a that is an opening through which a game ball can be entered. The specific winning opening 65a is formed with a substantially rectangular opening above the pachinko machine 10, and the game ball passing through the opening is inclined to the lower left so that it is guided to the left in FIG. 50 (b). A bottom surface is formed. A detection port 65a1 composed of a magnetic sensor 65c1 for detecting a winning of a game ball is disposed at the left end of the bottom surface. The game ball that has passed through the detection port 65a1 is guided to a sorting channel formed on the back side of the back cover body 65e shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 50 (b), the opening of the special winning opening 65a is in an open state in which a game ball can enter by an open / close door 65f1 constituted by a shutter mechanism that can be projected and retracted from the game board 13 side, and in an incomplete entry. It can be changed to a possible closed state (difficult to enter). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening / closing door 65f1, and the game ball is configured to roll on the upper portion of the opening / closing door. In the open state, the open / close door 65f1 is configured to be retracted from the specific winning opening 65a by being retracted inside the base member 65c (inside the game board 13).

  With this configuration, when the opening of the first variable winning device 65 is closed, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the first variable winning device 65 and moves toward the second winning port 640 side. It is configured to be guided. Therefore, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second winning port 640 while keeping the right-handed state even during the short-time game (including during the probability change game), and to the left-handed immediately after the big hit game The time and effort to change can be reduced. Therefore, the game can be performed more easily.

  Further, in the open state, the surface orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball flows down can be configured as the opening of the first variable winning device 65, so that more game balls can be won in the specific winning opening 65a efficiently. Therefore, the time required for the big hit game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

  FIG. 50A is a La-La cross-sectional view shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 50A, the magnetic sensor 65c1 having the detection port 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c so that the detection port 65a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel side of the back cover body 65e.

  With reference to FIG. 51, a configuration in which game balls guided to the distribution flow path of the back cover body 65e are distributed to a normal discharge flow path 65e1 and a special discharge flow path 65e2 to be described later.

  FIG. 51A is a rear view of the back cover body 65e showing a state in which the switching member 65h is operated so that the game balls are distributed to the special discharge port 65e2. As shown in FIG. 51 (a), the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 65i is inserted and a guide piece 65h2 for guiding the game ball, and the flow path cover body 65g. Is pivotally supported from the back side. Here, the flow path cover body 65g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 65h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 65h is rotated into the distribution flow path from the back side of the flow path cover body 65g. It is configured to be possible to arrange.

  As shown in FIG. 51 (a), the game ball guided into the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 arranged diagonally to the left and guided to the special discharge port 65e2. . The game ball that has passed through the special discharge port 65e2 is detected by a probability change switch 65e3 configured by a magnetic sensor that can detect the passage of the game ball provided in the special discharge port 65e2, and is discharged out of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. .

  Here, although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, the game state after the jackpot game is changed to a high probability game state (probability change) by passing the game ball through the probability change switch 65e3 described above during the jackpot game. Gaming state). That is, the probability variation switch 65e3 is configured as a winning opening for giving a probability variation gaming state. In addition, the switching member 65h is configured to distribute the game state after the big hit to the low probability gaming state (normal gaming state) or the probability variation gaming state.

  In this way, since the gaming state set after the jackpot game is changed by the flow route of the game ball that won the first variable winning slot 65 during the jackpot game, the player's interest is improved even during the jackpot game. Can do. The time required to pass from the opening of the first variable winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge port 65e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h) is configured to be 1 second at the shortest. . The operation of the switching member 65h is set according to the jackpot type. In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is won, the switching member 65h is operated for 5 seconds in accordance with the opening timing of the first variable winning device 65 at the start of the 13th round. In addition, when the jackpot B is won, the switching member 65h is operated for 0.5 seconds in accordance with the opening timing of the first variable winning device 65 at the start of the 13th round.

  Therefore, in the jackpot A, it is configured that the game ball that has won the first variable winning device 65 can pass the probability variation switch 65e3, but in the jackpot B, it is impossible to pass the probability variation switch 65e3. Has been. Therefore, the probability variation grant ratio can be controlled according to the jackpot type, and it can be configured so that an excessive advantage or disadvantage does not occur.

  With reference to FIG. 51 (b), the case where a game ball is guided to the normal outlet 65e2 will be described. FIG. 51B is a diagram illustrating a state in which the flow path solenoid 65k is inactive and the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h blocks the opening surface of the entrance of the special discharge port 65e2.

  The game ball guided to the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h and is guided to the normal discharge port 65e1. At the end of the normal discharge port 65e1, a discharge confirmation switch 65e4 configured with a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of the game ball is provided. Thereby, it can be determined by the sum of the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 and the probability variation switch 65e3 whether or not all the game balls that have entered the first variable winning device 65 have been discharged.

  Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem of winning in the probability change switch 65e3 even if the winning ball is B in the thirteenth round in a state where the game balls won before the 13th round are not discharged.

  In this way, the game ball that has won the specific prize opening 65a in the first variable prize winning device 65 is detected by the magnetic sensor 65c1, and based on this, the player receives a prize ball as a privilege (in this embodiment, for one ball prize). 15 prize balls). In addition, by using the game ball after the detection, it is possible to sort whether or not to pass to the probability change switch 65e3, so that a lottery to determine whether or not to give a probability change game state can also be executed. . Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated winning port for giving the probability-changing gaming state separately from the first variable winning device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be used effectively.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the relationship between the first variable winning device 65 and the second winning port 640 will be described. An opening through which one game ball can pass is formed on the right side of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65, and the gaming ball that has passed through the opening is provided below the first variable winning device 65. A guiding path that leads to the general winning port 65b1 is formed. When a game ball enters the general winning port 65b1, ten game balls are paid out to the player as prize balls to the upper plate. Here, when the game ball is played in a right-handed manner, which is a game method that is fired so as to pass through the right side of the liquid crystal display unit 80, it does not roll on the open / close door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65. In addition, all the game balls that roll on the right side of the first variable winning device 65 pass through this opening and are configured to win the general winning opening 65b1. A plurality of game nails for changing the rolling direction of the game ball are provided on the upper portion of the first variable winning device 65.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 110, when the open / close door 65f1 is in the open state, the angle of the game nails K2 and K3 is adjusted as means for adjusting the ratio to the specific winning opening 65a, and the interval is narrowed. Or can be widened. Here, the game store will increase the profit by increasing the number of game balls to be launched in order to enter 10 balls in one round by reducing the number of game balls to be awarded to the specific winning opening 65a at the time of the big hit. It can be considered. However, in the configuration of the present embodiment, when the game nail K2 is tilted to the left and adjusted so that it is difficult to win the specific prize opening 65a, the gap between the adjustment nails K1 and K2 becomes wide, and the opening on the right side of the open / close door 65f1 It becomes easy to enter the ball. Further, if the game nail K1 is narrowed to narrow the gap between the game nails K1 and K2, the right channel of the game nail K1 is widened, and a game ball enters from the channel through the right opening of the open / close door 65f1. It becomes easy to ball. Accordingly, even when the jackpot game is not being played, the rate of winning in the general winning port 65b1 is increased, and the damage on the game store side is increased, so that the rate of winning in the specific winning port 65a is reduced. Adjustment of the nail can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the game preference is significantly reduced by adjustment on the game store side.

  Further, when the game nail K1 is tilted rightward so that the interval between the game nails K2 and K3 is narrowed to adjust the winning rate to the specific winning port 65a, the game ball is moved to the second winning port 640 side. Becomes easier to flow down. As a result, the winning rate to the second winning port 640 is increased, and the rate of winning the second winning port 640 is increased during a short-time game or a probable gaming state, which increases the damage on the game store side. , It can be suppressed that the winning rate of the specific winning opening 65a is set low. A plurality of game nails are arranged between the first variable prize-winning device 65 and the second prize-winning port 640, and a game ball that flows down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable prize-winning device 65 in the left direction. All are configured to be able to reach the second winning opening 640. The game nails disposed between the first variable winning device 65 and the second winning port 640 are arranged so that all the game balls are guided to the second winning port 640 even if adjusted.

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 48. First, with reference to FIG. 43 to FIG. 46, the swing operation unit 2300 in the second embodiment will be described.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the transmission device 350 and the drive gear 341 of the drive device 340 are always meshed has been described. However, the oscillating operation unit 2300 in the second embodiment includes the transmission device 2350 and the drive device 2340. A state in which the drive gear 2341 is engaged (engaged state) and a state in which the engagement of the transmission device 2350 and the drive gear 2341 is released (non-engaged state) can be formed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  43 and 44 are front views of the drive gear 2341, the transmission device 2350, and the L-shaped lever 2380 illustrating the swinging operation of the drive gear 2341, the transmission device 2350, and the L-shaped lever 2380 in time series in the second embodiment. FIG.

  Note that the main body 321 and the release hole 325 of the arm member 320 are illustrated by imaginary lines, and in FIG. 43A, the arm member 320 is disposed at the extended position, and in FIG. FIG. 43 (c) shows a state in which 320 is swung from the extended position toward the retracted position, and FIG. 43 (a) shows a state in which the arm member 320 is disposed at the retracted position. FIG. 44B shows a state immediately before the transmission device 2350 is pulled by the L-shaped lever 2380 from the state of c), and FIG. 44B shows a state where the arm member 320 is projected to the front of the projecting position. ), The state in which the arm member 320 is disposed at the extended position by the transmission device 2350 being pulled by the L-shaped lever 2380 is illustrated.

  As shown to Fig.43 (a), the drive gear 2341 and the transmission device 2350 are formed so that engagement is possible.

  The drive gear 2341 includes a main body portion 2341a that is axially viewed from the drive shaft and formed in a fan-like shape when viewed from the front, and an extrusion pin 2341b that protrudes from the front side in the vicinity of the peripheral surface of the main body portion 2341a.

  The transmission device 2350 includes a release pin 2352 that protrudes toward the front side at the end of the regulation sliding portion 351 on the opposite side to the front view.

  The base member 2310 includes a rocking shaft 2318 that protrudes to the front side in the lower right side of the shaft of the drive gear 2341 when viewed from the front.

  The L-shaped lever 2380 is formed in a long bar shape, and one end of the L-shaped lever 2380 is pivotally supported by the swing shaft 2318 of the base member 2310 so as to be swingable. A second main body portion 2382 that is pivotally supported at the other end of the opposite side and is formed into a long rod shape, and a long hole shape extending along the extending direction of the second main body portion 2382 is formed. And a pull slide hole 2383 to which the release pin 2352 is coupled. The L-shaped lever 2380 is formed so as to be able to swing the front side of the drive gear 2341 and to be able to contact the push pin 2341b when the drive gear 2341 rotates.

  A case where the arm member 320 is swung from the extended position to the retracted position will be described. The arm member 320 is disposed at the retracted position by the transmission device 2350 coupled by the release hole 325 being swung to the state of FIG. 43C by the rotation of the drive gear 2341. At this time, the L-shaped lever 2380 is pulled to the release pin 2352 of the transmission device 2350 through the pulling slide hole 2383 and inclined toward the transmission device side.

  When the drive gear 2341 is further rotated counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 43 (c), the engagement between the transmission device 2350 and the drive gear 2341 is released (see FIG. 44 (a)). Next, a case where the arm member 320 is swung from the retracted position toward the extended position will be described.

  In a state where the arm member 320 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 43C), the regulation sliding portion 351 of the transmission device 2350 and the release hole 325 of the arm member 320 form a dead point, and thus the transmission device 2350 And the drive gear 2341 are disengaged, the arm member 320 is maintained in the retracted position.

  When the drive gear 2341 is further rotated from the state shown in FIG. 44A and the L-shaped lever 2380 is pushed outward (rightward in FIG. 44), the transmission device 2350 is inserted into the pulling slide hole 2383 of the L-shaped lever 2380. The release pin 2352 is pulled, and the transmission device 2350 is slightly rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front.

  By slightly rotating the transmission device 2350, the dead point formed by the regulating sliding portion 351 of the transmission device 2350 and the release hole 325 of the arm member 320 is released, and the arm member 320 is rotated by the torsion spring 360 (see FIG. 20). ) Is oscillated toward the overhang position (see FIG. 44B).

  When the drive gear 2341 is further rotated and the push pin 2341b is arranged on the right side of the rotation shaft, the L-shaped lever 2380 pulls the release pin of the transmission device 2350 again. Thereby, the regulation sliding part 351 of the transmission device 2350 and the release hole 325 of the arm member 320 form a dead point, and the arm member 320 can be maintained at the extended position (see FIG. 44C).

  That is, when the arm member 320 is swung from the retracted position toward the extended position, the engagement between the drive gear 2341 and the transmission device 2350 coupled to the arm member 320 can be released, and the arm member 320 can be released. It is possible to reduce the resistance applied to. Therefore, by starting the arm member 320 with the biasing force of the torsion spring 360 (see FIG. 20), the action of swinging the arm member 320 at a high speed from the start can be made remarkable.

  Here, the transmission device 2350 and the drive gear 2341 are engaged only when the arm member 320 is swung from the extended position to the retracted position. Therefore, the change in resistance generated between the transmission device 2350 and the drive gear 2341 affects the swing of the arm member 320 only when the arm member 320 is swung from the extended position to the retracted position, and the arm member 320 When the arm is swung from the retracted position to the extended position, the arm member 320 is not affected.

  Therefore, even if the capacity of the driving device 2340 is selected to be large by setting a large elastic force of the torsion spring 360, a large force is required when the arm member 320 is swung from the extended position to the retracted position. Thus, it is possible to ensure the high speed at the start when the arm member 320 is swung from the retracted position to the extended position.

  45 (a), 45 (b), 46 (a), and 46 (b) illustrate a second embodiment in which the operation of swinging the arm member 320 from the retracted position to the extended position is illustrated in time series. It is a front view of rocking | fluctuation operation | movement unit 2300 in a form. 45A illustrates a state where the arm member 320 is disposed at the retracted position, and FIG. 45B illustrates a state where the arm member 320 is swung by a predetermined amount from the retracted position. 46 (a) shows a state in which the arm member 320 is swung by a predetermined amount from the state of FIG. 45 (b), and FIG. 46 (b) shows a state in which the arm member 320 is disposed at the overhanging position. Is done.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the standing member 330 is gently raised has been described. However, in the swing operation unit 2300 in the second embodiment, the standing member 330 is suddenly raised.

  As shown in FIG. 46B, the standing hole 2316 of the base member 2310 includes a posture changing portion 2316a formed at the upper portion of the bending point and a concentric circle portion 2316b formed near the lower end.

  The posture changing portion 2316 a is a portion in which the extending direction of the long hole is directed to the cylindrical portion 322 that is the swing axis of the arm member 320. When the change sliding portion 333 of the upright member 330 is slid on the posture changing portion 2316a, the degree of change in the posture of the upright member 330 with respect to the swing angle of the arm member 320 is maximized (FIGS. 45B and 46). (See (a)). This is because the posture changing portion 2316a is in a perpendicular relationship with the circle formed by the movement locus of the sliding ring portion 323 (see FIG. 17B).

  The concentric circle portion 2316b is a portion in which the extending direction of the long hole is directed in a direction along a circle centering on the cylindrical portion 322 of the arm member 320. When the change sliding part 333 of the standing member 330 slides on the concentric circle part 2316b, the relative positional relationship between the sliding ring part 323 of the arm member 320 and the change sliding part 333 of the standing member 330 does not change. The posture of the upright member 330 with respect to the arm member 320 is maintained.

  In the present embodiment, since the concentric circular portion 2316b is formed at the lower end of the standing hole 2316, the arm member 320 stands up from the retracted position until the arm member 320 is disposed at the position illustrated in FIG. The relative posture of the member 330 is maintained.

  The posture changing portion 2316a is formed at the upper part of the bending point of the upright hole 2316 (that is, near the upper part of the concentric circle part 2316b), so that it is shown in FIG. 46 (a) from the arrangement shown in FIG. 45 (b). When the arm member 320 is swung in such an arrangement, the upright member 320 is suddenly raised.

  Thereby, the posture change after the standing member 320 is visually recognized by the player can be made abrupt. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the high-speed operation of the swing operation unit 2300 felt by the player.

  With reference to FIG. 47, the 1st slide operation unit 2400 in 2nd Embodiment is demonstrated. In the first embodiment, the case where the connecting member 470 is formed from a resin material has been described. However, in the first slide operation unit 2400 in the second embodiment, the connecting member 2470 is formed from an elastic rubber material. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 47A is a front view of the first slide operation unit 2400 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 47B is a rear view of the first slide operation unit 2400. In FIG. 47, the state in which the suspension member 430 is disposed at the extended position is illustrated, and the cover member 420 is partially omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 47A, the second cover member 2466 of the tilting member 2460 includes a mass portion 2466m disposed at the upper end.

  The mass portion 2466m is a portion having a mass necessary for the center of gravity of the tilting member 2460 to be formed vertically above the suspension shaft 461a in a state where the suspension member 430 is disposed at the extended position. Therefore, the center of gravity G of the tilting member 2460 is formed vertically above the suspension shaft 461a.

  The connecting shaft 461 b of the tilting member 2460 is connected to the suspension shaft 454 of the auxiliary member 450 by the connecting member 2470.

  The connecting member 2470 is a long member formed of a rubber-like elastic body, and is formed to be extendable / contractable by swinging of the tilting member 2460.

  Here, in a state where the suspension member 430 is disposed at the overhang position, the center of gravity G of the tilt member 2460 is formed vertically above the suspension shaft 461a, and therefore the tilt member 2460 is formed unstable. Therefore, when the driving device 464 (see FIG. 23) is driven and the tilting member 2460 performs an expansion / contraction operation in a state where the hanging member 430 is disposed at the extended position, the tilting member 2460 swings around the hanging shaft 461a. Moved.

  In this case, since the connecting shaft 461b of the tilting member 2460 extends and contracts the connecting member 2470, an elastic force is applied to the tilting member 2460. As a result, a force opposite to the swinging direction of the tilting member 2460 is applied to the tilting member 2460. In this case, the time until the tilting member 2460 swings back is shortened, and the operation of the tilting member 2460 is speeded up. Therefore, the speed of the swinging operation of the tilting member 2460 that occurs when the driving device 464 (see FIG. 23) is driven can be increased, and an effect due to the swinging (vibration) of the tilting member 2460 is effectively performed. be able to.

  With reference to FIG. 48, the 2nd slide operation | movement unit 2700 in 2nd Embodiment is demonstrated. In the first embodiment, the case where one of the pair of first slide members 720 is stopped and brought into contact with the other first slide member 720 has been described, but the second slide operation unit 2700 in the second embodiment is The position and speed of the other first slide member 2720 are detected, and one of the first slide members 2720 is controlled to run backward according to the detection result. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 48 is a partial front view of the second slide operation unit 2700 in the second embodiment illustrating an example of an operation in which the first slide member 2720 is slid and moved from the retracted position to the extended position. 48, the illustration of the upper front cover member 730 is omitted, and in FIG. 48 (a), a state in which the pair of first slide members 2720 are disposed at the retracted position is illustrated, and FIG. FIG. 48C shows a state in which the right first slide member 2720 has been slid by a predetermined amount of the pair of first slide members 2720, and FIG. 48C shows the first slide on the left side from the state of FIG. A state in which the member 2720 is slid by a predetermined amount is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 48 (a), the main body portion 2721 of the first slide member 2720 is perforated in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 48) and extended in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 48). A hole-shaped detection hole 2721c is provided.

  The base member 2710 is a transmission type optical sensor disposed on the front side, and the detection device is disposed at a position where the transmitted light can pass through the detection hole 2721c when the first slide member 2720 is slid. 2716. Note that the detection device 2716 is disposed approximately at the center in the left-right direction of the base member 2710 (see FIG. 48A).

  As shown in FIG. 48B, when the first slide member 2720 on the right side is slid from the state of FIG. 48A and the transmitted light of the detection device 2716 reaches the position penetrating the detection hole 2721c, the right side slide member 2720 is moved to the right side. The first slide member 2720 is controlled to stop.

  As shown in FIG. 48C, when the first slide member 2720 on the left side is slid and the transmitted light of the detection device 2716 reaches a position penetrating the detection hole 2721c, the right slide member 2720 is moved to the left slide member. Control is performed so as to reversely feed (slide to the right) at a speed capable of contacting 2720 at a constant speed.

  That is, while the left first slide member 2720 slides, the transmitted light of the detection device 2716 is blocked by the rack portion 721a of the first slide member 2720, but the transmitted light of the detection device 2716 passes through the detection hole 2721c. When the penetrating position is reached, the transmitted light of the detection device 2716 is detected, and the position information of the left first slide member 2720 is output to the main control device. Further, since the detection hole 2721c is formed in a long hole shape, the speed information of the left first slide member 2720 is output to the main control device by detecting the length at which the transmitted light of the detection device 2716 is detected. The

  Based on the position information and the velocity information of the left first slide member 2720, the reverse acceleration required for the right first slide member 2720 to contact the left first slide member 2720 at a constant speed is obtained. The first slide member 2720 on the right side is calculated and controlled with the acceleration.

  Thereby, the impact at the time of contact | abutting of a pair of 1st slide member 2720 can be relieved, and durability of the 1st slide member 2720 can be improved.

  The present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configuration in the other embodiments to form another embodiment.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the changing sliding portion 333 of the standing member 330 is slid into the standing holes 316 and 2316 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a rotatable roller may be disposed on the changing sliding portion 333 and the roller may roll on the upright holes 316 and 2316. Thereby, the resistance which generate | occur | produces at the time of the attitude | position change of the standing member 330 can be suppressed.

  In each of the above embodiments, the size of the gap formed between the main body portion 321 and the collar member of the arm member 320 and the base member 310 gradually decreases from the vicinity of the lower end of the guide hole 315 toward the vicinity of the upper end. Although the case where it is formed has been described, it is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the size of the gap formed between the main body portion 321 of the arm member 320 and the collar member and the base member 310 may be rapidly changed in a part of the guide hole 315. That is, at least two types of change in the gap may be formed. In this case, the degree of change in the slide resistance of the arm member 320 can be changed (rapidly or loosened).

  In each of the above embodiments, the size of the gap formed between the main body portion 321 and the collar member of the arm member 320 and the base member 310 gradually decreases from the vicinity of the lower end of the guide hole 315 toward the vicinity of the upper end. Although the case where it is formed has been described, it is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, even if the size of the gap formed between the main body portion 331 and the collar member of the standing member 330 and the base member 310 is gradually reduced from the vicinity of the lower end of the standing hole 316 to the vicinity of the upper end, Good. In this case, resistance applied to the standing member 330 when the arm member 320 starts from the retracted position toward the extended position is suppressed, and wobbling of the standing member 330 is suppressed in a state where the arm member 320 is disposed at the extended position. can do.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the size of the gap formed between the main body portion 321 of the arm member 320 and the collar member and the base member 310 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the groove width orthogonal to the extending direction of the guide hole 315 may be reduced from the lower end toward the upper end. In this case, the degree of reduction in diameter perpendicular to the extending direction of the guide hole 315 can be formed differently on the left and right with respect to the center of the sliding portion 326.

  That is, the right side surface (right side in FIG. 18A) of the guide hole 315 is a portion formed on the upper side of the sliding portion 326 of the arm member 320, and the arm member 320 swings from the retracted position to the extended position. In this case, the arm member 320 is a portion that is positively contacted when the arm member 320 slightly moves in the surface direction (direction perpendicular to the surface thickness direction) of the base member 310 due to play with the swing shaft. By greatly reducing the reduction degree of the groove width from the stage close to the retracted position, the arm member 320 can be smoothly swung in the protruding direction.

  On the other hand, the left side surface (the left side in FIG. 18A) of the guide hole 315 is in contact with the arm member 320 when it is swung from the extended position to the retracted position and when the arm member 320 is tilted forward. Therefore, the degree of contraction of the groove is moderated until it reaches the vicinity of the upper end of the guide hole 315, and is formed rapidly in the vicinity of the upper end, whereby the resistance received when the arm member 320 is swung toward the retracted position. Can be suppressed. That is, the sliding portion 326 can be prevented from coming into contact with the left side surface of the guide hole 315 when the arm member 320 is swung from the extended position to the retracted position, or when the arm member 320 is tilted forward. Resistance generated when the member 320 swings from the extended position to the retracted position can be suppressed. Thereby, the driving force required for the driving device 340 can be reduced, and the driving device 340 can be downsized.

  Note that the same effect can be obtained by changing the diameter from the swing shaft 312 to the guide hole 315 by the portion of the guide hole 315 without changing the groove width of the guide hole 315. For example, by increasing the diameter from the swing shaft 312 in the vicinity of the lower end of the guide hole 315 as compared to the vicinity of the upper end, the arm member 320 is swung from the retracted position to the extended position from the start. The sliding portion 326 can be easily brought into contact with the upper side surface of the guide hole 315. Thereby, the swing of the arm member 320 can be made smooth.

  Further, by increasing the diameter from the swing shaft 312 in the vicinity of the upper end of the guide hole 315 as compared with that in the vicinity of the lower end, the arm member 320 can be armed from the upper side surface of the guide hole 315 in a state where the arm member 320 is disposed at the extended position. A downward force acts on the sliding portion 326 of the member 320. Accordingly, it is possible to reduce the driving force required at the time of starting when the arm member 320 is swung from the extended position to the retracted position.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where all the reflection members 520 of the reversing operation unit 500 are rotated at the same time has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the rotation timing may be shifted for each reflection member 520, or the rotation speed may be shifted. Thereby, the reflection direction of the light irradiated from the light source and reflected by the reflecting member 520 can be set in various ways, and the front side of the reversing operation unit can be brilliantly produced.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the reflection member 520 is rotated by the rotation gear 523 of the reflection member 520 of the reversing operation unit 500 meshing with the first rack gear 553 of the transmission member 550 has been described. is not. For example, the transmission member 550 may be formed of a rotating belt, and the rotating gear 523 may be formed of a roller. In this case, even if the rotating belt further rotates while the reflecting members 520 are in contact with each other, slip occurs between the rotating belt and the roller, and further rotation of the reflecting member 520 is suppressed. Therefore, damage to the reflecting member 520 can be prevented.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case has been described in which the expansion gear 523a is formed on the rotation gear 523 of the reversing operation unit 500 and the first rack gear 553 of the transmission member 550 is formed with an interval between them. is not. For example, the expansion teeth 523a may be formed on the transmission member 550 and the tooth interval may be formed on the rotation gear 523.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the reflecting member 520 of the reversing operation unit 500 is formed of an opaque resin material has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the reflecting member 520 may be formed from a transparent resin material. In this case, since the player can visually recognize the light emitted from the light source regardless of whether the reflecting member 520 is in the closed state or the open state, the player can visually recognize the effect of the light emitted from the light source for a long period of time. Can do.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where one slide member 720 is slid by being pushed by the other slide member 720 out of the pair of first slide members 720 of the second slide operation unit 700 has been described. It is not something that can be done. For example, each of the pair of first slide members 720 may be formed so as to be always driven by an independent drive motor.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the pair of second slide members 740 directly contact the main body portions 741 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, an elastic member such as rubber or a coil spring may be disposed on the surfaces of the main body 741 that are in contact with each other. In this case, since the impact can be reduced as compared with the case where the main body portions 741 are in direct contact with each other, the durability of the second slide member 740 can be improved.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the second slide operation unit 700 is formed so that the shape of the “heart” can be visually recognized in a front view in a state where the slide members 720 and 740 protrude is described. It is not limited. For example, the visually recognized shape is not limited to “heart”, and may be “star”, “fish”, “car”, and the like. Further, different shapes may be formed so as to be visible when the slide members 720 and 740 have different degrees of overhang. In this case, the effect of the second slide operation unit 700 can be improved.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where one second slide member 740 pushes and moves the other second slide member 740 out of the pair of second slide members 740 is not necessarily limited thereto. . For example, it can be moved in the pulling direction by attaching a magnet to the contact portion of the second slide member 740. In this case, the pair of slide members 740 can be reciprocated by the drive motor 773 that slides one of the second slide members 740. Therefore, for example, when one drive motor 773 is newer than the other drive motor 774, the motor to be driven can be switched according to the situation, such as driving the second slide member 740 using only the drive motor 773. Therefore, the life of the pair of drive motors 773 and 774 can be adjusted.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the carriage receiving portion 721b and the carriage main body portion 722a of the carriage portion 722 are brought into contact with each other when the pair of first slide members 720 are in contact with each other has been described. Absent. For example, the pair of first slide members 720 may be in contact with the lower end side of the decorative portion 723, that is, the lower end side opposite to the upper end side to which the driving force is transmitted, of the longitudinal ends of the decorative portion 723. . In this case, the impact on the upper end side of the first slide member 720 when the pair of first slide members 720 are brought into contact with each other can be reduced, so that the burden on the drive motors 771 and 772 can be reduced.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the carriage receiving portion 721b and the carriage main body portion 722a of the carriage portion 722 are brought into contact with each other when the pair of first slide members 720 are in contact with each other has been described. Absent. For example, the pair of first slide members 720 may be in contact with both the upper end side and the lower end side of the decorative portion 723. In this case, since the contact area of the pair of first slide members 720 can be increased, the load applied per unit area when the pair of first slide members 720 are contacted can be reduced.

  Furthermore, since the movement of one of the pair of first slide members 720 is reliably transmitted to the other, the pair of slide members 720 are moved when the pair of first slide members 720 are slid in a contact state. The effect of visually recognizing as a unit can be made remarkable. At this time, if the contact points on both sides are concealed by the front cover member 730, the pair of slide members 720 that are separated from each other are viewed in a coordinated manner, so that the effect of the pair of slide members 720 can be improved. .

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the rotating body group 722b of the carriage unit 722 is formed with the same diameter has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the diameter of the rotating body group 722b may be formed larger in one first slide member 720 and smaller in the other first slide member 720. In this case, the rotating body group 722b having a small diameter can be sandwiched between the rotating body group 722b having a large diameter and the first slide shaft rod S1. Thereby, the effect which brakes the rotating body group 722b can be improved because the rotating body group 722b contact | abuts.

  In the second embodiment, the case where the detection hole 2721c is formed in one place in the first slide member 2720 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the first slide member 2720 stops when the detection holes 2721c are formed at a plurality of locations (for example, one end, the center, and the other end of the main body portion 2721 of the first slide member 2720). A plurality of positions can be formed. At this time, by changing the lengths of the detection holes 2721c in the longitudinal direction, the positions of the first slide members 2720 can be detected at a plurality of locations in the detection period of the detection device 2716.

  In the second embodiment, the case where the detection hole 2721c is formed in a long hole shape has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the detection hole 2721c may be formed in a circular shape. In this case, the processing cost of the detection hole 2721c can be suppressed. Even when the detection hole 2721c is circular, a plurality of detection holes 2721c are continuously drilled along the sliding direction of the first slide member 2720, so that the detection device 2716 is moved during the movement of the first slide member 2720. The moving speed of the first slide member 2720 can be determined from the time interval during which the transmitted light is blocked. Further, by changing the number of circular detection holes 2721c for each longitudinal position of the first slide member 2720 (for example, both ends and the central portion), the transmission of the detection device 2716 during the movement of the first slide member 2720 is performed. The position of the first slide member 2720 can be detected based on the number of times light is blocked.

  In the second embodiment, after one slide member 2720 is stopped at the extended position, the position and speed of the other first slide member 2720 are detected by the positional relationship between the detection device 2716 and the detection hole 2721c. Although described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when only the position or speed of the other first slide member 2720 is detected, the relative speed difference between the pair of first slide members 720 is suppressed by causing at least one first slide member 2720 to run backward. And the impact at the time of contact can be suppressed.

  In the second embodiment, the case where the detection device 2716 detects the position and speed of the pair of second slide members 740 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a pair of detection devices 2716 may be provided corresponding to the pair of second slide members 740, respectively. In this case, the position and speed of the other second slide member 740 can be detected regardless of the arrangement of the one second slide member 740.

  In the second embodiment, the case where the detection device 2716 is disposed on the base member 2710 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the detection device 2716 may be disposed on at least one of the pair of second slide members 740. In this case, the relative speed of the pair of second slide members 740 can be detected.

<Regarding the first control processing example>
Next, a first control processing example in the control processing of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (start winning), the first special symbol or the second special symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a trigger. Is displayed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Note that the 3rd symbol is displayed in common with the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol. In addition, the second special symbol is configured to be displayed in a variable manner in preference to the first special symbol, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not displayed in a variable manner at the same time. Has been.

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not displayed in a variable manner at the same time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be displayed in a variable manner at the same time. It is good also as a possible structure. With such a configuration, more lottery games can be executed in the same time, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of an 8-inch size liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 to be described later. Is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays on the first symbol display device 37. Corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like. The display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described. The third symbol is composed of ten kinds of main symbols consisting of numbers from “0” to “9”.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of special symbols performed by the main controller 110 described later is a big win, the variation display in which the same main symbols are arranged is performed, and the variation display is performed. It is configured to generate a jackpot after it is over. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is performed.

  In the display area of the third symbol display device 81, a symbol row having three main symbols is displayed. In each symbol row, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each symbol row, main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of numbers, and each symbol row is scrolled from the top to the bottom with periodicity to perform variable display. The symbol sequence is displayed as a left symbol sequence displayed on the left side of the display area, a middle symbol sequence displayed on the right side of the left symbol sequence, and a right symbol sequence displayed on the right side of the middle symbol sequence.

  In addition, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row. The middle part of the third symbol is set as the effective line L1, and in each game, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1 in the order of left symbol column → right symbol column → middle symbol column. If the combination of jackpot symbols (the same main symbol combination in this embodiment) is arranged on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

  On the other hand, below the display area of the third symbol display device 81, the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls that have not been executed (holding balls) among the balls that have entered the first winning opening 64, is a holding ball. One “black circle” identification symbol (holding symbol) is displayed for one and notified to the player. The player can discriminate the current number of reserved balls from the number of the reserved symbols.

  In the display area of the third symbol display device 81, in addition to the third symbol and the reserved symbol, a character symbol, a character, or the like is displayed as a notice display mode displayed during the variable display (dynamic display) of the third symbol. Is done. When a game is not performed for a predetermined period, a standby display image such as a model name of the pachinko machine 10 and a digest in a reach display mode is displayed.

  When a ball enters the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 while the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), the number of times the ball is entered is The number of held balls is held up to four times, and the number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, and the reserved symbol is also displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the present embodiment, it is configured that the balls entered into the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 are each held up to four times, but the maximum number of held balls is limited to four times. It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Moreover, it replaces with the display of the number of reservation balls in small area Ds1, and the aspect which changes the number of reservation balls by a part in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, or the area divided into four by the number of reservation balls (For example, the color or lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps that are lit.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  In main controller 110, special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting on first symbol display device 37, display setting on second symbol display device 83, and display setting on third symbol display device 81 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 52, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, etc., are a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. For example, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is used.

  In order to select a special symbol lottery and the first symbol random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol lottery for setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 The first per-type counter C2 used for the selection, the stop-type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-service stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first per-random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is an execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 63), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 72). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. In the RAM 203, a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and a second winning port 640 corresponding to winning in the first winning port 64 composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). And a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to winning a prize, and in each of these areas, the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640 is synchronized with the timing of entering the ball. Each value of the random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the normal start ports (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first per-random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 for a counter that can take a value of 0 to 299). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 72).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640. Are stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. The random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol is set by a first random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number counter C1. A special symbol jackpot is determined when the value matches a random jackpot value set by the random number table per hit. The first random number table is used for a low probability of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state), and at a high probability (a special symbol) that has a higher probability of being a special symbol jackpot than the low probability. The period of a high probability state) is divided into two types, and the number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability. Note that the first per-random number table (not shown) for a special symbol with a high probability and the first per-random number table (not shown) for a special symbol with a low probability are stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. Is provided.

  Here, the first random number table 202a will be described. The first winning random number table 202a is a table in which random numbers (determination values) determined to be winning in each gaming state in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol are set. Specifically, when the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state, in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the value of the obtained first random number counter C1 is any of “0-9” If it is determined that there is any of “0-9”, it is determined that it is a big hit. Further, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, it is determined whether the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 is “9”, and if it is “9”, it is determined that it is a big hit.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol 1 in the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first winning port 64. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203a.

  Here, if the value of the first per random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, If the random number is off, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is that when the special symbol is off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed in 37 is that of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In the first per random number counter C1, there is one random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol at the low probability of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the random value “9” is as described above. It is stored in the first per random number table 202a for low probability. In this way, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 1 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1/300”.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are 10 random numbers that are jackpots of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the value “0-9” is the first random number for the high probability. It is stored in the table 202a. Thus, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 10 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1/30”.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. In the first hit type counter C2, the big hit type when the random value is any one of “0 to 49” is “big hit A”. The jackpot type when the random value is any of “50 to 99” is “jackpot B”. In the present embodiment, the number of jackpots is two. However, the present invention is not limited to this. One type may be used, or two or more types may be provided. Also, different jackpot types may be selected for the first special symbol and the second special symbol even if they are the same value of the first hit type counter C2. By configuring in this way, for example, by setting a jackpot type that is executed with a larger number of rounds when a big hit is made with the second special symbol, the player with the second special symbol can be more successful It can be expected. Therefore, hitting in the high-probability gaming state can be made more advantageous to the player, and the game preference in the high-probability state can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to make the player strongly think that the player wants to shift to the high probability state, and the game can be performed for a longer time.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A rough display mode such as so-called short-time deviation, long-term deviation, normal reach, and super reach is determined by the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode. The The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 72) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. Note that a variation pattern table (see FIG. 55A) that stores a random value that determines one variation time of symbol variation from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random number value) is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. Is provided.

  In the variation pattern selection table 202b, for example, “out (for long time)”, “out (for short time)”, “out normal reach”, and “out super reach” are specified as variation patterns for out. As a variation pattern of jackpot A, various types of “normal reach” and “super reach” are defined. Then, a variation pattern is selected from the various variation patterns defined in the variation pattern table according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot). Although illustration is omitted, the variation pattern selection table 222a is also set in the audio lamp control device 113, and more detailed variation corresponding to the type of variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is provided. The pattern content is selected from the variation pattern selection table 222a.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is periodically updated, for example, every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63), and the ball has passed through the right or left normal starting port (through gate) 67. Is detected and stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

  The value of the random number that is a normal symbol is set by the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 53A) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4. If the value matches the value of the winning random number set by the second winning random number table 202c, it is determined that the winning symbol is a normal symbol (second symbol). Further, the second random number table 202c is used for a normal symbol at a low probability (period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state) and at a high probability (ordinary symbol) at which the probability of hitting the normal symbol is higher than the low probability. And the number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each are set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

  FIG. 53A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the second random number table 202c described above. In the second per random number table 202c, there are 24 random number values that are hit by the normal symbol when the normal symbol has a low probability, and the range is “5 to 28”. These random number values are stored in the second per-random number table 202C for low probability. Thus, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 24 among the total number of random number values, and therefore the probability of jacking a special symbol is “1/10”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes the normal starting port 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 changes the normal symbol. The display is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the second prize opening 640 is opened for “0.2 seconds × one time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is at a low probability of the normal symbol, the second winning port 640 is opened “only once for 0.2 seconds” when the normal symbol is hit. The opening time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are jackpots of the normal symbol, and the range is “5-204”. These random number values are stored in the second per-random number table 202C for high probability. Thus, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 200 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes the normal start port 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 changes the normal symbol. The display is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the second winning opening 640 is opened “for 1 second × 2 times”. As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variation display time becomes “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the normal symbol having a low probability, and the release period of the second prize opening 640 is further reduced. However, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times” becomes very long, so that the ball can easily enter the first winning opening 64. Note that a table (not shown) storing random number values for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit from the value (random number value) of the second hit random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the second winning opening 640 is opened “only once per second × 2” when the normal symbol is hit. The number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 3 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 72).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 52, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 52, the RAM 203 stores a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. There is a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 72), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 71) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 15) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  As shown in FIG. 53 (c), the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, Special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, normal symbol held ball number counter 203f, probability variation flag 203g, probability variation setting flag 203h, probability variation passing counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, action counter 203k, notification counter 203m, remaining ball timer flag 203n, It has a remaining ball timer 203o, a probability variation valid flag 203p, a probability variation valid timer 203r, a discharge number counter 203s, an hour / medium counter 203t, and other memory areas 203z.

  As shown in FIG. 52, the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Each value of the first per-random number counter C1 and the first per-type counter C2 acquired based on winning in the first winning port 64 is stored.

  More specifically, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 (start winning prize), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (area to reserved fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the special controller lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery of a special symbol is performed.

  Note that when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a only in that the counter value acquired for winning in the second winning port 640 is stored, respectively. Since the configuration is the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c includes one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). ). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal starting port 67 on either the left or right side, and the acquired data is stored in four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth). Among the vacant areas, the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as with the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data corresponding to winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for the normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery for a normal symbol is performed.

  Note that when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the winnings stored in the other reserved areas are the same as in the case of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Is shifted to the reserved area with the area number 1 smaller. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third symbol) of the first special symbol (first symbol) which is performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the winning (start winning) at the first winning opening 64. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the symbol display device 81 up to four times. The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero, and every time a ball enters the first winning port 64 and the number of held balls in variable display increases, the maximum value 4 is increased to 1. They are added (see S404 in FIG. 66). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time a special symbol variation display is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 64).

  The value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the special symbol 1 held ball number command (S211 in FIG. 64, FIG. 66). (See S405). The special symbol 1 reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 changes the value held in the main controller 110 by a special symbol 1 hold ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is changed. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of reserved balls in the display itself. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is the actual changed display held ball held in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next-holding ball number command received.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and each time the number of held balls changes, the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls (holding symbol) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in that the number of reserved balls held in the second winning opening 640 is stored with respect to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. Therefore, detailed description thereof is omitted. When the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is changed, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by a special symbol 2 reserved ball number command.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f has a maximum of four held symbols (the number of waiting times) of the variable symbol display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the normal start port 67. It is a counter that counts up to once. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f has an initial value set to zero, and is incremented by 1 to a maximum value of 4 each time the ball passes through the normal starting port 67 and the number of held balls for variable display increases. (See S704 in FIG. 69). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 every time a variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 68).

  If the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is less than 4 when the ball passes through the normal starting port 67 on either the left or right side, the second random number counter C4 Is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S705 in FIG. 69). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4 when the ball passes through the normal starting port 67 on either the left or right side, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c ( S703 in FIG. 69: No).

  The probability change flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the current game state is a probability change game state (probability change game state). When the probability change flag 203g is set to ON, it indicates that the game state is a probability change game state, and when it is OFF, it indicates that the game state is a low probability game state (including a short-time game state). In the present embodiment, the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON when a probability variation setting flag 203h, which will be described later, is set to ON when the jackpot game ends (see S1213 in FIG. 75). On the other hand, when the jackpot game is started, it is set to off. In the initialized state, it is set to OFF, and when a normal power failure occurs, the state immediately before the power failure is backed up.

  The probability change setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the game state to the probability change game state after the big hit game. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is set to the probability change game state is determined by whether or not the game ball has passed through the probability change switch 65e3 (see FIG. 51A) during the big hit game. Here, when the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1242 in FIG. 77). On the other hand, the probability variation flag 203h is set to OFF based on the probability variation flag 203g being set to ON (S1213 in FIG. 75). The probability variation setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). In the initialized state, it is set to off.

  If the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the probability variation switch 65e3 has passed before the power is turned off. It is also possible to configure such that 203h is officially set to ON and returned. In this case, it can be determined whether or not the probability variation switch 65e3 has passed before the power is turned off based on whether or not a probability variation passage counter 203i described later is a value greater than zero. By configuring in this way, it is possible to discriminate fraud such as rewriting only the probability change setting flag 203h and turning on the power again in a state where the power is turned off, and reducing damage on the amusement store side. it can.

  The probability variation passing counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the probability variation switch 65e3 in one round during the jackpot game (13 rounds in the jackpot A in this embodiment). Note that it is possible to determine whether or not all game balls won in the first variable winning device 65 have been discharged based on the sum of the probability variation passing counter 203i and a discharge number counter 203s described later. The probability variation passage counter 203i is incremented by one and updated when the probability variation switch 65e3 is passed (S1241 in FIG. 77). In addition, after the process of determining whether the number of game balls won in the first variable winning device 65 matches the number of discharged balls, the initial value is reset to “0” (S1271 in FIG. 78). The probability variation passage counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The winning number counter 203j indicates the number of game balls won in the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game (that is, the number of game balls entered in the first variable winning device 65). It is a counter for counting. Specifically, one is added and updated based on the detection that the game ball has passed through the detection port 65a1 (see FIG. 49) provided in the first variable winning device 65 (FIG. 77). S1233). On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of winning (the value of the winning number counter 203j) and the number of discharged (the total value of the discharging number counter 203s and the probability variation passing counter 203i) are awarded to the first variable winning device 65. Are matched (S1267 in FIG. 78), then the initial value is reset to “0”. The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The operation counter 203k is a counter for counting (counting) the time for which the flow path solenoid (probability changing solenoid) 65k is set to ON (excitation). In the pachinko machine 10, in the big hit A, the flow passage solenoid 65k is set on for 5 seconds based on the start of the 13th round, and in the big hit B, the flow passage solenoid 65k is turned on for 0.5 seconds based on the start of the 13th round. Is set. In the big hit A, a counter value corresponding to 5 seconds is set as start data for 13 rounds in the jackpot A, and a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set in the jackpot B (S1202 in FIG. 74). On the other hand, 1 is subtracted and updated in the process of S1239 of the winning process (FIG. 77, S1112) executed by the MPU 2011 of the main controller 110. Further, when the value of the operation counter 203k is determined to be 0 (S1243: Yes in FIG. 77), the flow path solenoid 65k is set to OFF. The operation counter 203k is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to an initial value of 0 in the initialized state. In this way, by setting the operation counter 203k and controlling the flow path solenoid 65k, the winning to the probability variation switch 65e3 can be controlled according to the jackpot type.

  The notification counter 203m is a counter for discriminating the timing of outputting a notification effect for attracting the player's attention (in this embodiment, a voice “watching the liquid crystal”). In the present embodiment, the notification counter 203m corresponding to 1 second is set at the end timing of the 12th round (10 ball winnings in the first variable winning device 65 or 30 seconds have passed). This notification counter 203m is decremented by 1 and updated by the processing of S1224 of the notification processing (FIG. 76, S1111) of the main controller 110. A notification command that is output to the sound lamp control device 113 is set based on the notification counter 203m becoming zero. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives this command, the above-described processing for outputting the voice is executed.

  With this configuration, since the sound “Look at the liquid crystal” is output before the 13th round when the flow path solenoid 65k is operated, the player can display the third symbol display device corresponding to the liquid crystal. Look at 81. Here, although details will be described later, in the 12th round of the jackpot game, the third symbol display device 81 displays a girl character as shown in FIG. 60 (b), and the third symbol display device 81 Is displayed as a notice that prompts the player to watch the game. In the thirteenth round, the flow path solenoid 65k is operated, and if the operation is watched by the player, the type of jackpot being executed is determined by the operation period of the flow path solenoid 65k. In order to keep the player having the expectation that the probable game state will be given until the end of the jackpot game, a notification that makes it difficult for the player to see the movement of the switching member 65h (see FIG. 51A) Production is being performed. However, when the twelfth round is over, the player may watch the switching member 65h during the interval display, so that the third symbol display device 81 is informed by voice during the interval period. The notification effect is performed. Thereby, after an interval effect is performed, a player's attention can be attracted to the displayed display content, and a player's attention can be diverted from operation | movement of the switching member 65h.

  In the present embodiment, it is configured to distract the player's attention from the switching member 65h by informing the user to show the 3rd symbol display device 81. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may alert | report so that the movement of the switching member 65h may be hidden by a player's hand by alert | reporting so that a player's hand may be held over the variable prize-winning apparatus 65. FIG. Moreover, not only the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 but you may comprise so that a player may be distracted by alert | reporting so that a decoration lamp 34 etc. may be seen to a player. Furthermore, it may be configured to distract the player's attention by displaying a three-dimensional code or the like during 12 rounds and informing the user to read it with a mobile phone. In the present embodiment, the effect that diverts attention is set to the longest time (5 seconds from the start of the 13th round) until the operation of the switching member 65h ends. Thereby, the malfunction which discriminate | determines whether it is jackpot A or jackpot B by alerting | reporting time can be suppressed.

  The remaining ball timer flag 203n is a flag indicating that the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is closed in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, it indicates that the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is set from the open state to the closed state in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, a remaining ball timer 203o described later is added and updated by 1 (see S1264 in FIG. 78). The remaining ball timer 203o is a counter for determining the time since the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed, and determines whether the time required for the game ball in the first variable winning device 65 to be discharged has elapsed. It is a counter for doing.

  The remaining ball timer 203o discharges the game ball won in the first variable winning device 65 when one preset round ends and the open / close door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is closed. It is a counter for determining whether the time necessary for the elapse of time. In the present embodiment, the time required until the game ball won in the first variable winning device 81 is discharged is 2 seconds. In this embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 3 seconds is set in advance in the remaining ball timer 203o. It is set as the upper limit. Based on the fact that the remaining ball timer 203o has reached the upper limit value (3 seconds in the present embodiment), it is determined whether the number of winnings to the first variable winning device 65 matches the number of dischargings. (S1267 in FIG. 78). If they do not match, an error command is set and a notification to that effect is given. Therefore, it can be notified at an early stage that game balls are jammed in the first variable winning device 65. Therefore, the game ball is illegally left in the first variable winning device 65, the impact is given at the start timing of the 13th round, the game ball is reached to the switching member 65h earlier than the actual, and the big hit B Even if it exists, it is possible to suppress the injustice to allow the game ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3.

  If the winning number and the discharging number do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON. If the flag is ON, the probability change setting flag 203h is set even if the game ball passes the probability change switch 65e3. You may make it the structure which is not set to ON. By comprising in this way, it can suppress that a probability variation | change game state is provided illegally.

  The probability variation valid flag 203p is a flag for determining whether or not the passage is valid when the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 after the passage solenoid 65k is set to OFF. When the probability variation valid flag 203p is set to ON, the game ball that has flowed into the special discharge port 65e2 (see FIG. 51A) based on the flow passage solenoid 65k being turned on is the probability variation switch 65e3. Indicates that it is less than the time required to pass through. That is, the period during which the probability variation valid flag 203p is on indicates that it is normal for the game ball to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3.

  The probability variation valid timer 203r is a counter for counting the time after the probability variation valid flag 203p described above is set to ON. After the flow rate solenoid 65k is turned off by the probability variation valid timer 203r, it is possible to determine (measure) a period required to normally pass the probability variation switch 65e3. In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball entering the special discharge port 65e2 to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is 1 second. The upper limit value of the probability variation valid timer 203r is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds. Thereafter, even if the probability variation switch 65e3 passes, it is determined to be illegal and not determined to be passed.

  Thereby, in a state where the switching member 65h is not guided to the special discharge port 65e2, the game ball is illegally entered into the special discharge port 65e2 and passed through the probability variation switch 65e3, or a game is played with a piano wire or the like from below the probability variation switch 65e3. It is possible to suppress damage caused by fraud in which a sphere is pushed up and passed, or a magnetic sensor is erroneously detected as passing by radio waves or the like.

  The discharge number counter 203s is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (see FIG. 51A) in one round. The discharged number counter 203s is reset to 0, which is an initial value, after the number of game balls won in the first variable winning device 65 and the number of discharged balls are determined (S1271 in FIG. 78).

  The short / medium counter 203t is a counter for counting the number of times the remaining special symbols fluctuate in the short / short game state. At this time, the short / medium counter 203t is set to 100 when the probability variation setting flag is OFF at the end of the big hit game. That is, in this embodiment, when the probability change gaming state is not set after the jackpot game, the game mode is shifted to the short-time gaming state 100 times.

  In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, a counter, a flag, and the like are set (stored).

  Returning to FIG. 4, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 70) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super-reach is performed. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the type of the error. To device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  As shown in FIG. 54A, the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222a, a long press effect lottery table 222b, and other various data and programs necessary for game control. Yes.

  In the variation pattern selection table 222a, variation patterns of variation pattern types (out of reach, out of reach, various types of reach, etc.) are set as counter values for variation pattern selection (not shown). The sound lamp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the determination result, and the acquired counter value for selection. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 113 can select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly observing rough information such as variation time and variation pattern type. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variation display mode and the like from being frequently displayed, and to suppress a problem that the player gets bored early.

  The long push effect lottery table 222b is a frame button 22 in the case where an SW variation pattern in which a display mode that changes the display mode by pressing the frame button 22 is selected as one of the variation patterns described later. It is a selection table for selecting the alerting | reporting aspect which alert | reports the operation timing of this. FIG. 55B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the long press effect lottery table 222b. In the long press effect lottery table 222b, a notification mode type of an operation method related to a long press operation in which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed for a predetermined period or longer is set as the long press navigation type. Three types of long press navigation A, long press navigation B, and long press navigation C are set as the long press navigation type.

  Here, each long-press navigation type will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 62. FIGS. 61A to 61B are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of the long press navigation B. FIG. When the SW variation pattern is selected and the long press effect B is selected, as shown in FIG. 61 (a), the characters “Let's get a big hit with a long press!” Are displayed, and the player presses the long press. By executing this, a notification mode that expects a jackpot to be awarded is notified.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 61 (a), the third symbol display device 81 displays the characters “Predict the start timing of long press within the period meter!”, And the color changes with time from the left to the right. An indicator that changes in order in the direction is displayed. By this notification, the player starts pressing the frame button 22 at an arbitrary timing until the correct long press start period is predicted and all the colors of the indicators change. When the pressing of the frame button 22 is started, as shown in FIG. 61 (b), the timing for releasing the long press (timing for releasing the pressing of the frame button 22) is notified. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 61 (b), the characters “Separate with count 0!” Are displayed, and below that, an indicator whose color changes in order from the left to the right is displayed. At the upper right corner of the indicator, the characters “3, 2, 1, 0, release!” Are displayed, and when the color of the indicator changes to just below the character “0”, the frame button 22 is pressed. You are navigating to unlock. In this case, the frame button 22 may be released at the timing when the countdown is displayed in characters and the character “release!” Is displayed.

  As described above, in the notification mode of the long press navigation B, the timing of the start of the long press is made to be predicted by the player, and the timing of releasing the long press is clearly notified, thereby configuring the navigation with a medium difficulty level. doing.

  When the long press start timing coincides with the start timing set in advance by the SW fluctuation pattern, the player is notified that the result of the determination is a big hit. Thereby, the player can know that it is a big hit early.

  FIG. 62A is a diagram showing a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the long press navigation A is selected. In the notification mode of long press navigation A, the player expects that the 3rd symbol display device 81 will display the letter “Get a big hit at the long press timing!” And give the jackpot at the long press timing. The notification mode to be displayed is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 62 (a), after the indicator is displayed and long-pressed for an arbitrary period while the color of the indicator is variable, the length previously set for an arbitrary period of the player is set. The text “Let the long press period!” Prompting you to apply the press period is displayed.

  Thus, the long press navigation A is a notification mode in which the player must predict both the long press start timing and the long press release timing, and is configured in the navigation notification mode with the highest difficulty. ing.

  FIG. 62B is a diagram showing a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the long press navigation C is selected. When the long press navigation C is selected, as shown in FIG. 62 (b), the characters “Get a big hit in the specified long press period!” Are displayed, and the long press is performed at the specified timing and period. A notification that prompts the player to execute is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 62 (b), an indicator is displayed, and characters “start” and “end” are displayed below the indicator, and the color of the indicator is changed until the start. The start and release of the long press at the timing of “end” is notified.

  As described above, the long-press navigation C is the navigation content having the lowest difficulty among the long-press navigation types, and is a notification mode that is selected only when the determination result is a big hit as will be described later. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (b), in the long-press effect lottery table 222b, a value of an effect counter 223f (range 0 to 198) to be described later is set for each long-press navigation type according to the determination result. Yes. When the determination result is a win, it is set so that the long-pressed navigation type having a lower difficulty level is easier to select than when it is a miss. Thereby, it can comprise so that the expectation to jackpot may be changed with the long press navigation type displayed. Moreover, it can be made to feel whether or not the jackpot is given depending on the player's operation method, and the player can be provided with a fresh game.

  In the case where the long press operation is not executed even after a predetermined period of time, the long press effect may be terminated in the middle and switched to a predetermined main symbol variation effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to entertain the game even for a player who does not operate the frame button 22.

  With reference to FIG. 54B, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. As shown in FIG. 54 (b), the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 has a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, a variation start flag 223d, A stop type selection flag 223e, an effect counter 223f, a long press flag 223g, a long press counter 223h, a SW valid time storage area 223i, and other memory areas 223z are provided.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. Based on the information stored in this winning information storage area 223a, the voice lamp control device 113 can discriminate the lottery result of the reserved ball before the start of the fluctuation.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). ), And a counter that counts up to four times the number of suspended balls (the number of standby times) of the fluctuating effects held in the main controller 110. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of held balls based on the held ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b holds the reserved ball of the first special symbol. Manage numbers.

  Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of held balls in the variable display is added by entering the first winning opening 64, or the main control device 110 executes the variable display in the special symbol and holds it. When the number of balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball number command, It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1408 in FIG. 25). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 retained ball number counter 223b in accordance with the retained ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so that the special symbol 1 retained ball of the main controller 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203d.

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, and the special symbol 1 held ball number after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223b, a display holding ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. Image drawing is controlled so that several symbols are displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball numbers displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed in synchronization with the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c stores the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol with respect to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b based on the reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The variation start flag 223d is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1602 in FIG. 81), and is turned off when variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1702 in FIG. 82). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1605 in FIG. 81), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1706 in FIG. 82). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot).

  The effect counter 223f is a counter used for the notice effect and various lotteries. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0-198. Although not shown, it is updated by one each time the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

  The long press flag 223g is a flag indicating that the frame button 22 has been pressed for 3 seconds or longer. The time during which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed is counted by a long press counter 223h described later, and this long press flag 223g is set to ON when the count value is equal to or greater than the count value indicating 3 seconds. .

  The long press counter 223h is a counter for counting the time during which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed. In this embodiment, it is determined that an operation different from the state in which the frame button 22 is pressed in a normal short time is executed as a long press when the frame button 22 is continuously pressed for 3 seconds or longer (S1810 in FIG. 83). ) Is configured as follows. It is possible to determine whether or not the long press is executed by the long press counter 223h.

  The SW valid time storage area 223i is a storage area for storing a period during which the frame button 22 is determined to be valid. In the present embodiment, when the variation pattern selected by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is the SW variation pattern described above, it is determined that the frame button 22 set in the variation pattern is off. The period (time) set to OFF when the button 22 is enabled (S1807: No in FIG. 83) is set in the SW effective time storage area 23i as the SW effective time. When the SW effective time is set in the SW effective time storage area 223i, the SW effective time is subtracted and updated by 1 based on the elapse of the SW effective time (see S1806 in FIG. 83).

  In addition, the RAM 223 includes a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 81) of the sound lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area. The command is analyzed and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation of the third symbol (variation). Effect) and notice effect. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 70).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

<Electric Configuration of Display Control Device in First Control Example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 56 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is a different model that has different lottery probabilities for special symbol jackpots or different number of prize balls to be paid out for one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common part to reduce costs.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to receive a system reset from the power supply device 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time for the data to be output. Further, when reading non-continuous data, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory is slow in reading, if the MPU 231 directly reads out the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read out the instructions constituting the control program. May occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data is read and written at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after canceling the system reset, and transfers a control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, Transfer to normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234. Most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81 are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where a lot of image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. Thus, the control program and fixed value data are provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Are output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or defective data blocks in which data cannot be written are generated. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known so that data is read from and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs data address conversion.

  The ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  In addition, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b is for one page including data corresponding to the designated address (for example, 2 kilobytes). It is determined whether or not the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Thereby, for example, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other A process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading out the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR type ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. The MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, the display control device 114 can be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a for the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  In this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after canceling the system reset in the boot program are obtained from the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing is in the following reason. In other words, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time for data to be output after the address is specified when reading the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out data for one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time from reading to setting to the buffer RAM 234c. It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR-type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d in the boot program. Thus, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately loads the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, and can activate the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program other than the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 stores fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, in the first program storage area 234d1. While using a bank different from the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as “0000H”. In response to this, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time related to the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the first predetermined storage area 233a. Set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. The remaining boot program included in the control program is executed.

  In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) that are used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S2002 in FIG. 84) executed after the end of the boot process (see S2001 in FIG. 84) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read out the control program from the work RAM constituted by the DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. Accordingly, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released without storing the entire boot program in the NOR-type ROM 234d. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d. Can do.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 59) to be described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c to be described later The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame on the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 86B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for the image for the next one frame, and also executes a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image previously developed by the drawing.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates an increase in the capacity of the ROM, while the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. The time required for the readout can be omitted, and the image drawn can be immediately displayed and the image drawn on the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 resident image data of frequently displayed images or image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the image is drawn using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. Therefore, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above, and it is possible to omit the time required for the reading. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 includes a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes that is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  In the image data transfer instruction that the MPU 231 performs to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data to be transferred is used. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) An address is included. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads out data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. The process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

  Thus, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can do. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being in time.

  In addition, since the image controller 237 transfers image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The period that is not used for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This area stores the corresponding data. In addition, in the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball entering the first winning port 64 is detected. In this case, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image for displaying the lottery result performed in the main controller 110 by the variation effect is stored.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S2003 and S2004 in FIG. 84).

  The fluctuation image at power-on will be described. The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image in the third symbol display device. 81 (display of “◯” and “×” on the third symbol display device 81).

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 that is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 displays the power-on main image. On the display screen of, the fluctuation image at power-on of the “○” symbol at the lower right position toward the screen and the fluctuation image at power-on of the “×” symbol at the same position as the “○” symbol. It is displayed repeatedly alternately. Then, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110. The result is judged. If it is “special symbol jackpot”, the image is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped, and if it is “out of special effect”, the image is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw main image when power is turned on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall related person can confirm the main image at the time of power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Can do.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. In addition, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234.

  In addition, when the player starts playing while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64, the fluctuation image area at the time of power-on The MPU 231 causes the image controller 237 to draw a power-on variation image using image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in 235 b and alternately display the images on the third symbol display device 81. Instructed. Thereby, a simple variation effect can be performed using the variation image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  Further, when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the varying effect image at power-on is already resident in the power-on varying image area 235b. When a ball is detected in the first entrance sphere 64 while the hour main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 56, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols, which are numbered from “0” to “9” as the third symbol, are resident. As a result, when changing effects are performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Fluctuation production can be started quickly. Therefore, the variation effect is not immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37 after the first winning opening 64 is entered. The occurrence of such a state can be suppressed.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as “boy” are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character design area 235e, so that display control is performed. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but reads it into the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading the image data resident in advance. Thereby, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display controller 114 is notified by an error command. Further, when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When receiving an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player's fraud and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 performs the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. This eliminates the need to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

  The MPU 231 transmits image data required for subsequent image drawing out of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the sub-areas provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area designated in the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list (to be described later) in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for expanding an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby storing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer is read, and the third symbol display device 81 is read together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 simultaneously develops an image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers. The first frame image developed from the other frame buffer can be read out, and the read one frame image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 include an image drawing process for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 designates one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c alternately.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing a control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233j and a drawing target buffer flag 233k.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main controller 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfer data table that defines transfer timing among image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and are in accordance with a boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. Display data tables corresponding to ending effects and demonstration effects are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When a display variation pattern command is received, a display stop type command indicating a variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when a variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot A, a jackpot B If it is any of these, the stop symbol which shows each jackpot will be stop-displayed finally. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  By notifying the short time period of the normal symbol in the ending effect, the player can easily recognize the short time period of the normal symbol. The longer the short time period of this normal symbol, the greater the chance that the ball will pass through the second entrance 67, so there will be more opportunities for the normal symbol to be drawn, and there will be more opportunities to hit the normal symbol. Become. Therefore, since there are many opportunities for the electric symbol to be released as a big bonus for the normal symbol, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640 and the special symbol lottery is easily performed. Therefore, the longer the short time period of the displayed normal symbol, the stronger the expectation that a special symbol will be a big hit, and it can be given to the player, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased it can. Therefore, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  Further, since the first winning opening 64 is a winning opening from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball enters, the electric symbol is released as a big bonus of the normal symbol, and the ball becomes the second winning opening. As it becomes easier to enter 640, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where the number of possessed balls is difficult to decrease or the number of possessed balls is not decreased even when a game is performed. You can get a feeling of a period that you can get a big jackpot of special symbols in the absence. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can have the willingness to participate in the game continuously.

  Also, in the ending effect, by notifying that one of the lottery results of the reserved special symbol will be a big win of the special symbol, the player can make a special symbol in the special symbol lottery that is on hold. Therefore, the player can have a sense of expectation that a special symbol will be a big hit. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can be continuously given willingness to participate in the game.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect associated with the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that no game is being played in the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. Further, the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effects, has 32 tables in total for one variation effect pattern, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) is represented as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81 such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. If the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Light in the image. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information Since it is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table. This back surface type indicates whether to display any of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (any one of the “city stage”, “empty stage”, and “island stage”), or the back surface A to C. Information specifying whether to display a back image different from C is described. The back surface type also includes information specifying which back image to display when specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A to C is displayed.

  When the MPU 231 specifies that any one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed with respect to the frame is specified as time elapses. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

  In this embodiment, the case where only the back surface type is specified as the rendering content of the back image in the display data table will be described, but instead, the back surface type and which range of the back image corresponding to the back surface type Position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from the start of image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started.

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 according to the rear surface type). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) This is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes depending on the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from when the change is started until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each 3rd symbol, the 3rd symbol is displayed as a variation symbol in the previous variation effect or a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. It is possible to identify the third symbol to be displayed easily from the offset information by managing the offset information with the number attached to the symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the digits attached to each third symbol.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is changed to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently performed. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variably displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the symbol of the change effect that was performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently being performed, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the discontinuity of the number continuity be able to.

  “0000H”, which is the top address of the display data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, and the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 57) contains the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the rendering contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 59) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is required for starting up and executing a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason that the pachinko machine 10 can create is that an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance is determined based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table, Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

  If all the sprite image data used in the production defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) to be transferred at the time indicated by the address. (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 58 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to be transferred corresponding to the address. Is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 15).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored. Is included.

  Note that “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, as in the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 15, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 59) described later is created. In addition, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 58, when the pointer 233f is “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information defined by the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. In addition to the drawing list, the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the sprite image data used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and transfers image data to be transferred that should start transfer at the time indicated by the address corresponding to the address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, a variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) on the third symbol display device 81. This simple image display flag 233c is displayed after image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. The main process (see FIG. 84) executed by the MPU 231 is set to ON (see S2005 in FIG. 84). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S2305 in FIG. 86 (b)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2301 in FIG. 86B). When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S2308 in FIG. 86 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 86) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 86 (b) S2309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is OFF, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 87 to 90) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 91 to 93) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3301 in FIG. 94A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, a resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 94B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 95) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. After selecting, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 59) described later describing the image drawing instruction content for the is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image to the image controller 237 is displayed frame by frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 59), which will be described later, describing the drawing instruction content is generated. Thereby, the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of image data to be transferred specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a drawing list (see FIG. 59), which will be described later, with the image drawing instruction content for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is for designating. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image rendering process for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 86 (b)). ), The pointer update process (see S3005 in FIG. 93) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the drawing list to be described later (See FIG. 59), and from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired, and the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 that is used in the above drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 59, a back image to be used for an image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 1). Symbol (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, Reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error For each sprite (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In the drawing list, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described.

  Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value According to the α blending information, synthesis processing with other sprites, color tone correction processing according to the color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of the other image to be drawn (for example, the holding ball number symbol for displaying the holding ball number symbol). Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame based on images and warning images that notify the occurrence of errors. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 corresponds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the order of the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and displays detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of characters (character 1, character 2,..., Retained ball number design 1, retained ball number design 2,..., Error design).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  In addition, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (the character storing the transfer target image data). The storage source head address and the storage source last address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production effect time displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing and display processes for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process (FIG. 86 (b) Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S3007 in FIG. 91). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, respectively. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is generated by an initial setting process (see S2002 in FIG. 84) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233j generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 95) executed by the MPU 231. Is called. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite in which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite are always in an unstored state by storing the image data of one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3517 in FIG. 46). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S3518 in FIG. 95). Then, the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information on the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3602 in FIG. 96).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing processing, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the rendering target buffer flag 233k, that is, when the value is “0”, it is set to “1”, and when it is “1”, it is set to “0”. Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The drawing list is transmitted by a V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 86B) is executed (see S3602 in FIG. 96).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

<Control processing executed by main controller 110 in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 63 to 78. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is periodically started (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4, and these counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, When it reaches 299, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the third symbol variation pattern and the like by the third symbol display device 81 is executed in addition to the processing for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B (S104). Thereafter, a start winning process is performed in accordance with winning (start winning) at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process is executed, a normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106). A gate passing process is executed (S107). Details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69. After executing the through gate passing process, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. This is a process for determining on / off of firing. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display or the third symbol performed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol and the like performed on the display device 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, Includes during the predetermined time after the end of the symbol jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If the special symbol is not big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S202), and the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. If the aspect is not changing (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number N2 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S204).

  If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S205), and is changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command (special figure 2 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 72) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted values in the RAM 223. They are stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, respectively.

  After the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After the data is shifted, a special symbol variation start process for starting variation display is executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B (S213). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. Is obtained (S208). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S209). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted (S210) and is changed by calculation. Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set (S211). After the special figure 1 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). Thereafter, the process of S213 is executed.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S202: Yes), has the change time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B elapsed? It is determined whether or not (S214). The variation display variation time executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command). If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S214: No), this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has passed in the process of S214 (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set (S215). . The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start processing is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Is called. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1, and if the special symbol is a big hit, the value depends on the value of the first hit type counter C2. It is determined whether it is a big hit A, a small hit, or a miss.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, a blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, when it is a small hit, the red LED is turned on, and when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  After the process of S215 is completed, the special symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is started. Is determined to be a special symbol jackpot (S216). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S216: Yes), based on the jackpot type, a specific winning mouth opening scenario is set (S217), and then the jackpot A start setting (16 rounds, etc.) is set. Jackpot setting) is executed (S218).

On the other hand, in the process of S216, if the current lottery result is off (S216: No),
It is determined whether or not the value of the hour / middle counter 203t is 1 or more (S220). When it is determined that the value of the hour / midtime counter 203t is 0 (S220: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hour / minute counter 203t is 1 or more (S220: Yes), the value of the hour / hour counter 203t is decremented by 1 (S221).

  Next, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol fluctuation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol fluctuation process (see FIG. 64) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63). Based on the values of the various counters stored in the common execution area with the symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a lottery (decision of success / failure) of “special symbol jackpot” or “exclusion of special symbol” is performed. This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed by the symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special symbol variation start process, first, the first per-random number counter C1 and the first per-type counter C2 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Each value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the stop type counter CN1 is acquired (S301). Next, it is determined whether the probability change flag 203g of the RAM 203 is on (S302).

  When the probability variation flag 203g is on (S302: Yes), the special symbol jackpot is determined based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. Whether or not the lottery result is obtained from the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 53B) (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with 10 random values set in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 53B). As described above, 10 random numbers that are big wins of special symbols are set to “0-9”, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number that hits them. When it does, it determines with it being a jackpot of the special symbol. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same determination value determined to be a big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this, and different random values may be used. By comprising in this way, it is comprised so that the random number value determined to be off in the 1st special symbol may be determined to be a win in the 2nd special symbol, and the big hit bias can be suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the number of jackpot random numbers is set to be the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The number of random values to be set may be set differently. By configuring in this way, the probability of jackpots can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol with the higher jackpot probability, the player Can give you the expectation of jackpot.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when the hour / minute counter 203g is 0 (S302: No), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (low probability gaming state) of the special symbol, the first acquired in the process of S301. Based on the value of the winning random number counter C1 and the first winning random number table 202a for low probability (see FIG. 53B), a lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a big win is obtained (S304). Specifically, the value of the first per-random number counter C1 is compared with one random number value stored in the first per-random number table 202a for low probability. As the random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol, one of “9” is set, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number value that hits this match, the special symbol jackpot It is determined that If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  Then, it is determined whether the special symbol lottery result acquired by the process of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305). A display mode for jackpot time indicating jackpot A is set (S306).

  In the process of S306, the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A). In addition, the jackpot type is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Next, based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, the variation pattern at the big hit is determined from the variation pattern selection table 202b (see FIG. 55A) (S307).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S305 that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of removal corresponding to the special symbol is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set according to the determined deviation. Next, a variation pattern at the time of detachment is determined based on the current number of reserved balls (S309). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Although illustration is omitted, a fluctuation pattern command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of each decided fluctuation pattern is generated. When this process ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, start winning information processing (S105) will be described. First, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 63), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (start winning) in the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640, and the starting winning is determined. Is a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing a hold process for the values.

  When the start winning process (FIG. 66, S105) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first winning port 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  Then, there is no winning in the first winning opening 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is less than 4. If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 holding ball. The value (N1) of the number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 72) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the pending ball number command by the process of S405, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203. Is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, in the processing from S407 to S412, the same processing is executed for the winning of the second winning opening 640 with respect to the processing from S401 to S406. The second winning symbol 640 is different from the winning in the second special symbol only in that the holding process is executed, and the other processes are the same, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted. When it is determined in the process of S407 that the ball has not won the second winning opening (S407: No), a pre-read process is executed after the process of S412 (S413). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Next, referring to FIG. 67, the pre-reading process (S413), which is one process in the start winning process (see S105 of FIG. 66) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing this prefetch process (S413).

  In this prefetching process (FIG. 67, S413), first, it is determined whether or not there is a new winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S501). As a result of the determination, when there is no new winning in the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 (S501; No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when there is a new winning at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 (S501: Yes), it is determined whether or not the gaming state at the start of the change is a certain change (S502), and the gaming state If it is certain (S502: Yes), the lottery result is acquired based on the first per-random number table 202a for high probability (S503), and the process proceeds to S505. In the process of S502, if the gaming state is not certain (S502: No), the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table 202a for the low probability (S504), and the process proceeds to S505. In the process of S505, a winning information command including the jackpot determination result executed in the processes of S503 and S504 is set (S505), and this process is terminated.

  Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 63), and the second symbol variation display performed in the second symbol display device and the electric role associated with the second winning opening 640 are displayed. This is a process for controlling the opening time of an object.

  In this normal symbol variation process (FIG. 68, S106), it is first determined whether or not the present symbol is being hit by the normal symbol (second symbol) (S601). As for the normal symbol (second symbol) being hit, the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the first winning port 64 is performed while the winning symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device. In the middle. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S601: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device If the display mode is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time state of a normal symbol (S608).

  When the pachinko machine 10 is in the short time state of the normal symbol (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a big hit with the special symbol (S609). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, Includes during the predetermined time after the end of the symbol jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611.

  In the process of S609, if the special symbol jackpot is not being hit (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not hitting the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time state of a normal symbol, so it is acquired in the process of S607. Based on the value of the second per random number counter C4 and the second per random symbol table 202c for high probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 205-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 53 (a)).

  In the process of S608, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the short time state of the normal symbol (S608: No), the process proceeds to S611. In the process of S611, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607 is low. Based on the second random number table 202c for probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is won is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second per-random number table 202c for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-28”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 29-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 53 (a)).

  Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is a normal symbol win (S612). If it is determined that the normal symbol wins (S612: Yes) The display mode for winning is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-short state (S614). Is determined (S615). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In the present embodiment, during the jackpot of the special symbol, in order to suppress the ball from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible, even when it hits the normal symbol, it is the same as the case where it is out of the normal symbol The number of opening times and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a are set.

  In the process of S615, if the special symbol jackpot is not being hit (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not hitting the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the short-time state of the normal symbol, so the second prize opening 640 Is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the short time state of the normal symbol (S614: No), the process proceeds to S617. In the process of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is set to 0. In addition to setting for 2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S612, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (S612: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of removal is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S619, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-short state (S619). If the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-short state (S619: Yes), the variable display on the second symbol display device is displayed. Is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the normal symbol time-short state (S619: No), the variation display variation time in the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this process is terminated. In this way, except for the big hit of the special symbol, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of the variable display becomes “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, Since the release period of the second winning opening 640 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to easily enter the second winning hole 640.

  In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device has passed ( S622). The variation time here is a time preset by the processing of S620 or the processing of S621 before the variable display is started in the second symbol display device.

  If the variation time has not elapsed in the process of S622 (S622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the process of S622 (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S623). In the process of S623, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the symbol “◯” as the second symbol is displayed in the stop display (lighted display) on the second symbol display device. ). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S618, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device. Is set as follows. When the stop display is set by the process of S623, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 72) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished. Then, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the processing of S613 or S618.

  Next, the normal symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process (FIG. 68, S106) when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device is started is the normal symbol. It is determined whether or not it is a win (S624). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is set (S625), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S625, the opening / closing of the electric accessory is performed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 72) is executed next. The control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S616 or the process of S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63), and it is determined whether or not a sphere has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, and there has been a sphere passing. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passing process (FIG. 69, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the sphere has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the sphere at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S703).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol retention ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 203f is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is used as the first of the free reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. (S705), and this process ends. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off was not completed normally, the process proceeds to S912 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S912. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1014 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S912). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S913, S914) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( (S907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S910, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As its outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process (see FIG. 72), first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is sent to the sub-side. External output processing to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 63) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired Send a prize ball command. Further, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 64) or the start winning process (see FIG. 66) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 73) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003). The jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the 1 variable winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning slot 65a. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In this embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 72), but may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 62).

  Next, an electrical accessory opening / closing process for performing opening / closing control of the electrical accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 68), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

  Next, the 1st symbol display update process which updates the display of 1st symbol display apparatus 37A, 37B is performed (S1006). In the first symbol display update processing, when a variation pattern is set by the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 65), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Start in devices 37A, 37B. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, for example, if the currently lit LED is red until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, the red LED If the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is lit. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned on. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the processing of S307 and S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 65) is completed, the first symbol display device 37A, The variation display being executed in 37B is ended, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed in the first symbol display device 37A in the display mode set by the processes of S306 and S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 65). , 37B are stopped (lighted).

  Next, the 2nd symbol display update process which updates the display of a 2nd symbol display apparatus is performed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 68) or the process of S621, the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. To do. Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display apparatus, the variable display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a 2nd symbol alternately is performed. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the processing of S623 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 68), the variation being executed in the second symbol display device. The display is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device (lighted display) in the display mode set by the processing of S613 or the processing of S618 of the normal symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 68). )

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008). If no occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1009). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the processes after S1001 described above are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1009: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process execution timing. The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1011).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly performing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the processing of S1008, if the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 70 has been executed, the power-off process after S1012 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1014), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1008 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1007 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. The process can be started from S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case where the initialization is performed in the startup process. Therefore, in the processing at the time of power shutdown, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved. By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1001. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 72). When the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot or a specific prize This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (large opening mouth) 65a.

  In the jackpot control process (FIG. 73, S1004), it is first determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is started (S1101). Specifically, if the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 64) S218 or S220 is executed and the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. When the special symbol jackpot is started in the processing of S1101 (S1101: Yes), an opening command is set (S1102), and this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol jackpot is not started in the processing of S1101 (S1101: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is being hit (S1103). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1103, if the special symbol is not big hit (S1103: No), this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1103 that the special symbol is a big hit (S1103: Yes), the process of S1104 is executed. In the process of S1104, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1104). In the process of S1104, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1104: Yes), a jackpot operation setting process is executed (S1105).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 74, the jackpot operation setting process will be described (S1105). FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot operation setting process (S1105). In the jackpot operation setting process (FIG. 74, S1105), first, an opening operation corresponding to the number of jackpot rounds to be started is read from the set opening scenario (S1201). The opening operation of the flow path solenoid (probability changing solenoid) 65k is set based on the data read in S1201 (S1202). The opening operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is set by the data read in the processing of S1201. Thereafter, this process is terminated. In the processing of S1202, the operation of the flow path solenoid 65k and the operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 are set for each round.

  In this way, each operation of the first variable prize winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, so even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game ends in the middle Such problems can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 73, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S1104 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1104: No), it is determined whether it is the operation timing of the open / close door 65f1 and the flow path solenoid (probability changing solenoid) 65k (S1106). When it is determined that it is the operation timing (S1106: Yes), the open solenoid 65f2 is set to ON (S1107). Thereafter, the flow path solenoid (probability changing solenoid) 65k is set to ON (S1108). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1106 that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S1106: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1109). The start timing of the ending effect is the end timing of the ending effect when the 15th round is completed and the open / close door 65f1 is closed and a waiting time (3 seconds in the present embodiment) that is a ball thrown time has elapsed. It is determined as If it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: Yes), an ending process is executed (S1110). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Here, the details of the ending process (S1110) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the contents of this ending process (FIG. 75, S1110). In the ending process (FIG. 75, S1110), first, an ending command indicating the start of ending is set in the sound lamp control device 113 (S1211). It is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1212). The probability variation flag 203g is set to ON (S1213). Although not shown, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to be off based on the probability variation flag 203g being turned on. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Thus, in this embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, it is determined whether or not the probability variation setting flag 203h is on, and if it is on, the probability variation flag 203g is set on. Therefore, at the end of the big hit game, it is possible to determine whether or not the game ball is passing the probability variation switch 65e3, and to set the probability variation. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player expecting to shift to the probable gaming state until the big hit game ends. Further, if the game ball can be passed through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, the probability change game state is given after the jackpot game. You can play games with interest.

  Returning to FIG. 73, the description will be continued. In the process of S1109, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: No), a notification process is executed (S1111). Here, the details of the notification process (S1111) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the contents of the notification process (S1111).

  In the notification process (S1111), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the notification counter 203m is greater than 0 (S1221). When it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1221: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the 12th round (S1222). The determination of the end timing of the 12th round is performed when it is detected that 10 balls have been won in the 12th round or when it is determined that 30 seconds have elapsed. When it is determined that it is the end timing of the 12th round (S1222: Yes), a counter value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the notification counter 203m. Thereafter, this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1222, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the 12th round (S1222: No), this process is ended. Here, by setting the 2-second counter in S1223, the notification counter 203m is set to 0 during 3 seconds of the interval time which is the ball throwing time after the 12th round is finished, and the sound of watching the liquid crystal is heard. Is output. Therefore, although the flow path solenoid 65k operates in the 13th round, the player is attracted attention to the liquid crystal from the interval time after the end of the 12th round, so that the movement of the switching member 65h of the first variable winning device 65 is identified. Thus, the player can be prevented from identifying the jackpot type. Therefore, the player can play the game with the expectation that the probability variation game state is given until the end of the jackpot game.

  In the present embodiment, by providing the notification counter 203m, an effect of attracting attention to the liquid crystal is performed across the 13th round from 1 second before the end of the interval time. It may be executed continuously.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1221 that the value of the notification counter 203m is greater than 0 (S1221: Yes), the value of the notification counter 203m is decremented by -1 and updated (S1224). It is determined whether the value of the updated notification counter 203m is 0 (S1225). When it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1225: Yes), a notification command is set (S1226). Thereafter, this process is terminated. In response to this notification command, the sound lamp control device 113 executes the sound output setting “Look at the liquid crystal”.

  Returning to FIG. 73, the description will be continued. When the notification process (FIG. 76, S1111) is executed, a winning process is executed (S1112). Here, with reference to FIG. 77, the winning process (S1112) will be described in detail. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning process (S1112).

  In the winning process (FIG. 77, S1112), first, it is determined whether or not it is a round effective period (S1231). The round effective period is a period during which a round game is set, that is, a period from the open state of the open door 65f1 to the end of the interval period (3 seconds). If it is determined that it is outside the round effective period (S1231: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is within the round effective period (S1231: Yes), it is determined whether or not the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has been passed. When it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has been passed (S1232: Yes), the winning number counter 203j is incremented by 1 and updated (S1233). Thereafter, the process of S1234 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 has not been passed (S1232: No), the process of S1234 is executed.

  In the processing of S1234, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1234). If it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1234: Yes), the opening / closing door 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is set to be closed (S1236). Thereafter, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON (S1237). Thereafter, the process of S1238 is executed. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203n to be on, it can be determined that the ball is being thrown away after the opening / closing door 203n is closed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1234, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is less than 10, it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed (S1235). If it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S1235: Yes), the process of S1236 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1235: No), the process of S1238 is executed.

  In the processing of S1238, it is determined whether or not the value of the operation counter 203k is greater than 0 (S1238). When it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203k is greater than 0 (S1238: Yes), the value of the operation counter 203k is decremented by 1 and updated (S1239). It is determined whether the game ball has passed through the probability change switch 65e3 (S1240). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the probability variation passing switch 65e3 (S1240: Yes), the value of the probability variation passing counter 203i is incremented by 1 and updated (S1241). The probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1242). Thereafter, the process of S1243 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S1240, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the probability change switch 65e3 (S1240: No), the process of S1243 is executed. In the process of S1243, it is determined whether or not the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1243). If it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to OFF (S1244). The probability variation valid flag 203p is set to ON (S1245). Thereafter, this process is terminated. Here, when the probability variation valid flag 203p is set to ON, if the game ball remaining in the special flow path 65e2 passes the probability variation switch 65e3 even after the switching member 65h is switched, the probability variation game Can be controlled to be set.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1238, when it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1238: No), it is determined whether the probability variation valid flag 203p is on (S1246). If the probability variation valid flag 203p is off (S1246: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability variation valid flag 203p is on (S1246: Yes), the probability variation valid timer 203r is incremented by 1 and updated (S1247). It is determined whether the value of the probability variation valid timer is the upper limit value (1.2 s in the present embodiment) (S1248). If it is determined that the probability variation valid timer 203r is the upper limit value (S1248: Yes), the probability variation valid flag 203p is set to off (S1249). The probability variation valid timer 203r is reset to 0 which is an initial value. Thereafter, this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1248, when it is determined that the probability variation valid timer 203r is not the upper limit value (S1248: No), the process of S1240 is executed.

  Thus, if the probability variation valid timer 203r is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the probability variation switch 65e3, so that the probability variation gaming state can be set in consideration of the ball removal time. In addition, since there is an upper limit for the time that is determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the probability variation gaming state from being imparted by illegally passing the game ball through the probability variation switch 65e3.

  Returning to FIG. 73, the description will be continued. When the winning process (FIG. 77, S1112) is executed, an abnormal process is executed (S1113). Thereafter, this process is terminated. Here, the details of this abnormality process (S1113) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the contents of the abnormality process (S1113). In the abnormality process (S1113), a process for monitoring whether the probability variation switch 65e3 is illegally passed is executed.

  In the abnormality process (FIG. 78, S1113), first, it is determined whether it is a round effective period (S1261). If it is outside the round valid period (S1261: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is within the round effective period (S1261: Yes), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the ball outlet switch 65e4 (S1262). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (S1262: Yes), the value of the ball discharge number counter 203s is incremented by 1 and updated (S1263). Thereafter, the process of S1264 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the ball outlet switch 65e4 (S1262: No), the process of S1264 is executed.

  In the process of S1264, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1264). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is off (S1264: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1264: Yes), the remaining ball timer 203o is incremented by one and updated (S1265) because it is during the ball throwing time period. The remaining ball timer 203o determines whether or not the upper limit value (3 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed (S1266). If it is determined that the value is not the upper limit value (S1266: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value is the upper limit value (S1266: Yes), the number of discharges (total value of the probability variation passage counter 203i and the discharge number counter 203s) and the number of winning (value of the winning number counter 203j) match. Is determined (S1267).

  If it is determined that they match (S1267: Yes), the process of S1269 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (S1267: No), an error command is set (S1268). Thereafter, the process of S1269 is executed. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, displaying a character of the winning number mismatch error) is performed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the illegal act of allowing the game ball to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 even if the game ball is illegally left in the first variable winning device 65 and the jackpot B.

  In the process of S1269, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to OFF (S1269), and the remaining ball timer 203o is reset to 0, which is an initial value (S1270). Thereafter, the winning number counter 203j, the discharging number counter 203s, and the probability variation passing counter 203i are respectively reset to initial values (S1271), and then this process ends.

<Control processing executed by the sound lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 79 to 83, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1401). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing in S1514 (see FIG. 80) is performed due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “instantaneous power failure”). ) Is determined during execution (S1402). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 80, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1513 in FIG. 80), it executes a power-off process in S1514. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1514 is being executed can be determined based on the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1402: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off process in S1514 It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1403).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1406. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1403: Yes), the process proceeds to S1404, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1403: No), the process proceeds to S1408.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1403: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1404. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S1516, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. If it is started, the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223. Therefore, the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1403: No), and the process proceeds to S1408.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1402: Yes), the current ramp-up process is performed after an instantaneous power failure and during the execution of the power-off process in S1516, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1404, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1404, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1404). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1405: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1406). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1405: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1407), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the process of S1408, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1408). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S1516 is executed (see S1515 in FIG. 80). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S1516 is executed, the current start-up process is instantaneous because the power-off flag is turned on. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1516 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1408: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1409), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1410), and an interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S1411), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the process of S1408 is reached after the power-off flag is turned off because the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, for example, through the processes of S1404 to S1406. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1408: No), S1409, which is the work area clear process of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1410, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1410), and interrupt permission is set. In step S1411, the process proceeds to the main process.

  Note that the reason for skipping the clear process of S1409 is that when the process from S1404 to S1406 is reached via the process of S1406, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1404. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the current process of S1501 was executed (S1501). If not (S1501: No), the process proceeds to S1512 without performing the processes in S1502 to S1510. In S1501, it is determined whether 1 msec has passed or not, because S1502 to S1510 are mainly processes related to display (effects), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the variable display setting process of S1512 and the command determination process of S1511 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1511 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception of a command transmitted from the main control device 110 from being missed. By executing the processing of S1512 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the changing effect without delay.

  If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the process of S1501 (S1501: Yes), first, various commands for the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1503 to S1512 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 (S1502). ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1508 described later are set (S1503), and then the power-on notification processing is executed (S1504). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 so that it may alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1505 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the processing of S1505, a customer waiting effect processing is executed, and then a hold number display update processing is executed (S1506). In the customer waiting effect process, when a predetermined period of time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. Sent to device 114. In the number-of-holds display update process, a process for turning on a hold lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 1 number-of-holds ball counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1507). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set to the display control device 114. Details of this frame button input monitoring / effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, a lamp editing process is executed (S1508), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S1509). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1509, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1510). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S1508 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing of S1509 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  After the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S1511). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the process proceeds to S1512. In the process of S1512, a variable display setting process is executed (S1512). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of the change display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the variable display setting process is completed, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1513). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1513 (S1513: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S1515), and the power interruption processing is executed (S1516). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1517), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the occurrence information of power interruption is not stored in the process of S1513 (S1513: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1514), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1514: No), the process returns to S1501, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1514: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, a command determination process (S1511) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1511). This command determination processing (S1511) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. . Further, in this process, when the reserved ball number command is received from the main control device 110, the third symbol display device 81 also determines to start the continuous notice effect.

  In the command determination processing (FIG. 81, S1511), first, the first command received from the main control device 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the main control device 110. It is further determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (S1601). When the variation pattern command is received (S1601: Yes), the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1602), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1603). Return to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 82) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and its variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, if the variation pattern command has not been received (S1601: No), it is then determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1604). When the stop type command is received (S1604: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1605), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1606). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 82) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1604: No), it is then determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1607). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S1607: Yes), it is determined whether the received reserved ball number command is the special figure 1 reserved ball number command or the special figure 2 reserved ball number command. The value included in the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is extracted, and the special symbol 2 of the main controller 110 is extracted. The value of the reserved ball number counter 203e (the number N2 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1608). In the processing of S1608, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the updated values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c to the display control device 114 is set. After the process of S1608 ends, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, the special figure 1 reserved ball number command or the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is executed when the ball wins (start winning prize) at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640, or a special symbol is drawn. Is transmitted from the main control device 110 when it is released, so that every time a start winning is detected or a special symbol lottery is performed, the special symbol 1 holding ball of the voice lamp control device 113 is processed by the processing of S1608. The values of the number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c can be matched with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol of the main controller 110. The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 at the time of detection of the start winning or the special symbol lottery even if the value deviates from the value of the 2 reserved ball number counter 203e. To the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. When the processing of S1608 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the updated values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c to the display control device 114 is displayed. Is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the processing of S1607, when the pending ball number command has not been received (S1607: No), it is then determined whether a notification command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1609). When it is determined that the notification command has been received (S1609: Yes), the notification voice corresponding to the received command (in this embodiment, “see the liquid crystal”) is selected, and the display command for notification is set. (S1610).

  Next, in the processing of S1609, when it is determined that a notification command has not been received (S1609: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and processing according to the received command is executed. The process returns to the main process (S1619). If the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set so as to be transmitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 82, the variable display setting process (S1512) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the change display setting process (S1512). This variable display setting process (S1512) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and in order to execute a variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S1701). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1701: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to S1706. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S1701: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S1702), and then the fluctuation pattern is determined in the process of S1603 of the command determination process (see FIG. 81). The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1703).

  Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a variation pattern command for display for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S1704). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  In the processing of S1705, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1705). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S1705: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, so this change display The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S1705: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S1706), and then in the process of S1606 of the command determination process (see FIG. 81), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1707). The stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1708), and the process proceeds to S1709. In the processing of S1709, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S1709). . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the frame button input monitoring / production process (S1507) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing this frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1507). This frame button input monitoring / production process (S1507) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and enhances the production effect in the third symbol display device 81. In order to cause the player to perform an effect according to the player's operation, a display command is generated and set based on the operation of the frame button 22.

  In the frame button input monitoring / effect process (FIG. 83, S1507), first, it is determined whether or not a long press effect variation pattern has been started (S1801). If it is determined that the long press effect variation pattern has not been started (S1801: No), the process proceeds to S1805. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern of the long press effect has been started (S1801: Yes), an effect counter is acquired (S1802), and the long press effect lottery table 222b (see FIG. 55B) is pressed long. A navigation pattern is selected (S1803). Next, the display command indicating the selected long press pattern is set (S1804), and the process proceeds to S1805.

  In the process of S1805, it is determined whether or not the SW valid time in the SW valid time storage area 223i is greater than 0 (S1805). If it is determined that the SW valid time is 0 (S1805: No), the frame button input monitoring / effect process (FIG. 83, S1507) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 80). On the other hand, if it is determined that the SW effective time is greater than 0 (S1805: Yes), the SW effective time is subtracted (S1806), and it is determined whether or not the frame button is on (S1807). Here, the subtraction of the SW valid time is to subtract the elapsed time (in this embodiment, 1 is subtracted from the counter value).

  When it is determined that the frame button 22 is on (the frame button 22 is pressed), 1 is added to the long press counter 223h (S1808), and it is determined whether or not the long press flag 223g is on ( S1809). If it is determined that the long press flag 223g is on (S1809: Yes), the frame button input monitoring / effect process ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the long press flag 223g is off (S1809: No), it is determined whether or not the long press counter 223h is 3 seconds or more (S1810).

  If it is not determined that the long press counter 223h is 3 seconds or longer (S1810: No), this process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the long press counter 223h is 3 seconds or more (S1810: Yes), the long press flag 223g is turned on (S1811), and a display command indicating that the long press is being performed is set (S1812). Return to the main process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1807 that the frame button 22 is off (the frame button 22 is not pressed) (S1807: No), it is determined whether the long press counter 223h is 3 seconds or more ( S1813). When it is determined that the value of the long press counter 223h is 3 seconds or more (S1813: Yes), a display command indicating long press off is set (S1814), and the process proceeds to S1815. On the other hand, if it is not determined that the long press counter 223h is longer than 3 seconds (S1813: No), the process of S1814 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1815. In the process of S1815, the long press counter 223h is reset (the counter value is set to 0 in this embodiment) (S1815), and then the long press flag 223g is set to OFF (S1816), and the process returns to the main process.

<Control processing executed by display control device in first control processing example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 84 to 96, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. The MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and one frame worth from the image controller 237. There is a V-interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  Specifically, the main process is activated according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” according to its hardware configuration. The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all the boot programs processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it from the reading to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. A lot of waiting time will be consumed. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR ROM 234d in the boot program. Since the memory can read data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S2001), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. Start up.

  Here, the boot process (S2001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S2001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area, so that not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when random access is performed. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d after the system reset is released is read according to the boot program set in the buffer RAM 234c. Among the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2301). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2302). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2101.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing in S2102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S2302, subsequently, the instruction pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S2303). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-described various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S2304), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot process (see S2001 in FIG. 84). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S2002 in FIG. 84) (S2305), the boot program execution is completed and the boot process ends.

  As described above, when the boot process (S2001) is executed, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. To execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect section.

  On the other hand, not all boot programs are stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND-type flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d. Can do.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 85, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2101 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2101 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S2102 It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be performed. Then, the processing of S2103 to S2105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred by the processing of S2101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S2101. The processing of S2103 to S2105 may be executed after repeating a plurality of times including the processing of S2102.

  Thus, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  In the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. One program storage area 234d1 may be stored. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S2103 to S2105 without performing the processes of S2101 and S2102. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Returning to the description of FIG. When the boot process ends, an initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 is checked by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the start can be normally started.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S2003). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, transfer end information indicating the end of transfer is stored in a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided in the image controller 237. You may make it write. The MPU 231 reads information in this register or a partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detects that transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has been completed by detecting writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S2003, the power-on variation image is then displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2004). In this transfer instruction, the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image, the data size of the image data, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), , The start address of the power-on variation image area 235b as the transfer destination is included, and the image controller receives image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the fluctuation image area 235b at power-on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S2004, then, the simple image display flag 233c. Is turned on (S2005). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 94A) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 so as to transfer is executed (see S3302 in FIG. 94A).

  The simple image display flag 233c is used to transfer all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is finished. Thereby, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 86 (b)), the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image (not shown), which are images at power-on, are drawn. Command determination processing (see S2308 in FIG. 86 (b)) and simple display setting processing (see S2309 in FIG. 86 (b)) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is caused by the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The main image can be confirmed. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball entry (start winning) into the first winning opening 64, and an instruction to start the changing effect is sent from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device. 113, that is, when a display variation pattern command is received, a variation image at power-on (not shown) is immediately displayed during the variation rendering period to perform a simple variation rendering. Can do. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, and therefore, it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is displayed when the power is turned on also becomes longer. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after power failure Even immediately after the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the process of S2005, interrupt permission is set (S2006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Thereby, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read by a command determination process or a simple command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 86 (b), the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 86 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. A list (see FIG. 59) is created, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237, thereby instructing the image controller 237 to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described first, and then the details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 86 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on. If it is off (S2301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so it is not a power-on image (not shown) but a normal effect. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S2302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S2302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, the process corresponding to the command is executed, the display demo command, When the display variation pattern command is stored, a display data table for demonstration or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of a variation effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the variation effect mode and stop type selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of this command interrupt processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S2303), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2302) or the like. The contents of are specifically identified. Further, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is then executed (S2304). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2303) or the simple display setting process (S2309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be performed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S2305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. In addition, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the normal controller for the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 and receiving a continuous notice command or a back image change command from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice image used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 94 and 95.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S2506). In this drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2304), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S2305) are used. 59 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S2307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. When reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear out, reach out, chance The stop type table corresponding to the eye) is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the change effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2301: Yes), this means that transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display a power-on image (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81, a simple command determination process (S2308) is executed, and then a simple display setting process (S2309) is executed, Transition to processing.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 87 to 89, details of the above-described command determination process (S2302) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the command determination process.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 87, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2401). If there is no unprocessed new command (S2401: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2402), and then the command The command types of all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed (S2403).

  First, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S2404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2405), the process returns to S2401.

  Details of the variation pattern command process (S2405) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 88A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command process. This variation pattern command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S2501).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S2501, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a change effect having a change time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as shown in the present embodiment, by setting the display data table buffer 233d with the display data table buffer 233d corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time, the change is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variable effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variable effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 performs the next display. Since the display setting process controls the display of the 3rd symbol display device 81 so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the 3rd symbol display device 81 without any discomfort. You can continue to see changes in the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2502). Of the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of S2501 is turned on, and other variations The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to OFF (S2503). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2503, it is easy to determine which fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. Judgment can be made.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S2504), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2505). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S2506), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S2505 is updated, while the change display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2501 is updated. The drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted, the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 are specified, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S2502. The transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in (2), and the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the normal video R from the character ROM 234. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the processing of S2504, and the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 87. If it is determined in step S2404 that there is no display variation pattern command (S2404: No), it is then determined whether there is a display stop type command among unprocessed commands (S2406). If there is a display variation type command (S2406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S2407), and the processing returns to S2401.

  Here, the details of the stop type command process (S2407) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 88 (b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, stop type table corresponding to stop type information (one of big hit A, big hit B, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear out, complete out, chance chance) indicated by the display stop type command. (S2601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 86 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device The stop symbol after the fluctuating effect displayed in 81 is finally set (S2602).

  Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S2602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are turned off. (S2603), the stop type command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S2602 is described. In the task process (S2304) described above, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol set by the process of S2602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S2603, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. Note that the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed. Image data necessary for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a, the drawing responsiveness in the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  In addition, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more display stop type commands stored in the command buffer area, part of the command will change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command will stop display for mistakenly. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2601, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is assumed to be completely out of order, and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment is set by the processing of S2602.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to the “special symbol jackpot” is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually displays “special symbol” even if it is a “special symbol detachment”. The stop symbol corresponding to “Large Bonus” will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a “special symbol jackpot”, possibly reducing the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment, in actuality, if it is a “special symbol jackpot”, the third symbol display device 81 stops completely detachment. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a “special symbol jackpot”, so that the player can be pleased.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 87. If it is determined in the processing of S2406 that there is no display stop type command (S2406: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a back image change command among unprocessed commands (S2408). If there is an image change command (S2408: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S2409), and the process returns to S2401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 89A, details of the rear image change command processing (S2409) will be described. FIG. 89A is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process. This rear image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S3303) of the back image change accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the on state is set to on (S2701). . Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back A to C), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and other back images The rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to OFF (S2702), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set in the process of S2701 is turned on, the changed back image type is specified from the back image discrimination flag set in the process of S2702. . If the specified back image type is back B or back C, a part of the image data corresponding to the back image is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 as described above. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the task processing, when it is specified that any one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type of the back image specified in the display data table, the task image processing is performed based on the back image discrimination flag set in S2702. The rear image type to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified with time, and the RAM type (resident) that stores the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the RAM address.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands will change due to noise and other commands, and another command will change the back image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. In the processing of S2702, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value in the pachinko machine 10, it is preferably set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 87. If it is determined in step S2408 that there is no rear image change command (S2408: No), then it is determined whether there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S2410). If (S2410: Yes), the error command process is executed (S2411), and the process returns to S2401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 89B, details of the error command processing (S2411) will be described. FIG. 89B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S2801). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to OFF (S2802). The process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set in the process of S2801, the error type generated from the error determination flag set in the process of S2802 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S2802, the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a hall-related person can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 87. If it is determined in step S2410 that there is no rear image change command (S2410: No), it is then determined whether there is a command indicating a long press among unprocessed commands (S2412). If there is a command indicating pressing (S2412: Yes), the long press effect process is executed (S2413), and the process returns to S2401. Here, the command indicating long press refers to the display command indicating the long press navigation pattern set in the processing of S1804, the display command indicating that the long press is set in the processing of S1812, and the processing of S1814. This corresponds to the display command indicating long press-off set in.

  Here, the details of the long press effect process (S2413) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing long press effect processing. This long press effect process is to execute a process corresponding to the command indicating the long press received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the long press effect process (FIG. 90, S2413), it is first determined whether the command is a long press navigation effect command (see S1804 in FIG. 83) (S2901). In the process of S2901, if it is determined that the long press navigation effect (S2901: Yes), display data corresponding to the long press navigation is set (S2902), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  On the other hand, when it is not determined to be a long press navigation effect (S2901: No), it is determined whether it is a long press command (see S1812 in FIG. 83) (S2903). If it is determined in the process of S2903 that the command is a long press (S2903: Yes), display data indicating the start of the long press is set (S2904), and the process returns to the command determination process. On the other hand, if it is not determined that the command is a long press (S2903: No), display data corresponding to long press off is set (S2905), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 87. If it is determined in step S2412 that there is no command indicating a long press (S2412: No), processing corresponding to another unprocessed command is executed (S2419), and the process returns to step S2401.

  In the process of S2401, which is executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2401: Yes). ), The processes of S2402 to S2413 and S2419 are executed again. The processes of S2401 to S2413 and S2419 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area. If it is determined in the process of S2401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, The command determination process ends.

  Note that the simple command determination process (S2309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 86B) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, a command necessary for displaying a power-on image (not shown) from unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, a display variation pattern command and a display command Only the stop type command is extracted, the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 88 (a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 88 (b)), which are processes corresponding to each command, are executed, and the others For this command, the process corresponding to the command is discarded without executing the process.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 88A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2501. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on variation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2502, a process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing its contents is performed.

  Next, the details of the display setting process (S2303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 91, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3001). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S3001: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that a new command has not been processed, the process of S3002 to S3004 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3005. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3001: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after setting the new command flag to off (S3002), S3003 to S3004. By this process, the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S3003, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S3003). If the error occurrence flag is on (S3003: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S3004).

  Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S3101).

  In task processing, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the warning image is specified based on the developed warning image data, and the display coordinate position, magnification, and rotation angle are drawn for each sprite. Various parameters are determined.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S3101, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3102), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 91. After the warning image setting process (S3004) or in the process of S3003, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S3003: No), the process proceeds to S3005.

  In S3005, pointer update processing is executed (S3005). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update processing acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process for updating the pointer 233f for designating the power address.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3201). That is, the update process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described in the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is specified after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S3201, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is discriminated (S3202). As a result, if it is End information (S3202: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S3203). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S3203: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S3204), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3205), and this process ends. Return to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3203, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the display data table for demonstration (S3203: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( In step S3206, the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the display data table for demonstration, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which End information is described. Since the drawing contents of the above are always developed, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3202, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3202: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 91, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3006). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing image expanded in the processing of S3006 together with the previously developed warning image and the display coordinate position for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing, such as a zoom ratio, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined.

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the time counter 233h (S3007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3008). When the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S3008: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is equal to or less than 0 (S3008: Yes), it means that the production effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the fixed display flag is on. (S3009).

  As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S3009: Yes), the confirmed display data table has not been performed yet and the confirmed display effect has been performed. Therefore, the confirmed display data table is first stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the contents are cleared by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3011). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3012), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3013). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3014), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3015), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Moreover, the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be easily changed into a fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set to the display data table buffer 233b to a fixed display data table. And, compared with the case where the display contents are changed by starting another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not greatly loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3015 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes depending on the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before. In the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect performed one time before is described until a predetermined time elapses from the start. In the task process (S2304), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set in S3015, and the The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3009, if the confirmation display flag is not on but off (S3009: No), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S3016). If the demo display flag is off (S3016: Yes), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so the display data table for demonstration is displayed as the display data table. The data is set in the buffer 233d (S3017), and then the null data is written into the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3018). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3019). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3020), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3021), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thus, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set.

  In the process of S3016, if the demonstration display flag is on (S3016: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the final display effect is ended, and the demonstration effect is ended. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. In this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  Note that, in the simple display setting process (S2309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 86B), the same process as the display setting process is performed. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image ends, the power-on variation image corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time (Fig. (Not shown) is set in the display data table buffer 233d, which is a display data table that stipulates that display is stopped.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 94 and 95, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. First, FIG. 94A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301: Yes), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S3302), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S3301, that is, if it is off (S3301: No), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3303), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3302), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 94 (b). FIG. 94B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3302).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S3401), and if a transfer instruction is transmitted (S3401: Yes). Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 has ended (S3402). In the process of S3402, when an image data transfer instruction is given to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S3402 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3402: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3402: Yes), the process proceeds to S3403. Also, as a result of the process of S3401, when the transfer instruction of untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3401: No), the process proceeds to S3403.

  In the process of S3403, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3403). A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so that the image data to be transferred resides from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3404), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, transfer data information relating to untransferred resident object image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the head address and final address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident target image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S3403 (S3403: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3405), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 86B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2308 in FIG. 86B) and the simple display setting process (see S2309 in FIG. 86B). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 87 to 89) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 91 to 93) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 has The normal image is displayed. The subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 95) (see S3301: No in FIG. 94A).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 removes all the resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 performs control so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. Thus, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the player can perform various operations performed at an arbitrary timing. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, a normal image transfer setting process (S3303), which is a process of the transfer setting process (S2305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3303).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3005) of the display setting process (S2303) executed earlier is used. Information described in the indicated address is acquired (S3501). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S3502). If it is transfer data information (S3502: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Start address (storage source start address), final address (storage source final address), and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in a transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S3503), a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the on state is set to on (S3504), and the process proceeds to step S3505.

  In the process of S3502, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S3502: No), the processes of S3503 and S3504 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3505. In the processing of S3505, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of image data has been completed (S3505), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3505: Yes), it is further determined whether the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S3506).

  In the process of S3506, when an image data transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S3506 that the transfer process has not ended (S3506: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3506: Yes), the process proceeds to S3507. Also, as a result of the process of S3505, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S3505: No), the process proceeds to S3507.

  In the process of S3507, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3507). If the transfer start flag is on (S3507: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S3508), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3503 is set as the transfer target image data, and the process proceeds to S3517. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3507: No), it is then determined whether or not the back image change flag is on (S3513). If the back image change flag is not on but off (S3513: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S3513: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S3514), the back image provided for each back image type Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as transfer target image data (S3515). Furthermore, the head address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state, and the transfer destination (normally) The top address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S3516), and the process proceeds to S3517.

  When the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and therefore the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. There is no data. Therefore, in the process of S3515, if the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer process is terminated as it is.

  In the process of S3517, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3517). The determination in the process of S3517 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, when the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233j and the storage state is "ON", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the image is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S3517 (S3517: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is finished as it is. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S3517 (S3517: Yes), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3518). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S3518, the stored image data discrimination flag 233j is updated (S3519), and the normal transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “on” and substituting the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, when the normal image transfer process is executed, if the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the back image is displayed. The image data not stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As a result, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can do.

  In the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is determined in accordance with the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the details of the above-described drawing process (S2306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2304) and the parameters (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information required for drawing each sprite) , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer list set by the transfer setting process (S2305), the drawing list shown in FIG. 59 is generated (S3601). That is, in the process of S3601, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2304). The parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite that should be placed on the front side from the sprite that should be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement As a drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing a storage RAM type and address where sprite image data is stored, and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2305), the leading address (storage source leading address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 Depending on the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S3602). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including information for instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Further, when transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the destination address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the source address to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of the normal video RAM 236 being in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the developed image in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed simultaneously in parallel. Can do.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S3602, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated (S3603). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V interrupt signal executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 86B) is executed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for the remaining minutes is read out. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

<Second control example>
Next, a second control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the second control example, the content of the SW variation pattern is changed with respect to the first control example. In the first control example described above, it has been described that the effect of long pressing the frame button 22 is executed in the SW variation pattern, but in the second control example, the effect of catching the fish at the timing of pressing the frame button 22. Is different in that it is executed. Since other configurations are the same, other configurations are omitted.

<Electric Configuration in Second Control Example>
The second control example is different from the first control example in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 are changed. Since the other points are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 97 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example. In the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example, the long press effect lottery table 222b is deleted and a capture effect lottery table 222c is added to the first control example. Since other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The capture effect lottery table 222c is a data table in which the movement direction of the fish and net displayed in the SW variation pattern in the second control example is set. Here, with reference to FIG. 98, an example of a display mode displayed in the SW variation pattern displayed in the second control example will be described. FIGS. 98A and 98B are diagrams showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the SW variation pattern in the second control example. In the second control example, as shown in FIG. 98 (a), fish and nets are displayed, respectively, and the characters “Press the button according to the fish!” Are displayed. A display mode is displayed in which the player can obtain the fish by pressing the frame button 22 at the position where the fish enters the net. In addition, an indicator composed of a plurality of scales is displayed on the right side of the display area, and the color can be changed one by one vertically (for example, from blue to red) at a high speed (for example, a speed of 1 square in 0.5 s). Variable). There are 6 scales, and the letters “GET” are displayed on the 3rd and 6th scales from the bottom. As shown in FIG. 98 (b), when the frame button 22 is pressed in a state where the color of the scale is changed, the display timing is set so that the fish is in the net.

  On the other hand, the fish and the net are controlled to move and display in the moving direction set by the SW effect type selected in the capture effect lottery table 222c. The fish and the net move to irregular positions, but at the timing when the position of the indicator scale “GET” is varied, display control is performed so that the fish is located in the net.

  This makes it easier for the player to understand not only the positional relationship between the fish and the net but also the timing at which the indicator changes, making it easier to understand when to press the frame button 22, and participating in the production of the SW variation pattern. This makes it easier to play games. Therefore, the player can play the game while predicting the timing at which the fish is displayed at the position of the net by the indicator. In the present embodiment, the indicator is always displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the indicator may be displayed when the expectation level of the jackpot is high, and may not be displayed when the expectation level is low. By comprising in this way, the expectation to jackpot can be raised by displaying an indicator, and also the jackpot effect can be performed in a state where the player can catch the fish.

  FIG. 97 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the capture effect lottery table 222c. In the capture effect lottery table 222c, the value of the effect counter 223f is assigned to each of the capture effects D to F when the determination result is correct and the capture effects A to C are assigned. Has been. The capture effects A to C are configured to be able to press the frame button 22 at the timing when the fish is in the net, and are set as effects that can capture the fish. On the other hand, in the capture effects D to F, the timing (period) when the fish enters the net is shorter than the period necessary for detecting that the frame button 22 is pressed and the frame button 22 is pressed. Because it is set, it is set to be impossible to capture.

  Although not shown in the present embodiment, if the result of the determination is wrong, even if the frame button 22 is pressed by chance when the net matches the fish, the display is shifted. In other words, the effect that the fish could be caught is not displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and at the timing when the fish and the net coincide with each other, the control is performed by excluding the frame button 22 from the effective period instantaneously (for example, the matching display period of 0.2 s). It is possible to reduce the load for performing the control of shifting and displaying.

  In the capture effect A and the capture effect D, a display mode is set in which the fish and the net are displayed by moving at high speed to random positions in the horizontal direction. The capture effect B and the capture effect E are display modes in which the fish and the net are displayed by moving to random positions. The capture effects C and F are display forms in which fish and nets are displayed by moving to random positions in an oblique direction.

  As shown in FIG. 97 (c), when the determination result is correct, the capture effect A and the capture effect B are set to be selected more easily than when the capture effect A is out of the range. Therefore, the player can predict the success / failure determination result based on the moving direction of the fish and the net (that is, the type of capture effect). Therefore, the player can be expected to perform the SW variation pattern effect.

  In the present embodiment, the content of the capture effect is determined by lottery based on the selection of the SW variation pattern. However, the SW variation pattern to be selected may be set in advance. . In this control example, the movement direction between the fish and the net is set according to the type of capture effect, but the movement direction is not set in advance, and the display position is updated every time the display position of the fish and the net is updated. May be determined and updated by lottery. In this case, when the display is updated from the display position of the currently displayed fish and net, the moving direction and the moving distance may be determined by lottery and displayed. By configuring in this way, the positions of fish and nets can be made more random, and the player can have a fresh effect.

  Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 97 (b). FIG. 97 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example. The second control example is different from the RAM 223 (see FIG. 54B) of the first control example in that the long press flag 223g and the long press counter 223h are deleted. Since other configurations are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

<Control processing in the second control example>
In the control processing in the second control example, the contents of the control processing in the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are changed with respect to the first control example. Since other processes are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, a control process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. The second control example is different from the first control example in that the frame button input monitoring / effect process (FIG. 83, S1507) is changed to the frame button input monitoring / effect process (FIG. 99, S1520). To do. Since other configurations are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the contents of frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (S1520) in the second control example.

  In the frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (FIG. 99, S1520), it is first determined whether or not a capture effect variation pattern that is a SW variation pattern is selected (S1821). Here, it is determined whether the variation pattern selected based on the variation pattern command output from main controller 110 is the SW variation pattern (capture effect variation pattern). If it is determined that the variation pattern of the capture effect (S1821: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired (S1822). The type of capture effect is selected based on the effect counter 223f that has acquired the content of the capture effect from the capture effect lottery table 222c (see FIG. 97 (c)), and the determination result corresponding to the selected SW variation pattern ( S1823). A display command indicating the selected capture effect is set (S1824). By outputting this display command to the display control device 113, the display mode corresponding to the selected capture effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display control device 114. The SW effective time set in the SW fluctuation pattern is set in the SW effective time storage area 223i (S1825). Thereafter, the process of S1826 is executed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1821 that the change pattern of the capture effect is not selected (S1821: No), the process of S1826 is executed. In the process of S1826, it is determined whether the counter value stored in the SW valid time storage area 223i is a value greater than 0, that is, whether the SW valid time is set (S1826). If it is determined that the SW effective time is set (S1826: Yes), the SW effective time is subtracted (S1827), and it is determined whether the frame button 22 is on (pressed) (S1828). When it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S1828: Yes), a display command indicating that the SW is pressed is set (S1829). The SW valid time is reset to 0 which is an initial value. Thereby, since SW effective time is reset with operation of frame button 22, it can control that a plurality of productions are changed and a player gets confused. On the other hand, when it is determined that the SW valid time is 0 in the process of S1826 (S1826: No) or when it is determined that the frame button 22 is OFF in the process of S1828 (S1828: No), this process is performed. Exit.

  In this control example, in the capture effect, the frame button 22 can be pressed once. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of times may be set.

<Control processing executed by display control device 114 in the second control example>
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 to 103. In the second control example, the command determination process (FIG. 87, S2302) is replaced with the command determination process 2 (FIG. 100, S2320), and the display setting process (FIG. 91, S2303) is the display setting process compared to the first control example. 2 (FIG. 102, S2330). Since the other processes are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 100, the command determination process 2 (FIG. 100, S2320) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the contents of this command determination process 2 (FIG. 100, S2320). In the command determination process 2 (FIG. 100, S2320) in the second control example, the processes of S2412 to S2413 are deleted from the command determination process (FIG. 87, S2302) in the first control example, and the processes of S2414 to S2415 are performed. Is different in that each is added. Since other processes are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  If it is determined in the processing of S2410 that an error command has not been received (S2410: No), it is determined whether a command indicating that it is related to the SW effect is received (S2414). The command related to the SW effect corresponds to a display command indicating the selected capture effect (see S1824 in FIG. 99), a display command indicating SW pressing indicating that the frame button 22 has been pressed, and the like.

  If it is determined in the process of S2414 that a command related to the SW effect is received (S2414: Yes), the SW effect process is executed (S2415). The SW effect process (S2415) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the contents of this SW effect process (S2415). In the SW effect process, a process for setting the corresponding display data and the like is performed based on the SW effect (capture effect) command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and the command indicating that the frame button 22 has been pressed. .

  In the SW effect processing (FIG. 101, S2415), first, it is determined whether the command indicates any of the capture effects A to F that are SW effects (S2911). If the command indicates one of capture effects A to F (S2911: Yes), display data corresponding to the capture effect is set in the display data table. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the command does not indicate any of capture effects A to F in the process of S2911 (S2911: No), it is determined whether the command indicates that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S2913). If it is determined that the command indicates that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S2913: Yes), the content of the displayed capture effect is set to stop (S2914). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  When the frame button 22 is pressed, the position of the capture effect net and fish is fixed at the displayed position, and the SW effective time that is initially set elapses for a certain period (in this control example). Display until the same period). After that, when the fish can be stopped at a position where it is in the net, a display mode (for example, “Get !!”) indicating that the fish has been captured is displayed. On the other hand, when the fish stops at a position other than the position where the fish is in the net, a display mode (for example, “capture failure!”) Indicating that the fish could not be captured is displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the display setting process 2 (S2330) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 102 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the display setting process 2 (S2330). In the display setting process 2 (FIG. 102, S2330) in the second control example, the SW effect display setting process (FIG. 103, S3030) is added to the display setting process (FIG. 91, S2303) in the first control example. Is different. Since other processes are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof is omitted. After the processing of S3005 is executed, SW effect display setting processing is executed (S3030). The SW effect display setting process (S3030) will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the contents of the SW effect display setting process (S3030). In the SW effect display setting process (S3030), first, it is determined whether or not the SW effect (capture effect) is being displayed (S3031). Here, whether the capture effect is being displayed is a period during which the indicator is variably displayed, that is, during the SW effective time, and the indicator before the frame button 22 is pressed is variably displayed at high speed. Indicates whether it is a period.

  If it is determined that the capture effect is not being displayed (S3031: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the capture effect is being displayed (S3031: Yes), the indicator determines whether the scale color corresponding to “Get” is displayed in a variable manner (S3032). If the indicator is displayed with the scale of Get being variably displayed (S3032: Yes), display data in which the display positions of the fish data and the net data are matched is set (S3033). Thereafter, this process is terminated. Here, the display coordinates of the net data are set according to the display coordinates where the fish data is displayed. By comprising in this way, the display position of a fish and a net | network can be matched according to the timing when the scale of Get is changed. In this control example, in the capture effects A to C, the period during which the indicator is displayed on the Get is set to be longer than the period required to press the frame button 22, and the frame button has a good timing. It is set so that fish can be caught if 22 is pressed. On the other hand, in the capture effects D to F, the period during which the indicator is displayed on the Get is set to be shorter than the period required to press the frame button 22, and no matter what timing the frame button 22 is pressed. It is configured so that it cannot be captured.

  In the present embodiment, the captureable state and the uncaptured state are set by varying the time during which the indicator is varied. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in capture effects D to F, the frame button 22 is displayed at the capture timing. When is pressed, the position of the fish and the net may be forcibly shifted and displayed so that they cannot be captured.

  In addition, in this control example, the success of the capture is configured to notify the jackpot of the determination result, but the present invention is not limited to this, and by successful capture, the player can be given points to be used in the game as a game privilege. Alternatively, it may be configured to display a URL for downloading a standby image to be used on a mobile phone, display a three-dimensional code, or set a special background image. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute an effect that captures successfully even when the result of the determination is wrong. Therefore, the player can be more entertained with the SW effect.

  In the processing of S3032, when the indicator is displayed with a variable scale other than the position corresponding to Get (S3032: No), it is determined whether the indicator is at the timing when the next scale is changed and displayed. (S3034). If the indicator determines that it is time to display the next scale in a variable manner (S3034: Yes), the coordinate data for displaying the fish and the coordinate data for displaying the net are respectively selected. The movement direction set in the capture effect is set for each movement (S3035). Here, a predetermined counter (not shown) is acquired and the number of moving coordinates is determined and set by lottery. It is determined whether the updated display coordinates of the fish and the net match (S3036). If it is determined that they match (S3036: Yes), the same processing as S3035 is executed again (S3037). Thereby, when the indicator is not a scale of Get, it is possible to suppress a problem that the display positions of the fish and the net match and the fish is displayed in the net. On the other hand, in the process of S3034, when it is not time to change the indicator scale (S3034: No), or in the process of S3036, it is determined that the position data does not match (S3036: No), this process is terminated. .

  In this way, although the moving direction set in the capture effect is determined, the display position of the fish and the net is set randomly by lottery, so the display of the fish and the net can be made irregular. . On the other hand, the variable indicator is preset in the display data table corresponding to the SW variation pattern. Therefore, the display of the indicator can be configured to be changed regularly.

  In this control example, the display position of the fish and the net is determined by lottery every time the display position is updated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display position is set in advance in the display data table in the same manner as the indicator. May be.

  Further, in this control example, the movement direction of the fish is defined according to the type of capture effect selected, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the position of the fish and the net may be set randomly by lottery. Good.

<Third control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 106. In the first control example, regardless of the game state (probability game state, short-time game state, etc.), the timing at which the special symbol starts to fluctuate when the reserved ball is not stored is configured to be constant. However, the second control example is different in that the process is executed so that the timing of the change start varies depending on the gaming state. Since other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Electric Configuration in Third Control Example>
With reference to FIG. 104, the electrical configuration in the third control example will be described. The third control example is different from the first control example in that the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 113 are changed. Since other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 104 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third control example. In the third control example, a weight counter 203u is added to the RAM 203 (see FIG. 53C) in the first control example. Since other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The weight counter 203u counts a delay time for delaying the variation start timing of the second special symbol when the number of reserved balls is zero when the time is short (when the probability variation game state or the short time game state). It is a counter.

  When it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is zero when the time counter 203u is running short, the counter value corresponding to 1 second is set in the weight counter 203u (S314 in FIG. 106). reference). Further, when the counter value is set in the weight counter 203u, it is decremented by 1 and updated every time the short / middle fluctuation process (FIG. 106, S231) is executed.

  As described above, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is zero during the time reduction, and the variation of the special symbol is not executed, the game ball enters the second winning opening 640 thereafter. Even so, the start of the fluctuation is delayed for one second. Here, the second winning opening 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a, and when the electric accessory 640a is in an open state, a game ball can be easily won in the second winning opening 640. In this case, it becomes easy to win two or more game balls in one open state. However, even if a plurality of game balls enter with one release in a state where the number of holding balls is zero, if the start of the variation of the second special symbol is set immediately at the timing when the first game ball enters. As a result, it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is zero, and a variation pattern having a relatively long variation time is easily selected. As a result, in spite of the shortage of time, the efficiency of the game is deteriorated, making the player uncomfortable.

  However, in the characteristic configuration of this control example, the timing of the start of fluctuation is delayed by 1 second by the weight counter 203u. Therefore, if the electric accessory 640a is opened during that time, a plurality of game balls are continuously connected. In the case of entering the ball, it is possible to suppress a problem that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is determined as zero and the first variation is started.

  In this control example, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is zero in the state where the fluctuation is stopped in a short time, the delay time of 1 second is set. You may comprise so that delay time (for example, 4 second) longer than 3 second which is the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in time reduction may be set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to delay the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol until the timing when the electric accessory 640a is released, and to delay until the timing when the game ball wins the second winning opening 640. . Moreover, you may comprise so that a delay time may be set according to the timing when opening of the electrically-driven accessory 640a is set. In this case, even when the delay time is short, it is possible to suppress the fact that the number of reserved balls is effectively determined as zero and a relatively long variation pattern is selected. Moreover, it is not restricted to the 2nd prize opening 640 not only in time saving.

  In this control example, as shown in FIG. 55A, in the variation pattern selection table 202b, when there are 0 to 2 reserved balls, a relatively long variation pattern is set to be easily selected. Yes. Therefore, it is preferable to set a delay time for delaying to a period in which there are three or more holding balls.

  In this control example, the start of variation of the second special symbol is delayed in the short-time gaming state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability variation gaming state may be used. Alternatively, it may be configured to delay when the number of reserved balls is below a certain value (for example, one). Furthermore, you may comprise so that it may delay not only with a 2nd special symbol but with a 1st special symbol. In addition, by delaying the variation start timing of the second special symbol at the end timing of the jackpot game, it is configured to suppress the problem that the variation starts when it is determined that there is no number of reserved balls of the second special symbol Also good.

  In this control example, the variation start timing is configured to be delayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the fixed time of the special symbol during the variation (the period from when the variation time has elapsed until it is determined that the variation is stopped, In other words, when the symbol is determined to stop and the period from when it is determined that the fluctuation is stopped in the process of S202 of FIG. 64 is set to be variable, and the reserved ball of the second special symbol is not stored. The period may be set longer.

  In addition, in this control example, the delay is made when the time is short. However, when the second special symbol starts to change, the period until the start of change is set each time (the holding ball is discriminated and the start of change is set). It may be configured to set a longer period). Further, when the electric accessory 640a is in an open state regardless of the gaming state, the timing for setting the start of variation of the second special symbol may be delayed.

<Control processing in the third control example>
Next, control processing in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 to 106. The third control example is different from the first control example in that the special symbol variation process (FIG. 64, S104) is changed to the special symbol variation process 2 (FIG. 105, S111). Since other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process 2 (S111) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third control example. In special symbol variation processing 2 (FIG. 105, S111) in the third control example, processes from S231 to S233 are added to the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 64, S104) in the first control example. About other processing, since the same processing as the 1st control example is performed, the detailed explanation is omitted.

  In the process of S202, when it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not changing (S202: No), it is determined whether the time is short (S231). Whether the time is short or not is determined whether the game state is a probability variation gaming state or a short time gaming state. If it is determined that the time is short (S231: Yes), the time-short-time variation process is executed (S232).

  Here, the details of the short / middle fluctuation processing (S232) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the contents of the short / middle fluctuation process (S232). In the short / middle fluctuation process (FIG. 106, S232), first, it is determined whether the weight counter 203u is a value greater than 0 (S311). When the weight counter 203u is a value larger than 0, it is a case where a delay time has already been set at the start of the variation of the second special symbol. If it is determined that the weight counter 203u is greater than 0 (S311: Yes), the value of the weight counter 203u is set by subtracting -1 (S312). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S311 that the weight counter 203u is 0 (S311: No), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, which is the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol, is 0. (S313). If it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0 (S313: Yes), a counter value corresponding to 1 second is set in the weight counter 203u (S314). Thereafter, this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S313, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is not 0 (S313: No), this process ends.

  Here, returning to FIG. 105, the description will be continued. After executing the time-short / medium fluctuation process (FIG. 106, S232), the process of S233 is executed. In the process of S233, it is determined whether the weight counter 203u is a value greater than 0 (S233). If the counter value is set in the weight counter 203u, this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the weight counter 203u is 0 (S233: No), the process of S203 is executed.

  In this way, since the start of special symbol variation is not set until the wait counter 203u is executed, the second special symbol variation is discriminated from 0 to 2 pending and executed in a short time. it can. In this control example, the value set in the weight counter 203u is 1 second. However, the value is not limited to this, and is a time longer than the normal symbol fluctuation time (3 seconds in this control example). You may comprise so that second may be set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to control the start of variation of the second special symbol after the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is more than three. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the game efficiency is deteriorated in a short time because it is determined that the number of reserved balls is small (0 to 2) and a relatively long variation pattern is selected.

<Fourth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. In the fourth control example, in contrast to the first control example, the third symbol is temporarily stopped several times during the period of change of the one special symbol (swing is changed by shaking) and the special symbol is changed a plurality of times. As such, it is different in that an effect to be shown in a pseudo manner is set. Since other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 107, an example of the display mode in the pseudo continuous effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the fourth control example will be described. Pseudo-continuous production is a special symbol variation, by temporarily stopping the third symbol one or more times and then displaying the variation again, as if one variation is a multiple variation. This is an effect that is shown to the player.

  FIG. 107 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in which the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is variably displayed in the pseudo continuous effect. When the variation display of the pseudo-continuous effect variation pattern is started, the variation is a low-speed variation (dynamic display) that can identify the symbol from the beginning of the variation, and then the variation in which the symbol type is difficult to identify It becomes a high-speed fluctuation that is a fluctuation in speed (dynamic display), and a temporary stop is suddenly displayed as shown in FIG. FIG. 107 (b) is an example of a display mode in the case of a temporary stop display in the pseudo-continuous effect, and the third pattern is slightly fluctuating up and down, and a character is displayed on the front side thereof. A stationary symbol is displayed so as to overlap each third symbol. This stationary symbol is set smaller than the size of each third symbol, and a part of the third symbol on the back side is configured to be visible. In addition, the stationary symbol is added and displayed at the timing of the variation display immediately before the third symbol is temporarily stopped from the state where the third symbol is temporarily varied before the temporary suspension. Specifically, in the case of high-speed display, the third symbol is displayed in a translucent manner so that the background image can be seen through. The translucent display is canceled immediately before the temporary stop display, specifically 0.5 seconds before, and the display is displayed in an opaque state. A stationary symbol is added and displayed at the display timing. Note that this static symbol is not displayed as it fluctuates as in the third symbol, but is displayed in a static manner, so that the player is not temporarily stopped but the third symbol is as if it has been confirmed and stopped. Can feel like.

  Therefore, the player can feel the temporary stop in the pseudo-continuous effect as if it is a fixed stop, and can appear as if the variable display is performed multiple times.

  In this control example, the static symbols are the same for each third symbol, but may be different symbols or shapes. Further, the luminance of the third symbol displayed on the back surface may be displayed lower than the luminance of the stationary symbol. By displaying in this way, the stationary symbol can be made more conspicuous, and the player can make it seem as if the player has stopped.

  In this control example, the character is displayed only for the stationary symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the identification number of the third symbol displayed on the back side (for example, 7 for seven symbols) is attached. May be configured to be displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make an illusion that the still symbol is the third symbol, and it is possible to make it appear as if the player has stopped definitely.

<Control processing in the fourth control example>
Next, control processing in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. In the fourth control example, the display setting process (FIG. 91, S2303) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is changed to the display setting process 3 (FIG. 108, S2340) with respect to the first control example. It is different in point. Since other processes are the same as those in the first control example, the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the contents of the display setting process 3 (S2340) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the fourth control example. In the display setting process 3 (FIG. 108, S2340) in the fourth control example, the symbol temporary stop setting process (FIG. 109, S3040) is added to the display setting process (FIG. 91, S2303) in the first control example. Is different. About the other composition, since the same processing as the 1st control example is performed, the detailed explanation is omitted.

  The symbol temporary stop setting process (S3040), which is one process in the display setting process 3 (FIG. 108, S2340), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the contents of the symbol temporary stop setting process (S3040). In the symbol temporary stop setting process (S3040), when the pseudo continuous effect is set, a process of temporarily stopping and displaying the symbol is executed. In the quasi-continuous production, the timing for temporarily stopping the symbol is set in advance with a variation pattern, and is automatically set by defining a display data table.

  In the symbol temporary stop setting process (FIG. 109, S3040), first, it is determined whether or not the variation display of the variation pattern of the pseudo continuous effect is being performed. If it is determined that the variation pattern is a pseudo continuous effect (S3041: Yes), it is determined whether it is the timing of temporary stop of the third symbol (S3042). If it is determined that it is not the temporary stop timing of the third symbol (S3042: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the symbol temporary stop timing (S3043: Yes), still image data is set at the symbol position to be temporarily stopped (S3043). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Here, the still image data is set so as to overlap the symbol information of the display data table. In this way, by executing still image data to be displayed in a superimposed manner at the temporary stop display timing of the third pattern, the type of the still image data can be changed by operating the player's frame button 22, other lottery, It can be set variably according to the notice display, etc., and various still images can be obtained.

  In this control example, in the quasi-continuous production, the third symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number of times set in advance with the variation pattern, and thereafter, the third symbol is always in the reach display mode, and the super reach display mode is displayed. Is done. In the third symbol that is temporarily stopped, the still image is displayed as a temporary stop, and the color of the still image is green for the first temporary stop so that the player can identify the number of times the temporary stop has been performed. The first time is displayed in yellow, the third in red, and the fourth in gold. Actually, when a still image is displayed without shaking fluctuation, it is easy for the player to recognize the number of times that the fluctuation display is actually performed, not the temporary stop. Therefore, the player expects that when a stationary symbol that informs the number of consecutive times is displayed due to a variation in a plurality of special symbols, a variation display that becomes super reach is performed in the subsequent variation display of the special symbol. Can do. In this control example, the larger the number of temporary stops, the higher the degree of expectation for jackpots (the easier it is to select when the determination result is a jackpot), and four temporary stops are executed. It is composed only of pseudo-continuous effects in which the determination result is a big hit. Therefore, when the red still symbol indicating the third time is displayed, the player can expect that a still image will be displayed even in the next change, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In this control example, the still image is set to non-display at the timing when the third symbol is dynamically displayed again after the temporary stop. Thereby, it is possible to set the player to easily see the variation of the third symbol.

  The still image is not limited to the character in this control example, and may be a character or may be displayed in a size that hides the fluctuation of the third symbol on the back. In actuality, since it is a temporary stop, it may be configured such that the third symbol on the back surface can be seen through the still image so that the third symbol on the rear surface can be slightly changed. .

<Fifth control example>
With reference to FIGS. 111 to 151, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example will be described. In each control example described above, it is determined whether or not a probability variation gaming state is to be given by the operation of the flow path solenoid (probability variation solenoid) 65k in the first variable prize winning device 65 capable of entering a game ball during a big hit game. Was configured to be. On the other hand, in the fifth control example, whether or not the big hit game state is given is determined by the operation of the flow path solenoid 900k in the V winning device 900 in which a game ball can enter during the small hit game. It is different in that it is configured as described above. About another structure, it is the same as that of the 1st control example, The same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the same part and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 111, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example will be described. In this control example, the first variable winning device 65 is provided in the lower center portion instead of the second winning port 640, and the V winning device 900 is replaced by the right in place of the first variable winning device 65. The second prize opening 640 is provided in the lower part, and is different in that the electric winning combination 640a is provided on the right side of the second prize opening 640. Since other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, the same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

  In addition, although mentioned later for details, the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus 65 is the same structure as the 2nd prize winning opening in each control example mentioned above. The V winning device 900 is different in that the staying member 900n is provided in the first variable winning device 65 in each control example described above, and the other points are the same in structure.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 112, the difference of the game board 13 in this control example will be described. FIG. 112 is a partially enlarged view of the lower right portion of the game board 13.

  A normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is provided in the lower right part of the game board 13 in this control example, and the game ball that has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 enters by natural fall. A second winning port 640 is provided at a position where no action is taken (lower left position). In addition, nails are provided from the left part to the upper right part of the second winning opening 640, and these nails have a predetermined distance to the above-described normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (interval through which game balls cannot pass). Is provided. Further, an electric accessory 640 a is provided at a position where the game ball that has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (or the right side thereof) can be guided to enter the second winning port 640.

  Here, the electric accessory 640a operates in the front-rear direction of the game board 13 by the operation of a solenoid (not shown) (one of the other solenoids 209z). The electric accessory 640a functions to guide the game ball to enter the second winning opening 640 by moving forward (opening operation) forward. On the other hand, by retreating backward (closing operation), the game ball is not guided (does not enter the ball) to the second winning opening 640.

  That is, the second winning opening 640 is configured such that a game ball does not enter unless the electric accessory 640a is opened. In addition, even if the electric accessory 640a is opened, if the opening operation time (opening time) is short, the opening operation ends while the gaming ball is being guided, so that the gaming ball 2 It will not enter the winning prize opening 640.

  In the present embodiment, a nail is provided from the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 to the second winning port 640, so that the game ball flowing down the left side of the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is the second winning port. Although it was configured not to enter the ball 640, the present invention is not limited to this, and a similar configuration may be adopted by covering with a case body. As a result, it is possible to suppress an illegal act of changing the distance between the nails so that the game ball can pass therethrough. In addition, the case body, the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, and the second winning port 640 may be integrated, or only part of them may be integrated.

  In addition, a shielding member is provided in conjunction with the electric accessory 640a. When the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (retracted state), the second winning port 640 is closed, and when the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (advanced state). The second winning opening may be opened. Accordingly, it is possible to more reliably prevent the game ball from entering the second winning opening 640 even though the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state.

  In addition, the game ball that has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is configured to change whether or not to enter the second winning port 640 based on the operation of the electric accessory 640a. The game ball that passes through a predetermined area (for example, a game ball that has passed through the passage, a game ball that has just been launched, etc.) is not limited to this, and is moved to the second prize opening 640 based on the operation of the electric accessory 640a. It may be configured to change whether or not to enter the ball.

  A V winning device 900 is provided below the second winning port 640, the electric accessory 640a, and the like. The V winning device 900 is provided with a V winning opening 900a. When a game ball enters the V winning opening 900a, a predetermined game ball (for example, 3 balls) is paid out to the player. It is. Further, a game ball that has entered the V winning opening 900a passes a V winning switch 900e3 described later, and a big hit game is awarded.

  An open / close door 900f1 composed of a shutter mechanism that can be moved in and out from the game board 13 side is provided above the V winning opening 900a, and the open / close door 900f1 is opened. Thus, the game ball can enter the V winning opening 900a and the opening and closing door 900f1 is closed, so that the gaming ball cannot enter the V winning opening 900a. Details of the V winning device 900 will be described later with reference to FIG. The open / close door 900f1 is opened and closed by a V inlet solenoid (not shown) (one of the other solenoids 209z).

  In addition, the structure which suppresses the momentum of the game ball to roll is provided in the upper surface of the opening-and-closing door 900f1 and the game ball rolling surface of V winning device 900 upper part (not shown). Specifically, the rolling speed is reduced using a material with a high friction coefficient (eg, rubber, uneven material), the rolling speed is reduced using a structure in which a rolling game ball collides, There is a structure in which balls are guided in the depth direction of the board to increase the rolling distance. This is a configuration for putting a lot of game balls into the V winning device when the open / close door 900f1 is opened.

  On the left side of the V winning device 900, a first winning port 64 is provided at the lower center of the game board, and a first variable winning device 65 is provided below the first winning port 64. The first variable winning device 65 is opened and closed a predetermined number of times in the jackpot game (for example, 16 times in the case of the jackpot C). When the game ball enters the first variable winning device 65a, the first variable winning device 65 is predetermined. A game ball (for example, 15 balls) is paid out. In this control example, since the device having the same structure as the second prize opening 640 described above in the first control example is handled as the first variable winning device 65, the reference numerals of the same parts are changed from 640 to 65. In addition, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 113, a description will be given of a configuration in which game balls guided to the distribution flow path of the back cover body 900e in the V winning device 900 are distributed to a normal discharge flow path 900e1 and a special discharge flow path 900e2. To do. The V winning device 900 in the present control example is the same as the first control example described above in that the stay member 900n is provided on the special discharge channel 65e2 of the first variable winning device 65, and the V switch 900e3 is used instead of the probability variation switch 65e3. Are different, and the other points are the same. In this control example, a device having the same structure as that of the first variable winning device 65 described above in the first control example is handled as the V winning device 900. Therefore, the reference numerals of the same parts are changed from 65 to 900. In addition, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 113 (a) is a rear view of the back cover body 900e showing a state in which the switching member 900h is operated so that the game balls are distributed to the special discharge flow path 900e2.

  As described above, when the switching member 900h is operated, the game balls that have passed through the detection port 900a1 of the V winning device 900 are distributed to the special discharge flow path 900e2. In this control example, the stay member 900n is provided in the special discharge flow path 900e2. With this stay member 900n, only one game ball can stay in the distribution destination area 900h3, which is the area where the game balls are distributed to the special discharge flow path 900e2 by the switching member 900h. As a result, when one game ball stays in the allocation destination area 900h3, the game ball that has passed through the detection port 900a1 of the V winning device 900 is not distributed to the special discharge flow path 900e2, but is normally discharged. It will flow down to the flow path 900e1.

  The stay member 900n is configured by a shutter mechanism that can be moved in and out from the game board 13 side. The stay member 900n is moved in the front-rear direction of the game board 13 by the operation of a stay solenoid 209a (not shown). This staying member 900n can advance one game forward (close operation) so that one game ball stays in the sorting destination area 900h3. On the other hand, by retreating backward (opening operation), the game balls staying in the distribution destination area 900h3 flow down to the special discharge flow path 900e2.

  Here, the V winning device 900 allows a game ball to enter by opening the open / close door 900f1 during the small hit game. In addition, the stay member 900n is closed during the small hit game (when it is possible to enter the V winning device 900), and after the small hit game is finished (no new pitch is entered into the V winning device 900). The opening operation is performed after a lapse of a predetermined time (after 3 seconds in the present control example) from the time when it becomes possible. That is, in this control example, the game balls that have entered the V winning device 900 are limited to one ball that flows down to the special discharge flow path 900e2 even if the switching member 900h is operating. Thereby, it can suppress that the game ball which flows down into the special discharge flow path 900e2 becomes excess.

  The game ball that has flowed down to the special discharge flow path 900e2 passes through the V switch 900e3. In the first control example, the probability variation game is given based on the passage of the probability variation switch 65e3, but in this control example, the jackpot game is constructed based on the passage of the V switch 900e3 ( (See S4603, S4607 in FIG. 138 and S4904 in FIG. 142 described later).

  In this control example, the number of game balls that flow down to the special discharge channel 900e2 is limited to one. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more game balls can stay in the distribution destination area 900h3. Alternatively, the number of game balls to be limited may be appropriately changed by causing the staying member to operate a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) during the small hit game.

  With reference to FIG. 113 (b), a case where a game ball is guided to the normal discharge flow path 900e2 will be described. FIG. 113 (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the flow path solenoid 900k is inactive and the guide piece 900h2 of the switching member 900h blocks the opening surface of the entrance of the special discharge flow path 900e2.

  In the present control example, the stay member 900n provided in the special discharge flow path 900e2 is configured to operate even when the flow path solenoid 900k is inactive. Thereby, since it is not necessary to switch a process according to the presence or absence of the operation | movement of the flow path solenoid 900k, the reduction of design cost and the reduction of program capacity can be aimed at.

  When the flow path solenoid 900k is inactive, all the game balls that have passed through the detection port 900a1 of the V winning device 900 flow down to the normal discharge flow path 900e1. On the other hand, since there is no game ball flowing down to the special discharge flow path 900e2, there is no influence by the stay member 900n newly provided in the present control example, and the operation is the same as that in the first control example described above. Is omitted.

<Electric Configuration in Fifth Control Example>
Next, an electrical configuration in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 127. The pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example is electrically different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in that the ROM 202 and RAM 203 in the main control device 110 and the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 are different. And a part of the ROM 234 (production) in the display control device 114 is changed (added), and a retention solenoid 209a is added as a solenoid 209 connected to the main control device 110. However, the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 114 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example.

  This control example is different from the first control example described above in that a staying solenoid 209a is provided as the solenoid 209. As described above, the staying solenoid 209a is used to operate the staying member 900n in the V winning device 900. In addition, the solenoid (for example, the flow path solenoid 900k) described in each control example described above is handled as a part of the other solenoid 209z.

  As other changes, the ROM 202 and RAM 203 in the main controller 110, the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the sound lamp controller 113, and the ROM 234 (effect) in the display controller 114 are changed (added). This will be described later with reference to FIGS. 115 to 127. Since other parts are the same, the same reference numerals are given and description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 115, each counter in this control example will be described in detail. This control example is different in that a small hit type counter C5 is added to each counter in the first control example described above.

  The small hitting type counter C5 is configured so that 1 is sequentially added within a predetermined range (0 to 99 in the present control example), and after reaching the maximum value (99), returns to 0. The small hit type counter C5 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interruption process in the present embodiment), and the special value stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640. It is stored in the symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Then, based on the value of the small hit type counter C5, the small hit type is selected. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Since the other counters are the same as those in the first control example described above, the same reference numerals are given and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 in the main controller 110 of this control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 116 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the main controller 110, and FIG. 116 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the main controller 110. .

  The ROM 202 in this control example has at least a small hit type selection table 202e in addition to the ROM 202 in the first control example (see FIG. 116 (a)). This small hit type selection table 202e is used to select a small hit type when a small hit is made based on a game ball entering the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640. It is. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In addition to the RAM 203 in the first control example, the RAM 203 in the present control example includes a big hit start flag 203v1, a big hit middle flag 203v2, a small hit start flag 203w1, a small hit middle flag 203w2, a V pass big hit type value 203x1, and a V flag. 203x2 and at least a normal symbol time initial flag 203y. In the present control example, the probability variation flag 203e is not necessary and is not shown.

  The jackpot start flag 203v1 is a flag used to determine whether or not it is a jackpot start timing. The jackpot start flag 203v1 is set to ON when the lottery result is a jackpot in the special symbol variation process (see S241 in FIG. 129), and is referred to in the jackpot control process 2 to determine whether it is a jackpot start timing. When the jackpot control process 2 determines that it is the big hit start timing (see S4701 in FIG. 140). Thereby, the process according to jackpot start timing can be performed. In each of the control examples described above, although not shown, the jackpot start timing is similarly determined.

  The jackpot flag 203v2 is a flag used for determining whether or not a jackpot game is being executed, that is, whether or not a jackpot game is being executed. Like the jackpot start flag 203h described above, the jackpot flag 203v2 is set to ON when the lottery result is a jackpot in the special symbol variation process (see S241 in FIG. 129). Then, in the jackpot control process 2, it is referred to determine whether or not the jackpot is being hit (see S4704 in FIG. 140), and in the jackpot control process 2, when it is determined that the timing of the jackpot end, It is set to off (see S4712 in FIG. 140).

  The small hitting start flag 203w1 is a flag used to determine whether or not it is a small hitting start timing. The small hitting start flag 203w1 is set to ON in the small hitting start setting process executed when it is determined that the lottery result is a small hitting in the special symbol variation process (see S4308 in FIG. 133). Then, it is referred to determine whether or not it is a small hit start timing in the small hit control process (see S4801 in FIG. 141), and it is determined that it is a small hit start timing in the small hit control process (See S4802 in FIG. 141).

  The small hitting flag 203w2 is a flag used to determine whether or not a small hit is being made, that is, whether or not a small hit game is being executed. This small hitting medium flag 203w2 is set to ON in the small hitting start setting process in the same manner as the small hitting start flag 203w1 described above (see S4308 in FIG. 133). Then, it is referred to in order to determine whether or not the small hit control is in the small hit control process (S4807 in FIG. 141), and is turned off when it is determined that the small hit end timing is in the small hit control process. It is set (S4812 in FIG. 141).

  The V passing jackpot type value 203x1 is used to set a jackpot type to be given when a game ball passes through the V winning switch 900e3 of the V winning device 900. The V pass big hit type value 203x1 is set according to the small hit type in the small hit start setting process (S4305 or S4306 in FIG. 133). The set V pass big hit type value 203x1 is acquired in the V pass process (S4601 in FIG. 138), and the V flag 203x2 is set based on the acquired value (S4603 and S4607 in FIG. 138). This V hit big hit type value 203x1 is cleared in the small hit end process executed at the end of the small hit game (S4908 in FIG. 142).

  The V flag 203x2 is a flag for storing that the game ball has passed through the V winning switch 900e3 of the V winning device 900, and determines the jackpot type based on the value of the V flag 203x2 at the end of the small hitting. is there. This V flag 203x2 is set based on the value of the V pass big hit type value 203x1 in the V pass process (S4603, S4607 in FIG. 138), and is referenced in the small hit end process (S4902, S4904 in FIG. 142). After being referred to, it is set to off (S4906 in FIG. 142).

  The normal symbol short time initial flag 203y is a flag for determining whether or not the normal symbol variation in the short time game is the first time. The normal symbol time initial flag 203y is set to ON when the jackpot type is C at the jackpot end timing in the jackpot control processing 2 (see S4715 in FIG. 140), and is referred to in the normal symbol variation process. (See S642 in FIG. 136). Although details will be described later, when it is determined that the normal symbol time initial flag 203y is turned on (S641: Yes in FIG. 136), it is referred to in the normal symbol variation process and the electric accessory 640a is in a long time (5 seconds). It is set so that a large number of game balls can enter the second winning opening 640 (S642 in FIG. 136) and then turned off (S643 in FIG. 136). On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal symbol time initial flag 203y is off (S641: No in FIG. 136), a little game is played to the second winning opening in which the electric accessory is opened for a short time (0.5 seconds). It is set so that the ball can enter the ball (S644 in FIG. 136).

  Next, the contents of the first per-random number table 202a and the second per-random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. 117A to 117C are schematic diagrams schematically showing the contents of the first random number table 202a, and FIG. 117D schematically shows the contents of the second random number table 202c. It is the shown schematic diagram.

  As shown in FIG. 117 (a), the first per-random number table 202a determines whether or not the value of the first per-random number counter C1 acquired when a game ball enters the first winning port 64 is a big hit. In order to determine whether the value of the first symbol random number counter C1 acquired when the game ball enters the second winning port 640 and the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 for determining Special symbol 2 random number table 202a2.

  Specifically, the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 is, as shown in FIG. 117 (b), a random number value determined to be a win in the lottery of the first special symbol based on the ball entering the first winning opening 64 ( This is a table in which (determination value) is set. In the lottery of the first special symbol, it is determined whether the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 is “0”, and if it is “0”, it is determined that it is a big hit. Further, it is determined whether or not the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is “1 to 3”, and if it is “1 to 3”, it is determined that it is a small hit. In addition, when it is determined that the value is “4 to 399”, it is determined that the value is out of place.

  On the other hand, the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 is, as shown in FIG. 117 (c), a random value (determination value) determined to be a win in the lottery of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second winning opening 640. Is a set table. In the lottery of the second special symbol, it is determined whether the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 is “0”, and if it is “0”, it is determined that it is a big hit. Further, it is determined whether or not the acquired value of the first hit random number counter C1 is “1 to 398”, and if it is “1 to 398”, it is determined that it is a small hit. In addition, when it is determined that “399”, it is determined that it is off.

  Thus, the first per-random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In the first per-random number counter C1, when the first special symbol is drawn based on the first winning slot 64, the first special symbol is a random number that is a big hit, and the total number of random numbers is 400. Among them, since the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 1, the probability that the jackpot of the first special symbol is jackpot is “1/400”. In addition, since the total number of random numbers that will be a small hit is 3, the probability that the first special symbol will be a small hit is “3/400”.

  On the other hand, at the time of lottery of the second special symbol based on the entrance to the second winning port 640, the random number value that is a big hit of the second special symbol is one, and the total number of random number values is 400, Since the total number of random values to be 11 is 11, the probability of winning the second special symbol is “1/400”. In addition, since the total number of random numbers that will be a small hit is 398, the probability that the second special symbol will be a small hit is “398/400”.

  The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 117 (d)) is a data table in which a hit determination value for a normal symbol is stored. As shown in FIG. 117 (d), regardless of the state of the gaming machine, when the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the second random number counter buffer is in the range of 5-204, It is determined (see S640 in FIG. 136).

  As in the case of the above-described control examples, when it is determined that the normal symbol is hit, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol “○” is lit as the stop symbol (second symbol). In addition, the electric accessory 640a is opened for a predetermined time.

  Here, as described above with reference to FIG. 112 and the like, the electric accessory 640a in this control example operates in the front-rear direction of the game board 13 by the operation of a solenoid (not shown) (one of the other solenoids 209z). The electric accessory 640a functions to guide the game ball to enter the second winning opening 640 by moving forward (opening operation) forward. On the other hand, by retreating backward (closing operation), the game ball is not guided (does not enter the ball) to the second winning opening 640.

  Although the details will be described later, the electric accessory 640a in this control example is opened for 5 seconds or 0.5 seconds when the time is short, but is opened only for 0.2 seconds when the time is not short. Further, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a of 0.2 seconds is shorter than the time required for the game ball to be guided to the second winning port 640. Therefore, even if the value of the second random number counter C4 is won when the time is not short, it is not possible to win the game ball to the second winning opening. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a game that attempts to enter the second winning opening regardless of whether the time is short or not (the jackpot with the short time has not been revealed).

  Specifically, the electric combination 640a includes a game ball falling area a (a in FIG. 112) for receiving a game ball that has naturally dropped on the electric combination 640a during the opening operation, and a position where the game ball does not naturally fall. And it has the game ball guidance area | region b which guide | induces the game ball which rolled from the game ball fall area | region a to the 2nd winning hole 640. FIG.

  That is, the distance that the game ball rolls during the opening time (0.2 seconds) when the length of the game ball guiding area b (the distance that the game ball rolls) is not at least shorter than the time of the electric accessory 640a. By designing the game ball to be longer and shorter than the distance that the game ball rolls during the opening and closing time (0.5 seconds), the game ball that has fallen on the electric accessory 640a can be reliably In the opening operation when it is guided to the second winning opening 640 and it is not in the short time, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has fallen on the electric accessory 640a from winning the second winning opening.

  Next, the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 118A to 118C are schematic views schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b.

  The first hit type selection table 202b selects the jackpot type of the jackpot based on the special symbol 1 jackpot selection table 202b1 for selecting the jackpot type of the jackpot based on the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640. Special symbol 2 big hit selection table 202b2 for this purpose (see FIG. 118 (a)).

  As shown in FIG. 118 (b), at the big hit based on the first winning opening 64, when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 49”, the big hit C (16R hour short big hit) is selected, In the case of “50 to 99”, the jackpot D (16R hour short no jackpot) is selected.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 118 (c), in the case of the big hit based on the second winning opening 640, regardless of the value of the first win type counter C2 (when the value is “0 to 99”), the big win C (16R short time) Big hit) is selected.

  Next, the contents of the small hit type selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 119 (a) to 119 (c) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection table 202e.

  The small hitting type selection table 202e is a special symbol 1 small hitting selection table 202e1 for selecting a small hitting type based on the first winning opening 64, and a small hitting based on the second winning opening 640. A special symbol 2 small hit selection table 202e2 for selecting a type (see FIG. 119 (a)).

  As shown in FIG. 119 (b), at the small hit based on the first winning opening 64, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is selected, and when the value is “0 to 1”, the small hit C (V passable) is selected. In the case of “2 to 99”, the small hit E (V cannot pass) is selected.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 119 (c), at the small hit based on the second winning opening 640, the value of the first hit type counter C5 is “0 to 49”, the small hit C (V passable). In the case of “50 to 99”, a small hit D (V passable) is selected.

  Although details will be described later, in the present control example, the operation of the flow path solenoid 900k of the V winning device 900 is set in accordance with the small hit type. Specifically, in the small hit game with the small hits C and D, the flow path solenoid 900k of the V winning device 900 is operated, and the game ball can enter the special discharge flow path 900e2. On the other hand, in the small hit game by the small hit E, the flow path solenoid 900k of the V winning device 900 is not operated. A game ball cannot enter the special discharge channel 900e2. That is, the small hits C and D are small hits to which a big hit is given when the game ball passes through the V winning switch 900e3, and the small hit E is a small hit to which no big hit is given.

  Also, in this control example, the type of jackpot to be given thereafter is determined according to the type of jackpot, and the jackpot given after the jackpot C is jackpot C (16R short-time big jackpot). The jackpot given after D is configured to be a jackpot D (16R hour short no jackpot).

  In this control example, the type of jackpot to be given afterwards is determined according to the type of jackpot. However, as another specification, the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot. Also, the type of jackpot is determined by the jackpot selection table (only the jackpot right is acquired), and the jackpot that has won the right is executed by passing the V winning switch 900e3 in the subsequent jackpot game. It may be. By doing in this way, the player can select a small hit to pass the V winning switch 900e3, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Next, the contents of the fluctuation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. The variation pattern table 202d is a data table used to determine the variation pattern display mode, and the display mode is defined for each value of the variation type counter CS1. In the variation pattern table 202d, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the special symbol lottery results are defined.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 120 (a), the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 67 (b)), the out (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 67 (c)), The time variation pattern table 202d4 is defined at least. In this control example, since the probability variation state is not provided, the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 is omitted. Further, the contents of the big hit variation pattern table 202d1 and the out (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 are the same as those in the first control example described above, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The variation pattern table 202d4 for time reduction defines the variation pattern during time reduction as shown in FIG. 120 (d). Specifically, in the case of a short time, a deviation pattern is a short deviation (0.5 seconds) regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the case of a deviation, and a small hit (10 seconds) in the case of a small hit. In the case of a big hit, it is specified to be a long big hit (20 seconds). In addition, the fluctuation pattern in the case of losing in the short time may be set as the extra long (10 seconds) and the same length as the small hit.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. The RAM 223 in this control example has at least a V inlet passage counter 223j, a round number accumulation counter 223k, and a continuation determination counter 223m in addition to the RAM 223 in the first control example (see FIG. 124 (b)). . Since the ROM 222 is the same as the ROM 222 in the first control example, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The V entrance passage counter 223j is a counter for counting game balls that have passed through the detection port 900a1 of the V winning device 900. The V entrance passage counter 203j is incremented by 1 when a V entrance passage command transmitted when a game ball passes through the detection port 900a1 is received (S5014 in FIG. 144). The V entrance passage counter 203j is referred to when setting a display effect command in the V passage process (S5103 in FIG. 145), and is initialized to 0 after the display effect command is set in the V passage process. (S5106 in FIG. 145).

  The round number cumulative counter 223k is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of rounds in the jackpot game when the jackpot or the jackpot continues. This round number accumulation counter 223k is incremented by 1 when a round number command indicating the start of a new round is received (S5004 in FIG. 144). When a jackpot end command is received, the continuation determination counter 223m If it is 0, it is initialized (S5009 in FIG. 144). In the sound lamp control device 113, the display round number command is set based on the round number cumulative counter 203k (S5005 in FIG. 144), and the effect based on the value of the round number cumulative counter 203k is displayed in the third symbol display. It will be displayed on the device 81.

  The continuation determination counter 223m is a counter that is used to determine whether or not the big hit or the small win continues, and is used to determine whether or not to initialize the round number accumulation counter 223k described above. The continuation determination counter 223m is set to 2 when a small hit C small hit start command is received (see S5013 in FIG. 144), and is subtracted by 1 when a small hit D small hit start command is received. (See S5015 in FIG. 144). The continuation determination counter 223m is referred to when a jackpot end command is received (see S5008 in FIG. 144). If the continuation determination counter is 0, that is, if the small hit D continues twice, the big hit and small It is determined that the winning continuation has ended, and the round number accumulation counter 203k is initialized to 0 (see S5009 in FIG. 144).

  In addition, the other memory area 223z includes a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 143) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area. The command is analyzed, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, the big hit flow in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. In this control example, the game state is divided into a special figure 1 (hereinafter also referred to as special 1) game state (left-handed game) and a special figure 2 (hereinafter also referred to as special 2) game state (right-handed game). It is done. The special figure 1 game state is a normal game state in which a game ball is launched aiming at the first winning port 64. If the first special symbol is drawn based on the game ball entering the first winning port 64 and the jackpot type of the lottery result is a jackpot C, the winning to the second winning port 640 is made after the jackpot is over. A short-time gaming state (described as “short-time” in FIG. 122) is provided. When shifting to the short-time gaming state, a right-handed game is performed in which a right-handed game is performed in which a game ball is launched to the right side of the game board 13 so as to aim at the second winning port 640 disposed on the right side of the game board 13. On the other hand, when the jackpot type of the lottery result of the first special symbol is jackpot D, since the short-time gaming state is not given after the jackpot is ended, the special figure 1 gaming state is performed again. Further, in this control example, there is a route that is a big win (V prize) when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit and the small hit type is a small hit C. In this case, the game shifts to the short-time gaming state after the jackpot.

  Next, the lottery of the second special symbol performed based on the winning of the game ball to the second prize opening 640 is set with a high probability of jackpot that will be more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol. ing. This control example has a hold storage function for holding the right to receive a lottery based on the second special symbol, and the second special symbol is changing (specifically, the change display of the second special symbol is started). If the game ball wins the second prize opening 640 from the time when the game is stopped to the time when it is confirmed, the right to perform the lottery based on the prize is changed. It is possible to hold until the confirmation display is made (holding upper limit = 1).

  Next, in the special figure 2 gaming state, the flow of jackpots in the short-time and middle games will be described. In this state, the lottery of the second special symbol is mainly performed. As described above with reference to FIGS. 117 and 119, most of the lottery contents of the second special symbol are allocated to the small hits. This is to increase the probability of occurrence of a jackpot (V winning) via a small hit in order to increase the jackpot probability of the second special symbol. Here, when the small hit type of the lottery result of the second special symbol is the small hit C, the short-time gaming state is given again after the big hit ends. On the other hand, when the small hit type is the small hit D, since the short-time gaming state is not given after the big hit ends, the time shifts to the non-short-time middle in which the short-time game in the special figure 2 gaming state is not given.

  Next, in the special figure 2 game state, the flow of jackpot in the non-time-short game will be described. In this state, as described above, the lottery of the second special symbol stored and held by the second special symbol hold storage function is executed. As a result of the lottery, if the small hit type is the small hit C, a time-short game is given after the jackpot is ended, so that the time-short game state is entered. On the other hand, when the small hit type is the small hit D, the short-time gaming state is not given after the end of the big hit, and there is no reserved memory, so the state shifts to the special figure 1 gaming state. It should be noted that since this state is not in time, a new reserved memory cannot be acquired.

  In this control example, in the lottery of the second special symbol, the symbol type with the jackpot type C may be selected.

  In other words, it is designed so that a lottery based on the second special symbol, which is a lottery advantageous for the player, can be performed at least twice using the holding function described above, and after entering the special figure 2 gaming state, Unless the small hit D is selected twice consecutively, it is possible to loop the special figure 2 gaming state.

  FIG. 123 is a time chart illustrating the flow from winning to the second winning opening 640 in the present control example until the occurrence of the jackpot game. FIG. 123 (a) shows a small lottery result based on winning to the second winning opening 640. It is a win, and it explains the case where the lottery result based on winning a prize to the 2nd winning a prize is a big win (per symbol) by winning a big win (V prize) by passing through the special discharge route 900e2. is there. Details of operation control of various devices will be described later.

  First, a description will be given with reference to FIG. Based on the winning of the game ball at the second winning port 640, the main controller 110 controls the variation of the second special symbol. At that time, the display control device 114 executes a second special symbol change effect indicating that the second special symbol is changing. The time of the second special symbol variation effect executed by the display control device 114 will be described later. When the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped and the main control device 100 starts the small hit control, the V inlet solenoid, the flow solenoid 900k, and the staying solenoid 209a provided in the V winning device 900 are turned on ( FIG. 113 (a) state). In this state, since the player is aiming at the V winning opening 900a of the V winning device 900 and firing a game ball, a plurality of gaming balls enter the V winning device 900, one of which is retained by the stay member 900n. It will be in a residence state (900h of FIG. 113), and other game balls will flow down the normal discharge flow path 900e1. In addition, the time of the small hit effect performed by the display control device 114 will be described later.

  Next, the flow of the small hit control by the main controller 110 will be described. Here, the entire time of the small hit control is set to 10 seconds. First, when the set time t1 (6.5 seconds) elapses after the small hit control is started, among the plurality of solenoids described above, the V inlet solenoid is turned off and the open / close door 900f1 is closed. When the opening / closing door 900f1 is closed, no new game ball is won in the V winning device 900. Next, the set time t2 (9 seconds) elapses, the staying solenoid 209a is turned off, the staying member 900n is opened (withdrawn), and the game ball stayed by the staying member 900n flows down to the special discharge path 900e2. I will do it. The set time t2 is set to a time sufficient for the game ball existing in the V winning device 900 to flow down the normal discharge flow path 900e1 when the set time t1 elapses. Only the game balls retained by the retaining member 900n in the device 900 will flow down the special discharge flow path 900e2. Subsequently, the set time t3 (1 second) elapses, the flow path solenoid 900k is turned off, and the opening piece at the entrance of the special discharge flow path 900e2 is blocked by the guide piece 900h2 of the switching member 900h. The set time t3 is set to a time sufficient to allow the game ball flowing down the special discharge channel 900e2 to flow downstream from the movable range of the guide piece 900h2 when the set time t2 has elapsed.

  Thus, even if the game ball is retained by the stay member 900n within the movable range of the guide piece 900h2 by driving the stay solenoid 209a and the flow path solenoid 900k with a time difference, the guide piece 900h2 and the stay member 900n are retained. Therefore, the apparatus can be downsized to the special discharge flow path 900e2 without interfering with the game balls retained by the above.

  Finally, based on the fact that the game ball flowing down the special discharge flow path 900e2 passes the V winning switch 900e3, the main controller 110 ends the small hit game control, performs the big hit game control, and opens the specific winning opening. Is done.

  Next, differences from FIG. 123 (a) will be described with reference to FIG. 123 (b). In FIG. 123B, since the lottery result of the second special symbol based on winning in the second winning opening 640 is a big win (per symbol), the operation of the V winning device 900 is not performed. That is, the jackpot control is started after the fluctuation control of the first special symbol by the main controller 110 is completed. Meanwhile, the display control device 114 executes the second special symbol variation effect indicating that the second special symbol is being varied.

  Here, the relationship between the effect performed by the display control device 114 in FIG. 123A and the effect time performed by the display control device 114 in FIG. 123B will be described. In FIG. 123 (a), the sum of the variation time (10 seconds) of the second special symbol and the small hit effect time (10 seconds) is set to 20 seconds, and in FIG. 123 (b), the variation time of the second special symbol. Is set to 20 seconds. This is the timing at which the jackpot game is started even if the jackpot based on the lottery result of the second special symbol is one of the above V winnings or symbols, that is, the first variable winning device 65 (specific winning port 65a). ) To match the timing of release, and by configuring in this way, the player is prevented from grasping the lottery result of the second special symbol, and the display controller performs the effect to the end. Can do.

  Next, the effect display on the third symbol display device 81 executed by the effect control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 to 127. FIG. 124 (a) is an effect image at the start of a time-saving game in this control example. On the upper right side of the third symbol display device 81 is a variable display area showing a variable display (dynamic display) of the second special symbol, and on the upper left side of the third symbol display device 81 is a lottery holding number of the second special symbol. On the lower side of the third symbol display device 81, there is provided a comment area for guiding display of a comment and a right-handed game, and an effect area for developing a story as the game progresses. It has been. FIG. 124 (a) shows a state in which there is no game ball entering the second winning opening 640, so that the display indicating that the change display area is not changed is displayed in the hold display area. In the comment area, the current mode name and a right-handed notification display are displayed.

  FIG. 124 (b) is an effect image in which the second special symbol is changing. A difference from FIG. 124 (b) is that a display indicating that the second special symbol is changing is displayed in the change display area, and a fork is displayed in the effect area. In the effect area, during the second special symbol variation, an effect is made in which the character proceeds deep into the cave, and when the game ball is won in the second prize opening 640, that is, the hold area is displayed with a hold. Go along one of the forks. As described above, the development of the story displayed in the effect area of the third symbol display device 81 is performed based on the winning in the second winning opening 640, so that the game ball during the second special symbol fluctuation is obtained. Is stopped, so that the second special symbol can be reliably reserved. In this control example, the control is shown in which one of the forks is selected and advanced based on the display of holding, but each time a game ball is awarded to the second winning opening, the fork may be advanced. May select a path to be advanced by operating a predetermined operating means, and control to proceed to the selected path due to winning of a game ball to the second winning port 640 generated after the selection is completed. . Further, the color and design of the branch road may be changed based on the lottery result of the second special symbol being changed or the lottery result of the second special symbol being held. In this way, the player can participate in the development of the story that is progressing in the production area, and can enjoy the production suggesting the lottery result of the second special symbol. It is possible to further prevent the ball from stopping firing.

  Next, FIG. 125 (a) is an effect image after stoppage of variation when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit. A door is displayed in the effect area, a fixed display indicating the small hit is displayed in the variable display area, a display indicating that there is a hold in the hold display area, and a right-handed notification display is displayed in the comment area. When the effect image is displayed, since the V winning device 900 is open on the lower right side of the game board, a comment is displayed so that the player can make a right strike and aim at the V winning device 900, and the V winning device is displayed. Based on the winning of the game ball to the device 900, an effect in which the character destroys the door is executed in the effect area. In addition, the color and design of the door displayed in the effect area are changed based on the lottery result of the second special symbol and the reserved lottery result of the second special symbol.

  Even when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the same effect image is displayed at the same timing. However, as described above with reference to FIG. 123, since the second special symbol is still changing, the changing display area is displayed changing. Therefore, by making the display area smaller or by providing it other than the third symbol display device 81, it is even more difficult for the player to grasp whether the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit or a big hit. Can do.

  Further, if the fluctuation pattern when the lottery result of the second special symbol is out is 10 seconds (0.5 seconds in this control example), an effect image in which the door does not come out at this timing may be displayed.

  Next, FIG. 125 (b) is an effect image when the game ball passes the V winning switch 900e4 provided in the special discharge channel 900e2 in the V winning device 900, and FIG. 125 (a) shows the effect area. A monster appears from the door displayed in the production area. The type of character appearing from the door will be described later with reference to FIG. When a monster appears, the process shifts to a jackpot effect shown in FIG. FIG. 126 (a) is an effect image with a big hit. Since the big win effect image is mainly a battle effect performed in the effect area, the variable display area and the hold display area are moved to an inconspicuous place or an appropriate position outside the third symbol display device 81. Instead, a jackpot round number display and a jackpot display (not shown) during the jackpot are displayed. FIG. 126 (b) is an effect image when the monster is subjugated in the battle effect during the jackpot. When the monster is subjugated in the battle performance, there is at least one more jackpot (the lottery result of the second special symbol being held is a jackpot or a state where a short-time game is awarded after the jackpot). On the other hand, FIG. 126 (c) is an effect image when the monster is defeated in the jackpot battle effect. When the monster is defeated in the battle performance, the game is in the normal game state (the second special symbol is not held and the short game is not given after the big hit). It is also possible to provide a so-called resurgence effect that once the effect image defeated in the battle is displayed, then revived and subjugated the monster. Further, if the V prize is not won during the small hit, the door is not opened (not shown).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 127, the character which appears from the door displayed in FIG. 125 (a) is demonstrated. FIG. 127A is displayed when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit (the first random number counter value C1 is “0” in the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2).

  FIG. 127 (b) shows that the lottery result of the second special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol that is held are both small with a short time (the small hit type counter value C5 is “0 to 0 in the special symbol 2 random number table 202e2. 49 ”). In other words, it is a premier effect in which a jackpot is awarded at least three more times.

  As described above, the effect display on the third symbol display device 81 executed by the effect control device 114 has been described. However, as shown in FIG. 123, any jackpot based on the lottery of the second special symbol starts the jackpot state. Since the timing for displaying the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81 is set to the same timing as shown in FIGS. 125 (b) and 127, the second special symbol is drawn to the player. It is possible to make it difficult to grasp the result.

  In addition, the display of FIGS. 124 (b) and 125 (a) suppresses the stop of the game ball launch by the player, ensures that the second special symbol is retained, and wins the V winning device. Can be surely performed.

<Control processing executed by main controller in fifth control example>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 128 to 152. In the fifth control example, the V entrance passage process and the V passage process are executed in the timer interrupt process, and the special symbol variation process, the start winning process, and the normal symbol in the timer interrupt process, compared to the first control example described above. The difference is that a part of the variation process is changed and that the big hit control process 2 and the small hit control process are executed in the main process. Since the other points are the same, the same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 128 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process in the fifth control example. Among the timer interrupt processes, the processes of S101 to S103, S107, and S108 to S109 are the processes of S101 to S103, S107, and S108 to S109 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63) in the first control example, respectively. Since the same processing is executed, detailed description thereof is omitted. In the fifth control example, the special symbol variation process in S104 (see FIG. 129), the start winning process in S105 (see FIG. 134), and the normal symbol variation process in S106 (see FIG. 136) executed in the timer interruption process. ), A V inlet passage process in S140 (see FIG. 137), and a V passage process in S141 (see FIG. 138), which will be described later, are different from the first control example.

  First, the difference from the first control example of the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation process (S104) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 128), and the processes in S240 to S244 are different from those in the first control example. The other processes are the same as those in the first control example described above, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The special symbol variation start process 2 of S240 is performed in place of the special symbol variation start process of the first control example (S213, see FIG. 64). Details of the special symbol variation start process 2 (S240) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  The processes of S241 to S242 are performed instead of the process of S219 of the first control example. Specifically, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a jackpot after the fluctuation time has elapsed (S214: Yes), a specific winning opening release scenario is set based on the jackpot type. (S217), the start of jackpot is set (S218). Next, the big hit start flag 203v1 and the big hit middle flag 203v2 are set to ON (S241), the hour / middle counter 203f is set to 0, and this processing ends.

  In the process of S241, whether the jackpot start timing 203v1 and the jackpot medium flag 203v2 are set to ON, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start timing or the jackpot game is in jackpot control process 2 (FIG. 140) described later. It becomes possible to determine whether or not.

  In addition, by setting the hour / minute counter 203f to 0 in the processing of S242, the hour / short game is ended when the jackpot game is started.

  On the other hand, in the process of S216, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big win (S216: No), it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a small hit (S243).

  In the process of S243, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a small hit (S243: Yes), a small hit start setting process is executed (S244), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S243, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small hit, the processes of S220 to S221 are executed as in the first control example described above, and this process is terminated.

  In the present control example, as described above, since it is configured to be a small hit in the lottery of each special symbol, if the lottery result is determined to be a small hit by the processing of S243 to 244, the small hit game is started Is configured to do. Details of the processing of S244 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the special symbol variation start process 2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 130 to 132. First, FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation start process 2 executed in place of the special symbol variation start process in S213 of the first control example. In the special symbol variation start process 2 (S240), it is first determined whether or not the time is short (S4001). When the time is not short (S4001: No), the normal variation start process (S4002) is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, if the time is short (S4001: Yes), the time variation start process (S4003) is executed, and this process ends.

  Next, the normal variation start process (S4002) and the short time variation start process (S4003) executed in the special symbol variation start process 2 (S240) described above will be described.

  First, the normal variation start process (S4002) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing a normal fluctuation start process (S4002) executed in the special symbol fluctuation start process 2 (see S240 in FIG. 130).

  In the normal variation start process, first, data of an execution area in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is acquired (S4101). Thereafter, the lottery result is acquired based on the special symbol jackpot random number table corresponding to the acquired special symbol type (S4102). Specifically, if the lottery of the first special symbol is based on the entrance to the first winning opening 64, it is determined whether the jackpot or the jackpot with reference to the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 (see FIG. 117 (b)). If the lottery of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second winning opening 640, the big winning or the small winning is determined with reference to the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 (see FIG. 117 (c)). .

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a big hit (S4103). When the lottery result is a jackpot (S4103: Yes), a display mode for a normal jackpot corresponding to the special symbol and the jackpot type is set (S4104). Thereafter, a normal jackpot variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter (S4105), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if the lottery result is not a big hit (S4103: No), it is further determined whether or not the lottery result is a big hit (S4106). When the lottery result is a small hit (S4106: Yes), the display mode for the normal small hit corresponding to the special symbol and the big hit type is set (S4107). Thereafter, a normal small hit variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter (S4108), and this process is terminated.

  When the lottery result is not a small hit (S4106: No), the display mode at the time of normal losing corresponding to the special symbol is set (S4109). Thereafter, the fluctuation pattern at the time of normal departure is determined based on the number of reserved balls (S4110), and this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 132, the short time variation start process (S4003) will be described. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the short time variation start process (S4003) executed in the special symbol variation start process 2 (S240, see FIG. 130). This short time variation start process (S4003) is different from the above-described normal variation start process (S4002) in that the display mode and the variation pattern for the short time are set (determined), and other points are the same. Detailed description thereof will be omitted. The variation pattern for time reduction determined in S4105, S4108, and S4110 is determined based on the variation pattern table 202d4 for time reduction (see FIG. 120D) as described above.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the small hitting start setting process, which is a process added in the above-described fifth control example, will be described. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the small hitting start setting process (S244) executed in the special symbol variation start process 2 (S240).

  In the small hit start setting process (S244), first, a V inlet solenoid opening scenario is set (S4301). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the small hit type C or D (S4302). If it is not the small hit type C or D (S4302: No), the process of S4303 to S4306 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4307.

  When the small hit type is C or D (S4302: Yes), an opening scenario of the flow path solenoid 900k is set (S4303). Next, it is determined whether or not the small hit type is C (S4304). If the jackpot type is C (S4304: Yes), the jackpot type D is set as the jackpot type value when passing V, and the process proceeds to S4307.

  On the other hand, if the small hit type is not C (S4304: No), the big hit type D is set as the big hit type value at the time of passing V, and the process proceeds to S4307.

  When the processing of S4302, S4305, or S4306 is completed, the start of the small hit is set based on the small hit type (S4307). Next, the small hitting start flag 203w1 and the small hitting medium flag 203w2 are set to ON (S4308), and this process ends.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105) executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 128) in the fifth control example.

  In this start winning process (S105), the processes of S401 to 405 are executed as in the first control example described above. When the process of S405 is completed, various counter values are acquired, and the acquired values are stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area (S406). In S406, the value of the small hitting type counter C5 newly provided in this control example is also acquired and stored.

  Subsequently, the process of S407-S408 is performed. When the processing of S408 is completed, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter is smaller than 1 (S409). In the process of S409, in this control example, the upper limit of the number of holds in the lottery of the second special symbol is set to 1, so that the configuration is made in this way.

  In the processing of S409, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter is smaller than 1 (S409: Yes), the processing of S410 to S411 is executed as in the first control example. When the processing of S411 is completed, various counter values are acquired, and the acquired values are stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area (S412). In S412, similarly to the processing in S406 described above, the value of the small hit type counter C5 newly provided in this control example is also acquired and stored.

  When the processing of S407, S409, or S412 is completed, prefetch processing 2 (S440) is executed, and this processing ends.

  Next, the prefetch process 2 (S440) is demonstrated with reference to FIG. FIG. 135 shows a prefetch process 2 (S440) executed in the start winning process (see FIG. 134) instead of the prefetch process in S413 executed in the start winning process (see FIG. 66) in the first control example. It is a flowchart to show.

  In the prefetch process 2, it is first determined whether or not there is a new winning (S4401). If there is no new winning (S4401: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if there is a new winning (S4401: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the winning is a first special symbol winning (S4402).

  If it is determined in the process of S4402 that the winning is the winning of the first special symbol (S4402: Yes), based on the special symbol 1 random number table, the special symbol 1 big hit selection table, and the special symbol 1 small hit selection table The lottery result, the big hit type and the small win type are acquired (S4403), and the process proceeds to S4405.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4402 that the winning is the winning of the second special symbol (S4402: No), the special symbol 2 random number table, the special symbol 2 big hit selection table, and the special symbol 2 small hit selection table are displayed. Based on the lottery result, the jackpot type and the jackpot type are acquired (S4404), and the process proceeds to S4405.

  Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 128). In this normal symbol variation process (S106), since the change of the lottery probability in the normal symbol lottery is eliminated with respect to the first control example described above, the process of S640 is executed instead of the process of S608 to S611. The difference is that the processing of S641 to S644 is executed instead of the processing of S616 and the change of the variation time depending on whether the time is short or not (the processing of S619 and S621 is deleted). Since the other points are the same, the same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the normal symbol variation process (S106) in this control example, the processes of S601 to S607 are executed as in the first control example. When the process of S607 is completed, a lottery result is acquired based on the second random number table (S640). In this control example, there is no distinction between the high probability state and the low probability state in the normal symbol lottery, and the probability of winning the normal symbol is always constant.

  When the process of S640 is completed, the processes of S612 to S615 are executed as in the first control example. In the process of S614, it is determined that the time is short (S614: Yes), and in the process of S615, when it is determined that the special symbol is not big hit (S615: No), the normal symbol time initial flag 203y is on. It is determined whether or not there is (S641).

  In the process of S641, when it is determined that the normal symbol time initial flag 203y is on (S641: Yes), the first normal symbol variation process is executed in the assigned short time game. In order to win a lot of game balls in the two winning openings 640, the opening time and the number of times of the electric accessory 640a are set to “5 seconds × 1 time” (S642). As a result, the electric accessory 640 is opened for a long time (5 seconds), and during that time, the game ball passing through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is guided to the second winning port 640. Therefore, when the first normal symbol variation process in the short-time game is executed, a lot of game balls enter the second winning port 640, and the lottery based on the second winning port 640 (the lottery of the second special symbol) is suspended. The number of balls can be stored up to the upper limit (1 in this control example).

  When the process of S642 is completed, the normal symbol time initial flag 203y is set to OFF (S643), and the process proceeds to S620.

  On the other hand, in the process of S641, when it is determined that the normal symbol time initial flag 203y is off (S641: No), it is after the first normal symbol variation process is executed and based on the second winning a prize opening 640. Since the number of reserved balls in the lottery (the lottery of the second special symbol) is the upper limit (1 in this control example), the opening time and the number of times of the electric accessory 640a are “0.5 seconds × 2 times”. (S644), and the process proceeds to S620. As a result, the electric accessory is opened for a short period (0.5 seconds), during which only a part of the game balls passing through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is the second winning opening. It will be guided to 640. Therefore, at the time of execution of the normal symbol variation process after the first time in the short-time game, many game balls do not enter the second winning port 640 but can enter the V winning device 900 disposed below. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the game ball enters only the second winning port 640 and the game ball does not enter the V winning device 900 during the short-time game.

  In addition, the opening time (0.5 seconds) of the electric accessory 640a set in the process of S644 is that the game ball that has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 cannot enter the second winning port 640. It is not the time, but it is a time during which a part of the game balls that have passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 can enter. As a result, even when a game ball is not fired at the time of the first execution of the normal symbol variation process, the lottery based on the second winning opening 640 (the second special symbol of the second special symbol) is performed during the subsequent execution of the normal symbol variation process. The number of reserved balls for lottery can be stored up to the upper limit (1 in this control example). On the other hand, during the opening time (0.2 seconds) of the electric accessory 640a set in the process of S617, the game ball that has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 may enter the second winning port 640. It is impossible time. Thereby, when the short-time game is not given, it is possible to realize a game property in which a game ball is not allowed to enter the second winning port 640.

  When the process of S617, 643 or S644 is completed, the normal symbol variation time is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this process ends. Thereby, in this control example, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is fixed to 3 seconds regardless of whether the time is short or not.

  Note that the variation time of the normal symbol is not limited to this, and the time reduction function may be provided in conjunction with the time reduction function of the special symbol. For example, the change time may be set to 2 seconds during the time reduction. Further, in this control example, the condition for ending the operation of the electric accessory 640a is only the passage of time, but in addition to that, the electric accessory is subject to a predetermined number (for example, the upper limit number of reserved storage numbers) of balls. The operation of 640a may be terminated. In this way, when the reserved memory reaches the upper limit number, the electric accessory 640a immediately closes, and the first normal symbol time shortening operation ends. Then, the second and subsequent normal symbol time reduction operations are started. Therefore, when the small winning game is started when the V winning opening 900a of the V winning device 900 is opened, it is possible to prevent the electric accessory 640a from being opened for a long period of time, and the small winning game can be performed smoothly. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 137, the V inlet passage process (S140) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the V-entrance passing process (S140) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 128).

  In the V entrance passage processing (S140), it is first determined whether or not a small hit is being made (S4501). In the process of S4501, if it is determined that a small hit is being made (S4501: Yes), a V-entrance passage command is set (S4502), and this process ends. If it is not a small hit (S4502: No), since it is a case where a game ball has entered the V winning device 900 even though it is not a small hit game, an error command is set (S4503). finish.

  The V-entrance passage command set in the process of S4502 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the V-entrance passage command, it counts the game balls that have passed through the V-entrance and transmits a command for executing an effect based on the passage of the V-entrance to the display control device 114. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect during the small hit game based on the ball entering the V winning device 900 (see FIG. 122).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 138, the V passing process (S141) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the V passing process (S141). This V passing process (S141) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28).

  In the V passing process, first, a V hit jackpot type value is acquired (S4601). Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot C is satisfied (S4602). If the jackpot C is satisfied (S4602: Yes), the V flag 203x2 indicating the jackpot C is set to ON (S4603), and the process proceeds to S4604.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4602, when it is determined that the jackpot C does not correspond (S4602: No), it is then determined whether or not the jackpot D is satisfied (S4606). In the process of S4606, when it is determined that the jackpot D is met (S4606: Yes), the V flag 203x2 indicating the jackpot D is set to ON (S4607), and the process proceeds to S4604. When the process of S4603 or S4607 is completed, a V passing command is set (S4604), the hour / minute counter 203f is set to 0 (S4605), and this process ends. In the processing of S4605, the time-shortage game is ended by setting the time-shortage counter 203f to 0.

  In the process of S4606, if it is determined that the jackpot D does not correspond (S4606: No), an error command is set (S4608), and this process ends. In this control example, the gaming ball can pass through the V winning switch 900e3 of the V winning device 900 is a small hit C or a small hit D, and the big hit C or the big hit D is set as the big hit type value when the V passes. Only if there is. Accordingly, when the V passing jackpot type value is not jackpot C or jackpot D, if the V passing process (S141) executed based on the game ball passing the V winning switch 900e3 is executed, it is illegal. This is considered to be a case where a game ball is won to the V winning switch 900e3. In this case, by setting an error command in the processing of S4608, an error output is executed, and an illegal act can be found.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 139 is a flowchart of the main process in the fifth control example. In this main process, the jackpot control process 2 (S1040) is executed instead of the jackpot control process (S1004) in the first control example, and the jackpot control process (S1041) is executed after the jackpot control process 2 (S1040) is executed. Is different.

  The other processes of S1001 to S1003 and 1005 to S1015 are executed in the same manner as the processes of S1001 to S1003 and 1005 to S1015 of the main process (see FIG. 72) in the first control example, respectively. The detailed explanation is omitted.

  The jackpot control process 2 (S1040) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 2 (S1040) executed in the main process (see FIG. 139). This jackpot control process 2 (S1040) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 139). When the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state of a special symbol, execution of various effects according to the jackpot and the first variable This is a process for opening or closing the specific winning port 65a of the winning device 65.

  In the jackpot control process 2, it is first determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is started (S4701). Specifically, if the jackpot start flag 203v1 is set to ON by the process of S241 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 129), it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. In the process of S4701, when the special symbol jackpot is started (S4701: Yes), the jackpot start flag 203v1 is set to OFF (S4702), the opening command is set (S4703), and this process ends. .

  The jackpot start command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201, the sound lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the jackpot start command, it transmits the display jackpot start command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot start command, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect of starting the jackpot.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol jackpot is not started in the processing of S4701 (S4701: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is being hit (S4704). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. Specifically, the determination is made based on whether or not the big hit flag 203v2 is ON. In the process of S4704, if the special symbol is not big hit (S4704: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4704, if the special symbol is a big hit (4704: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S4705). If it is the start timing of a new round (S4705: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is opened (S4706), and a round number command indicating the newly started round number is set (S4707). . After the round number command is set, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it transmits a display round number command corresponding to the round number to the display control device 114. When a display round number command is received by the display control device 114, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  Although details will be described later, in this control example, when the continuous jackpot is executed in the audio lamp control device 113, a display round number command corresponding to the cumulative number of rounds is transmitted. Therefore, the number of rounds accumulated in the jackpot that is continued on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. Thereby, it is possible to make the player recognize that the jackpot has continued for a long time, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  On the other hand, if it is not the start timing of a new round in the process of S4705 (S4705: No), it is determined whether the closing condition for the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is satisfied (S4708). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is opened, or a predetermined number (for example, a total number of balls) is entered in the first variable winning device 65. 10) When winning, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the process of S4708, when the closing condition of the specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is satisfied (S4708: Yes), the specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is closed and this process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is not satisfied (S4708: No), it is determined whether or not it is the timing of the jackpot end (S4710). Specifically, when the special gaming state (all 16 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual is completed, it is determined that it is the timing of the jackpot end.

  In the processing of S4710, when it is the timing of the big hit (S4710: Yes), the big hit end command is set (S4711), and the big hit middle flag is set to OFF (S4712).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special game being executed was a big hit C (S4713). In the process of S4713, when it is determined that the jackpot C (16R time short and big hit) is determined (S4713: Yes), the hour / middle counter 203f is set to 99 (S4714), and the normal symbol time initial flag 203y is set to ON. In step S4715, the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4713, when it is determined that the big hit D (16R time short hit big hit) (S4713: No), the processes of S4714 and S4715 are skipped, and this process is terminated.

  The jackpot end command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201, the sound lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the jackpot end command, the sound lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the jackpot end effect based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display jackpot end command corresponding to the selected jackpot end display mode is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives a display jackpot end command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a jackpot end effect. On the other hand, in the process of S4710, when it is not the big hit end timing (S4710: No), this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 141, the small hit control process (S1041) will be described. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the small hit control process (S1041) executed in the main process (see FIG. 139). This small hitting control process (S1041) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 139). When the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol small hitting state, execution of various effects according to the small hitting, V This is a process for opening or closing the open / close door 900f1 of the winning device 900.

  In the small hit control process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol small hit is started (S4801). Specifically, if the small hitting start flag 203w1 is set to ON by the processing of S4308 of the small hitting start setting process (see FIG. 133), it is determined that the special symbol small hitting is started. In the process of S4801, when the special symbol small hitting is started (S4801: Yes), the small hitting start flag 203w1 is set to OFF (S4802), and the small hitting start command is set (S4803).

  The small hitting start command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201, the voice It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the small hitting start command, it transmits the display small hitting start command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display small hitting start command, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect for starting the small hitting.

  When the process of S4803 is completed, the V inlet solenoid and the flow path solenoid 900k are set to ON based on the open scenario (S4804), the operation of the staying member is started (S4805), and this process is terminated.

  The release scenario referred to in the process of S4804 is set in the above-described small hit start setting process (see FIG. 133), and the V inlet solenoid open scenario is set regardless of the small hit type, and the flow path solenoid The open scenario of 900k is set only when the small hit type is C or D. Therefore, the opening / closing door 900f1 of the V winning device 900 is opened in all the small hit games, and it becomes possible to allow the gaming ball to enter the V winning device 900. On the other hand, the game balls that have entered the V winning device 900 can flow down to the special discharge channel 900e2 only at the small hit C or D when the channel solenoid 900k is turned on. That is, the small hit C or D is a small hit type to which a big hit is given, and the small hit type C is a small hit type to which no big hit is given.

  In addition, the operation of the staying member is started (the staying solenoid 209a is turned on) in the process of S4805, so that one game ball can stay in the sorting destination area 900h3.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4801, when it is not the timing when the special symbol small hit is started (S4801: No), it is determined whether the special symbol small hit is being made (S4806). During the special symbol small hits, while the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol small hits (including during the special symbol small hit game), Includes a special symbol during the predetermined time after the small hit game ends. Specifically, the determination is made based on whether or not the small hitting medium flag 203w2 is on. If the special symbol is not being hit in the process of S4804 (S4804: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  In the process of S4806, if it is determined that a special symbol is being hit (S4806: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the V inlet closing condition is satisfied (S4807). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 6.5 seconds) elapses after the opening / closing door 900f1 of the V winning device 900 is opened, or a predetermined number of balls (for example, a total of 10) is placed on the V winning device 900. When winning, it is determined that the closing condition is established.

  The closing condition may be that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls have entered the V winning opening 900a.

  In the process of S4807, when the closing condition of the open / close door 900f1 of the V winning device 900 is satisfied (S4708: Yes), the V inlet solenoid is set to OFF in order to close the open / close door 900f1 of the V winning device 900 ( In step S4808), the staying solenoid 209a is set to OFF in order to end the operation of the staying member (S4809), and the process ends. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the open / close door 900f1 of the V winning device 900 is not satisfied (S4808: No), it is determined whether it is the timing of the end of the small hit (S4810). Specifically, it is determined that the small hitting end timing is reached after a lapse of a predetermined time (3 seconds in the present control example) after the above-described V inlet closing condition is established. As a result, after the operation of the stay member 900n is finished, the small hit end process (off of the flow path solenoid) can be executed, so that the game ball staying in the distribution destination area 900h3 is transferred to the V winning switch 900e3. It is possible to enter the ball with certainty.

  In the processing of S4810, when it is the timing of the small hit end (S4810: Yes), the small hit middle flag 203w2 is set to OFF (S4811), a small hit end command is set (S4811), and each solenoid is opened. The scenario is cleared (S4813), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4810, when it is not the timing of the end of the small hit (S4810: No), this process is ended as it is.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 142, details of the small hit end process (S4812) will be described. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the small hit end processing (S4812). This small hitting end process (S4812) is a process executed when it is determined that the small hitting end timing is reached in the small hitting control process.

  In the small hit end process (S4812), first, the flow path solenoid 900k is set to OFF (S4901), and it is determined whether or not the V flag 203x2 is ON (S4902). If it is determined in the process of S4902 that the V flag 203x2 is on (S4902: Yes), it is a case where the game ball has passed the V winning switch 900e3 of the V winning device 900 during the small hit game. Processing for starting execution of the jackpot game based on the passing of the winning switch 900e3 is performed.

  Specifically, the specific winning opening 65a release scenario is set based on the jackpot type corresponding to the V flag (S4903), and the jackpot start is set based on the jackpot type corresponding to the V flag (S4904). Next, the jackpot start flag 203v1 and the jackpot medium flag 203v2 are set to ON (S4905), the V flag 203x2 is set to OFF (S4906), and the process proceeds to S4908.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4902 that the V flag 203x2 is not on (S4902: No), it is a case where the game ball has not passed the V winning switch 900e3, so In order to end without executing, a small hit end command is set (S4907), and the process proceeds to S4909.

  The small hitting end command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201, the voice It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the jackpot end command, the sound lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the jackpot end effect based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display jackpot end command corresponding to the selected jackpot end display mode is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives a display jackpot end command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a jackpot end effect.

  When the processing of S4906 or S4907 is completed, the value of the V passing jackpot type value 203x1 is cleared (S4908), and this processing ends.

<Regarding Control Process Performed by Audio Lamp Control Device in Fifth Control Example>
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 143 to 145. This control example is different from the first control example described above in that a process based on reception of a hit-related command is executed in the command determination process 2 (S1530). Other parts are the same, and the same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 143, the command determination process 2 (S1530) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 2 (S1530). This command determination process (S1511) is a process for performing a process corresponding to the command received from the main controller 110, as in the first control example described above.

  In the command determination process 2 (S1530), the processes from S1601 to S1610 are executed as in the first control example. Thereafter, in the processing of S1609, if it is determined that the notification command has not been received (S1609), the winning information based on the received winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S1641), and S1619 Transition to processing. On the other hand, if no winning information command has been received (S1640: No), it is determined whether or not a win-related command has been received (S1642). When a hit-related command is received (S1643: Yes), a hit-related process is executed (S1643), and then the process proceeds to S1619. On the other hand, if it is determined that a hit-related command has not been received (S1642: No), the process of S1643 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1619.

  In the process of S1619, similar to the first control example, the process according to the other command is executed (S1619), and then this process is terminated.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 144, the hit-related processing (S1643) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the hit-related processing (S1643). This hit-related process (S1643) is a process executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see FIG. 143) that a hit-related command has been received.

  In the hit-related process, it is first determined whether or not a jackpot start command is received (S5001). If it is determined that a jackpot start command has been received (S5001: Yes), a display jackpot start command is set (S5002), and this process ends. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect (for example, FIG. 125 (b), FIG. 127) indicating the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S5001: No), it is then determined whether a round number command has been received (S5003). If it is determined in the process of S5003 that a round number command has been received (S5003: Yes), 1 is added to the round number cumulative counter 223k (S5004). Thereafter, a display round number command is set based on the round number cumulative counter 223k (S5005), and this process ends.

  If it is determined in step S5003 that the round number command has not been received (S5003: No), it is determined whether a jackpot end command has been received (S5006). In the process of S5006, when it is determined that the jackpot end command has been received (S5006: Yes), the display jackpot end command is set (S5007), and then it is determined whether or not the continuation determination counter 223m is zero. (S5008).

  In the process of S5008, when it is determined that the continuation determination counter 223m is 0 (S5008: Yes), it is a case where the jackpot D is executed twice in succession, and it is the timing when the continuation of the jackpot is finished. The round accumulation counter 223k is set to 0 (S5009), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5008, when it is determined that the continuation determination counter is not 0 (S5008: No), this process is ended as it is.

  If it is determined in step S5006 that a jackpot end command has not been received (S5006: No), it is determined whether a jackpot start command has been received (S5010).

  If it is determined in the processing of S5010 that a small hitting start command has been received (S5006: Yes), a display small hitting start command is set based on the small hitting type (S5011), and then the small hitting to be started is started. It is determined whether or not the game is a small hit C (S5012). In the process of S5012, when it is determined that the small hit game to be started is the small hit C (S5012: Yes), since the big hit game based on the big hit C is given thereafter, the number of consecutive executions of the big hit D is set. The continuation determination counter 223m for counting is initialized (set to 2) (S5013), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5012 that it is not the small hit C (S5012: No), it is then determined whether or not it is a small hit D (S5014). In the process of S5014, if it is determined that the jackpot D is (S5014: Yes), then the jackpot game based on the jackpot D is given, so the continuation determination counter for counting the number of consecutive executions of the jackpot D 223m is decremented by 1 (S5015), and this process ends. In the process of S5014, when it is determined that it is not the small hit D (S5014: No), this process is finished as it is.

  In the process of S5010, when it is determined that a small hitting start command has not been received (S5010: No), it is determined whether or not a small hitting end command has been received (S5016).

  In the process of S5016, if it is determined that a small hitting end command has been received (S5016: Yes), a display small hitting end command is set in order to execute an effect suggesting the end of the small hitting game (S5017). This process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5016, when it is determined that the small hit end command has not been received (S5016: No), it is determined whether or not a V-entrance passage command has been received (S5018).

  If it is determined in step S5018 that a V-entry passage command has been received (S5018: Yes), 1 is added to the V-entry passage counter 223j (S5019). The added V entrance passage counter 223j is referred to in order to determine the number of game balls that have entered the V winning device 900 during the small hit game in the V passage process described later.

  When the processing of S5109 is completed, a display V-entrance passing command for display is set in order to execute an effect (for example, see FIG. 125 (a)) based on entering the V winning device 900 during the small hit game (S5020). ), This process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5018 that a V-entry passage command has not been received (S5018: No), it is determined whether a V-passing command has been received (S5021).

  If it is determined in the process of S5021 that the V pass command has been received (S5021: Yes), the V pass process is executed in order to execute a process based on entering the V winning switch 900e3 of the V winning device 900. (S5022), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5021 that the V passing command has not been received (S5021: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 145, the V passing process (S5022) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the V passing process (S5022). This V passing process (S5022) is a process executed when it is determined that the V passing command is received in the hit related process (see FIG. 144).

  In the V passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the small hit game being executed is the small hit C (S5101). If it is determined in the process of S5101 that it is a small hit C (S5101: Yes), it is then determined whether or not there is a hold (S5102).

  If it is determined in the processing of S5102 that there is no winning hit (S5102: No), there is no big hit or small hit based on the holding ball, but a big hit C is given based on the passing of the V winning switch 900e3. is there. Here, the jackpot C is a jackpot with a short time, and the probability of becoming a jackpot C or D in the short game at that time (that is, the jackpot C or D thereafter) is “397/399”. Therefore, in order to execute the 2V effect, which is an effect that suggests that there is a high probability that the jackpot game will be given continuously for two consecutive times, a display 2V effect command is set (S5105), and the process proceeds to S5106.

  The display 2V effect command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display 2V command, the display control device 114 displays an effect on the third symbol display device 81 that suggests that there is a high probability that the jackpot game will be given in succession.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5102 that there is a hold (S5102: Yes), a big win C is awarded based on the passing of the V winning switch 900e3, and a big hit or a small win based on the held ball is given. This is the case. That is, there is a high probability that the jackpot game will be executed for two consecutive times, and the jackpot game is executed based on the small hits in the hold, so there is a high probability that the jackpot game will be awarded for three consecutive times.

  Here, in the processing of S5102, when it is determined that there is a small hit in the hold (S5102: Yes), it is determined whether or not the V inlet passage counter 223j is greater than 5 (S5103).

  In the process of S5103, when it is determined that the V entrance passage counter 223j is greater than 5 (S5103: Yes), an effect suggesting that there is a high probability that the jackpot game will be awarded in three consecutive times (for example, FIG. 127 (b )) Is executed, a display 3V effect command is set (S5104), and the process proceeds to S5106. On the other hand, if it is not determined that the V entrance passage counter 223j is greater than 5 (S5103: No), the game ball has entered the V winning device 900, for example, the game ball has not been sufficiently fired during the small hit game. This is the case when the ball is not enough. In this case, in this control example, the processing of S5105 is executed to shift to the processing of S5106 so as not to display an effect suggesting that the probability that the jackpot game will be awarded in three consecutive times is high. Thereby, even when the number of winning balls based on the winning in the V winning device 900 is small, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to enter the gaming ball into the V winning device 900.

  The display 3V effect command set in the process of S5015 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 and is included in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221. Then, it is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display 3V command, the display control device 114 displays an effect (for example, see FIG. 127 (b)) on the third symbol display device 81, which suggests that there is a high probability that the jackpot game will be given three consecutive times. To do.

  In the process of S5101, if it is determined that the small hit game being executed is not the small hit C (S5101: No), it is determined whether or not there is a hold (S5107). If it is determined in the processing of S5107 that there is a hold (S5107: Yes), it is then determined whether or not it is a small hit C (S5108).

  In the process of S5108, when it is determined that there is a small hit C in the hold (S5108: Yes), a big hit game based on the V passing is executed, and the small hit C is given based on the held ball (that is, 2 It is highly likely that a consecutive jackpot game will be awarded). Therefore, in this case, in order to execute an effect (for example, see FIG. 127 (b)) that suggests that there is a high probability that the jackpot game will be given in three consecutive times, a display 3V effect command is set (S5109). The process proceeds to S5106.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5108, when it is determined that the hold is not the small hit C (S5108: No), the big hit game based on the V passage is executed, and the small hit D is given based on the held ball (ie, 1 jackpot game is awarded). Therefore, in this case, in order to execute an effect that suggests that the jackpot game is awarded in succession, a display 2V effect command is set (S5110), and the process proceeds to S5106.

  If it is determined in step S5107 that the game is not on hold (S5107: No), it is not a case where the jackpot game is continuously executed after the execution of the jackpot game based on the V passage. In order to execute an effect that suggests that the display has occurred, a display V effect command is set (S5111), and the process proceeds to S5106.

  The display V effect command set in the process of S5111 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221. Then, it is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display V command, the third symbol display device 81 provides an effect indicating that the big hit game is given based on the fact that the game ball has passed the V winning switch 900e3 in the small hit game. indicate.

  When the processing of S5104, S5105, S5109, S5110, or S5111 is completed, the V inlet passage counter is set to 0 (S5106), and this processing ends.

<Control processing executed by display control device in fifth control example>
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 146 to 152. The fifth control example is different from the first control example described above in that a hit related command process is executed when a hit related command is received. Since the other parts are the same, the same reference numerals are given to the same parts, and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, the command determination process (S2302) in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the command determination process (S2302). This command determination process (S2302) is a process for determining a command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and performing a process according to the determined command.

  In the command determination process (S2302), the processes of S2401 to S2413 are executed as in the first control example described above. Next, in the processing of S2412, when it is determined that there is no command indicating long press (S2412: No), it is determined whether there is a hit related command (S2440).

  If it is determined in the processing of S2440 that there is a hit related command (S2440: Yes), the hit related command processing is executed (S2441), and the process returns to S2401. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2440 that there is no hit-related command (S2440: No), other command processing is executed (S2419), and the processing returns to S2401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 147, details of the hit-related command processing (S2441) will be described. This hit-related command process (S2441) is a process executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see FIG. 146) that there is a hit-related command.

  In the winning related command process (S2441), first, it is determined whether or not there is a display jackpot start command (S5201). When it is determined in the process of S5201 that there is a display start hit command (S5201: Yes), the big hit start command process is executed (S5202), and the process proceeds to S5203.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 148 (a), the details of the jackpot start command processing (S5202) will be described. FIG. 148 (a) is a flowchart showing the jackpot start command processing (S5202). This jackpot start command process (S5202) is a process executed when it is determined that there is a display jackpot start command in the hit related command process (FIG. 147). This is a process for displaying on the symbol display device 81.

  In the jackpot start command process (S5202), first, a jackpot start display data table corresponding to the command (for example, corresponding to the jackpot type) is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5301). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the jackpot start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5302). Thereafter, the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the jackpot start display data table (S5303), the pointer 233f is initialized (S5304), the demo display flag and the final display flag are set to OFF (S5305), This process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 147, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S5201 that there is no display jackpot start command (S5201: No), the process proceeds to S5203. When the process of S5201 or S5202 is finished, it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command (S5203). If it is determined in step S5203 that there is a display round number command, round number command processing is executed (S5204), and the process proceeds to step S5205.

  Details of the round number command process (S5204) will be described with reference to FIG. 148 (b). FIG. 148 (b) is a flowchart showing the round number command processing (S5204). This round number command process (S5204) is a process executed when it is determined that the display round number command is received in the hit related command process (FIG. 147), and the number of rounds in the jackpot game is updated. This is a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display an effect at the time of display.

  In the round number command processing (S5204), first, a round number display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5401). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5402), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the round number display data table (S5403). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5404), the demonstration display flag and the final display flag are set to OFF (S5405), and this process is terminated.

  Returning to FIG. 147, the description will be continued. In the process of S5203, when it is determined that there is no display round number command (S5203: No), the process proceeds to S5205. When the processing of S5203 or S5204 is finished, it is determined whether or not a display jackpot end command has been received (S5205).

  In the process of S5205, if it is determined that there is a display jackpot end command (S5205: Yes), the jackpot end command process is executed (S5206), and the process proceeds to S5207.

  Here, the details of the jackpot end command process (S5206) will be described with reference to FIG. 149 (a). FIG. 149 (a) is a flowchart showing the jackpot end command processing (S5206). This jackpot end command process (S5206) is a process executed when it is determined in the command determination process (FIG. 147) that a jackpot end command has been received, and an effect suggesting the end of the jackpot game is displayed on the third symbol display. This is a process for displaying on the device 81.

  In the jackpot end command process (S5206), first, a jackpot end display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5501). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5502), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the jackpot end display data table (S5503). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5504), the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S5505), and this process is terminated.

  Returning to FIG. 147, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S5205 that there is no display jackpot end command, the process of S5206 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5207.

  When the process of S5205 or S5206 is finished, it is determined whether or not there is a display small hit start command (S5207). In the process of S5207, if it is determined that there is a display small hitting start command (S5207: Yes), the small hitting start command process is executed (S5208), and the process proceeds to S5209.

  Details of the small hitting start command process (S5208) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 149 (b) is a flowchart showing the small hitting start command process (S5208). This small hitting start command process (S5208) is a process executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see FIG. 147) that the small hitting start command has been received, and an effect suggesting the start of the small hitting game is provided. This is a process for displaying on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the small hitting start command process (S5208), first, a small hitting start display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5601). Next, the transfer data table buffer corresponding to the small hitting start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5602). Thereafter, the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the small hitting start display data table (S5603), the pointer 233f is initialized (S5604), and the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S5605). This process is terminated.

  Returning to FIG. 147, the description will be continued. In the process of S5207, when it is determined that there is no display small hitting start command (S5207: No), the process of S5208 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5209.

  When the processing of S5207 or S5208 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a display small hitting end command (S5209). If it is determined that there is a small hit end command in the process of S5209 (S5209: Yes), the small hit end command process is executed (S5210), and the process proceeds to S5211.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 150A, details of the small hit end command processing (S5210) will be described. FIG. 150A is a flowchart showing the small hit end command processing (S5210). This small hitting end command process (S5210) is a process executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see FIG. 147) that the small hitting end command has been received, and an effect suggesting the end of the small hitting game. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the small hit end command processing (S5210), first, a small hit end display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5701). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5702), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the small hit end display data table (S5703). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5704), the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S5705), and this process is terminated.

  Returning to FIG. 147, the description will be continued. In the process of S5209, when it is determined that the display small hitting end command has not been received (S5209: No), the process of S5210 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5211.

  When the processing of S5209 or S5210 is finished, it is determined whether or not there is a display V inlet passage command (S5211). If it is determined in step S5211 that there is a display V-entrance passage command (S5211: Yes), V-entrance passage command processing is executed (S5212), and the process proceeds to step S5213.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 150B, details of the V inlet passage command process (S5212) will be described. FIG. 150B is a flowchart showing the V entrance passage command process (S5212). This V entrance passage command process (S5212) is a process executed when it is determined in the command determination process (FIG. 147) that the V entrance passage command has been received, and to the V winning device 900 during the small hit game. This is a process for displaying on the third symbol display device 81 an effect based on the incoming game ball.

  In the V entrance passage command processing (S5212), first, the V entrance passage display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5801). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5802), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the V inlet passage display data table (S5803). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5804), the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S5805), and this process is terminated.

  Returning to FIG. 147, the description will be continued. If it is determined in step S5211 that there is no display V-entrance passage command (S5211: No), step S5212 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S5213.

  When the processing of S5211 or S5212 is finished, it is determined whether or not there is a 3V display command for display (S5213). In the process of S5213, when it is determined that there is a display 3V effect command (S5213: Yes), the 3V effect command process (S5214) is executed, and the process proceeds to S5215.

  Here, the details of the 3V effect command processing (S5214) will be described with reference to FIG. 151 (a). FIG. 151 (a) is a flowchart showing 3V effect command processing (S5214). The 3V effect command process (S5214) is a process executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see FIG. 147) that the display 3V effect command has been received. Is a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display an effect that suggests that the third symbol display device 81 is to be continued three times).

  Specifically, as described above, the 3V effect command for display is given a big hit when the game ball passes the V winning switch 900e3 of the V winning device 900 and becomes a big hit C during the small hit game. When there is a holding ball of the second special symbol, it is received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the 3V effect command processing (S5214), first, a 3V effect display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5901). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5902), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the 3V effect display data table (S5903). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5904), the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S5905), and this process is terminated.

  Returning to FIG. 147, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S5213 that there is no display 3V effect command (S5213: No), the process of S5214 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5215.

  When the processing of S5213 or S5214 is finished, it is determined whether or not there is a display 2V effect command (S5215). In the process of S5215, when it is determined that there is a display 2V effect command (S5215: Yes), the 2V effect command process is executed (S5216), and the process proceeds to S5217.

  Here, the details of the 2V effect command processing (S5216) will be described with reference to FIG. 151 (b). FIG. 151 (b) is a flowchart showing 2V effect command processing (S5216). This 2V effect command process is a process executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see FIG. 147) that the 2V effect command for display has been received. This is a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display an effect suggesting that it is “continuation”.

  Specifically, as described above, the display 2V effect command is given a jackpot when the game ball passes the V winning switch 900e3 of the V winning device 900 during the small hit game, and becomes the big hit D. When there is a holding ball of the second special symbol, it is received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the 2V effect command process (S5216), first, a 2V effect display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6001). Next, the transfer data table buffer is cleared (S6002), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the 2V effect display data table (S6003). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized (S6004), the demonstration display flag and the final display flag are set to OFF (S6005), and this process is terminated.

  Returning to FIG. 147, the description will be continued. In the process of S5215, when it is determined that there is no display 2V effect command (S5215: No), the process of S5216 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5217.

  When S5215 or S5216 is finished, it is determined whether or not there is a display V effect command (S5217). If it is determined in the process of S5217 that there is a display V effect command (S5217: Yes), the V effect command process is executed (S5218), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5217 that there is no display V effect command (S5217: No), there is no command to be executed as a hit-related command, and thus this process ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 152, the details of the V effect command process (S5218) will be described. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the V effect command process (S5218). The V effect command process (S5218) is a process executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see FIG. 147) that the display V effect command has been received. This is a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display an effect suggesting that (the game ball has passed the V winning switch 900e3).

  In the V effect command process (S5218), first, a V effect display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6101). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S6102), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the V effect display data table (S6103). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized (S6104), the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S6105), and this process is terminated.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example, based on the lottery result of the first special symbol, the state shifts to a state where it is easy to receive the lottery of the second special symbol (short-time gaming state). 2. A game that provides a jackpot by opening the V winning device 900 based on the lottery result of 2 special symbols and passing through a specific area (special discharge channel 900e2) in the V winning device 900 (passing the V winning switch 900e4). It has.

  The pachinko machine 10 having such game characteristics includes a plurality of technical configurations for preventing the game balls from entering or passing through various devices other than the proper game order.

  First, the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not provided on the left side of the game board 13 so that the second winning opening 640 is not opened in the normal game state (game aiming at the left side of the game board 13). It was provided only on the right side. Second, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 in the normal game state, the game ball is likely to enter the second winning port (the electric accessory 640a is opened). However, the time (0.2 seconds) when the game ball is difficult to enter is set as the time when the electric accessory 640a is in the open state in the normal game state. Third, a game ball falling area a that catches a game ball that has flowed down (naturally dropped) to the electric accessory 640a and a game ball that has been rolling from the game ball falling area a are received and guided to the second winning port 640. It is possible to provide a game ball guiding area b that is capable of being ballistically dropped from the game board 13 and is not buffered, and it is necessary for the game ball to roll in the game ball guiding area b and win the second winning opening 640. The opening time of the electric accessory 640a is shortened from time. Fourthly, as a result of the lottery of the first special symbol by the main control device 110, when a so-called small win is selected that is not a big hit but the V winning device 900 is opened, a special discharge flow provided with a V winning switch 900e4 is provided. In order to prevent the game ball from flowing down to the path 900e2, two switching members 900h and a staying member 900n are provided. The configuration is as follows. By using all or part of such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game balls from entering or passing through various devices other than the proper game order.

  In the fifth control example, the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the second winning port 640 (the electric accessory 640a), the V winning device 900, and the first variable winning device 65 from the upstream side of the flow path of the game ball. Although it is arranged as (special winning opening 65a), the arrangement of various devices provided in the game board 13 may be appropriately changed. In order to prevent an unexpected situation from occurring when a game ball enters the second winning opening 640 or the V winning device 900 during the right-handed jackpot game, a normal symbol start opening (through The first variable winning device 65 may be provided on the upstream side of the game ball flow path with respect to all or part of the gate) 67, the second winning port 640, and the V winning device 900. With this configuration, during the jackpot game, the launched game ball enters the first variable winning device 65 on the upstream side of the flow path of the game ball. The ball can be prevented from entering, and the game ball can be prevented from entering or passing through various devices other than the proper game order. In order to prevent more reliably, the opening and closing plate of the first variable prize-winning device 65 provided on the upstream side of the game ball flow path is opened, so that the entrances or passage openings of various devices provided on the downstream side are opened. It should be closed. In the unlikely event that a game ball enters or passes through various devices other than in an appropriate game order, it is based on detection signals from various switches for detecting the game balls provided in the various devices and the current game state. It is good to notify. As for the notification contents at that time, when a game ball is detected in the V winning device 900 directly related to the jackpot game in the normal game state, an abnormality notification is made, and the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 passes in the normal game state. If detected, changing the status notification and the urgency of the notification makes it possible for the game shop clerk to quickly detect a situation that may be detrimental to the game hall. Note that the abnormality notification is a notification in which the sound is louder than the game volume and also outputs a signal to the outside, and the state notification is a notification instructing a normal way of hitting on the liquid crystal of the third symbol display device. Conceivable.

  Furthermore, in this control example, the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the second winning port 640 (electrical accessory 640a), the V winning device 900, the first variable winning device 65 (specific) from the upstream side of the game ball flow path. However, in order to smoothly enter the game ball into the V winning device 900 during the small hit game, the V winning device 900 is located above the second winning port 640 (the electric accessory 640a). May be provided. By configuring in this way, even if the electric accessory 640a is variably operated during the small hit game and is in the open state, the entry of the game ball into the V winning device 900 is not affected. In addition, a V winning device may be provided above the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game ball from passing through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 during the small hit game, so that the electric accessory 640a can be variably operated during the small hit game. It is possible to prevent the game ball from entering, and there is no influence on the game ball entering the V winning device 900.

  Further, in this control example, a game ball to be inserted into the V winning device 900 at the time of a small hit game is used by delaying the flow of the gaming ball on the gaming ball rolling surface on the V winning device 900 and the upper surface of the opening / closing door 900f1. However, in addition to this, for example, the V winning device is a rotating body having ten pockets in which one game ball can be placed, one of which is provided on the game board 13. The V-pocket is provided with an opening that communicates with the special discharge path 900e2, and the game ball that enters the tenth ball at the start of the small hit game is stored in the V-pocket, or the game ball is placed in the V-winning device. There may be a configuration in which a storage space is provided and the game ball passes through the V winning switch 900e3 only when a predetermined number (10) of the game balls stay in the space. In addition, a control and a configuration may be used in which game balls that roll on the electric accessory 640a are collectively entered into the V winning device 900 by using the advance / retreat operation of the electric accessory 640a.

  It should be noted that a game ball may be smoothly inserted into the V winning device 900 during a small hit game by limiting the number of times of normal symbols. Specifically, the normal symbol variation time (for example, 3 seconds) and the operating time of the electric accessory 640a (for example, 2 seconds) are shorter than the variation time (for example, 22 seconds) of the second special symbol whose lottery result is a small hit. The range in which the time (for example, 5 seconds) that is added is reduced may be set to the number of time reductions (in the case of the above example, the number of time reductions is 4 times). By configuring in this way, since the short-time game of the normal symbol is completed at the time of the small hit game, the time for the electric accessory 640a to variably operate during the small hit game can be shortened. In addition, when the small hit game is started, control may be performed to extend the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, prohibit the variable operation of the electric accessory 640a, and change it to short-term release (0.2 seconds). Then, when the reserved memory of the second special symbol has reached the upper limit, the control time for extending the fluctuation time of the normal symbol or prohibiting the variable operation of the electric accessory 640a and changing it to short-term release (0.2 seconds) May be performed. In addition to the control to end the time-saving game internally and return to the normal game internally, the normal symbol time-shortage here means shortening the variation time only for the first predetermined number of times in the normal symbol time-saving game, After the predetermined number of times, the variable time is set to be long, or the variable operation time of the electric accessory 640a is set to be long only for the first predetermined number of times, and after the predetermined number of times, the variable operation time is set to be short. This is a concept that includes all of the controls that make it easy for a game ball to enter the second winning opening 640.

  Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example has a holding storage function (special symbol 2 holding ball counter 223c) for holding the lottery of the second special symbol. Since the reserved memory is an important configuration for maintaining the gameability of the present control example, the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example has a plurality of technical configurations for storing the reserved memory.

  First, the story displayed in the effect area of the third symbol display device 81 in the short-time gaming state is developed based on winning in the second winning opening 640. Secondly, the variation time of 10 seconds (FIG. 120 (d)) of the second special symbol, in which the lottery result in the short-time game is a small hit, is made longer than the variation time of 3 seconds (S620) of the normal symbol. The configuration is as follows. By using all or part of such a configuration, it is possible to store the reserved memory. Regarding the second configuration described above, in the present control example, the variation time of the normal symbol is made constant regardless of whether or not the time-short game is being played, but the variation time of the normal symbol during the time-short game is other than during the time-short game ( It may be set shorter than the normal game). However, in that case, it is necessary to set the variation time of the second special symbol in which the lottery result during the short-time game is a small hit longer than the normal symbol variation time during the normal game. That is, in general, in the pachinko machine, the time-shortening function is canceled during the big hit game, and the normal symbol fluctuates with the fluctuation time based on the normal game state. Therefore, in the short-time game after the end of the jackpot game, the electric symbol 640a does not operate unless the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the normal game elapses at the maximum, and the game ball can enter the second winning opening. It becomes impossible. In the meantime, if the variation of the second special symbol is confirmed and a big hit occurs via the small bonus, it becomes impossible to store the reserved memory of the second special symbol which is a feature of this control example. Will occur. In order to solve such a problem, the variation time of the second special symbol and the variation time of the normal symbol are set to the above-described times.

  In the above description, the special symbol variation time is set to be longer than the normal symbol variation time. However, the second special symbol variation time and the small hitting game (V The total time of the game ball until the winning switch 900e4 is detected) may be set longer than the normal symbol variation time during the normal game. This is because the small hit game is in the short-time game state. However, in this case, it is necessary to continue the small hit game for a predetermined period by using a configuration in which a ball flowing down to the special discharge path 900e2 is retained in the V winning device as in this control example. In the unlikely event that the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol becomes zero during the short-time game, the first special symbol may start to change. It is preferable to perform highlighting so as to make a hit, or to perform voice guidance using the voice lamp control device 113.

  In this control example, as shown in FIG. 117 (c), the lottery result of the second special symbol includes some big wins or misses, but all of them may be assigned to the small wins. By doing so, the reserved memory for the special symbol will always be a big hit via the V winning device, the speed of the game can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the present control example, the first variable winning device 65 (specific winning port 65a) that is opened when playing the big hit game and the V winning device 900 are provided in different configurations. The apparatus 900 may be provided. In that case, during the big hit game, the game ball that has entered the V winning device 900 is caused to flow down to the normal discharge channel as shown in FIG. 113A using the switching member 900h. By doing so, the number of devices can be reduced, and it is possible to reduce costs and save space. Further, it may be configured to use the normal discharge channel 900e1 and the special discharge channel 900e2 in the V winning device 900 to determine whether or not to give a short-time game after the end of the jackpot game. In this case, when the game ball flows down to the special discharge flow path 900e2, time is given. In this case, the switching control of the switching member 900h may be determined in advance based on the first special symbol or the lottery of 2, or the switching member 900h is moved at regular intervals to discharge the flow. You may make it switch a path | route. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which determines whether the technical change of the said 1st control example-the 4th control example is given, and whether change is given.

  Further, the number of discharge channels in the V winning device 900 is not limited to two, and may be configured to be three or more according to the number of functions. Furthermore, the switching member that switches each discharge channel is not limited to the configuration of the present control example, and may be any configuration that can switch the channel.

  In this control example, the number of rounds provided by the jackpot based on the detection of the game ball by the V winning switch 900e4 is fixed to 16 rounds, but the number of rounds of the jackpot may be changed as appropriate, You may set the jackpot without time (less than 2 rounds). By doing so, it is possible to provide a gameability (a so-called time-span falling function) in which time saving is completed without acquiring a large amount of balls. Furthermore, in this control example, a configuration is made in which a big hit is always made when a game ball is made to enter the V winning device 900 that has been opened during the short-time game, but it is distributed to the small hit E (see FIG. 119 (C)). May be provided.

  By using each of the above-described components, a winning game is obtained because a pattern in which there are few balls and the winning time can be added to the result of entering the V winning device 900 during the shortening game. When you do, the player can be angry.

  In addition, in this control example, whether or not to give a short-time game after the jackpot ends is decided based on the small hit type (a jackpot type in the case of writing). Depending on the current game state (whether or not the time is short), if the jackpot is not granted after the jackpot ends, and if the jackpot is played during a non-temporary game, the time is always granted after the jackpot ends. In addition, it is possible to perform control for determining whether or not the time is given after the end of the jackpot. Even in such a control, whether or not to give a short-time game after the big win is set based on the lottery result (small hit or miss) of the second special symbol.

  In addition, what is necessary is just to set suitably about the number which can hold the lottery of the 2nd special symbol, and various games by changing the lottery pending storage number of the 2nd special symbol and the small lottery probability of the 2nd special symbol It becomes possible to have sex.

<Modification of fifth control example>
Hereinafter, a modified example of the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIG. In the present modification, the number of the second special symbol lottery that can be stored on hold is increased (for example, four), and the probability per special 2 based on the second special symbol lottery is decreased (for example, 1/6). 117 (C) is a pattern in which the value C1 corresponding to the small hit determination value is decreased and the deviation is increased). By doing so, there is no guarantee that the special 2 wins will occur twice, but many lotteries of the second special symbol with a higher expectation degree of big hit than the first special symbol can be received, so depending on the lottery result It is possible to increase the possibility of acquiring the consecutive villas and to improve the interest of the game. In addition, by prefetching the lottery results stored on hold, it is possible to provide a blissful effect for the player, such as a quadruple villa confirmation effect.

<Sixth control example>
Next, a sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 154 to 156. In the sixth control example, the detour member 660 is arranged on the upper part of the first variable winning device 65, and when the game ball is shot to the right of the game area (right-handed), the open / close door 65f1 is closed. In some cases, the game ball is configured to roll up to about 12 balls on the open / close door 65f1. Furthermore, it differs from the first control example in that the internal configuration of the first variable winning device 65 is changed with respect to the first control example. Since other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 154 is an enlarged perspective view of a part of the game board 13 (a part where the detour member 660 is disposed). The detour member 660 is inserted into an opening formed in the game board 13, and is fixed to the game board 13 with screws in a state in which a flow path through which a game ball can flow down projects from the front side of the game board 13. . The detour member 660 includes a flow path wall portion 660a that faces the game board 13 in the front-rear direction.

  The flow path wall 660a includes a front-side flow path wall 660a1 and a rear-side flow path wall 660a2, and the front-side flow path wall 660a1 and the rear-side flow path wall 660a2 are formed on the bottom surface. They are partly connected and formed integrally. As shown in FIG. 154, the front side wall portion 660a1 is arranged with an interval of two or more game balls each projecting to the rear side (at least 2.5 game balls in this control example). ing. Further, the rear side wall portion 660a2 is formed with three wall portions projecting to the front side, and the interval between the respective wall portions is configured in the same manner as the front side wall portion.

  The front side wall part 660a1 and the rear side wall part 660a2 are configured such that the protruding wall part of the front side wall part 660a1 is inserted in the center between the protruding wall parts of the rear side wall part 660a2, and the front side wall part 660a1 and the rear side wall part 660a2 It is arranged at a position where game balls can pass between them. The detour member 660 has a bottom surface that is slightly inclined downward from the right to the left. When the open / close door 65f1 is closed, the bottom surface is closed, and the game ball detours on the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1. The road member 660 rolls while meandering in the front-rear direction of the game board 13. Further, a connecting part 660k that connects the front side wall part 660a1 and the rear side wall part 660a2 at the bottom face connects each wall part to the rear side wall part 660a2 from the entrance part of the detour member 660 and each protruding wall of the front side wall part 660a1. It is formed as follows. The connecting portion 660k slightly protrudes from the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 to form a step even when the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed, and thus reduces the rolling speed of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1.

  The rolling speed of the game ball is reduced by the connecting portion 660k, and the game ball meanders and rolls from the front side to the rear side of the game board 13 by the detour member 660, so that the game ball is placed on the open / close door 65f1. The number of rolls can be increased. In the detour member 660 in this control example, the distance between the front side wall portion 660a1 and the rear side wall portion 660a2 is configured by 2.5 game balls. Here, two game balls enter the first detour channel portion 660c2 formed by being surrounded by the wall portion protruding from the front side wall portion 660a1 and the wall portion protruding from the rear side wall portion 660a2 in the front-rear direction. It consists of a flow path. Since five similar flow paths are formed to communicate with each other, a maximum of 12 game balls can roll inside the detour member 660.

  As a result, when the big hit game is started and the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened, the gaming ball that has flowed down on the opening / closing door 65f1 can be configured to enter the first variable winning device 65. The game balls can be entered in a short time. Further, as will be described later, in the first variable winning device 65 in this control example, each time a game ball passes through the normal discharge flow path 65e1, the special discharge flow path 65e2 is set by rotating the rotation piece 650a. The open piece 650i to be closed is moved little by little in a direction (left direction in FIG. 155) that opens the special discharge channel 65e2. When nine game balls pass through the normal discharge flow path 65e4, the open piece 650i is moved to a position where the game balls can pass through the special discharge flow path 65e2. Therefore, when the open / close door 65f1 is in an open state while nine or more game balls are rolling on the detour member 660, it is possible to make the game ball flowable down to the special discharge path 65e2. Therefore, it is possible to pass the game ball through the probability change switch 65e3, and the player can be given a probability change game state. As a result, the player places a large number of game balls before the jackpot start so that the game balls roll more on the bypass member 660 at the timing when the jackpot game starts. A game can be played to fire towards 660. Therefore, even in a jackpot game in which the opening time of the open / close door 65f1 is set to a short time, it is possible to cause the player to play a game by consuming a large amount of game balls. Therefore, the profit on the game store side can be increased. Furthermore, even if it is a short hit game, the interest can be increased.

  Next, the first variable winning device 65 will be described with reference to FIG. In this control example, a flow path opening device 650 is provided in place of the switching member 65h and the flow path solenoid 65k that moves the switching member 65h with respect to the first variable winning device 65 in the first control example. Is different.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 156, the details of the flow path opening device 650 will be described. FIG. 156 is a perspective view showing a schematic diagram of the flow path opening device 650. The flow path opening member 650 includes an open piece 650i that opens and closes the special discharge flow path 65e2, a spring wire 650h for moving the open piece 650i, a rotating drum 650b that rotates and winds the spring wire 650h, and a rotating drum 650b. Is constituted by a turning piece 650a for turning the turning drum 650b in a fixed direction, and a movable solenoid 650c for moving a restriction piece 650d for restricting turning of the turning drum 650b in the front-rear direction.

  As shown in FIG. 155, the open piece 650i is formed in a door shape so as to close the upstream opening of the special discharge flow path 65e2, and is held by the first variable prize winning device 65 so as to be slidable left and right. One end of a spring wire 650h is attached to one end side of the open piece 650i. The spring wire 650h is composed of a stainless steel fine wire, and is composed of a coiled spring in the middle. The coil spring 650h is always attached so that the open piece 650i is biased in a direction to close the special discharge channel 65e2. The other end side of the coil spring 650h is attached to the wire attachment portion 650f of the rotating drum 650b, and the rotating wire 650b rotates in the direction of winding up the spring wire 650h (right rotation direction in FIG. 156). The open piece 650i is wound around the rotary drum 650b and pulled by the spring wire 650h, and the open piece 650i is moved by a predetermined amount.

  The rotating piece 650a is always disposed so as to protrude into the normal discharge channel 65e4. The rotating piece 650a is engaged with the shaft portion of the rotating drum 650b, and has a one-way clutch structure in which the rotating drum 650b rotates only in the direction of winding the spring wire 650h. When the game ball comes into contact with the turning piece 650a and the turning piece 650a is turned downward (see FIG. 155), the turning drum 650h is wound up by a predetermined angle (90 degrees in this control example) by the spring wire 650h. After being rotated in the direction, it is configured to rotate back to a position (a position shown in FIG. 155) before contacting the game ball by an urging force applied to the rotation piece 650a. When the rotating piece 650a is reversed and returned, the rotating drum 650b is not rotated but only the rotating piece 650a is rotated. Here, as shown in FIG. 156, stopper members 650e1 to e4 protruding rearward (rearward of the pachinko machine 10) are attached to the rotating drum 650b. The stopper members 650e1 to e4 are respectively attached to the outer peripheral side of the rotating drum 650b every 90 degrees. The stopper members 650e1 to e4 are configured to come into contact with the regulating piece 650d. When the regulating piece 650d comes into contact with any one of the stopper members 65e1 to e4, the direction opposite to the direction in which the rotating drum 650b winds up the spring wire 650h. Is restricted from rotating. On the other hand, when the rotating drum 650b rotates in the direction to wind up the spring wire 650h, the restricting piece 650d changes in the rotating direction by coming into contact with the stopper members 650e1 to e4, and the stopper members 65e1 to e4 are left of the restricting member 650d. In a state where it is allowed to be positioned (see FIG. 156), the rotation in the direction opposite to the direction in which the wire is wound up in a state where the stopper members e1 to e4 are positioned on the left side is restricted.

  Thereby, when the game ball flowing down the normal discharge flow path 65e4 rotates the rotating piece 650a, and the rotating drum 650b is rotated 90 degrees by the rotating piece 650a, the stopper members 650e1 to e4 are regulated. By being restricted by the rotation position by 650d, the rotation drum 650h is held at the rotated position. When the next game ball flows down the normal discharge channel 65e4, the same operation is repeated, and the spring wire 650h is further wound up by the rotating drum 650b. In this control example, at the timing when the opening / closing door 65f1 is changed to the closed state, the movable solenoid 650c is also excited, and the regulating member 650d is moved to the back side of the pachinko machine 10 (in the direction away from the stopper members 650e1 to e4). Thus, the engagement between the stopper members 65e1 to e4 and the regulating member 650d is released, the rotating drum 650d is rotated in the direction opposite to the winding direction by the biasing force of the spring wire 650h, and the opening piece 650i is brought into the closed position. It can be moved by sliding.

  Therefore, in the first variable winning device 65 in this control example, it is possible to determine whether or not to give a certain change depending on the number of game balls that have entered the first variable winning device 65. Therefore, even after the jackpot game is started, the player can play the game with an interest in whether or not the probability variation game is given. Further, the percentage of probability-changing games can be varied by the opening time of one round of the first variable winning device 65, and the fun of the game can be further improved.

  In the present embodiment, the rotating piece 650a is disposed in the normal discharge channel 65e4. However, the rotational piece 650a is not limited to this, and is disposed at the position of the specific winning port 65a1 of the first variable winning device 65, so that the game ball that has entered immediately The open piece 650i may be configured to be movable. By configuring in this way, at the timing when the tenth game ball enters, the open piece 650i is in an open state and can be configured to easily flow down to the special discharge flow path 65e2. Therefore, it can be configured such that a certain change is surely given by entering 10 balls.

  In the present embodiment, the open piece 650i is configured to be in an open state with nine winnings, but is not limited thereto and may be configured with other numbers. Furthermore, not only in the configuration of this control example, the game ball wins the first variable winning device 65, so that the sprocket can be rotated and the winning hole provided in the sprocket can be won in the tenth game ball. You may comprise so that it may face a right position.

<About the seventh control example>
A seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. The seventh control example is different from the first control example in that a continuous chance effect described later is executed, which is not in the first control example. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description and illustration thereof are omitted.

  First, continuous chance effects will be described with reference to FIGS. In this control example, unlike the first control example, the changing order of the special symbols is changed in the order in which the game balls are won in the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 and the reserved balls are stored. It is comprised so that. FIG. 157 (a) is a diagram showing a maximum of eight holding balls including the holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. For each holding ball, the variation pattern to be selected is shown. The type is indicated by a symbol. In the seventh control example, in the prefetch process 2 (FIG. 166, S450), it is possible to discriminate up to the type of variation pattern to be selected (one out of short, one out of long, reach, super reach, or special reach). Has been.

  In the example in which the reserved balls shown in FIG. 157 (a) are stored, six reserved balls including the first special symbol and the second special symbol are stored, and the sixth reserved ball is stored. In this case, a state in which a continuous chance effect is set by the winning information processing (FIG. 168, S1651) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 described later is shown. Although details will be described later, whether or not to execute a continuous chance effect by lottery when the winning information command transmitted when the holding ball is generated from the main controller 110 is super reach or special reach. Is determined. If it is determined to execute the continuous chance effect, the number of times of executing the continuous chance effect is determined within the range of the stored ball that has already been stored. This number of times is determined by the number of times including a holding ball (in this example, the sixth holding ball) determined to execute the continuous chance. For example, if the number of holding balls is six as shown in FIG. 157 (a), it is determined by lottery with a maximum of six times.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 158 (a)-FIG. 159 (a), an example of the display mode displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 in a continuous chance effect is demonstrated. In FIG. 158 (a), execution of the continuous chance effect is determined by the winning information command for the sixth reserved ball shown in FIG. 157 (a), and the continuous chance effect is displayed from the variation display of the special symbol for the first reserved ball. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the change display of the 1st special symbol in case execution of is set.

  In the production in which the execution of the continuous channel production is set, at the start of the variation of the special symbol, the production of the trembling of the symbol is performed with the special symbol still stopped at the previous variation display. After that, the characters “continuous chances !!” are displayed as a background image simultaneously with the change of the special symbol. Here, the symbol ha indicated by five “black circles” displayed at the lower left of the third symbol display device 81 indicates the number of reserved balls currently stored. Here, the holding symbol ha1 is the second holding ball holding shown in FIG. 157 (a), the holding symbol ha2 is the third holding ball, the holding symbol ha3 is the fourth holding ball, and the holding symbol ha4 is holding. The fifth ball and the reserved symbol ha5 correspond to the sixth reserved ball.

  In FIG. 158 (b), the special symbol is stopped after the variation time in the variation of the special symbol shown in FIG. 158 (a) (the variation corresponding to the first reserved ball shown in FIG. 157 (a)) has elapsed. The display mode when displayed is shown. This continuous chance effect is a combination of specific main symbols called “chance eyes” in the previous continuous chance effect (in this control example, “341”, when a continuous chance effect is also set for a change to the next reserved ball. )) Is displayed. It should be noted that the chance is set with a symbol different from the symbol indicating the big hit (displayed with a flat eye) and notifies that it is a miss. By displaying this chance item, the player not only recognizes that the lottery result is out, but also recognizes that the continuous chance effect is continuously executed for the next change. The characters “continuous chance effect !!” displayed in the background image are continuously displayed even when the variation of the special symbol is stopped, and are displayed across the start of the variation of the next special symbol.

  FIG. 159 (a) shows an example of the variation display mode of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol ha1 (see FIGS. 158 (a) to (b)) which is the second variation of the reservation shown in FIG. 157 (a). FIG. In FIG. 159 (a), the holding symbol ha2 is a holding ball (the second holding ball in FIG. 157 (a)) in which the super reach variation pattern is selected as shown in FIG. 157 (a). A display mode is shown when a reach state is reached after a certain period of time has elapsed since the start of fluctuation. Here, since the determination result of whether or not the fluctuation is correct is out of order, the display is stopped and displayed in the out-of-combination combination like the special symbol combination shown in FIG. 159 (b).

  Here, returning to FIG. 157 (a), the latent effect in the continuous chance effect will be described. As described above, the execution of the continuous chance effect is determined by the winning information command corresponding to the sixth reserved ball, and the execution of the continuous chance effect from the first reserved ball is determined. In this case, based on the winning information from the first to fifth reserved balls stored in the winning information storage area 223a, it is determined whether the reserved balls that will be super reach or special reach are stored. If the hold ball that becomes the super reach or special reach is stored as shown in the example shown in FIG. 157 (a) (the second hold ball is the super reach), the continuous chance effect ends once with the hold ball. In the subsequent holding ball (in the example of FIG. 157 (a), the third holding ball to the fifth holding ball), one or more consecutive holding balls are executed. Is set for a holding ball that executes a latent effect.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 159 (b), the latent effect is an effect that is displayed in a trembling manner in a state in which the symbol in the stopped state of the previous special symbol is stopped at the start of the variation of the special symbol. . Similarly, at the start of a continuous chance production, after the stop symbol is shaken and displayed, a display indicating that it is a continuous chance production at the same time as the fluctuation is displayed, but in this latent production, the stop symbol is trembled and displayed. After that, even if the change is started, the background display indicating the continuous chance effect is not displayed. By configuring the latent effect in this way, the player can have an expectation that the continuous chance effect will be started by the display of the stop symbol shaking. It should be noted that an effect similar to the latent effect is configured so that it may be selected and executed even when the normal special symbol changes, even if execution of the continuous chance effect is not determined. Therefore, the player recognizes that even if the latent effect is displayed, the continuous chance effect is not always executed by the special symbol effect corresponding to the subsequent hold, and the continuous chance effect is realized by the latent effect. A game can be performed in expectation of execution.

  In FIG. 157 (a), among the third to fifth held balls, the fifth held ball is obtained by the process of S1726 of the winning information processing (FIG. 168, S1651) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. The execution of the latent effect is determined (assumed to be determined) until (the third to fifth reserved balls). Thus, in the special symbol variation for the third to fifth reserved balls, the latent effect shown in FIG. 159 (b) is executed at the start of the variation time. Therefore, the player has lost the final variation in the continuous chance effect at the second holding ball, but the continuous chance effect is not started again, or, in fact, the continuous chance effect is hidden. You can have the expectation that it may continue just by being. In the example of FIG. 157 (a), the continuous chance effect is executed again in the variation of the special symbol of the sixth reserved ball.

  In this control example, it is configured that there is no guarantee that the continuous chance effect will be executed afterwards, regardless of how many times the latent effect is executed, but not limited thereto, for example, the latent effect is continued three times or more. In such a case, it may be configured that a continuous chance effect is always executed thereafter. By comprising in this way, when a latent effect is performed to a player, it can be made interested to the continuous frequency | count, and there exists an effect that an interest can be improved more.

  Next, referring to FIG. 157 (b), after determining the number of reserved balls that are established after the reserved balls that have been triggered to execute the continuous chance effect, the number of the reserved balls is maximized. A case where execution of a latent effect is set will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 157 (b), six holding balls have been established, and a continuous chance effect is produced from the third holding ball by the winning information command that is output when the sixth holding is established. The case where execution is decided is shown. FIG. 157 (c) shows a case in which the digestion of the reservation ball proceeds from the state of FIG. 157 (b) and the third reservation ball shown in FIG. 157 (b) is shifted to the first reservation ball. This is the state shown. In this state, at the timing when the first holding ball (the first holding ball shown in FIG. 157 (c)) starts to change, the holding ball (FIG. 157 (c) ), The number of executions of the latent effect is determined by maximizing the number of balls held after the fourth ball). Here, the latent effect is executed at a continuous number of times when the above-described latent effect is determined with respect to the variation of the retained ball after the variation with respect to the fourth retained ball is finished.

  Thereby, even after the final change in the continuous chance effect (in this control example, the change of the special symbol for the fourth reserved ball) is completed, the latent effect is executed, so the continuous chance effect continues. You can expect that you are doing. In addition, since the latent production is configured to be executed within the range of the holding ball that is established at the start of the first continuous chance production, the super reach or special reach that is a big hit to the established holding ball It can be expected that the variation is stored and the continuous chance effect or the latent effect is being executed.

  Further, in addition to the configuration of this control example, super reach or special reach is applied to the holding ball that is established at the start of continuous chance effect change (the stored ball that is stored after the hold ball of the last change of continuous chance effect). If there is, set to execute the hidden effect of the holding ball until the change, and execute the continuous chance effect again by the change of super reach or special reach, the player will be able to make the latent performance more When displayed, the expectation of the continuous chance effect can be increased. Further, in this case, it may naturally be configured such that the continuous chance effect is started with the reserved ball stored before the reserved ball that becomes the special reach or the super reach.

  As for the continuous chance effect, in this control example, the notification mode is displayed in the background. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a specific character may be displayed, and the background color is normal. The color may be changed to a different color, or a BGM type or a special sound effect may be output. Furthermore, the chance items displayed in the continuous chance effect are not limited to the configuration of the present control example, and other combinations may be used. It may be configured so that it can be displayed in a variable pattern such as a character or the like. It may be configured to display in a manner different from the display etc.).

  Next, an electrical configuration in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 160 to 163. Only differences from the first control example will be described. In the seventh control example, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 of the first control example are changed, and the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control apparatus 113 are changed. It is different in that it has been changed. Since other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Details of the variation pattern selection table 202a in the present control example will be described later with reference to FIGS. 161 (a) to 161 (c). First, referring to FIG. 160, the sound lamp control device in the seventh control example. The ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of 113 will be described. FIG. 160 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example. The ROM 222 in the seventh control example is different from the ROM 222 in the first control example in that a continuous chance number table 222d and a latent number table 222e are added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 162, the continuous chance number table 222d in the seventh control example will be described. This consecutive chance number table 222d is different from the success / failure determination result table 202d (see FIG. 162 (a)) used for reference when the determination result indicated by the received winning information command is correct. It consists of a continuous chance count table 222d for detachment referred to in some cases (see FIG. 162 (b)). The continuous chance number table 222d is a data table for determining whether or not to execute a continuous chance effect and determining the number of times when it is executed.

  FIG. 162 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the winning consecutive chance count table 222d. In the winning consecutive chance number table 222d, the number of times determination counter 223n (0 to 198), which will be described later, is not executed for each number of currently held balls, and each execution number is set to the current number of held balls as a maximum value. ) Is set for each. When the number of held balls is stored, as shown in FIG. 162 (a), a value of “0 to 160” is set as a determination value for the content to be determined that the continuous chance effect is not executed. In addition, a determination value of “161 to 198” is set as a determination value for one continuous chance effect. Here, based on the value of the acquired number determination counter 223n, the determination content set to the matching determination value is selected by comparing with the determination value of the continuous chance number table 222d. Here, if non-execution is selected, the continuous chance effect is not executed. When the number of consecutive chance effects is determined, a consecutive chance effect is set for the execution of the first reserved ball. Note that the number of executions set in the continuous chance number table 222d is the holding ball that triggered the execution of the continuous chance effect (sixth holding ball in the example of FIG. 157 (a)). It shows the number of holding balls that are continuously stored in front of it. For example, for the sixth reserved ball shown in FIG. 157 (a), a lottery of continuous chance effects is executed, and when four execution times are selected by the continuous chance number table 222d, the number is three. The continuous chance effect is started from the reserved ball of the eye, and the continuous chance effect is continuously executed up to the sixth reserved ball.

  Similarly, reference values to be referred to are set from the continuous chance number table 222d according to the number of reserved balls when the winning information command is received. In this control example, the greater the number of reserved balls when receiving a winning command, the easier it is to execute a continuous chance effect. Further, as apparent from the comparison with the outlier consecutive chance count table 222d shown in FIG. 162 (b), when the determination result is a win, the continuous chance effect is obtained for all the numbers of held balls. Is set to have a high probability of being executed. As a result, for the winning information command indicating the super reach or the special reach where the determination result is successful, the execution of the continuous chance effect is set easily. Furthermore, since the continuous chance effect is set more easily as the number of held balls is larger, it becomes easier to execute the continuous chance effect with respect to fluctuations with respect to a larger number of consecutive held balls, and the player is also able to deal with outlier fluctuations. Can play games with high expectations for jackpots.

  It should be noted that, as shown in the continuation chance count table 222d for losing, even when the number of held balls is 6 or more, if the determination result is losing, a maximum of 6 consecutive chance effects are produced. A judgment value is set. Thereby, when the 6th consecutive chance effect is started, the player can recognize at an early stage that the success / failure determination result is a big hit by continuing the continuous chance effect once again. Therefore, it is possible to give interest to the number of consecutive chance effects, and to improve the interest of the game.

  Next, the latent number lottery table 222e in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 163 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the latent number lottery table 222e. The latent number lottery table 222e, when the execution of the continuous chance effect is determined by the above-described continuous chance number table 222d, among the held balls corresponding to the determined number of continuous chance effect, It is determined whether other reserved balls other than the reserved balls (held balls that become super reach or special reach) are stored as super reach or special reach, and become the super reach or special reach It is a lottery table for determining the frequency | count of performing a latent effect with the reservation ball | bowl to the reservation ball | bowl which became the lottery opportunity of the reservation ball | bowl and a continuous chance effect | action when the reservation ball | bowl is memorize | stored.

  Referring to the example shown in FIG. 157 (a), when the sixth reserved ball is established, a continuous chance effect with the number of executions of six times is determined, and the first to sixth reserved balls are used for the continuous chance effect. It is determined that the performance is executed. Therefore, when it is determined whether the first to fifth reserved balls have a reserved ball that becomes super reach or special reach, in the example of FIG. 157 (a), the second held ball is super reach or special reach. Therefore, it is possible to execute the latent effect for a maximum of three times from the third reserved ball to the fifth reserved ball. Here, referring to the latent number lottery table 222e, the table contents to be selected are set for the determination result of the sixth holding ball, and the number of latent times described later for each maximum latent number. A determination value corresponding to the determination counter 223o is set. In the example of FIG. 157 (a), if the determination result of the sixth reserved ball is a win, the determination value with the maximum number of latent times of 3 is referred to in the winning table contents. Here, if the value of the obtained latent number determination counter 223o is “0-50”, the number of latent times is 1, if “51-149”, the number of latent times is 2, and if it is “150-198”, the number of latent times is 3. Times are set. Here, when the number of times of incubation is determined, in the example shown in FIG. 157 (a), the third and fourth reserved ball continuous chance effects are not executed, and the above-described latent effects are executed. Is done. The continuous chance effect starts again with the fifth reserved ball, and continues until the sixth reserved ball. The number of latent effects after the continuous chance effect shown in FIG. 157 (c) is similarly determined by the latent number lottery table 222e. It should be noted that the number of the holding balls after the holding ball (corresponding to the fourth holding ball in the example of FIG. 157 (c)) and five or more holding balls (in the example of FIG. 157 (c)) that are the triggers for determining the continuous chance effect. If there is no reserved ball that becomes super reach or special reach in the first to seventh reserved balls), the table contents corresponding to the deviation of the latent number lottery table 222e (see FIG. 163) are referred to.

  In the latent number lottery table 222e, as shown in FIG. 163, if the result of the determination is wrong, the number of latent effects is limited to a maximum of three, regardless of the number of reserved balls that can be hidden. Yes. As a result, when the third latent effect is executed, the player can recognize that if the latent effect is executed with the next reserved ball, it will be a big hit in the subsequent continuous chance effect. Therefore, the player can be interested in the number of consecutive latent effects, and can improve the interest of the game.

  Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. 160 (b). FIG. 160 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 in the seventh control example. The RAM 223 in the seventh control example is different from the first control example in that a number determination counter 223n, a latent number determination counter 223o, and a continuous chance storage area 223p are added. Since other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The number-of-times determination counter 223n is a counter for determining the number of times of execution, non-execution, and execution of continuous chance effects. The number determination counter 223n is a counter that is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198. Although not shown in the figure, the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is incremented by one and updated every predetermined period. The effect counter 223f and the later-described latent number determination counter 223o are set to have different update cycles and are configured not to synchronize. The number determination counter 223n is programmed to start updating from a random initial value when the power is turned on.

  The latent number determination counter 223o is a counter for determining the number of times of executing the latent effect in the continuous chance effect from the latent number lottery table 222e (FIG. 163). The latent number determination counter 223o is a counter that is repeatedly added and updated one by one in the range of 0 to 198. The main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is performed at predetermined intervals. One is added and updated. This latent number determination counter 223o is programmed to start updating from a random initial value when the power is turned on.

  The continuous chance storage area 223p is a storage area for storing data indicating the content of the effect to be executed for each reserved ball when the continuous chance effect is executed. The continuous chance storage area 223p is composed of a storage area corresponding to eight reserved balls and one execution area. When the continuous chance effect is determined, data indicating the determined effect content is stored in the corresponding reserved ball area, and is shifted to the area corresponding to the previous reserved ball as the reserved ball is consumed. The holding ball that starts to fluctuate is shifted to the execution area. Thereby, a continuous chance effect can be executed reliably.

  The continuous chance storage area 223p is configured to be backed up when the power is cut off, and is restored to the state when the power is turned off when the power is turned on again. Therefore, even when the power interruption occurs, the continuous chance effect can be continuously executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 161, the fluctuation pattern selection table 202b set in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the seventh control example will be described. The variation pattern table 202d is a data table used to determine the variation pattern display mode, and the display mode is defined for each value of the variation type counter CS1. In the variation pattern table 202d, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the special symbol lottery results are defined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 161, the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 161 (a)), the out (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 161 (b)), and out ( At least a variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 161 (c)) is defined. Although not shown in the drawing, a variation pattern table in the short-time gaming state is set in addition to this.

  First, the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 will be described. FIG. 161 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot. As the jackpot variation pattern, various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are set. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is set as the determination value for each variation pattern.

  Specifically, “0-50” for the fluctuation patterns of various normal reach (30 seconds), “51-179” for the fluctuation patterns of various super reach (60 seconds), various special reach (90 seconds). ) Is set as a determination value of the variation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a variation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the MPU 201 wins the variation pattern in which a determination value corresponding to the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 is set. It selects from the fluctuation pattern table 202d1 for use.

  FIG. 161 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. The deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 is a data table in which the type (fluctuation time) of the fluctuation pattern to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place is set. If the special symbol lottery result is out of place, as described above, whether the stop type is completely out (non-reach) or out of reach (reach common) from the stop type selection table (not shown) It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete outage is set, and if in the range of “80 to 99”, outlier reach is set.

  Here, when the variation pattern type is a complete deviation, a short deviation (7 seconds) with a relatively short fluctuation time and a long deviation (10 seconds) with a long fluctuation time are set. “0 to 98” is set as the judgment value for the short deviation (7 seconds), and “99 to 198” is set as the judgment value for the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the long deviation (10 seconds).

  For outreach, “0 to 149” for various types of normal reach (30 seconds) and “150 to 197” for various types of superreach (60 seconds). For various types (90 seconds), “198” is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1.

  In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the stop type when the special symbol lottery result is out of the normal gaming state, and the fluctuation obtained from the out (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2. Based on the value of the type selection counter CS1, a variation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2.

  FIG. 161 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3. This deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202d3 is a data table for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol to be removed when the gaming state is a probability variation gaming state. This deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 is different in that the set value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is different from the above-described variation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2.

  As described above, when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89” based on the stop type selection table (not shown), complete losing is determined. , The outreach reach is determined in the range of “90 to 99”.

  In this way, when the probability variation gaming state is higher than the normal gaming state, the probability of reaching when the player is out of play is set lower. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the deviation fluctuation time from becoming longer at the time of probability change and the period until the big hit from being prolonged. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the game is bored during the probability-changing game state where it is easy to make a big hit and the player feels bored.

  In this control example, the variation pattern selection table 202d is configured as described above, and the timing variation type counter CS1 in which a game ball is won at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 is acquired. Therefore, it is possible to determine the variation type selected at the time of winning a prize before starting the variation. Further, not only in the configuration of this control example, but also in the case where the variation type selected according to the number of reserved balls at the start of variation is different as shown in the first control example, the variation type assigned to super reach, etc. By assigning the value of the counter CS1 constant even when the number of reserved balls is variable, it is possible to determine the variation type at the time of winning.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller 110 in the Seventh Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 164 to 166, control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the seventh control example will be described. In the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the seventh control example, the special symbol variation process (FIG. 64, S104) is changed to the special symbol variation process (FIG. 164, S104), compared to the first control example. The difference is that the start winning process (FIG. 66, S105) is changed to the start winning process (FIG. 165, S105). Since other processes are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 164, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the seventh control example will be described. FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process (S104). The special symbol variation process (FIG. 164, S104) in the seventh control example is different from the special symbol variation process (FIG. 64, S104) in the first control example in that the processes of S203 to S204, S208 to S209 are S250 to S252. It is different in that it has been changed to processing. Since other processes are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the process of S202, when it is determined that the special symbol is stopped (S202: No), the process of S250 is executed. In the process of S250, with reference to the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203b, it is determined whether or not the reserved sphere having the reservation order of 1 is stored (S251). Although details will be described later, in the seventh control example, when the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 is won, the special symbols are changed in the winning order including both. Yes. Note that the maximum number of reservations for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is four as in the first control example. When a reserved ball is generated, it is stored in the corresponding special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, in which case information indicating the winning order is stored. As the winning order, an order obtained by adding 1 to the total number of winnings of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stored. Then, based on the one-ball digestion (start of fluctuation) of the reserved ball, the winning order is also decremented by 1 and updated.

  In the process of S251, it is determined whether or not the winning order determined in S250 is the second special symbol (second winning port 640) (S251). Here, if the winning order stored in the holding area 1 stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203a is 0, it is determined that the second special symbol is the winning order in which the next variation starts. The When it is determined that the next change start order is the second special symbol by the process of S251 (S251: Yes), the process of S205 is executed. In addition, about the process of S205-S207, since it is the same as a 1st control example, description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the process of S251, if it is determined that the next variation start order is not the second special symbol (S251: No), it is determined whether the next variation start order is the first special symbol (S252). Next, when it is determined that the winning order from which the variation starts is the first special symbol (S252: Yes), the process of S210 is executed. Since the processing from S210 to S212 is the same as that in the first control example, detailed description thereof is omitted. On the other hand, in the process of S252, when it is determined that the winning order is not the first special symbol, that is, the reserved ball is not stored (S252: No), this process is terminated. Other processes are omitted for the first control example.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing the contents of the start winning process (S105). In the start winning process (FIG. 165, S105) in the seventh control example, the process of S406 is changed to S420 and the process of S412 is changed to S430, compared to the start winning process (FIG. 66, S105) in the first control example. The pre-reading process (S413) is different from the pre-reading process 2 (S450). Since other processes are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the processing of S420 and S430, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is added to the first control example, and the value obtained by adding 1 to the total number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is It is different in that it is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b as information on the winning order. With this configuration, in the present control example, by acquiring the value of the variation type counter CS1 at the time of winning a prize, the variation type (out of short, long) selected by the prefetch process 2 (FIG. 166, S450) described later. Discrepancy, normal reach, super reach, or special reach) is determined and notified to the audio lamp control device 113 as a winning information command.

  When it is determined No in the process of S407 or after the process of S430 is executed, the prefetch process 2 is executed (S450). After the prefetch process 2 (S450) is executed, this process is terminated.

  Details of the prefetch processing 2 (S450) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing the contents of the prefetch process 2 (S450). The prefetch process 2 (FIG. 166, S450) in the seventh control example is different from the prefetch process (FIG. 67, S413) in the first control example in that the process of S510 is added. Since other processes are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  When the process of S503 or S504 is executed, the process of S510 is executed. In the process of S510, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the lottery result (win / no decision) based on the winning information (each counter value) acquired in S503 or S504 and the acquired values of the stop type selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1. The variation type to be selected from the selection table 202d is determined (S510). Thereafter, a winning information command indicating the jackpot determination result determined in S510 and the variation type is set.

  Thus, in the present control example, the voice lamp control device 113 can be notified of the selected variation type with the winning information command. Therefore, in the present control example, it is possible to execute a continuous chance effect, which is a special effect straddling a plurality of variations, triggered by the storage of a reserved ball on which a specific variation pattern is executed by the audio lamp control device 113. . In the present embodiment, the main control device 110 pre-determines and determines the variation type. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a winning information command indicating information of each acquired counter value is set and the sound lamp control device 113 sets the winning information command. It may be configured that each data that can be discriminated is set and the variation type or the like is discriminated.

<Regarding Control Processing by the Audio Lamp Control Device 113 in the Seventh Control Example>
With reference to FIGS. 167 to 170, a control process executed by the sound lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described. In the seventh control example, the command determination process (FIG. 81, S1511) is changed to the command determination process 3 (FIG. 167, S1540), and the variable display setting process (FIG. 82, S1512) is changed to the variable display. It is different in that it is changed to the setting process 2 (FIG. 169, S1550). About other processing, since the same processing as the 1st control example is performed, the detailed explanation is omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 167, the command determination process 3 (S1540) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described. FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 3 (S1540). The command determination process 3 (FIG. 167, S1540) in the seventh control example is different from the command determination process (FIG. 81, S1511) in the first control example in that the processes of S1650 to S1651 are added. . About other processing, since the same processing as the 1st control example is performed, the detailed explanation is omitted.

  In the process of S1609, when it is determined that the notification command has not been received (S1609: No), the process of S1650 is executed. In the process of S1650, it is determined whether a winning information command is received from the main controller 110 (S1650). When a winning information command is received (S1650: Yes), winning information processing is executed (S1651). After the winning information processing is executed, the processing of S1619 is executed.

  Here, the details of the winning information processing (S1651) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning information processing (S1651). In this winning information process (FIG. 168, S1651), first, it is determined whether or not a continuous chance effect is being set (S1721). Whether or not the continuous chance effect is being set is determined if it is determined that the continuous chance effect that determines whether or not information related to the continuous chance effect is stored in the continuous chance storage area 223p is set (S1721: Yes). This process is terminated. As described above, while the continuous chance effect is set, the new continuous chance effect is not set, so that it is possible to suppress problems such as the effect being overwritten during the execution of the continuous chance effect. .

  If it is determined in the process of S1721 that the continuous chance effect is not set (S1721: No), it is determined whether the received winning information command is a winning information command indicating super reach or special reach (S1722). . If the received winning information command is not a winning information command indicating super reach or special reach (S1722: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1722 that the received winning information command is a winning information command indicating super reach or special reach (S1722: Yes), the values of the number of times determination counter 223n and the number of times of determination of latency determination counter 223o are set. Obtain (S1724).

  Based on the acquired number-of-times determination counter 223n, the received winning information command, and the current number of reserved balls (the number of held balls corresponding to the received winning information command) 222d (FIGS. 162 (a) to (b)) Information (execution count or non-execution) related to execution of continuous chance effects is acquired (determined). It is determined whether the information acquired in S1724 is the number of executions of the continuous chance effect, that is, whether the execution of the continuous chance effect is performed (S1725). If execution of the continuous chance effect has not been determined (S1725: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1726 that execution of the continuous chance effect has been determined (S1725: Yes), the reserved ball corresponding to the determined number of continuous chance effects becomes super reach or special reach. It is determined from the winning information storage area 223a whether or not the holding balls (excluding the holding balls that have received the winning information command (the holding balls that are the final variation of the continuous chance effect)) are stored (S1726). Although illustration is omitted, as in the first control example, when a winning information command is received, data corresponding to the information indicated by the winning information command received in the winning information storage area 223a corresponding to the reserved ball is stored. Is done. As the reserved ball is consumed, the data is shifted to the corresponding reserved ball area, and the data of the winning information corresponding to the next reserved ball is overwritten when the change starts.

  If it is determined in the processing of S1726 that a reserved ball that becomes super reach or special reach is not stored, the processing of S1728 is executed. On the other hand, in the processing of S1726, if it is determined that there is a holding ball that becomes super reach or special reach (S1726: Yes), the success / failure determination result indicated by the winning information command received from the latent number lottery table 222e, the processing of S1726 In the processing of S1723, the number of latencies that can be held is the number of held balls up to the held ball that is stored immediately before the held ball corresponding to the winning information command received from the held ball that becomes the super reach or the special reach determined in step S1723. The number of latent times is determined from the value of the acquired latent number determination counter 223o (S1727). Thereafter, based on the content of the determined continuous chance effect, effects to be executed for each basket ball are stored in the continuous chance storage area 223p for each holding ball. In the continuous chance storage area 223p, a storage area is set corresponding to each of the eight reserved balls, and for each held ball, the start of the continuous chance effect, the end of the continuous chance effect, the latent effect, Data for identifying the re-entry of the chance effect is stored (S1728). Each data stored in the continuous chance storage area 223p is shifted to an area corresponding to the corresponding reserved ball every time the reserved ball is digested. When the continuous chance effect is completed, all stored data is cleared, so it can be determined whether the continuous chance effect is set based on whether or not data is stored in the continuous chance storage area 223p. When the process of S1728 is executed, this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 169, the variable display setting process 2 (FIG. 169, S1550) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described. FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 2 (S1550). In the variation display setting process 2 (FIG. 169, S1550) in the seventh control example, a post-latency setting process (S1750) is added to the variation display setting process (FIG. 82, S151) in the first control example. It is different in point. Since other processes are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  When the process of S1709 is executed, a post-latency setting process is executed (S1750). Details of the post-latency setting process (S1750) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing the contents of the post-latency setting process (S1750).

  In the post-latency setting process (FIG. 170, S1750), first, it is determined based on the data set in the continuous chance storage area 223p whether or not it is the most starting variation of the continuous chance effect (S1751). Here, it is determined whether or not the data set in the continuous chance storage area 223p corresponding to the holding ball whose fluctuation starts is data indicating the start of the continuous chance effect.

  If it is determined in the process of S1751 that the variation is not the start variation of the continuous chance effect (S1751: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the start variation of the continuous chance effect (S1751: Yes), the current reserved ball information is acquired from the winning information storage area 223a (S1752). With respect to the information on the acquired reserved balls, it is determined whether or not the reserved balls that become the super reach or the special reach are stored with respect to the stored balls stored after the final change of the continuous chance effect (S1753). If it is determined that a reserved ball that becomes a super reach or a special reach is stored (S1753: Yes), a super ball is stored from the stored ball that is stored next to the held ball corresponding to the final change of the continuous chance effect. The number of holdings up to the holding ball stored before the holding ball that becomes the reach or the special reach is determined as the maximum value (the number of possible latent times) (S1754). Based on the value of the number-of-latency determination counter 223o, the determination result of whether or not the holding ball is super reach or special reach, and the number of possible latent times determined in S1754, the number of latent times is determined from the latent number lottery table 222e. Is determined (S1755). Based on the number of latent times determined in S1755, a continuous chance effect is determined. Here, from the reserved balls stored after the reserved balls for the number of latent times to the reserved balls that become the super reach or special reach are set as the held balls for executing the continuous chance effect. After the process of S1756, the process of S1758 is executed.

  In the process of S1753, when it is determined that there is no reserved ball to be super reach or special reach (S1753: No), the value of the latent number determination counter 223o is acquired and stored after the final change of the value and the continuous chance effect. Based on the number of latent latencies that is the number of held balls, the number of latent times is determined from the latent number lottery table 222e (see FIG. 163) (S1757). Thereafter, the process of S1758 is executed. In the process of S1757, the number of times of incubation is determined based on the data for which the determination result is out of date.

  In the process of S1758, the continuous chance storage area 223p is set based on the information of the continuous chance effect and the latent effect determined in the processes of S1755 to S1756 and S1757 (S1758). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  In this way, even at the start of a continuous chance effect, a latent effect and a new continuous chance effect are set for the holding ball that has been established since the decision was made, so that the player has a variety of continuous chance effects. You can entertain. In addition, the continuous chance effect is an effect that is performed on a variation display of a plurality of consecutive reserved balls by prefetching the determination result of the established reserved balls. As a result, when the continuous chance effect is started, the player holds a holding ball that becomes super reach or special reach among the holding balls that are established at that time, and the lottery result is not hit. I have an expectation. Here, in this control example, since the continuous chance effect and the latent effect are set for the holding ball that is established at the start timing of the continuous chance effect, the player is expected to have more holding balls. be able to. Therefore, the expectation can be maintained continuously for the latent effect on the holding ball after the end of the continuous chance effect.

  In this control example, the latent effect is an effect that shakes the symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a sound effect, a character display, or the like may be executed at the start of variation. In addition, the special symbol pattern or the like may be changed to a different pattern.

<Eighth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. The eighth control example is different from the first control example described above in that the signal output to the external output terminal board 261 is changed according to the jackpot type.

  Specifically, in this control example, an accessory continuous operation terminal whose output is turned on based on the operation of the accessory continuous operation device on the external output terminal plate 261, and a jackpot terminal for indicating a jackpot state or type, Is provided.

  Then, when a jackpot based on the jackpot F (16R probability variation lottery / short-running jackpot) is executed, at the time when the jackpot game is started, one jackpot of the external output terminal board 261 is off, When the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3, the jackpot is controlled so that one terminal is turned on. On the other hand, when a jackpot based on the jackpot G (16R probability variation lottery / time-short jackpot) is executed, one jackpot of the external output terminal board 261 is turned on when the jackpot game is started. In addition, when a jackpot based on the jackpot H (16R probability variation lottery / timeless no jackpot) is executed, the jackpot 1 terminal is controlled to remain off. Furthermore, regardless of the type of jackpot, when a jackpot game is executed, it is controlled so that the accessory continuous operation terminal is turned on at the start of each jackpot game (see FIGS. 174 and 175).

  Therefore, in the hall computer 262 that detects the signal of the external output terminal plate 261, the jackpot is determined by comparing the timing when the signal of the accessory continuous operation terminal and the signal of the jackpot one terminal are turned on. The type can be determined. Accordingly, the jackpot type can be determined in the hall computer 262 without providing a terminal of the external output terminal board 261 for each jackpot type (big hit F, G, H), and the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced. Can do.

  In this control example, the configuration described above is added to the first control example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be added to each control example described above. In the following description, differences from the first control example will be described. The same parts as those in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

<About the electrical configuration of the gaming machine in the eighth control example>
First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 171 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The eighth control example is different from the first control example described above in that the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110 is provided with the external output terminal plate 261. Since the other points are the same, detailed description of the same parts is omitted.

  In this control example, an external output terminal plate 261 is connected to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110. The external output terminal plate 261 is provided with at least an accessory continuous operation terminal, one jackpot and two jackpots.

  The accessory continuous operation terminal is a terminal that indicates whether or not the continuous accessory operating device is operated and the open / close door 65f1 is opened, that is, whether or not the jackpot game is being executed. When the accessory continuous operation terminal is on, it indicates that the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened or closed, that is, a period during which the jackpot game is executed, and when it is off, the other period (jackpot game) It is a period during which is not executed. This accessory continuous operation terminal is set to ON when it is determined that the jackpot game is started in the external output process executed in the main process of the main controller 110 (see S7002 in FIG. 177). If it is determined that the jackpot game has ended, it is set to OFF (see S7007 in FIG. 177).

  The jackpot 1 terminal is a terminal indicating whether or not the jackpot game is being played. When the jackpot is on, the jackpot game is being played. When the jackpot is off, the jackpot game is not being played. However, unlike the above-mentioned accessory continuous operation terminal, the jackpot 1 terminal is not set to ON at the start of the jackpot game based on the jackpot F (16R probability variation lottery existence / short time bonus jackpot), and the game ball to the probability variation switch 65e3 It is set to ON when passing.

  Specifically, the jackpot 1 terminal is determined to be a jackpot game in the external output process executed in the main process of the main controller 110 (S7001: Yes in FIG. 177), and the jackpot related to the jackpot game When it is determined that the type is jackpot G (S7003: Yes in FIG. 177), one jackpot terminal is set to ON (see S7004 in FIG. 177), and it is determined that the jackpot game is being played in the processing. If it is determined (S7001: Yes in FIG. 177) and the jackpot type related to the jackpot game is jackpot F (S7003: No in FIG. 177), it is further determined that the probability change setting flag 203h is on. In the case (S7005 of FIG. 177: Yes), it is set to ON (see S7004 of FIG. 177). When it is determined that the jackpot game has ended (S7001: No in FIG. 177), it is set to off (see S7007 in FIG. 177).

  The jackpot 2 terminal is a terminal that indicates whether the gaming machine is in a state advantageous to the player, a jackpot gaming state, a probability variation gaming state, or a short-time gaming state, and the jackpot 2 terminal is on. In some cases, the player is in an advantageous state for the above-mentioned player, and in the off state, it is not. However, as with the jackpot 1 terminal described above, it is not set to ON at the start of a jackpot game based on jackpot F (16R probability variation lottery / short-time bonus jackpot), and is set to ON when the game ball passes the probability variation switch 65e3. It is what is done.

  Specifically, the jackpot 2 terminal is determined to be a jackpot game in the external output process executed in the main process of the main controller 110 (S7001: Yes in FIG. 177), and the jackpot related to the jackpot game If it is determined that the type is jackpot G (S7003: Yes in FIG. 177), the jackpot 2 terminal is set to ON (S7004 in FIG. 177). In the processing, when it is determined that the jackpot game is being played (S7001: Yes in FIG. 177) and the jackpot type related to the jackpot game is jackpot F (S7003: No in FIG. 177), When it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S7005: Yes in FIG. 177), it is set to on (see S7004 in FIG. 177). Then, when it is determined that the probability variation state or the time reduction state, which is an advantageous state for the player, is completed (S7008: No in FIG. 177), it is set to off (see S7009 in FIG. 177).

  The external output terminal plate 261 is provided with other terminals (for example, a prize ball terminal), and signals output from the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110 and the input / output port 215 of the payout control device 111 are provided. Reception is possible. The other terminals are configured so that the received signal can be detected by the hall computer 262 and are already known configurations, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 172 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

  FIG. 172 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. A first hit type selection table 202f for selecting a big hit type for the first control example described above. Is different in that it is newly provided. Since the other points are the same, a detailed description of the same parts is omitted.

  In this control example, unlike the first control example described above, jackpot F, jackpot G, jackpot H are provided as jackpot types. These jackpot types are a first jackpot type selection table 202f (see FIG. 172 (b)) set so that a jackpot F and a jackpot G jackpot H can be selected, and a first jackpot type counter value C2. And selected based on.

  Details of the first hit type selection table 202f will be described with reference to FIG. 172 (b). FIG. 172 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the first hit type selection table 202f and the first hit type counter value C2. In the first hit type selection table 202f, the value “0 to 33” of the first hit type counter C2 as the determination value of the big hit F, the value “34 to 66” as the determination value of the big hit G as the determination value of the big hit H “67 to 99” is set. In the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 65) executed in the timer interrupt process of the main controller 110, the special symbol lottery result is obtained (see S303 in FIG. 65), and the first hit type selection table 202f The jackpot type is selected based on the first hit type counter value C2. A jackpot game is executed based on the jackpot type selected here.

  In the jackpot game based on the jackpot F (16R probability variation lottery / short-time jackpot), the channel solenoid 65k is activated in the jackpot game, and the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a is a jackpot that can pass to the probability variation switch 65e3. ing. Based on the passing of the game ball to the probability change switch 65e3, the probability change game is given after the jackpot game is over. Further, in the jackpot game based on the jackpot G (no 16R probability variation lottery / short-time jackpot), the flow path solenoid 65k does not operate in the jackpot game, and the game ball that has entered the specific winning port 65a enters the probability variation switch 65e3. It has been a big hit without anything. After the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is completed, a short-time game is awarded. In addition, in the jackpot game based on the jackpot H (16R probability variation lottery / timeless no jackpot), as with the jackpot G described above, the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a does not enter the probability switch 65e3. It is. In addition, after the jackpot game based on the jackpot H is completed, the short-time game is not given, and the state shifts to the normal game state.

  Furthermore, the jackpot type selected here is referred to when the lottery result is determined to be a big win when the fluctuation is stopped in the special symbol change process of the main controller 110 (S216: Yes in FIG. 176). Based on this, a scenario for opening the specific winning opening 65a is set (see S217 in FIG. 176), stored in the jackpot type storage area 203α (S260 in FIG. 176), and referred to in an external output process (see FIG. 177) described later. Will be.

  Next, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 173 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. The RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in this control example is different in that a jackpot type storage area 203α is provided in addition to the contents of the RAM 203 of the first control example described above. Since the other points are the same, detailed description of the same parts is omitted.

  The jackpot type storage area 203α is for determining the jackpot type related to the jackpot game being executed, and stores values corresponding to the jackpot type (jackpot F, G, H). This jackpot type storage area 203α is set when it is determined that the lottery result is a jackpot in the special symbol variation process (FIG. 176) executed in the timer interrupt process of the main controller 110 ( (See S260 in FIG. 176).

  If it is referred to in the external output process executed in the main process of the main controller 110 and the jackpot type is jackpot F and it is determined that the jackpot is not G (S7003: No in FIG. 177), the probability variation setting flag 203h Is ON (S7005: Yes in FIG. 177), the outputs of the V winning terminal, the jackpot one terminal, and the jackpot two terminals of the external output terminal board 261 are set to ON (see S7004 in FIG. 176). On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot type is jackpot G in this process (S7003: Yes in FIG. 176), the output to the jackpot 1 terminal and jackpot 2 terminal is set to ON as it is (FIG. 177). (See S7004). When the jackpot type is jackpot H, it is determined that the jackpot type is not jackpot G as in the case where the jackpot type is jackpot F (S7003: No in FIG. 177). However, in the jackpot game based on the jackpot H, the game ball does not pass through the probability variation winning switch 65e3 and the probability variation setting flag 203h is not turned on (S7005: No in FIG. 177). The two terminals are never set on.

  Therefore, when a jackpot game is executed, it is possible to determine the type of jackpot game by comparing the outputs of the accessory continuous operation terminal provided on the external output terminal board 261 and the jackpot 1 terminal. Become. Specifically, if both of the accessory continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal are turned on at the start of the jackpot game, it can be determined that the jackpot is G. On the other hand, the accessory continuous operation terminal is turned on at the start of the jackpot. When the jackpot 1 terminal is off, it can be determined that the jackpot F or jackpot H, and the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on based on the V winning (the passing of the game ball to the probability variation switch 65e3) during the jackpot game. If it is, it can be determined that the jackpot is F. On the other hand, if there is no V winning (game ball passing to the probability change switch 65e3) during the jackpot game and the jackpot 1 terminal does not turn on, it is determined that the jackpot H. it can. In addition, you may comprise so that the big hit type of jackpot game may be discriminate | determined by comparing an accessory continuous action | operation terminal and jackpot two terminals.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 174, the relationship between the gaming state of the gaming machine and the signal of each terminal of the external output terminal board 261 in this control example will be described. FIG. 174 is a timing chart showing the gaming state of the gaming machine, the passing state of the game ball of the probability variation switch 65e3, and the state of the signal of each terminal of the external output terminal plate 261.

  FIG. 174 (a) shows the gaming state of the gaming machine, the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal of the external output terminal plate 261, and the passing state of the game ball of the probability variation switch 65e3 when the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is executed. 5 is a timing chart showing the output of one jackpot and two jackpots of the external output terminal plate 261.

  Specifically, when the gaming state of the gaming machine is the normal gaming state, the accessory continuous operation terminal, the jackpot one terminal, and the jackpot two terminal are in an off state. When a jackpot game based on the jackpot G based on the gaming state of the gaming machine is started, in the external output process (see FIG. 177) described later, the accessory continuous operation terminal, the jackpot 1 terminal, and the jackpot 2 terminal are set to ON. . Thereafter, when the jackpot game based on the jackpot G ends, the gaming state of the gaming machine shifts to the short-time state, and the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal and the jackpot one terminal is set to OFF in the external output process described later. (See S7007 in FIG. 177). When the short-time game ends, the gaming state of the gaming machine shifts to the normal gaming state, and the output of the jackpot 2 terminal is turned off (see S7009 in FIG. 177).

  Next, referring to FIG. 174 (b), when the jackpot game based on jackpot F is executed, the gaming state of the gaming machine, the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal of the external output terminal plate 261, the probability change switch 65e3 4 is a timing chart showing a passing state of game balls and outputs of one jackpot and two jackpots of an external output terminal board 261. FIG. When the jackpot game based on the jackpot F is executed, compared to the case where the jackpot game based on the jackpot G described above is executed, the outputs of the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminals are turned on when the jackpot game is started. However, it is different in that the signals of the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminals are set to ON when the game ball passes through the probability changing switch 65e3 during the jackpot game (when V wins).

  Specifically, when the gaming state of the gaming machine is the normal gaming state, the accessory continuous operation terminal, the jackpot one terminal, and the jackpot 2 terminal of the external output terminal board 261 are in an off state. When the gaming state of the gaming machine becomes a jackpot gaming state based on the jackpot F, the output to the accessory continuous operation terminal is set to ON in an external output process described later (see S7002 in FIG. 177). Then, during the jackpot game, based on the passing of the game ball through the probability variation switch 65e3, the jackpot terminal 1 and jackpot 2 terminal of the external output terminal board 261 are set to ON (see S7004 in FIG. 177). Thereafter, in the same way as when the jackpot game based on the jackpot G described above is executed, the jackpot game is ended, and one jackpot terminal is set to OFF (see S7007 in FIG. 177), and the probability change given after the jackpot game ends. When the game ends, the gaming state of the gaming machine shifts to the normal gaming state, and the jackpot 2 terminal is set to OFF (see S7010 in FIG. 177).

  When a jackpot game based on the jackpot H is executed, when the gaming machine enters the jackpot game state, the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal is turned on, while the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3. Therefore, the output of the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal remains off. When the jackpot game ends, the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state, and the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal is turned off (see S7007 in FIG. 177). In jackpot H, since the probability change game or the short-time game is not given after the jackpot game is executed, the jackpot 1 terminal and jackpot 2 terminal are set to be off (see FIG. 175 (b)).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 175, the case where the jackpot game is continuously executed will be described. FIG. 175 shows the gaming state of the gaming machine, the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal of the external output terminal plate 261, the passing state of the game ball of the probability variation switch 65e3, the external output when the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is executed. 3 is a timing chart showing the output of one jackpot and two jackpots of the terminal board 261. FIG.

  FIG. 175 (a) is a timing chart in the case where the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is continuously executed, and FIG. 175 (b) is a jackpot based on each jackpot type in the order of jackpot H, jackpot G, jackpot F. It is a timing chart in case a game is performed continuously.

  First, the case where the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is continuously executed will be described with reference to FIG. 175 (a). In the normal gaming state, the outputs of the accessory continuous operation terminal, the jackpot one terminal, and the jackpot two terminals of the external output terminal board 261 are all set to OFF. Thereafter, when the lottery result is a jackpot of jackpot G, and the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is started, the outputs of the accessory continuous operation terminal, the jackpot one terminal and the jackpot two terminals are all set to ON (FIG. 177). (See S7002 and S7004). Thereafter, when the jackpot game based on the jackpot G ends, a short-time game is awarded, and the accessory continuous operation terminal and the jackpot one terminal are set to OFF (see S7007 in FIG. 177), while the jackpot game ends. Later, because a short-time game is given and the gaming state of the gaming machine becomes a short-time game state, the jackpot two terminals are not set to OFF, and an ON signal is continuously output.

  Then, during the execution of the short-time game, the big hit G is again a big hit, and when the big hit game based on the big hit G is executed, the accessory continuous operation terminal, the jackpot 1 terminal is set to ON, and the jackpot 2 terminal continues. It is set to ON (see S7002 and S7004 in FIG. 177). Thereafter, when the jackpot game to be executed again is completed, a short-time game is given, and the accessory continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal are set to OFF (see S7007 in FIG. 177), while the jackpot 2 terminal is An ON signal is continuously output without being set to OFF. Then, when the short-time game is not executed and the short-time game is ended, the normal game state is entered and the output of the jackpot two-terminal is set to OFF (see S7009 in FIG. 177).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 175 (b), the case where the jackpot game based on each jackpot type is successively executed in the order of jackpot H, jackpot G, jackpot F will be described. In the normal gaming state, the outputs of the accessory continuous operation terminal, the jackpot one terminal, and the jackpot two terminal are all set to OFF. After that, when the lottery result is a big hit of jackpot H and a jackpot game based on the jackpot H is executed (S7001: Yes in FIG. 177), the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal is set to ON (S7002 in FIG. 177). On the other hand, the outputs of one jackpot and two jackpot jacks are not set to ON and remain off (S7005: No in FIG. 177). When the jackpot game ends, the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state, and the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal is turned off (see S7007 in FIG. 177). In jackpot H, since the probability change game or the short-time game is not given after the jackpot game is executed, the jackpot 1 terminal and jackpot 2 terminal are set to be off (see FIG. 175 (b)).

  After that, when the lottery result is a jackpot G and a jackpot game based on the jackpot G is executed (S7001: Yes, S7003: Yes in FIG. 177), the outputs to the accessory continuous operation terminal, the jackpot one terminal, and the jackpot two terminals are output. It is set to ON (see S7002 and S7004 in FIG. 177). When the jackpot game based on the jackpot G ends, a short-time game is given, and the outputs to the accessory continuous operation terminal and the jackpot one terminal are set to OFF (see S7007 in FIG. 177). On the other hand, since the gaming state of the gaming machine is a short-time gaming state, the output to the jackpot 2 terminal is not set to OFF, and the output remains on. Thereafter, during the execution of the short-time game, the jackpot F is a jackpot, and when the jackpot game based on the jackpot F is executed, the accessory continuous operation terminal is set to ON (S7002 in FIG. 177), and the jackpot two terminals continue. Will be set to ON.

  When the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is set to ON (see S7004 in FIG. 177), and the probability change game is given after the jackpot game ends. When the jackpot game is over, the outputs to the accessory continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal are set to OFF (S7007 in FIG. 177). On the other hand, after the jackpot game is over, the probability variation game is given, so the jackpot 2 terminal Is not turned off and remains on. After that, when the probability variation game ends, the game shifts to a normal game and the output to the jackpot 2 terminal is set to OFF.

  As described above, in this control example, the output timings of the accessory continuous operation terminal provided on the external output terminal plate 261 and the jackpot one terminal are configured to be different depending on the jackpot type. Accordingly, it is possible to determine the type of jackpot game by comparing the output timings of the accessory continuous operation terminal and the jackpot one terminal. Specifically, if both of the accessory continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal are turned on at the start of the jackpot game, it can be determined that the jackpot is G. On the other hand, the accessory continuous operation terminal is turned on at the start of the jackpot. When the jackpot 1 terminal is off, it can be determined that the jackpot F or jackpot H, and the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on based on the V winning (the passing of the game ball to the probability variation switch 65e3) during the jackpot game. If it is, it can be determined that the jackpot is F. On the other hand, if there is no V winning (game ball passing to the probability change switch 65e3) during the jackpot game and the jackpot 1 terminal does not turn on, it is determined that the jackpot H. it can.

  Further, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the generated jackpot is a continuous jackpot by using one jackpot terminal and two jackpot terminals provided on the external output plate 261. Specifically, at the jackpot 1 terminal, the output is turned off every time the jackpot game based on the occurrence of the jackpot is completed, so the occurrence of the jackpot can be detected, but it is determined whether or not the jackpot is a sustained jackpot. Can not. Here, the sustained jackpot refers to a jackpot during a probability change game or a short-time game.

  When the jackpot 2 terminal in this control example is a jackpot during the probability variation game or the short-time game, the output is continuously turned on without being turned off (the period during which the output is on is continued). Therefore, it is possible to determine that the jackpot generated during the period when the output of the jackpot 2 terminals is on (the output of the jackpot 1 terminal turned on) is a series of continuous jackpots.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Eighth Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 176 and 177, control processing of the main controller 110 in this control example will be described. The eighth control example is different from the first control example described above in that a part of the special symbol variation process and the external output process are changed, and the other parts are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, the details of the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process (S104). In the eighth control example, when it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit when the fluctuation time has elapsed (S216: Yes), the jackpot type related to the lottery result is set to the big hit type storage area 203α. Since the other parts are the same, the detailed description of those parts is omitted.

  In the special symbol variation process, first, the processes from S201 to S216 are executed as in the first control example. Next, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a jackpot (S216: Yes), based on the jackpot type, the opening scenario for the specific winning opening 65a is set (S217), and the start of the jackpot is set (S218). . Thereafter, a value based on the jackpot type of the lottery result is stored in the jackpot type storage area 203α (S260). The value of the jackpot type storage area 203α stored here is referred to in an external output process (see FIG. 177) described later, and the timing of the signal output to the external output terminal board 261 is controlled based on the jackpot type. Become.

  When the process of S260 is finished, this process is finished as it is. Further, in the process of S216, when it is determined that the lottery result is not a big hit (S216: No), the processes of S220 and S221 are executed similarly to the first control example, and this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 177, details of the external output processing (S1001) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the external output process (S1001). This external output processing (S1001) is executed every 4 milliseconds in the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, and commands set in other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are executed. This is processing for transmitting to the audio lamp control device 113 or the like, processing for outputting a signal to an external output terminal in accordance with the value of each area of the RAM 203, or the like.

  In the external output process, first, it is determined whether or not the gaming state of the gaming machine is a big hit (S7001). In the process of S7001, when it is determined that the gaming state of the gaming machine is a big hit (S7001: Yes), the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal provided on the external output terminal plate 261 is turned on (S7002). , The process proceeds to S7003. The accessory continuous operation terminal whose output is turned on in the process of S7002 is detected by the hall computer 262. Thereby, the hall computer 262 can detect that the gaming machine has shifted to the jackpot gaming state.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type storage area 203α is a value indicating the jackpot G (S7003). In the processing of S7003, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot type storage area 203α is a value indicating the jackpot G (S7003: Yes), the output to the jackpot 1 terminal and the output to the jackpot 2 terminal are turned on ( S7004) and the process proceeds to S7010. By the processing of S7004, at the start of the jackpot game based on the jackpot G, the output to the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminals is turned on, and the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminals are detected by the hall computer 262. Thereby, the hall computer 262 detects that the accessory continuous operation terminal whose output is turned on in the process of S7002 and the jackpot one terminal whose output is turned on in the process of S7004 are turned on at the same timing. Then (see FIG. 174 (a)), it is determined that the jackpot game by the jackpot G has been executed, and processing corresponding to that is performed.

  On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot type storage area 203α is a value indicating the jackpot F or the jackpot H and is not a value indicating the jackpot G (S7003: No), the process proceeds to S7005. In the process of S7005, it is determined whether or not the probability variation setting flag 203h is on. When it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S7005: Yes), it is a case where a game ball has entered the probability variation switch 65e3, and it is determined that the probability variation game is given after the jackpot game ends. . In this case, the process proceeds to S7004, the output to the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminals is turned on (S7004), and the process proceeds to S7010.

  Here, since the jackpot F is a jackpot with a probability variation lottery, the flow path solenoid 65k operates during execution of the jackpot game, and the game ball can pass through the probability variation switch 65e3. On the other hand, since the jackpot H is a jackpot without a probability variation lottery, the flow path solenoid 65k does not operate during execution of the jackpot game, and the game ball does not pass through the probability variation switch 65e3. Therefore, if the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on when passing through the probability variation switch 65e3, the hall computer 262 is behind the bonus continuous operation terminal whose output is turned on at the start of the jackpot game, and the jackpot based on the jackpot F It is possible to determine that the game has been executed, and it is possible to perform processing corresponding to the game.

  On the other hand, when the bonus item continuous operation terminal is turned on at the start of the jackpot game and the jackpot 1 terminal is not turned on thereafter, the jackpot game based on the jackpot H is executed so that the game ball does not pass to the probability change switch 65e3. It can be determined that it has been.

  On the other hand, in the process of S7005, when it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203h is OFF (S7005: No), the process proceeds to S7010.

  In the process of S7001, when it is determined that the jackpot is not hit (S7001: No), the value of the jackpot type storage area 203α is cleared (S7006), the output to the accessory continuous operation terminal and the jackpot one terminal The output is turned off (S7007), and the process proceeds to S7008.

  When the processing of S7007 is finished, it is then determined whether or not the gaming state is a probability change gaming state or a short-time gaming state (S7008). Specifically, when the probability change flag 203g is on, it is determined that the game is in the probability change game state, and when the hour / minute counter is greater than 0, it is determined that the time change game state is set. If it is determined in the process of S7008 that the game state is a probability change game state or a short-time game state (S7008: Yes), the process proceeds to S7010 without turning off the output to the jackpot two terminals. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7008 that the game state is not the probability change game state or the short-time game state (S7008: No), the output to the jackpot 2 terminal is turned off (S7009), and the process proceeds to S7010.

  By the processing of S7007, the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal can be turned off at the end of the jackpot game. Then, when the jackpot game ends, a probability change game or a short-time game is given, and when the gaming state of the gaming machine becomes a probability change game state or a short-time game state (S7008: Yes), the output of the jackpot two terminal is not turned off, Continuously, the output of the jackpot 2 terminal is turned on. On the other hand, when the probability change game or the short-time game is not given at the end of the jackpot game and the gaming state of the gaming machine is in the normal gaming state (S7008: No), the output of the jackpot two terminal is turned off.

  In the process of S7010, other external output processes are executed (S7010), and this process ends. In the process of S7010, for example, a process of transmitting various commands such as a reserved ball number command stored in the above-described command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 to the voice lamp control device 113 is performed. . Thereby, information from the main control device 110 can be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111.

  As described above, in the eighth control example, in the jackpot game based on the jackpot type according to the jackpot type of the lottery result, the timing of the signal transmitted to the terminal provided on the external output terminal board 261 is different. It is configured to make it. Specifically, in the case of jackpot F, when the jackpot game is started, the accessory continuous operation terminal is turned on. After that, when the game ball passes the probability variation switch 65e3, the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on. In the case of jackpot G, when the jackpot game is started, the accessory continuous operation terminal is turned on and one jackpot terminal is turned on. Further, in the case of jackpot H, when the jackpot game is started, the accessory continuous operation terminal is turned on, and thereafter, the jackpot 1 terminal is not turned on until the accessory consecutive operation terminal is turned off.

  Accordingly, three types of hall computers 262 that detect the output of the terminal of the external output terminal plate 261 are provided by detecting the outputs of the accessory continuous operation terminal of the external output terminal plate 261 and one jackpot terminal. It is possible to determine which jackpot game based on which jackpot type is being executed from among the jackpot types. Therefore, it is possible to determine the jackpot type without providing terminals corresponding to each jackpot type (three types).

  Further, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the generated jackpot is a continuous jackpot by using one jackpot terminal and two jackpot terminals provided on the external output plate 261. Specifically, at the jackpot 1 terminal, the output is turned off every time the jackpot game based on the occurrence of the jackpot is completed, so the occurrence of the jackpot can be detected, but it is determined whether or not the jackpot is a sustained jackpot. Can not. Here, the sustained jackpot refers to a jackpot during a probability change game or a short-time game.

  When the jackpot 2 terminal in this control example is a jackpot during the probability variation game or the short-time game, the output is continuously turned on without being turned off (the period during which the output is on is continued). Therefore, it is possible to determine that the jackpot generated during the period when the output of the jackpot 2 terminals is on (the output of the jackpot 1 terminal turned on) is a series of continuous jackpots.

  In this control example, the jackpot type is discriminated by the accessory continuous operation terminal and the jackpot one terminal. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type can be discriminated by the accessory consecutive action terminal and the jackpot two terminals. Also good. Further, either one of the jackpot or two jackpots may not be provided, or a terminal for performing output related to jackpot may be provided on the external output terminal plate 261 separately.

  Furthermore, the present control example is not limited to the above-described example, and a terminal of the external output terminal plate 261 for outputting information related to other jackpot games may be provided. For example, a V winning terminal that outputs an ON signal for a predetermined period (for example, 100 ms) based on passage of the probability change switch 65e3 may be provided on the external output terminal plate 261. Thereby, it is possible to detect an illegal act such as passing a game ball through the probability change switch 65e3 even during execution of the big hit game of the big hit H without the probability variation lottery. Specifically, the output of the V winning terminal is turned on based on the passing of the game ball to the probability change switch 65e3. However, in the case of the big hit type H, even if the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3, the jackpot 1 The pin output is not turned on. Therefore, the hall computer 262 detects the fraudulent act as if the game ball was entered into the probability change switch 65e3 by cheating if the output of the V winning terminal is turned on but the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is not turned on. And can be notified.

  Further, in the above-described eighth control example, the accessory continuous operation terminal indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The hall computer 262 may be configured to be able to determine the jackpot type according to the time difference.

  Specifically, when a jackpot game of jackpot G is executed, the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on at the start of the jackpot game, and the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is turned off at the end of the jackpot game. In this case, the time when the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on is the jackpot game time (for example, 120 seconds). Also, when a jackpot game of jackpot F is executed, the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is not turned on at the start of the jackpot game, and the jackpot game is turned on when the game ball passes to the probability change switch 65e3. At the end of the operation, the output of one jackpot is turned off. In this case, the time when the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on is shorter than the time of the jackpot game, and is the time from the period in which the flow solenoid 65k is operating to the end of the jackpot game (for example, 50 seconds to 30 seconds). . Further, when a jackpot game of jackpot H is executed, the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is not turned on at the start of the jackpot game, and is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) at the end of the jackpot game. In this case, the time when the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on is a predetermined time (for example, 1 second).

  With this configuration, the hall computer 262 can determine that the jackpot game with the jackpot G has been executed when it is determined that the time when the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is on is 120 seconds. it can. Further, if the time when the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is on is between 50 seconds and 30 seconds, it can be determined that the jackpot game with the jackpot F has been executed. Further, when it is determined that the time when the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is on is 1 second, it can be determined that the jackpot game with the jackpot H is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of determining the jackpot type related to the jackpot game executed by the hall computer 262 without providing the accessory continuous operation terminal, and the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced. It should be noted that all the times when the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is ON are determined for each jackpot type, and the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on only for the ON time specified at a predetermined trigger (for example, at the start of the jackpot). Also good.

  Further, in the eighth control example, a terminal (winning terminal) of the external output terminal 261 whose output is set to ON based on the winning to the specific winning opening 65a may be provided. As a result, a jackpot game based on the jackpot F is executed. However, if a game ball is not inserted into the specific winning port 65a because the game ball is not fired, the game ball does not pass through the probability change switch 65e3. Since the outputs of the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal are not turned on, it cannot be detected that the jackpot is F. Therefore, by detecting the winning terminal whose output is turned on based on the game ball entering the specific winning port 65a, the probability variation switch 65e3 is set despite the game ball entering the specific winning port 65a. It is possible to determine whether or not the game ball is not passing through (in the case of jackpot H).

<Ninth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 178 to 180. In the ninth control example, in contrast to the above-described eighth control example, an external output terminal plate 261 that outputs a signal in response to winning in the specific winning opening 65a is provided, and continuous winning is performed in the specific winning opening 65a. It is different in that it is configured so that it can be detected.

  Specifically, the external output terminal board 261 is provided with a winning terminal and a continuous winning terminal, and the winning terminal is controlled to be turned on for a predetermined time (100 milliseconds) when there is a winning in the gaming machine. Is done. The continuous winning terminal is controlled so that the output is kept on when there is a winning in the continuous winning output period (2 seconds) after the winning is generated and the continuous winning is performed.

  Therefore, in the hall computer 262 that detects the signal of the external output terminal board 261, whether or not the generated winning is continuously won by acquiring the signals of the winning terminal and the continuous winning terminal. Can be determined. In the hall computer 262, processing that needs to be executed when a continuous winning has occurred, without determining whether or not a continuous winning has occurred by calculating the signal acquisition result of the winning terminal. Is executed based on the acquisition result of the signal of the continuous winning terminal, the processing load can be reduced.

  In this control example, the configuration described above is added to the eighth control example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be added to each control example described above. For example, you may make it control the output of a winning terminal and a continuous winning terminal according to the winning to a V winning device in a 5th control example. In the following description, differences from the eighth control example will be described. The same parts as those in the eighth control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

<About the electrical configuration of the gaming machine in the ninth control example>
First, with reference to FIG. 178, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example will be described. FIG. 178 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. The RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in this control example is different in that a winning period counter 203β and a continuous winning period counter 203γ are provided in addition to the contents of the RAM 203 in the eighth control example described above. Since the other points are the same, detailed description of the same parts is omitted.

  The winning period counter 203β is a counter for counting a period during which a signal is output to the winning terminal (winning output period). This winning period counter 203β is determined in the external output process executed in the main process of the main controller 110 when it is determined that there is a game ball (winning) in the specific winning port 65a (S8001 in FIG. 180). : Yes), 25 (corresponding to 100 milliseconds) (see S8003 in FIG. 180). Here, the external output process is a process executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process of the main controller 110. Each time the external output process is executed, the winning period counter 203β is 1 or more (see FIG. 180 (S8008: Yes), one is subtracted (see S8009 in FIG. 180). When the winning period counter 203β becomes 0 (S8004: Yes in FIG. 180), the output to the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is set to OFF (see S8005 in FIG. 180).

  Thereby, the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 can be turned on for a predetermined time (100 milliseconds) based on the winning at the specific winning opening 65a.

  The continuous winning period counter 203γ is a counter for counting a period during which a signal is output to the continuous winning terminal. This continuous winning period counter 203γ is determined when it is determined in the external output process executed in the main process of the main controller 110 that a game ball has been won (winned) in the specific winning opening 65a (FIG. 180). S8001: Yes), 500 (corresponding to 2 seconds) is set (see S8003 in FIG. 180). Here, the external output process is a process executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process of the main controller 110, and every time the external output process is executed, the continuous winning period counter 203γ is 1 or more. (S8010 in FIG. 180: Yes) The value is decremented by 1 (see S8011 in FIG. 180). When the continuous winning period counter 203γ becomes 0, the output to the continuous winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is set to OFF. If a game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a before the continuous winning period counter 203γ becomes 0, the continuous winning period counter 203γ is set again to 500 (corresponding to 2 seconds) (see S8003 in FIG. 18).

  As a result, during the period until the continuous winning period counter 203γ becomes 0 (2 seconds in this control example), the continuous winning terminal of the external output terminal plate 261 remains while the game ball is entering the special winning device 65a. The output to can be kept on. If the game ball does not enter the specific winning opening 65a until the continuous winning period counter 203γ elapses, the output to the continuous winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is turned off (see S8007 in FIG. 180).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 179, the relationship between the gaming state of the gaming machine and the signal of each terminal of the external output terminal board 261 in this control example will be described. FIG. 179 is a timing chart showing the gaming state of the gaming machine and signals output from the accessory continuous operation terminal, the winning terminal and the continuous winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 when the jackpot game is executed. .

  With reference to FIG. 179 (a), the case where a game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a during the jackpot game will be described. FIG. 179 (a) shows the gaming state of the gaming machine when the game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a during the jackpot game, the accessory continuous operation terminal, the winning terminal and the continuous winning terminal of the external output terminal plate 261. 5 is a timing chart showing signals output from the signal.

  First, when the gaming state of the gaming machine is the normal gaming state, the accessory continuous operation device is not operating, the accessory continuous operation terminal is off, and a game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a. Since there is no ball, both the winning terminal and the continuous winning terminal are off.

  Next, when the lottery result based on the ball entering the first winning opening 64 becomes a big hit, the big hit game is started, and the accessory continuous operation device is activated, the accessory continuous operation terminal is set to ON (S8012 in FIG. 180). reference). When the accessory continuous operation device is activated, the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is opened and closed, and the game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a. When the detection switch 65c1 detects that the game ball has entered (wins) the specific winning opening 65a after the operation of the accessory continuous operation device, the outputs of the winning terminal and the continuous winning terminal are output for a predetermined time (in this control example). It is controlled to be on (100 milliseconds and 2 seconds) (see S8002 and S8003 in FIG. 180).

  Then, the output of the winning terminal is turned off after the winning output period (100 milliseconds) has elapsed (see S8005 in FIG. 180). On the other hand, the output of the continuous winning device is controlled to remain on until the continuous winning output period (2 seconds) elapses, and is turned off after the continuous winning output period (2 seconds) elapses (S8007 in FIG. 180). After that, when the big hit game is finished, the accessory continuous operation device is stopped and the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal is set to OFF, and the normal game (or the probability change game or the short-time game) is shifted to.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 179 (b), a case will be described in which a game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a during the jackpot game and there is a new ball in the continuous winning output period based on the winning. FIG. 179 (b) shows the gaming state of the gaming machine when the game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a during the jackpot game, and there is a new ball in the continuous winning output period based on the winning, It is the timing chart which showed the signal output from the accessory continuous action | operation terminal of the output terminal board 261, a winning terminal, and a continuous winning terminal.

  First, when the gaming state of the gaming machine is the normal gaming state, as described above, the accessory continuous operation terminal, the winning terminal, and the continuous winning terminal are all off. Next, when the lottery result based on the ball entering the first winning opening 64 becomes a big hit and the big hit game is started, the accessory continuous operation terminal is set to ON (see S8012 in FIG. 180).

  When the game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, the detection switch 65c1 detects the game ball entry, and outputs from the winning terminal and the continuous winning terminal for a predetermined time (100 milliseconds and 2 seconds in this control example). ) It is controlled to turn on (see S8002 and S8003 in FIG. 180). Thereafter, the output of the winning terminal is turned off after the winning output period (100 milliseconds) has elapsed (see S8005 in FIG. 180), and the output of the continuous winning device remains on until after the continuous winning output period (2 seconds) has elapsed. (S8006: Yes in FIG. 180).

  When the detection switch 65c1 detects that a new game ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a during the continuous winning output period (2 seconds), the output of the winning terminal is turned on in the winning output period (100 milliseconds). (See S8002 and S8003 in FIG. 180). In addition, the output of the winning continuation terminal is also reset (updated) so that the continuous winning output period (2 seconds) is on (see S8003 in FIG. 180), and the output is continuously turned on.

  Then, the output of the winning terminal is set to OFF after the elapse of the winning output period based on the new winning at the specific winning opening 65a (see S8005 in FIG. 180), and then continues after the elapse of the updated continuous winning period. The output of the winning terminal is set to OFF (S8007 in FIG. 180). If a game ball is newly entered into the specific prize opening 65a in the updated (reset) continuous winning period, the continuous winning period is updated (reset) again, and the continuous winning terminal is continuously updated. The output is set to be turned on.

  When the big hit game is finished, the accessory continuous operation device is stopped, the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal is set to OFF, and the normal game (or the probability change game or the short-time game) is started.

  As described above, in this control example, it is possible to determine that a game ball continuously enters (wins) into the specific winning port 65a by the continuous winning terminal provided on the external terminal output plate 261. . Thereby, in the hall computer 262 that detects the signal of the external output terminal board 261, it is detected by the winning terminal provided on the external output terminal board 261 that the game ball has entered (winned) into the specific winning opening 65a. It is possible to determine whether or not the winning is a continuous winning. Therefore, in the hall computer 262, it is determined only by referring to the output of the continuous winning terminal without calculating based on the previous winning information in order to determine whether the winning detected from the winning terminal is a continuous winning or not. And the processing load on the hall computer 262 can be reduced.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Ninth Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 180, the control process of the main controller in this control example will be described. The ninth control example is different from the above-described eighth control example in that a part of the process with the external output process is changed. Since other parts are the same, detailed description of the same parts is omitted.

  The details of the external output process (S1001) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing external output processing (S1001) in this control example. This external output processing (S1001) is executed every 4 milliseconds in the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, and commands set in other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are executed. This is a process of executing a process of transmitting to the sound lamp control device 113 or the like, a process of outputting a signal to an external output terminal in accordance with the value of each area of the RAM 203, and the like.

  In the external output process, first, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a (S8001). Specifically, since the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a passes through the detection switch 65c1, depending on whether or not the detection switch 65c1 is turned on in the switch reading process of the main controller 110. Determine.

  In the process of S8001, when it is determined that a game ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a (S8001: Yes), the outputs of the winning terminal and the continuous winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 are set to ON (S8002), The winning period counter 203β is set to 25 (corresponding to 100 milliseconds), and the continuous winning period counter 203γ is set to 500 (corresponding to 2 seconds) (S8003), and the process proceeds to S8008.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S8001 that no game ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a (S8001: No), it is then determined whether or not the winning period counter is 0 (S8004). In the process of S8004, when it is determined that the winning period counter 203β is 0 (S8004: No), the winning output period (100 milliseconds) has elapsed since the game ball entered the specific winning opening 65a. Therefore, the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is set to OFF, and the process proceeds to S8008.

  In the process of S8004, when it is determined that the winning period counter 203β is not 0 (S8004: No), it is determined whether or not the continuous winning period counter 203γ is 0 (S8006). In the process of S8006, when it is determined that the continuous winning period counter 203γ is 0 (S8006: Yes), the continuous winning period (2 seconds) elapses after the game ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a, Since the game ball has not newly entered the specific prize opening 65a in the continuous winning period (2 seconds), the output of the continuous winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is set to OFF (S8007). Transition to processing.

  In the process of S8006, when it is determined that the continuous winning period counter 203γ is not 0 (S8006: No), the process proceeds to S8008.

  Here, even when the gaming state of the gaming machine is a state other than the jackpot gaming state and the player has not entered the specific winning opening 65a and the winning period counter 203β is already 0, the processing of S8005 is also performed. Is executed. In this case, since the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 has already been turned off, it is set so that the output of the winning terminal is continuously turned off. Since the game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a only during the jackpot game, the processes from S8001 to S8007 may be executed only during the jackpot game.

  As a result, it is not necessary to execute the processing from S8001 to S8007 in a gaming state other than that during the jackpot game, and the processing load can be reduced. In addition, when a game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a in a state other than during the jackpot game, an illegal act or an abnormality may be caused. Therefore, a separate error terminal is provided on the external output terminal 261 for the error. You may comprise so that an illegal act and abnormality generation | occurrence | production can be detected by turning ON the output of a terminal. In addition, it is not necessary to use an error terminal for detection of fraud or abnormality, and a notification sound for notifying an error is output, or a display indicating the occurrence of an error is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You may make it do.

  When the processing of S8003, S8005, S8006 or S8007 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the winning period counter 203β is greater than 0 (S8008). If it is determined in the process of S8008 that the winning period counter 203β is greater than 0 (S8008: Yes), a game ball enters the special winning opening 65a, and the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal 261 is turned on. Since the winning output period is 100 milliseconds, the winning period counter 203β for measuring the winning output period is decremented by 1 (S8009), and the process proceeds to S8010.

  On the other hand, in the process of S8008, when it is determined that the winning period counter 203β is 0 (S8010: Yes), it is not necessary to measure the winning output period, not the winning output period, so the process of S8009 is skipped. Thus, the process proceeds to S8010. In the processing of S8010, it is determined whether or not the continuous winning period counter 203γ is greater than 0 (S8010). When it is determined in the processing of S8010 that the continuous winning period counter 203γ is greater than 0 (S8010: Yes), the game ball enters the special winning opening 65a and the output of the continuous winning terminal of the external output terminal 261 is turned on. Since it is the continuous winning output period (2 seconds), 1 is subtracted from the continuous winning period counter 203γ for measuring the continuous winning output period (S8011), and the process proceeds to S8012.

  If it is determined in the processing of S8010 that the continuous winning period counter 203γ is 0 (S8010: No), it is not necessary to measure the continuous winning output period instead of the continuous winning output period, so the process of S8011 is skipped. Then, the process proceeds to S8012.

  In the processing of S8012, other external output processing is executed (S8012). Other external output processing is, for example, an external output terminal that indicates that a continuous action device is operating, that is, a period in which a jackpot game is executed, like the external output processing in the eighth control example described above. A process of turning on the accessory continuous operation terminal of the plate 261 with a predetermined trigger is performed. When the process of S8012 is completed, the present process is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

  As described above, in the ninth control example, it is determined by the continuous winning terminal provided on the external terminal output plate 261 that the game ball continuously enters (wins) the specific winning opening 65a. It is possible. Specifically, the external output terminal board 261 is provided with a winning terminal and a continuous winning terminal, and the winning terminal is controlled to be turned on for a predetermined time (100 milliseconds) when there is a winning in the gaming machine. Is done. On the other hand, the continuous winning terminal is controlled so that the output is kept on when there is a winning in the continuous winning output period (2 seconds) after the winning occurs and the continuous winning is performed.

  Thereby, in the hall computer 262 that detects the signal of the external output terminal board 261, it is detected by the winning terminal provided on the external output terminal board 261 that the game ball has entered (winned) into the specific winning opening 65a. It is possible to determine whether or not the winning is a continuous winning based on the output of the continuous winning terminal. Therefore, in the hall computer 262, it is determined only by referring to the output of the continuous winning terminal without calculating based on the previous winning information in order to determine whether the winning detected from the winning terminal is a continuous winning or not. And the processing load on the hall computer 262 can be reduced.

  Note that the present control example is not limited to the above-described example, and it may be configured such that the output of the continuous winning terminal is continued only at a specific jackpot type. As a result, a device that detects the output of the terminal of the external output terminal board 261 such as the hall computer 262 detects and compares the output of the winning terminal and the continuous winning terminal to determine the type of jackpot that has been a big hit Can be possible.

  Further, the period during which the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is turned on (winning output period) may be different for each jackpot type based on the game ball entering the specific winning opening 65a. For example, when the jackpot type is jackpot F, the winning output period is 50 milliseconds, when the jackpot is G, the winning output period is 100 milliseconds, and when the jackpot is H, the winning output period is 150 milliseconds. As a result, the hall computer 262 detects the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 and measures the period (winning output period) during which the output of the winning terminal is on (winning output period). The type can be determined. Therefore, for the purpose of determining the jackpot type, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can determine the jackpot type without providing a separate terminal on the external output terminal board 261, thereby reducing the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine. be able to.

  Further, in the ninth control example, based on the game ball entering the specific winning port 65a, during the winning output period when the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal plate 261 is turned on, the game ball is input to the specific winning port 65a. It is necessary to set it shorter than the interval to enter. If a new game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a during the winning output period, the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is continuously turned on, and the number of winnings cannot be accurately detected on the hall computer 262 side. It is. Further, when the winning output period is shortened, the detection interval of the winning terminal by the hall computer 262 needs to be shortened correspondingly. This is because if the output of the winning terminal is not detected within the winning output period, the output of the winning terminal is turned off and the number of winnings cannot be accurately detected.

  Therefore, when the interval at which the game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a is very short (10 milliseconds or the like), the hall computer 262 needs to detect the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 at the very short interval. There is a problem that the processing load of the hall computer 262 becomes high.

  Therefore, when a new game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a during the winning output period, a period during which the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is turned off after the winning output period ends (winning output stop period) ) And the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal 261 is turned on based on the game ball newly entered into the specific winning opening 65a after the winning output stop period (for example, 50 milliseconds) elapses. It may be.

  As a result, even if the winning output period in which the winning terminal of the external output terminal 261 is set to ON is set to be longer than the interval at which the game balls enter (for example, 100 milliseconds), a new winning output period is entered. Since the output based on the game ball that has been struck can be executed after the winning output stop period (for example, 50 milliseconds), the hall computer 262 can accurately detect the winning (not to be missed). In the hall computer 262, it is not necessary to detect the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 at an interval (for example, 5 milliseconds) shorter than the interval at which the game ball enters, and the processing load of the hall computer 262 is reduced. Can be reduced.

  Here, the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is turned on when a game ball enters the specific winning port 65a in the big hit game. In the jackpot game, the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is opened, and a state (round) in which a game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 rounds). Yes. This round ends when a predetermined time (30 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) enter the specific winning opening 65a, and then an interval between rounds (for example, 2 seconds) elapses. The next round will start. Therefore, even if the winning output period is set longer than the interval at which game balls enter the specific winning opening 65a, the external output terminal is based on all the winnings (for example, 10 balls) in the interval between rounds. The winning terminal of the board 261 can be output.

  Specifically, when 10 gaming balls enter the specific winning opening 65a continuously at very short intervals (for example, 10 milliseconds), the gaming balls enter the specific winning opening 65a (10 balls). The winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 needs to be set to ON for a total of 10 times, the winning output period (100 milliseconds). Here, when a game ball newly enters the specific winning opening 65a in the winning output period, after the winning output period ends and the output of the winning terminal is turned off, the winning output stop period (50 milliseconds), It is assumed that the next winning output period is configured to start. In this case, the time required to output all the signals based on the winning ball to the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is the number of times the winning terminal output is turned on (10 times) and the winning output period (100 milliseconds). ) And the product of the number of winning output periods (9 times) required after output of the winning terminal and the winning output period (50 milliseconds) are added to 1450 milliseconds. Since this time is shorter than the interval between rounds (2 seconds), the completion of the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is completed based on all the balls (for example, 10 balls) during the interval between rounds. Is possible.

  Therefore, even if the winning output period in which the winning terminal of the external output terminal 261 is set to ON is set to a period (for example, 100 milliseconds) longer than the interval at which the game balls enter, a new entry is made in the winning output period. Since all the outputs based on the game balls can be executed in the subsequent interval between rounds, the hall computer 262 can detect (not miss) a winning. In the interval between rounds, even if it is not possible to execute all the outputs based on the game balls newly entered in the winning output period, the specific winning is performed after the jackpot game is executed until the next jackpot game is executed. Since there is a period during which the game ball does not enter the mouth 65a (a jackpot game interval), the game may be configured to be executed at the jackpot game interval. Note that the specific example described above is an example, and a period such as a prize output period, a prize output stop period, or an interval between rounds may be changed as appropriate.

  In the ninth control example, for example, a V winning terminal that outputs an ON signal for a predetermined period (for example, 100 milliseconds) is provided on the external output terminal plate 261 based on the passing of the game ball to the probability changing switch 65e3. You may do it. Thus, by comparing the output timings of the winning terminal whose output is turned on based on the winning of the specific winning opening 65a and the V winning terminal, the illegal V winning (the game ball has entered the probability changing switch 65e3). It is possible for the hall computer 262 to determine whether or not a ball has been performed.

  Specifically, the passing of the game ball to the probability change switch 65e3 is detected even though the output of the winning terminal is not turned on, that is, the gaming ball has not entered the specific winning port 65a. When the output of the winning terminal is turned on, there is a high possibility that the V winning (the game ball has entered the probability variation switch 65e3) is illegal. Therefore, when the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is OFF, the case where the V winning terminal is ON can be detected as illegal or abnormal.

  Furthermore, a predetermined passing time (for example, 1 second) is required for a game ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a and the game ball to pass the probability variation switch 65e3. Thus, by setting the period (continuous prize output period) during which the continuous prize terminal is turned on to the time required for passing (1 second), the V prize terminal is set during the period when the continuous prize terminal is off (other than the continuous prize output period). When turned on, the hall computer 262 can detect that it is an illegal V prize.

  Specifically, the game balls that have entered the specific winning opening 65a are distributed to either the normal discharge channel 65e1 or the special discharge channel 65e2 after a predetermined passage time (1 second) has elapsed. It does not pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 after elapse of a predetermined passage time (1 second). Therefore, if the continuous winning terminal that is turned on after the game ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a and then turned off after the passage of a predetermined passing time (1 second) is turned off, the probability change switch The game ball does not pass through 65e3. Therefore, if the V winning terminal is turned on during a period in which the continuous winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is off (other than the continuous winning output period), it can be determined that the V winning prize is invalid.

<10th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 181 to 196, the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example will be described. In the tenth control example, when the player operates the frame button 22, a first slide member (hereinafter referred to as an accessory A) 720, a second slide member (hereinafter referred to as an accessory B) 740, It is different in that an accessory operation effect driven by a tilting member (hereinafter referred to as an accessory C) 460 is executed.

  This accessory operation effect is an effect executed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), and when the player operates (presses) the frame button 22, a plurality of the above-mentioned accessories (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460). ) Is driven.

  In this way, in the effect of driving the accessory based on the player's operation of the frame button 22, the accessory can be driven based on the player's operation. The game was able to be played.

  Further, during a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), the player operates the frame button 22 by executing an accessory operation effect that can drive the accessory multiple times based on the operation of the frame button 22. Since the accessory operation effect is executed a plurality of times based on the number of times of operation, the player can be more motivated to play the game.

  However, there is a problem that during the period in which the accessory is being driven during the accessory operation effect, the accessory cannot be driven even if the frame button 22 is operated, and the effect effect of the accessory operation effect is reduced. It was. Here, when the driving period of the accessory executed based on the operation of the frame button 22 is shortened in advance, the period during which the accessory is driven can be shortened. Although it becomes possible to make it easy to drive an accessory based on this, there existed a problem that the range which an accessory will drive based on operation of the frame button 22 will become small, and the production effect will fall.

  The accessory operation effect executed in the tenth control example solves the above-described problem. Specifically, in the case where an accessory operation effect is being executed, if a predetermined condition (for example, the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during driving of the accessory) is satisfied, the driving pattern of the accessory executed next time As a driving period (for example, 0.5 seconds) shorter than a normal driving period (for example, 1 second) is set.

  In the gaming machine having such a configuration, when a predetermined condition (for example, operating (pressing) the frame button 22 while driving the accessory) is satisfied during the accessory operation effect, the accessory operation to be driven next time Therefore, for example, when the player operates (presses) the frame button 22 continuously, the short drive period is set as the driving period of the accessory, and the player sets the frame button 22 to 1 When the operation is performed (pressed) only once, a long drive period can be set as the drive period of the accessory. Therefore, the number of times of driving of the accessory based on the operation of the frame button 22 can be increased during the accessory operation effect executed for a predetermined period, and further, the effect of the effect of driving one accessory is prevented from being lowered. be able to.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 181 to FIG. 183, the driving contents of the accessory in this control example will be described. In addition, about the same element as 1st Embodiment mentioned above, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 181, an outline of the operation of each accessory (an accessory A720 to an accessory C460) used for an accessory driving effect in this control example will be described. FIG. 181 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an operation outline of the accessory A720 used for the accessory driving effect in the present control example. As shown in FIG. 181 (a), in the accessory driving effect of this control example, the operating motors (hereinafter referred to as "motors for accessory A") 771, 772 are driven, so that the accessory A720 moves in the left-right direction. Drive (see FIG. 40). Specifically, it moves from the retracted position shown in FIG. 40 (a) to the extended position shown in FIG. 40 (b) (operation period 0.5 seconds), and then moves from the extended position to the retracted position ( An operation having a total operation period of 1 second is performed.

  FIG. 181 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an outline of the operation of the accessory B740 used for the accessory driving effect in the present control example. As shown in FIG. 181 (b), in the accessory driving effect of this control example, the operating motor (hereinafter, referred to as a motor for accessory B) 773 and 774 is driven, so that the accessory B is moved vertically. Drive (see FIG. 41). Specifically, it moves from the retracted position shown in FIG. 41 (a) to the extended position shown in FIG. 41 (b) (operation period 1 second), and then moves from the extended position to the retracted position (operation period). An operation with a total operation period of 2 seconds is performed for 1 second).

  FIG. 181 (c) is a schematic diagram illustrating an outline of the operation of the accessory C460 used for the accessory driving effect in the present control example. As shown in FIG. 181 (c), in the accessory driving effect of the present control example, the accessory B 740 is rotationally driven by driving the operating motor (hereinafter referred to as an accessory C motor) 441 ( (See FIG. 25 and FIG. 26). Specifically, it moves from the retracted position shown in FIG. 25 (a) to the extended position shown in FIG. 26 (a) (operation period 1.5 seconds), and then moves from the extended position to the retracted position ( An operation with a total operation period of 3 seconds (operation period 1.5 seconds) is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 182, the accessory driving effect in this control example will be described. FIG. 182 (a) is a schematic diagram showing that each accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) is located at the retreat position (standby position), and FIG. 182 (b) shows each accessory ( It is a schematic diagram which shows that the accessory A720-accessory C460) is located in the overhanging position (operation | movement position).

  As shown in FIG. 182 (a), the accessory driving effect in this control example is the operation of the frame button 22 for each accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) provided around the third symbol display device 81. It is an effect to be driven based on. Specifically, when the player operates (presses) the frame button 22 once, all the objects positioned at the retreat position (standby position) are driven (in the case of FIG. 182 (a), All the objects A720 to C460 are driven). Thus, since a plurality of actors can be driven based on one operation of the frame button 22, it is possible to enhance the effect of the accessory driving effect based on the player's operation.

  In this accessory driving effect, as described above, the operation time of each accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) is set to be different, the accessory A720 is the operation period of 1 second, and the accessory B740 is the operation period. The operation period of 3 seconds is set for 2 seconds and for the accessory C460. In this way, by changing the operation period of each accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460), all the accessories (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) are all located at the retreat position (standby position). When the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) in a state (a state in which an accessory driving effect is started), all the accessories (an accessory A720 to an accessory C460) start driving. Then, after 1 second, the accessory A720 returns to the retracted position (standby position) (the operation is completed), and after 1 second, the accessory B740 returns to the retracted position (standby position) (the operation is completed), and finally The object C460 returns to the retracted position (standby position) (the operation is completed).

  Therefore, the timing at which the actor is positioned at the retracted position (standby position) during the accessory driving effect can be varied, and the player is driven by the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 during the accessory driving effect. Things can be made different, and the effect of the effect driving effect can be enhanced.

  A detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 187. In this control example, the period during which the frame button 22 can be operated in the accessory driving effect (the period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is effectively determined) is 10 seconds. An object drive effect (long consecutive hit effect) and a 5-second accessory drive effect (short hit effect) can be set. Thereby, it is possible to cause the player to eagerly operate the frame button 22 to drive the accessory several times within a limited period.

  Then, each accessory (act A780 to accessory C460) driven based on the operation of the frame button 22 is driven so as to cover the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. 182 (b). To do. Thus, it can be made to grasp | ascertain that the player is driving the actor reliably by driving the actor so as to cover the display area P of the third symbol display device.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 183, the operation of the accessory A720 in the accessory driving effect of this control example will be described. FIG. 183 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the accessory A720 driven in the accessory driving effect in the present control example, and FIG. 183 (b) shows driving in the normal driving pattern in the accessory driving effect in the present control example. FIG. 183 (c) is a schematic diagram illustrating the driving range of the accessory A720 driven by the shortened driving pattern in the accessory driving effect in the present control example. It is the schematic diagram shown.

  As shown in FIG. 183 (a), the accessory A720 is a pair of slide members 720 provided on the left and right sides of the second slide operation unit 700, respectively. Of the pair of slide members 720, the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 is located between the left slide member 720a and the right slide member 720b (see FIG. 2).

  The slide member 720 is configured to be driven based on the operation of the frame button 22, and when the drive is started, a pair of slide members 720 (left slide member 720a and right slide member 720) are respectively provided. It moves in the center direction of the second slide operation unit 700 (in the direction covering the display area P of the third symbol display device 81).

  As shown in FIG. 183 (b), when the accessory A720 is driven in the normal drive pattern, the pair of slide members 720 are located near the center of the second slide operation unit 700 (the display area of the third symbol display device 81). It is driven to a position where it approaches (contacts) in the vicinity of the center of P. In this normal drive pattern, the movement period from the standby position (position of FIG. 183 (a)) to the maximum drive position (position of FIG. 183 (b)) is set to 0.5 seconds. The period is set to 1 second (1 second for reciprocating the moving period of 0.5 seconds).

  In this way, since the accessory A720 driven in the normal driving pattern is driven so as to cover the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 that the player is gazing at, the player drives the accessory A720. It is easy to notice and can enhance the production effect. It should be noted that during the execution of the accessory driving effect, various images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (images of the effect display executed in the above-described control examples) indicate the driving accessory A720. It is displayed at the position to avoid. As a result, it is possible to simultaneously perform the effect of driving the accessory and the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the effect of the effect can be further enhanced.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 183 (c), when the accessory A720 is driven in the shortened drive pattern, the pair of slide members 720 are driven in a range that is half the drive range of the normal drive pattern. In this shortened drive pattern, the movement time from the standby position (position in FIG. 183 (a)) to the shortened drive position (position in FIG. 183 (b)) is set to 0.25 seconds. The period is set to 0.5 seconds (0.5 seconds for reciprocating the movement period of 0.25 seconds).

  Thus, the driving period of the accessory A720 when the shortened driving pattern is set is approximately half of the driving period of the accessory A720 when the normal driving pattern is set. Therefore, the drive period executed based on the operation of the frame button 22 can be shortened, and the frame button multiple times frame button 22 is operated during the accessory driving effect executed for a predetermined period (5 seconds or 10 seconds). In this case, it is possible to easily drive the accessory A 720 based on the operation of the frame button 22.

  More specifically, when the accessory A720 is executed in the normal driving pattern, the accessory A720 can be driven based on the operation of the frame button 22 next, and the driving by the normal driving pattern is completed. In contrast to the timing (that is, after one second), when the accessory A720 is executed in the shortened drive pattern, the accessory A720 can be driven based on the operation of the frame button 22 next. Is the timing when driving with the shortened driving pattern ends (that is, after 0.5 seconds).

  That is, when the accessory A720 is driven in the normal drive pattern, the operation of the frame button 22 is treated as invalid with respect to the accessory A720 for one second after the start of the drive, and the accessory A720 is driven in the shortened drive pattern. In this case, the operation of the frame button 22 is treated as invalid with respect to the accessory A720 for 0.5 seconds after the driving is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 184, the flow of the operation of the frame button 22 and the operation of each accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) in the “button repeated hitting effect” which is the accessory driving effect in this control example will be described. do. FIG. 184 is a timing chart showing the flow of the accessory driving effect in this control example. As shown in FIG. 184, when the “button repeated striking effect” is started, an “effective period” in which the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 is valid is set (for example, 10 seconds). Then, when the player operates the frame button 22 during the “valid period” (“button press” ON), each of the features (the feature A 720 to the role A) in the stopped state (position in the standby position). The operation of the object C460) is started (point a in FIG. 184).

  In this control example, the driving period of the accessory A 720 is set to 1 second, the driving period of the accessory B 740 is set to 2 seconds, and the driving period of the accessory C 460 is set to 3 seconds. . Then, when the frame button 22 is operated again at the timing when the accessory A720 is being driven (“button pressed” ON), an invalid flag 223af indicating that the frame button 22 has been operated during the invalid period (see FIG. 186). Is set to ON (point b in FIG. 184).

  Thereafter, when the driving period (1 second) of the accessory A720 has elapsed and the frame button 22 is operated at a timing when the accessory A720 is in a stopped state (a state where it is in the standby position), the accessory A720 is driven. The shortening drive pattern is executed as the pattern, and the invalid flag 223af is set to OFF (point c in FIG. 184). At this point c, since the accessory B 740 is stopped and the accessory C 460 is in an operating state, the accessory A 720 is driven in a shortened drive pattern based on the operation of the frame button 22 at the point c, and the accessory B 740 Are driven in a predetermined drive pattern.

  In the present control example, as described above, when the frame button 22 is operated while the accessory A720 is being driven, the invalid flag 223af is set to ON, and the accessory A 720 in a state where the invalid flag 223af is set to ON. When a new drive is performed, a shortened drive pattern is set. Thereby, since the driving mode of the special accessory which is different from the normal one can be provided to the player who has actively operated the frame button 22 while the accessory A 720 is being driven, the production effect can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, in this control example, when the accessory A720 is newly driven with the invalid flag 223af set to ON, the shortened drive pattern is set, so that the accessory driving effect is achieved. When the frame button 22 is operated a plurality of times in a short period during a certain “button repeated effect”, it is possible to increase the number of times the accessory A 720 is driven.

  Next, returning to FIG. 184, the flow when the frame button 22 is operated a plurality of times in a short time will be described. At the timing indicated by a point d in FIG. 184, each accessory (an accessory A720 to an accessory C460) enters an operating state based on the operation of the frame button 22 in the same manner as the point a. Then, the invalid flag 223af is set to ON by operating the frame button 22 at the timing when the accessory A720 started to be driven at the point d is operating (ie, within 1 second from the point d) (FIG. 184). Point e). Thereafter, the accessory A 720 that has started driving at the point d is stopped, and the timing when the accessory B 740 and the accessory C 460 are operating (that is, a period from when one second has elapsed from the point d until two seconds have elapsed). ), When the frame button 22 is operated, the accessory A720 starts operating in a shortened drive pattern (0.5 seconds) (point f in FIG. 184).

  Then, when the frame button 22 is operated again within 0.5 seconds after the operation of the accessory A720 started to be driven at the point f, the accessory A720 starts operating with the normal drive pattern (1 second). (Point g in FIG. 184).

  This point g is a timing at which the accessory B 740 and the accessory C 460 that have started driving at the point d are not finished in operation and one second has not elapsed since the point f. If the shortened drive pattern (0.5 seconds) is not set as the drive pattern of A720, all the objects (object A720 to object C460) are in the operating state at the point g, and the operation of the frame button 22 is performed. It is not possible to drive an accessory based on

  On the other hand, in the present control example, it is possible to drive the accessory A720 at the point f with a shortened variation pattern (0.5 seconds), so that the accessory A720 can be stopped at the point g. As described above, in the present control example, the shortened drive pattern can be set as the accessory drive pattern, and therefore, a plurality of times (for example, point d to point g in FIG. 184) (for example, When the (four times) frame button operation is executed, the number of times of driving the accessory based on the operation of the frame button 22 can be increased.

<Electric Configuration in Tenth Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 185, an electrical configuration in the tenth control example will be described. The tenth control example is different from the first control example in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are changed. Since other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 185 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example. This control example is different from the first control example described above in that the configuration of signal output control to each drive motor (771, 772, 773, 774, 441) is different. Since other parts are the same, the same reference numerals are given and description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 185, an input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 constituted by an address bus and a data bus. A drive motor group is connected to the input / output port 225. This drive motor group includes an accessory A motor (first slide member motor) 771, 772, an accessory B motor (second slide member motor) 773, 774, and an accessory C motor (tilting member). Motor) 441 and other motors are included.

  Each motor described above is composed of a stepping motor and a motor driver, and an operation command (operation (rotation) speed (pps), operation step for setting operation contents for each motor driver from the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113) Number and a command that can specify the movement (rotation) direction. The motor operation command output from the sound lamp control device 113 is set with reference to the contents defined in the operation scenario table 222ab stored in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the tenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 186 to 188. FIG. 186 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the tenth control example. The ROM 222 in the tenth control example is different from the ROM 222 in the first control example in that a continuous hit effect selection table 222aa and an operation scenario table 222ab are added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 187 (a), the repeated impact selection table 222aa will be described. FIG. 187 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the repeated strike selection table 222aa. The repetitive hit effect selection table 222aa is a table for determining whether or not to execute the repetitive strike effect, and when executing it, the type of the repetitive strike effect is selected, and the fluctuation pattern output from the main control device 110 is the normal reach. Reference is made in the case of the above (that is, the fluctuation time is 30 seconds or more).

  As shown in FIG. 187 (a), the repeated hitting effect selection table 222aa is a table for selecting the type of repeated hitting effect based on the determination result of the current special figure fluctuation and the value of the effect counter 223f. “Long-shot effect production” in which 10,000 milliseconds is set in the continuous hitting effective timer 223ab that sets the period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is valid at 10,000 milliseconds (10 seconds), and the continuous hitting effect start time is 10,000 milliseconds (10 seconds) ), Either “short-shot effect” that sets 5000 milliseconds in the continuous-hit effective timer 223ab that sets the period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is valid, or “−” that does not execute the continuous-hit effect is selected.

  This continuous hitting effect selection table 222aa is referred to in a variable display setting process 3 (S1512 in FIG. 190) described later (S1762). Specifically, if the current success / failure determination result is “winning” and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is “0 to 9”, “long-running effect” is selected as the consecutive impact effect type, and the effect counter 223f When the value is “10 to 19”, “Short Strike Effect” is selected as the repeated hit effect type, and when the value of the effect counter 223f is “20 to 198”, “−” is selected as the repeated hit effect type. .

  On the other hand, if the current determination result is “Out” and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is “0 to 4”, “Long Strike Effect” is selected as the consecutive hit effect type, and the value of the effect counter 223f is “ In the case of “5 to 19”, “Short Strike Effect” is selected as the repeated hit effect type, and in the case where the value of the effect counter 223f is “20 to 198”, “−” is selected as the repeated hit effect type.

  As described above, in the consecutive hit effect selection table 222aa in this control example, the ratio (about 10%) at which the repeat hit effect is selected is the same when the determination result is “winning” and “off”. However, when the success / failure determination result is “Win”, the ratio of “Long Strike Effect” is set higher as the consecutive hit effect type than when the success / failure determination result is “Out”. (“Hits” = 50%, “Out” = 25%). Thereby, when the “long continuous hit effect” is executed as the continuous hit effect, it is possible to increase the degree of expectation for the player.

  Furthermore, in this example of control, the time (continuous hit production start time) when the continuous hit effect is executed. Since the “long consecutive hit effect” and the “short consecutive hit effect” are the same (10000 milliseconds), whether the repeated hit effect that is executed this time is the “long consecutive hit effect” or “short repeated hit effect” It is restrained that a player grasps whether it is "." Thereby, when the repetitive striking effect is started, it is possible to expect the player to continue the effect for a long time, and there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  Next, the operation scenario table 222ab will be described with reference to FIG. 187 (b). FIG. 187 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the operation scenario table 222ab. The action scenario table 222ab is a table in which the action scenario of each accessory in the repetitive strike effect is stored, and each accessory action timer 223ac set when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the repetitive strike effect. An operation command corresponding to a value of ˜223ae is defined.

  As shown in FIG. 187 (b), in this action scenario table 222ab, an action A 720 scenario table 222ab1, an action B scenario table 222ab2, and an action C scenario table 222ab3 in which the action scenario of the accessory A 720 is set. Are defined, and the corresponding scenario table is referred to when each accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) is driven.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 188 (a) to 188 (c), the contents of each scenario table respectively corresponding to the accessory A720 to the accessory C460 defined in the operation scenario table 222ab will be described.

  First, with reference to FIG. 188 (a), the accessory A scenario table 222ab1 will be described. FIG. 188 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the accessory A scenario table 222ab1. This accessory A scenario table 222ab1 is a table in which an operation scenario for the accessory A 720 executed during the repetitive strike effect is set, and is executed when the operation type is “normal” (normal operation scenario). And an operation scenario (abbreviated operation scenario) executed when the operation type is “shortened”.

  As shown in FIG. 188 (a), the accessory A scenario table 222ab1 shows the elapsed time after the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the continuous striking effect and it is determined that the accessory A720 can be driven. Corresponding to the value of the A operation timer 223ac, a setting value (operation speed) set for the accessory A motor (driver for the accessory A motor) for each operation pointer value indicating the setting progress based on the operation scenario. (Pps), the number of operation steps, and the operation direction) are defined.

  Specifically, when the action type is “normal”, the action pointer value “01H” is set corresponding to the value “1000” of the accessory A action timer 223ac. This operation pointer “01H” is defined with “100 pps” as the operation speed, “50” as the number of steps, and “forward direction” as the operation direction. Thereafter, the value “02H” of the action pointer is set corresponding to the value “500” of the accessory A action timer 223ac. This operation pointer “02H” is defined with “100 pps” as the operation speed, “50” as the number of steps, and “negative direction” as the operation direction.

  Then, the action pointer value “03H” is set corresponding to the value “0” of the accessory A action timer 223ac. The operation pointer “03H” defines “END” information indicating the end of the operation scenario.

  That is, when the action A operation of “normal” is executed, the accessory A motors 771 and 772 are in the “forward direction” for 0.5 seconds (the forward direction of reciprocation, that is, the left slide member 720a and Drive in the direction in which the right slide member 720b approaches each other (see FIG. 183 (b)), and thereafter “negative direction” for 0.5 seconds (return direction of the reciprocating operation, that is, the left slide member 720a and the right slide member) An operation (that is, an accessory operation in which the entire operation period is 1 second) is performed in a direction in which the 720b is separated from each other (see FIG. 183 (b)).

  When the action type is “shortened”, the action pointer value “01H” is set corresponding to the value “500” of the accessory A action timer 223ac. The operation pointer “01H” is defined with “100 pps” as the operation speed, “25” as the number of steps, and “positive direction” as the operation direction. Thereafter, the value “02H” of the action pointer is set corresponding to the value “250” of the accessory A action timer 223ac. The operation pointer “02H” is defined with “100 pps” as the operation speed, “25” as the number of steps, and “negative direction” as the operation direction.

  Then, the action pointer value “03H” is set corresponding to the value “0” of the accessory A action timer 223ac. The operation pointer “03H” defines “END” information indicating the end of the operation scenario.

  That is, when the action A operation with the action type “shortening” is executed, the accessory A motors 771 and 772 are in the “forward direction” for 0.25 seconds (the forward direction of the reciprocating action, that is, the left slide member 720a and Drive in the direction in which the right slide member 720b approaches each other (see FIG. 183 (b)), and then “negative direction” for 0.25 seconds (reverse direction of reciprocation, that is, the left slide member 720a and the right slide member) An operation (that is, an accessory operation in which the entire operation period is 0.5 seconds) is performed in a direction in which the 720b is separated from each other (see FIG. 183 (b)).

  As described above, the action content of the accessory A 720 during the continuous striking effect includes an operation scenario having a long operation period (1 second) (normal drive pattern) and an operation scenario having a short operation period (0.5 seconds) (shortened drive pattern). ) Are defined, and one of the drive patterns is selected and executed according to the situation (setting condition of the shortening flag 223ag) when driving of the accessory A720 is started.

  Although details will be described later, the shortening flag 223ag is a flag that is set to ON when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) at the timing when the accessory A720 is operating. The operation of the accessory A 720 is started in a state where the shortening flag 223ag is on (the operation of the accessory A when the shortening flag 223ag is set to on is completed and the operation of the next accessory A 720 is started). ), The action type “shortened” is set. Therefore, when the player actively operates the frame button 22 a plurality of times during the repetitive striking effect, a shortened drive pattern with a short operation period is set, so that the bonus is based on the operation of the frame button 22 during the repetitive striking effect. The number of times A720 is operated can be increased.

  In addition, since a normal driving pattern is set for a player who does not operate the frame button 22 a plurality of times during a repetitive striking effect, it is possible to enhance the rendition effect in one action of an accessory. As described above, by changing the operation pattern (operation period) of the accessory based on the operation (pressing) state of the frame button 22 during the continuous striking effect, the operation (pressing) state on the frame button 22 of the player is changed. Thus, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

  Next, the accessory B scenario table 222ab2 will be described with reference to FIG. 188 (b). FIG. 188 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the accessory B scenario table 222ab2. This accessory B scenario table 222ab2 is a table in which an operation scenario is set for the accessory B 740 executed during the repetitive strike effect, and is executed when the operation type is “normal” (normal operation scenario). Only set.

  As shown in FIG. 188 (b), in the accessory B scenario table 222ab2, as in the above-described accessory A scenario table 222ab1, the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the continuous hitting effect, and the accessory B 740 can be driven. Corresponding to the value of the accessory B action timer 223ad indicating the elapsed time since the determination, the accessory B motor (for the accessory B motor) is set for each action pointer value indicating the setting progress based on the action scenario. Setting values (operation speed (pps), number of operation steps, and operation direction) set for the driver are defined.

  Specifically, when the action type is “normal”, the action pointer value “01H” is set corresponding to the value “2000” of the accessory B action timer 223ad. The operation pointer “01H” is defined with “100 pps” as the operation speed, “100” as the number of steps, and “positive direction” as the operation direction. Thereafter, the value “02H” of the action pointer is set corresponding to the value “1000” of the accessory B action timer 223ad. The operation pointer “02H” is defined with “100 pps” as the operation speed, “100” as the number of steps, and “negative direction” as the operation direction.

  Then, the action pointer value “03H” is set corresponding to the value “0” of the accessory B action timer 223ad. The operation pointer “03H” defines “END” information indicating the end of the operation scenario.

  That is, when the action B operation with the operation type “normal” is executed, the accessory B motors 773 and 774 are in the “forward direction” for 1 second (the forward direction of the reciprocation, that is, the upper slide member 740a and the lower slide). The member 740b is driven in the direction in which the members 740b approach each other, and then is driven in the “negative direction” for 1 second (reverse direction of the reciprocating operation, that is, the operation in which the upper slide member 740a and the lower slide member 740b are separated from each other , An accessory operation in which the entire operation period is 2 seconds) is executed.

  Next, the accessory C scenario table 222ab3 will be described with reference to FIG. 188 (c). FIG. 188 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the accessory C scenario table 222ab3. This accessory C scenario table 222ab3 is a table in which an operation scenario is set for the accessory C460 executed during repeated striking effects, and is executed when the operation type is “normal” (normal operation scenario). Only set.

  As shown in FIG. 188 (c), in the accessory C scenario table 222ab3, the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the repetitive striking effect, as in the above-described accessory A scenario table 222ab1 and accessory B scenario table 222ab2. Corresponding to the value of the action C operation timer 223ae indicating the elapsed time since it is determined that the accessory C 460 can be driven, for each of the action pointer values indicating the progress of the setting based on the operation scenario, Setting values (operation speed (pps), number of operation steps, and operation direction) to be set for the motor (the accessory C motor driver) are defined.

  Specifically, when the action type is “normal”, the action pointer value “01H” is set corresponding to the value “3000” of the accessory C action timer 223ae. The operation pointer “01H” is defined with “100 pps” as the operation speed, “150” as the number of steps, and “positive direction” as the operation direction. Thereafter, the value “02H” of the action pointer is set corresponding to the value “1500” of the accessory C action timer 223ae. The operation pointer “02H” is defined with “100 pps” as the operation speed, “150” as the number of steps, and “negative direction” as the operation direction.

  Then, the action pointer value “03H” is set corresponding to the value “0” of the accessory C action timer 223ae. The operation pointer “03H” defines “END” information indicating the end of the operation scenario.

  In other words, when the accessory C operation with the operation type “normal” is executed, the accessory C motor 441 moves in the “forward direction” for 1.5 seconds (the forward direction of the reciprocating operation, that is, the tilting member 460 tilts. After driving, “negative direction” for 1.5 seconds (reverse direction of the reciprocating operation, that is, an operation of driving in a direction in which the inclination of the tilting member 460 is restored (that is, an accessory operation having a total operation period of 3 seconds)) Is executed.

  As described above, in this control example, only the accessory A scenario table 223ab1 is set as the action type “shortening”. This is because, by shortening the operation of the accessory (the accessory A 720) having the shortest operation period among the plurality of actors (the accessory A 720 to the accessory C 460) driven during the repetitive strike effect, This is to increase the number of actions of the accessory during repeated hitting effects while suppressing a reduction in the effect of the effect in the object movement.

  In addition, although the action type “shortening” is not set in each scenario table (the accessory B scenario table 222ab2 and the accessory C scenario table 222ab3) corresponding to the above-mentioned accessory B740 and the accessory C460, the action type “shortening” is set. May be set.

  Returning to FIG. FIG. 186 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the tenth control example. The RAM 223 in the tenth control example is different from the RAM 223 in the first control example in the repeated hitting effect type storage area 223aa, the continuous hitting effective timer 223ab, the accessory A operation timer 223ac, the accessory B operation timer 223ad, The object C operation timer 223ae is different in that a counter flag 223af and a shortening flag 223ag are added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The repeated hitting effect type storage area 223aa is an area for storing the type of repeated hitting effect selected with reference to the repeated hitting effect selection table 222aa. In the continuous hitting effect type storage area 223aa, when it is determined that the fluctuation display setting process 3 (see FIG. 190) is not less than normal reach (the fluctuation time is 30 seconds (30000 milliseconds) or more) (S1761: Yes), The type of striking effect selected with reference to the effect selection table 222aa (S1762 in FIG. 190) is set (S1763 in FIG. 190). Then, when the special figure variation ends (the repeated hitting effect ends), the set information (the repeated hitting effect type) is cleared.

  The continuous hitting effective timer 223ab is a timer for measuring a period during which an operation on the frame button 22 is effectively determined in the continuous hitting effect. This interlocking valid timer 223ab is determined in the consecutive hit button processing (S1857 in FIG. 192) executed in the frame button input monitoring / setting process 3 (see FIG. 191), that is, when it is determined that the repeated hit effect start time has been reached, that is, When it is determined that the repeated hitting effect start time (10000 milliseconds has elapsed from the start of change) set in the action scenario table 223ab corresponding to the currently executed repeated hitting effect (s1902: yes in FIG. 192), The value of the continuous hitting effective timer 23ab set in the operation scenario table 223ab corresponding to the continuous hitting effect currently being executed is set (S1903 in FIG. 192). Then, it is referred to determine whether or not it is a period in which the repeated button effect can be executed (S1906 in FIG. 192), and every time the button timer subtraction process (S1907 in FIG. 193) is executed (every millisecond). Until the value becomes 0 (S2211 in FIG. 193), 1 is subtracted (S2212 in FIG. 193).

  The accessory A operation timer 223ac is a timer that counts the operation scenario of the accessory A720 in the repetitive strike effect, and is an operation scenario defined in the accessory A scenario table 222ab1 corresponding to the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac. Based on this, the operation of the accessory A720 is controlled.

  This accessory A action timer 223ac is cleared to 0 (S1904 in FIG. 192) when the repeated hitting button processing (see FIG. 192) reaches the repeated hit effect start time (S1902: Yes in FIG. 192). The accessory A action setting process (FIG. 194) executed when the value of the timer 223ab is larger than 0 (S1906: Yes in FIG. 192) and the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) (S1908: Yes in FIG. 192). In (refer to), a value corresponding to the state is set (S3704, S3705 in FIG. 194).

  Specifically, when the accessory A 720 is driven in the normal drive pattern, the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is set to “1000” (S3704 in FIG. 194). The value of the object A operation timer 223ac is set to “500” (S3705 in FIG. 194).

  The value set in the accessory A action timer 223ac is obtained every time the button timer subtraction process (S1907 in FIG. 193) executed in the continuous hit button process (see FIG. 192) is executed (that is, every 1 millisecond). ), 1 is subtracted until the value becomes “0” (S2213: Yes in FIG. 193) (S2214 in FIG. 193).

  The accessory B operation timer 223ad is a timer that counts the operation scenario of the accessory B 740 in the repetitive strike effect, and is an operation scenario defined in the accessory B scenario table 222ab2 corresponding to the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad. Based on this, the action of the accessory B 740 is controlled.

  This accessory B action timer 223ad is cleared to 0 (S1904 in FIG. 192) when the repeated hitting button processing (see FIG. 192) reaches the repeated hit effect start time (S1902: Yes in FIG. 192), and the continuous hitting is valid. The accessory B action setting process (FIG. 195) executed when the value of the timer 223ab is larger than 0 (S1906: Yes in FIG. 192) and the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) (S1908: Yes in FIG. 192). In (a), “2000” is set as the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad (S3802 in FIG. 195 (a)).

  The value set in the accessory B action timer 223ad is obtained every time the button timer subtraction process (S1907 in FIG. 193) executed in the continuous hit button process (see FIG. 192) is executed (that is, every 1 millisecond). ), 1 is subtracted until the value becomes “0” (S2215: Yes in FIG. 193) (S2216 in FIG. 193).

  The accessory C action timer 223ae is a timer that counts the action scenario of the accessory C460 in the repetitive strike effect, and is an action scenario defined in the accessory C scenario table 222ab3 corresponding to the value of the accessory C action timer 223ae. Based on this, the operation of the accessory C460 is controlled.

  This accessory C action timer 223ae is cleared to 0 (S1904 in FIG. 192) when the repeated hitting button processing (see FIG. 192) reaches the repeated hit effect start time (S1902: Yes in FIG. 192), and the continuous hitting is valid. The accessory C action setting process (FIG. 195) executed when the value of the timer 223ab is larger than 0 (S1906: Yes in FIG. 192) and the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) (S1908: Yes in FIG. 192). In (b), “3000” is set to the value of the accessory C action timer 223ae (S3902 in FIG. 195 (b)).

  The value set in the accessory C action timer 223ae is obtained every time the button timer subtraction process (S1907 in FIG. 193) executed in the continuous hit button process (see FIG. 192) is executed (that is, every 1 millisecond). ), 1 is subtracted until the value becomes “0” (S2217: Yes in FIG. 193) (S2218 in FIG. 193).

  As described above, each of the actors (acts A720 to C460) driven based on the operation on the frame button 22 during the continuous striking effect is provided with the operation scenario and the operation timer. Can be driven independently. Furthermore, in this control example, since the value of the operation timer set for each accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) is different, the operation for driving each accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460). The period is different. Thereby, only the accessory which is not driven when the frame button 22 is operated (the accessory whose operation timer value is “0”) can be driven. Therefore, according to the operation state of each accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460), the movement of the entire accessory when the frame button 22 is operated can be varied, and the production effect can be enhanced. it can.

  In addition, among each of the items (the item A 720 to the item C 460), an operation scenario in which the operation period is shorter than the other item (the item B 740 and the item C 460) is shorter than the other item (the item B 740 and the item C 460). Since the shortened drive pattern) can be set, all the objects (acts A720 to C460) are driven at the same time during the repetitive striking effect (all the objects (acts A720 to C460). The period of the operation timer is not “0”) can be shortened, and the driving effect of the accessory based on the operation of the frame button 22 can be easily performed.

  The invalid flag 223af is a flag for determining that the frame button 22 is operated while the accessory A720 is operating (the value of the accessory A operation timer is not “0”). Is set to ON when the frame button 22 is operated during operation. In the state where the invalid flag 223af is set to ON, when the driving of the accessory A720 is started, an operation scenario (shortened drive pattern) having an operation period shorter than normal is set.

  The invalid flag 223af is set to OFF (S1905 in FIG. 192) when the continuous hit effect start time is reached (S1902 in FIG. 192: Yes) in the repeated hit button process (see FIG. 192). In the accessory A action setting process (see FIG. 194) executed when the value is larger than 0 (S1906: Yes in FIG. 192) and the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) (S1908: Yes in FIG. 192). When the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is not “0” (S3701: No in FIG. 194), it is set to ON (S3702 in FIG. 194).

  Then, in the accessory A action setting process (see FIG. 194), when the accessory A action timer 223ac value is “0” (S3701: Yes in FIG. 194), the invalid flag 223af is set to ON (FIG. 194). (S3703: Yes) in FIG. 194 is set to OFF (S3706 in FIG. 194) after the operation scenario which is a shortened driving pattern is set (S3705 in FIG. 194).

  In this control example, when the frame button 22 is operated while the accessory A720 is in operation, the invalid flag 223af is set to ON, or the timing at which the next consecutive striking effect is started, or the next accessory A720 Although the configuration is such that it is not set off until the operation is executed, a condition for setting the invalid flag 223af to off may be further provided. For example, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been operated for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) after the invalid flag 223af is turned on, the invalid flag 223af may be set off. Good.

  As a result, a shortened drive pattern in which the operation period is shortened is executed only for a player who continuously operates the frame button 22 a plurality of times. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an effect effect according to the operation status of the frame button 22. In this case, the period for setting the invalid flag 223af to OFF may be the operation period (3 seconds) of the accessory (the accessory C460) having the longest operation period among the actors that can be driven by the continuous striking effect. By configuring in this way, when the frame button 22 is operated in a state in which all the objects (acts A 720 to C 460) are not driven in the repetitive striking effect, a shortened drive pattern is provided only for the function A 720. Setting can be prevented.

  In this control example, if the frame button 22 is operated once while the accessory A 720 is operating, the invalid flag 223af is set to ON. However, another condition may be set for setting the invalid flag 223af to ON. A condition may be set, for example, a condition in which the case where the frame button 22 is operated a plurality of times (for example, three times) while the accessory A720 is operating may be set to ON. The remaining period (the remaining period of the continuous hitting effective timer) may be set as a condition for turning on when a predetermined period (for example, within 3 seconds) is reached.

  In addition, in this control example, the invalid flag 223af is set off when an operation scenario that is a shortened drive pattern is set. However, other configurations may be used. For example, the invalid flag 223af is once turned on. When set, the invalid flag 223af may not be set to OFF until the repeated hitting effect ends.

  The shortening flag 223ag is a flag for determining the action type of the accessory A720, and is set to ON when the action type “shortening” is selected. This shortening flag 223ag is used when it is determined that the invalid flag 223af is set to ON in the accessory A action setting process (see FIG. 194) executed in the continuous hit button process (see FIG. 192) (FIG. 194). S3703: Yes), and is set to ON (S3703 in FIG. 194).

  Then, in the accessory action process (FIG. 196), it is referred to when selecting the action type of the accessory A scenario table (S2512 in FIG. 196), and when the action type is selected and the action scenario is set (S2514), It is set to off (S2515 in FIG. 196).

<Regarding Control Processing in Tenth Control Example>
Next, control processing in the tenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 189 to 196. In the control process in the tenth control example, the contents of the sound lamp control device 113 are changed with respect to the first control example. Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the tenth control example, the variable display setting process (S1512 in FIG. 82) is changed to the variable display setting process 3 (S1512 in FIG. 190) with respect to the main process (see FIG. 80) in the first control example. Point, frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1507 in FIG. 83) is changed to frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (S1560 in FIG. 191), and accessory action processing (S1561 in FIG. 196). It is different from the newly added point.

  First, a control process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing the contents of the main process in the tenth control example. When the main process is executed, the processes of S1501 to S1506 are executed in the same manner as the main process (see FIG. 80) of the first control example described above. When the process of S1506 is completed, the frame button input monitoring / effect process (FIG. Instead of 83 (S1507), frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (S1560) is executed. The detailed description of the frame button input monitoring / production process 3 (S1560 in FIG. 191) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S1560 is completed, the processing of S1508 to S1510 is executed in the same manner as the main processing (see FIG. 80) of the first control example described above, and after the processing of S1510 is completed, next, the accessory operation processing (S1512) Execute. The detailed description of this accessory operation process (S1561) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1561 is completed, the command determination process (S1511) is then executed in the same manner as the main process (see FIG. 80) of the first control example described above, and then the variable display setting process (S1512) is performed. Then, the variable display setting process 3 (S1512) is executed. The detailed description of the variable display setting process 3 (S1512) will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, similarly to the main process (see FIG. 80) of the first control example described above, the processes of S1513 to S1517 are executed, and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 190, the variable display setting process 3 (S1512) in this control example will be described. FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 3 (S1512). This variable display setting process 3 (S1512) is different from the above-described variable display setting process (S1512 in FIG. 82) in the first control example in that a process for executing a continuous hit effect is added. Other processes are the same, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  When the variable display setting process 3 (S1512) is executed, the processes of S1701 to S1703 are executed in the same manner as the variable display setting process (S1512 of FIG. 82) of the first control example described above. Then, it is determined whether the variation pattern extracted in the processing of S1703 is normal reach or more (whether the variation time of the extracted variation pattern is 30 seconds (30000 milliseconds) or more) (S1761).

  If it is determined in the process of S1761 that it is equal to or greater than the normal reach, then the type of repeated hitting effect is selected based on the value of the repeated hitting effect selection table 222aa and the effect counter 223f (S1762), and the selected repeated hitting effect is selected. The type is set in the continuous hit effect type storage area 223aa (S1763).

  When the processing of S1763 is completed, a display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted in S1703 and the repeated hitting effect type set in the repeated hitting effect type storage area 223aa in S1763 (S1704). On the other hand, in the process of S1761, if it is determined that the variation pattern extracted in the process of S1703 is not equal to or higher than the normal reach (S1761: No), the processes of S1762 and S1763 are skipped and based on the variation pattern extracted in S1703. The display variation pattern command is set (S1704).

  When the process of S1704 is completed, the processes of S1706 to S1709 are executed in the same manner as the variable display setting process (S1512 of FIG. 82) of the first control example described above, and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 191, the frame button input monitoring / production process 3 (S1560) in this control example will be described. FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (S1560). This frame button input monitoring / effect process 3 (S1560) is different from the frame button input monitoring / effect process (S1507 in FIG. 83) in that a continuous hit button process (S1857) is added.

  When the frame button input monitoring / effect process 3 (S1560) is executed, the processes of S1801 to S1816 are executed in the same manner as the frame button input monitoring / effect process (S1507 in FIG. 83) of the first control example described above. The continuous hit button process is executed (S1851). Then, when the process of S1851 is finished, this process is finished.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 192, the repeated hit button process (S1851) executed in the frame button input monitoring / effect process 3 (S1560) will be described. FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuous hit button process (S1851). In this repeated hitting button process (S1851), in order to determine the operation content of each accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) executed based on the operation (pressing) on the frame button 22 executed during the continuous hit effect. The process is executed.

  When the repeated hit button process (S1851) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the repeated hit effect type ("long consecutive hit effect", "short consecutive hit effect") is set in the consecutive hit effect type storage area 223aa (S1901). If it is determined in the process of S1901 that the continuous hit effect type is not set, that is, if the repeated hit button effect is not executed in the current variation (S1901: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the repeated hitting effect type is set (S1901: Yes), it is then determined whether it is the repeated hitting effect start time (S1902). In the process of S1902, it is determined whether or not it is 10 seconds (10000 milliseconds) after the start of the continuous striking effect (see FIG. 187 (a)).

  If it is determined in the processing of S1902 that it is the repeated hitting effect start time (S1902: Yes), as an initial process when starting the repeated hitting effect, a value corresponding to the current repeated hitting effect type (““ “10000” is set for the “long-running strike effect” and “5000” is set for the “short-running strike effect” (S1903), and each accessory action timer (the accessory A action timer 223ac, the accessory B action timer 223ad, The accessory C operation timer 223ae) is cleared to 0 (S1904), and the invalid flag 223af is set to OFF (S1905). Thereafter, the process proceeds to S1906.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1902 that it is not the continuous hit effect start time (S1902: No), the initial processing of S1903 to S1905 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S1906.

  In the processing of S1906, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous hitting valid timer 223ab is larger than “0” (S1906). Here, when it is determined that the value of the continuous hitting effective timer 223ab is not larger than “0” (“0”), that is, in a period in which the continuous hitting effect is not started in the variation in which the continuous hitting effect is executed. If there is (S1906: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1906 that the value of the continuous hitting valid timer 223ab is larger than “0” (S1906: Yes), then button timer subtraction processing is executed (S1907). Here, the button timer subtraction process (S1907) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing the contents of the button timer subtraction process (S1907). This button timer subtraction process (S1907) is for subtracting various timers (continuous hitting effective timer 223ab, accessory A operation timer 223ac, accessory B operation timer 223ad, accessory C operation timer 223ae) set during the continuous hit effect. It is processing of.

  When the button timer subtraction process (S1907) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous hitting effective timer 223ab is greater than “0” (S2211), and if it is determined that it is greater than “0” (S2211: Yes). Then, the value of the continuous hitting valid timer 223ab is decremented by 1 (S2212), and the process proceeds to S2213. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is not greater than “0” (“0”), the process of S2212 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2213.

  Next, in the process of S2213, it is determined whether the value of the accessory A action timer 223ac is greater than “0” (S2213). If it is determined that the value is greater than “0” (S2213: Yes), the accessory A action The value of the timer 223ac is decremented by 1 (S2214), and the process proceeds to S2215. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is not greater than “0” (“0”) (S2213: No), the process of S2214 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2215.

  In the process of S2215, it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory B action timer 223ad is greater than “0” (S2215). If it is determined that the value is greater than “0” (S2215: Yes), The value is subtracted by 1 (S2216), and the process proceeds to S2217. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not greater than “0” (“0”) (S2215: No), the process of S2216 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2217.

  In the processing of S2217, it is determined whether the value of the accessory C action timer 223ae is greater than “0” (S2217). If it is determined that the value is greater than “0” (S2217: Yes), the accessory C action timer 223ae The value is subtracted by 1 (S2218), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is not greater than “0” (“0”) (S2217: No), the process of S2218 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Returning to FIG. 192, the description will be continued. When the button timer subtraction process (S1907) is finished, it is then determined whether the frame button 22 has been operated (pressed) (S1908). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated (S1908: Yes), each accessory As a process for driving, an accessory A action setting process (S1909), an accessory B action setting process (S1910), and an accessory C action setting process (S1911) are executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1908 that the frame button 22 has not been operated (S1908: No), this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 194, the accessory A operation setting process (S1909) will be described. FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory A action setting process (S1909). In this accessory A action setting process (S1909), a process for starting the action of the accessory A720 during the continuous striking effect and a process for setting the action type (“normal”, “shortened”) of the accessory A720 are performed. Executed.

  When the accessory A action setting process (S1909) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the value of the accessory A action timer 223ac is “0” (S3701). If it is determined that the value is “0”, that is, if the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the accessory A 720 is not operating (S3701: Yes), then the invalid flag 223af is set. If it is determined whether it is set to ON (S3703) and not set to ON (set to OFF) (S3703: No), the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is set to “1000”. ”Is set, and this process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3701 that the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is not “0”, that is, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the accessory A 720 is operating. (S3701: No), the invalid flag 223af is set to ON (S3702), and this process ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S3703 that the invalid flag 223af is set to ON (S3703: Yes), then the value of the accessory action A timer 223af is set to “500” (S3705). Then, the invalid flag 223af is set to OFF (S3706), the shortening flag 223ag is set to ON (S3707), and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 195 (a), the accessory B action setting process (S1910) will be described. FIG. 195 (a) is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory B action setting process (S1910). In the accessory B action setting process (S1910), a process for starting the action of the accessory B 740 during the continuous striking effect is executed.

  When the accessory B action setting process (S1910) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the value of the accessory B action timer 223ad is “0” (S3801). When it is determined that the value is “0”, that is, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the accessory B 740 is not operating (S3801: Yes), the accessory B operation timer 223ad is set. The value “2000” is set, and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3801 that the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is not “0”, that is, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the accessory B 740 is operating. (S3801: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

  FIG. 195 (b) is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory C action setting process (S1911). In this accessory C action setting process (S1911), a process for starting the action of the accessory C460 during the continuous striking effect is executed.

  When the accessory C action setting process (S1911) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the value of the accessory C action timer 223ae is “0” (S3901). When it is determined that the value is “0”, that is, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) when the accessory C460 is not operating (S3901: Yes), the accessory C action timer 223ae A value of “3000” is set, and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3901 that the value of the accessory C action timer 223ae is not “0”, that is, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the accessory C460 is operating. (S3901: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 196, the accessory operation process (S1561) executed in the main process (see FIG. 189) of this control example will be described. FIG. 196 is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory operation process (S1561). In the accessory action process (S1561), the accessory A action setting process (S1909), the accessory B action setting process (S1910), and the accessory C action setting executed in the above-described consecutive hit button process (S1851 in FIG. 192). Based on the various timers and flags set in the process (S1911), a process for setting the operation command of each accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) is executed. The operation command set in this process is output to a driving motor (motor driver) for driving each accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460).

  When the accessory operation process (S1561) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is greater than “0” (S2511). The value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is not greater than “0” (when it is determined that it is “0” (S2511: No)), the processing related to the accessory A720 (S2512 to S2514) is skipped and shortened. The flag 223ag is set to OFF (S2515), and the process proceeds to S2516.

  If it is determined in the processing of S2511 that the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is greater than “0” (S2511: Yes), it is then determined whether the shortening flag 223ag is set to ON (S2512). When it is determined that the shortening flag 223ag is set to ON (S2512: Yes), the operation content corresponding to the operation type “shortening” defined in the accessory A scenario table 222ab1 is read (S2513). The process proceeds to S2516.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the shortening flag 223ag is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S2512: No), it corresponds to the operation type “normal” defined in the accessory A scenario table 222ab1. The operation content to be read is read (S2514), and the process proceeds to S2516.

  In the processing of S2516, it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is greater than “0” (S2516). The value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is not greater than “0” (when it is determined that it is “0” (S2516: No)), S2517 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2518. If it is determined that the value of the object B operation timer 223ad is greater than “0” (S2518: Yes), the operation content of the accessory B scenario table 222ab2 is read (S2517), and the process proceeds to S2518.

  In the processing of S2518, it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory C action timer 223ae is greater than “0” (S2518). The value of the accessory C action timer 223ae is not greater than “0” (when it is determined that it is “0” (S2518: No)), S2519 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2520. If it is determined that the value of the object C operation timer 223ae is greater than “0” (S2518: Yes), the operation content of the accessory C scenario table 222ab3 is read (S2519), and the process proceeds to S2520.

  Then, an operation command is set based on each operation content read in the processing of S2513, S2514, S2547, and S2519 described above (S2520), and this processing ends.

  As described above, in the present control example, all of the drivable items (the combination A 720 to the combination C 460) are driven based on one operation (pressing) on the frame button 22. It is comprised so that. Therefore, it becomes possible to drive a plurality of actors by one operation (pressing) on the frame button 22, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the accessory driving effect executed based on the player's operation.

  In addition, since the operation period is different for each accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460), each of the actors (the accessory A720 to the accessory A720) that can be driven by the timing at which the frame button 22 is operated. The object C460) can be different. Thereby, since the driving mode of the accessory when the frame button 22 is operated can be diversified, the effect of the accessory driving effect executed based on the player's operation can be enhanced.

  Further, when the frame button 22 is operated while the accessory (the accessory A 720) is in operation, a shortened drive pattern with a short operation period of the accessory is set when the accessory is driven next time. It is possible to increase the number of times that an accessory is driven based on an operation on the frame button 22 for a player who eagerly operates the button 22 a plurality of times. In addition, for a player who does not operate the frame button 22 a plurality of times, an accessory is not driven in a shortened drive pattern, and an accessory is driven in a long operation period. Can be increased.

  That is, in the accessory driving effect in this control example, the player can operate the frame button by changing the driving pattern of the accessory according to the situation in which the player operates the frame button 22 (single operation, continuous hitting operation). There is an effect that it is possible to execute the accessory driving effect according to the.

  In the tenth control example described above, the invalid flag 223af, which is a condition for executing the shortened drive pattern, is set to ON when the frame button 22 is operated during the operation of the accessory A720. However, another condition may be set as a condition for setting the invalid flag 223af to be on (that is, a condition in which the shortened drive pattern is executed as a drive pattern different from the normal drive pattern). The condition may be satisfied when the frame button 22 is operated a plurality of times (for example, three times) while the is operating, and the remaining period of the repeated hitting effect period (remaining period of the continuous hitting effective timer) The condition may be satisfied when a predetermined period (for example, within 3 seconds) is reached, or the condition may be satisfied based on the result of the special symbol determination.

  Furthermore, it is not a cumulative value of the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during one accessory operation, but a plurality of accessory operations (for example, during a period when one accessory driving effect is being executed). It may be configured to accumulate the number of times the frame button 22 is operated across the accessory action).

  In addition, in the above-described tenth control example, the invalid flag 223af, which is a condition for executing the shortened drive pattern when the frame button 22 is operated during the operation of the accessory A720, starts the next repeated striking effect. However, a condition for setting the invalid flag 223af to off may be further provided. For example, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been operated for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) after the invalid flag 223af is turned on, the invalid flag 223af may be set off. Good.

  As a result, a shortened drive pattern in which the operation period is shortened is executed only for a player who continuously operates the frame button 22 a plurality of times. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an effect effect according to the operation status of the frame button 22. In this case, the period for setting the invalid flag 223af to OFF may be the operation period (3 seconds) of the accessory (the accessory C460) having the longest operation period among the actors that can be driven by the continuous striking effect. By configuring in this way, when the frame button 22 is operated in a state in which all the objects (acts A 720 to C 460) are not driven in the repetitive striking effect, a shortened drive pattern is provided only for the function A 720. Setting can be prevented.

  In this control example, the shortened drive pattern can be set only for the accessory A720, but the shortened drive pattern can be set for other actors (the accessory B740 and the accessory C460). It may be possible.

  Further, in this control example, in a series of accessory driving effects, in order to change the action pattern (driving pattern) of the accessory (change from the normal driving pattern to the shortened driving pattern), the frame during the accessory driving effect is displayed. Although the variable condition is established based on the operation of the button 22 (the invalid flag 223af is set to ON), other than that, for example, a period before a series of accessory driving effects are executed A configuration may be used in which the action pattern of the accessory is changed in advance based on the operation status of the frame button 22 (number of operations, operation interval, etc.).

  By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to set a shortened driving pattern in the first accessory action in a series of accessory driving effects, and in response to an operation on the frame button 22 in a series of accessory driving effects. It is possible to make it easy to increase the number of times that the accessory action is executed.

  In this control example described above, a single shortening operation pattern (shortening drive pattern) having a short operation period is used for the normal operation pattern, but a plurality of shortening operation patterns having different operation periods are provided. In addition, based on the operation status of the frame button 22 (number of operations, operation interval, etc.), the remaining period of the production, and the game state (result of determining whether the special symbol is appropriate), one shortened motion pattern is set. You may comprise.

<Eleventh control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 197 to 205. The eleventh control example is different from the tenth control example described above in that control for changing the driving timing of the accessory in the accessory driving effect is added.

  Specifically, in the above-described tenth control example, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the accessory driving effect, each accessory (the accessory A720 to the role A) located at the retracted position (standby position). In the eleventh control example, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed), the timing at which the accessory B 740 is driven with respect to the accessory A 720 is configured. The timing for driving the accessory C 460 relative to the accessory A 720 is set to be delayed by 0.2 seconds (0.1 second for the accessory B 740).

  In this way, by changing the timing at which each accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) is driven in response to the operation of the frame button 22, all the accessories (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) are simultaneously transmitted. It is possible to shorten the driving period, and it is possible to easily drive any one of the items (the item A 720 to the item C 460) based on the operation of the frame button 22 during the item driving effect. It is possible to enhance the production effect during the accessory driving production.

  Further, when the frame button 22 is operated while the driving timing of the accessory is delayed (for example, when the driving timing of the accessory C460 is delayed by 0.2 seconds), the delay state is canceled. Based on the operation of the frame button 22, it is set so that driving of the target accessory (the accessory C460) is started. Thereby, it can be made easy to drive any of the respective items (the item A 720 to the item C 460) based on the operation of the frame button 22, and the production effect during the item driving effect can be enhanced.

  In addition, as mentioned above, when using the control which varies the drive timing of the accessory in an accessory drive effect, the process which delays a drive timing with respect to the accessory with the long operation | movement period set among several actors (Delay processing) may be executed. By configuring in this way, driving of an accessory with a short operation period is executed during the delay period, and therefore it is possible to efficiently shorten the period in which the respective actors (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) are simultaneously driven. it can.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 197, the delay operation in the accessory driving effect of this control example will be described. FIG. 197 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a state in which each of the actors (income A720 to accessory B740) driven in the accessory driving effect in this control example is located at the retreat position (standby position). FIG. 197 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a state in which the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the accessory driving effect and the accessory A720 starts driving, and FIG. ) Is a schematic diagram schematically showing a state in which the accessory B 740 that has been subjected to the delay process in the accessory driving effect has started to operate.

  As shown in FIG. 197 (a), the accessory A720 and the accessory B740 located at the retracted position (standby position) are arranged around the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 as in the tenth control example described above. Is done. For convenience of explanation, FIG. 197 does not show the accessory C460, but in actuality, the accessory C460 is provided at the same location as the tenth control example (see FIG. 182 (a)).

  In this control example, when the accessory driving effect is started and the frame button 22 is operated (pressed), the accessory A 720 starts to operate as shown in FIG. 197 (b). Specifically, the operation (see FIG. 188 (a)) with the operation type “normal” (operation period 1 second) is executed. And 0.1 seconds later, as shown in FIG. 197 (c), the accessory B740 starts to operate. Specifically, the operation of the operation type “normal” (operation period 2 seconds) (see FIG. 188 (b)) is executed.

  As described above, the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) in a state where the accessory A 720 and the accessory B 740 can be driven (a state where the accessory A 720 and the accessory B 740 are in the retracted position (standby position)) (see FIG. 197 (a)). In such a case, the operation of the frame button 22 is performed once by the operation of the accessory B 740 being delayed with respect to the start of the operation of the accessory A 720 (see FIG. 197 (b)) (FIG. 197 (c)). It is possible to drive a plurality of actors at different timings. Therefore, it is possible to drive the accessory at various timings with respect to the operation of the frame button 22, and there is an effect that the effect of production can be enhanced.

  Further, a period from the state shown in FIG. 197 (b) to the state shown in FIG. 197 (c), that is, a period (delay period) from when the accessory A 720 starts operating until the accessory B 740 starts operating. ), If the frame button 22 is operated, the accessory B 740 starts operating without waiting for the delay period to elapse. Thereby, based on operation of the frame button 22, it can make it easy to drive each of the objects (object A720 to the object C460), and enhance the effect during the effect drive effect. it can.

  In this control example, as described above, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the delay period, the accessory B 740 starts to operate without waiting for the delay period to elapse. Even if the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the delay period, the operation of the accessory B 740 may not be started until the delay period elapses. In this case, although the accessory cannot be driven based on the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 during the delay period, the accessory B 740 starts driving after the delay period has elapsed, Based on the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 during the period, it can be assumed that the driving of the accessory B 740 has been executed (started).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 198, the flow of the operation of the frame button 22 and the operation of each accessory (the accessory A 720 to the accessory C 460) in the “button repeated striking effect” that is the accessory driving effect in this control example will be described. do. FIG. 198 is a timing chart showing the flow of the accessory driving effect in this control example. In this control example, it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated (pressed) while a specific accessory (the accessory B 740 or the accessory C 460) is operating, and then the specific accessory (the accessory B 740). Or, when the driving of the accessory C460) is executed, the operation start timing is delayed.

  Specifically, an invalid flag 223af, which will be described later, is set to ON when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while either the accessory B 740 or the accessory C 460 is operating. When the operation of the accessory B 740 or the accessory C 460 is started in a state where the invalid flag 223af is set to ON, a delay process for delaying the operation start timing is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 198, when the player operates the frame button 22 ("button press" ON) during the effective period of the "button repeated striking effect", the player is in the stop state (the state where the button is in the standby position). The operation of each active character (the character A 720 to the character C 460) is started (point a in FIG. 198).

  In the present control example, the driving period of the accessory A 720 is set to 1 second, the driving period of the accessory B 740 is set to 2 seconds, and the driving period of the accessory C 460 is set to 3 seconds, as in the tenth control example described above. It is driven for a specified period. When the frame button 22 is operated at the timing when the accessory B 740 or the accessory C 460 is being driven (“button pressed” ON), the invalid flag 223af indicating that the frame button 22 has been operated during the invalid period is turned on. (Point b in FIG. 198).

  Thereafter, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) at the timing when the accessory A 720 and the accessory B 740 are in a stopped state (state in the standby position), the accessory A 720 performs a normal operation, and the accessory A In B740, a delay process (delay period 0.1 second) is executed (point c in FIG. 198). At this point c, since the accessory C460 is being driven, the invalid flag 223af is continuously set to ON.

  More specifically, in this control process, after the operation setting process (the accessory B action setting process (S1910 in FIG. 203)) for the accessory B 740, the action setting process (the accessory C action setting process) related to the accessory C460 is completed. (S1911 in FIG. 204) is executed, the invalid flag 223af is once set to OFF in the accessory B action setting process when the frame button 22 is operated at the point c in FIG. 198. Thereafter, since the invalid flag 223af is set to ON again in the accessory C action setting process, the invalid flag 223af is continuously set to ON.

  Then, after the delay period has elapsed (after 0.1 second), the operation of the accessory B 740 (operation period 2 seconds) is executed (point d in FIG. 198). Thereafter, when the frame button 22 is operated in a state where the operation of the accessory C460 is completed (point e in FIG. 198), the accessory A720 performs a normal operation, and the accessory C460 performs a delay process (delay period 0). .2 seconds) is executed (point e in FIG. 198). At this point e, since the delay process is executed for the accessory C460, the invalid flag 223af is set off. Then, after the delay period has elapsed (after 0.2 seconds), the operation of the accessory C460 (operation period 3 seconds) is executed (point f in FIG. 198).

  After that, in the timing of the point g in FIG. 198, that is, in the state where the invalid flag 223af is set to OFF, and the accessory A720 and the accessory B740 are in the stopped state (state in the standby position), When the frame button 22 is operated at the timing when the object C460 is in the operating state (the operating state), the operations of the accessory A720 and the accessory B740 are executed, and the invalid flag 223af is set to ON.

  Then, the timing at the point h in FIG. 198, that is, the state in which the invalid flag 223af is set to ON, and all of the accessory A720, the accessory B740, and the accessory C460 are in a stopped state (positioned at the standby position). When the frame button 22 is operated at the timing of the state), the operations of the accessory A720 and the accessory C460 are executed, and the delay process is executed on the accessory B740.

  As described above, in the present control example, the action setting process (the accessory C action) related to the accessory C460 after the action setting process (the accessory B action setting process (S1910 in FIG. 203)) related to the accessory B740 is completed. Since the setting process (S1911 in FIG. 204) is executed, the invalid flag 223af is set off in the accessory B action setting process when the frame button 22 is operated at the point h in FIG. 198. This is because the operation content of the accessory C460 is set in the accessory C operation setting process.

  As described above, when the frame button 22 is operated while any one of the plurality of accessories (the accessory B 740 and the accessory C 460) is operating, the invalid flag 223af is set to ON and the invalid flag 223af is set to ON. In a state where any of a plurality of accessories (the accessory B 740 and the accessory C 460) executes an operation, a delay process is performed, and a process of setting the invalid flag 223af to OFF is performed as an accessory B 740, an accessory When the operations of the accessory B 740 and the accessory C 460 are executed in a state where the invalid flag 223af is set to ON by executing in the order of C460, only the accessory B 740 is subjected to the delay process. Become.

  Thereby, it can suppress that a delay process is simultaneously performed with respect to several accessory (object B740 and accessory C460).

  Next, the flow of operation of each accessory when the frame button 22 is operated during the delay process will be described with reference to the points h and i in FIG. 198. If the frame button 22 is operated while the delay process (0.1 second) is being performed on the accessory B 740 at the point h in FIG. 198 (0.08 seconds after the delay process is performed) ( The point i) in FIG. 198 ends the delay process being executed, and the accessory B 740 executes an operation based on the frame button operation at the point i in FIG.

  In this way, when the frame button 22 is operated while the delay process is being executed, the delay process is stopped and the accessory is driven, whereby the accessory based on the operation of the frame button in the “button repeated stroke effect” The number of operations can be increased.

  In this control example, the invalid flag 223af is set to the initial state (set to off) at the timing when the “button repeated striking effect” is started, but other configurations may be used, for example, , It may be set off at the timing when the “valid period” of the “button repeated effect” ends, or may be set off at the timing when the “button repeated effect” ends.

<About the electrical configuration in the eleventh control example>
Next, the contents of the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the eleventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 199 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the eleventh control example. The RAM 222 in the eleventh control example is different from the RAM 222 in the tenth control example in that an accessory B delay timer 222ba and an accessory C delay timer 222bb are added. Since other configurations are the same as those in the tenth control example, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The accessory B delay timer 223ba is a timer for counting a delay period when a delay process is executed on the accessory B 740, and a value (for example, “100”) set in this timer is 1. When the timer value is “0”, the delay process is terminated. In the accessory B delay timer 223ba, the value of the accessory B action timer 223ad is “0” in the accessory B action setting process 2 (see FIG. 203) executed in the consecutive hit button effect process 2 (see FIG. 200). (S3811: Yes in FIG. 203) When the invalid flag 223af is set to ON (S3813: Yes in FIG. 203), a value of “100” is set, and in the continuous hit button effect processing 2 (see FIG. 200). Each time the executed delay timer subtraction process (see FIG. 201) is executed, 1 is subtracted until the timer value becomes “0” (S2352 in FIG. 201).

  In the accessory B action setting process 2 (see FIG. 203), when the frame button 22 is operated in a state where the value of the accessory B delay timer 223ba is not “0”, the timer value is set to “0”. Is set.

  The accessory C delay timer 223bb is a timer for counting a delay period when delay processing is executed for the accessory C460, and a value (for example, “200”) set in this timer is 1 When the timer value is “0”, the delay process is terminated. The This accessory C delay timer 223bb indicates that the value of the accessory C action timer 223ae is “0” in the accessory C action setting process 2 (see FIG. 204) executed in the continuous hit button effect process 2 (see FIG. 200). (S3911 in FIG. 203: Yes) When the invalid flag 223af is set to ON (S3913: Yes in FIG. 203), a value of “200” is set, and the repeated hit button effect process 2 (see FIG. 200). Each time the executed delay timer subtraction process (see FIG. 201) is executed, 1 is subtracted until the timer value becomes “0” (S2354 in FIG. 201).

  In the accessory C action setting process 2 (see FIG. 204), when the frame button 22 is operated in a state where the value of the accessory C delay timer 223bb is not “0”, the timer value becomes “0”. Is set.

  As described above, the above-mentioned accessory B delay timer 223ba and accessory C delay timer 223bb have a delay period set when the delay process is executed (the accessory B 740 is 0.1 seconds, C460 is a timer for counting 0.2 seconds).

  Further, in any of the accessory B 740 and the accessory C 460, when the frame button 22 is operated while the delay process is being executed (while the delay period is being counted), each delay timer (the accessory The values of the B delay timer 223ba and the accessory C delay timer 223bb) are set to “0”. Thereby, when the player operates the frame button 22 during the delay period, the accessory can be driven based on the operation on the frame button 22. Therefore, it is possible to easily drive the accessory B 740 or the accessory C 460 based on the operation of the frame button 22 during the accessory driving effect (during repeated hitting effect), and the effect of the effect during the accessory driving effect can be enhanced. .

<Regarding control processing in the eleventh control example>
Next, control processing in the eleventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 200 to 205. In the control process in the eleventh control example, the contents of the sound lamp control device 113 are changed with respect to the tenth control example. The other processes are the same as in the tenth control example, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the eleventh control example, the repeated hit button process (see FIG. 192) in the tenth control example is changed to the repeated hit button process 2 (see FIG. 200), and the accessory action process (see FIG. 196) is an accessory. The difference is that it is changed to operation processing 2 (see FIG. 205).

  First, with reference to FIG. 200, the repeated hit button process 2 (S1851) executed in the frame button input monitoring / effect process 3 (S1560) will be described. FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuous hit button process 2 (S1851). In the continuous hit button process 2 (S1851), the actions of the respective combinations (the combination A720 to the combination C460) executed based on the operation (pressing) on the frame button 22 during the repeated hitting effect (“button repeated hitting effect”). Processing for determining the contents is executed.

  Each process of the consecutive hit button process 2 (S1851) in the eleventh control example is different from the repeated hit button process (see FIG. 192) in the tenth control example in that a delay timer subtraction process (S1921) is added. To do.

  When the consecutive hit button process 2 (S1851) is executed, the process of S1901 to S1907 is executed in the same manner as the consecutive hit button process (see FIG. 192) of the first control example described above, and then the delay timer subtraction process is executed. (S1921) After that, the processing of S1908 to S1911 is performed, and this processing is terminated.

  Next, the delay timer subtraction process (S1921) in the eleventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing the contents of the delay timer subtraction process (S1921). When the delay timer subtraction process (S1921) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the value of the accessory B delay timer 223ba is greater than “0” (S2351). When it is determined that the value of the accessory B delay timer 223ba is larger than “0” (“1” or more) (S2351: Yes), the value of the accessory B delay timer 223ba is decremented by 1 (S2352), The process proceeds to S2353.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the accessory B delay timer 223ba is “0” (S2351: No), the process of S2352 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2353.

  In the process of S2353, it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory C delay timer 223ca is greater than “0” (S2353). If it is determined that the value of the accessory C delay timer 223ca is greater than “0” (“1” or more) (S2353: Yes), the value of the accessory C delay timer 223ca is decremented by 1 (S2354), This process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the accessory C delay timer 223ca is “0” (S2353: No), the process of S2354 is skipped, and this process ends.

  Next, the accessory A action setting process 2 (S1909) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 202 is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory A action setting process 2 (S1909). The eleventh control example is different in that the accessory A action setting process (see FIG. 194) of the tenth control example is changed to an accessory A action setting process 2 (see FIG. 202).

  When this accessory A action setting process 2 (S1909) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the value of the accessory A action timer 223ac is “0” (S3711). When it is determined that the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is not “0” (“1” or more) (S3711: No), the invalid flag 223af is set to ON (S3712), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3711 that the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is “0” (S3711: Yes), the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is set to “1000” (S3713). ), This process is terminated.

  That is, in the above-described accessory A operation setting process 2 (S1909), the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the current operation state of the accessory A 720 is in operation. In this case, the invalid flag 223af indicating that the frame button 22 is operated during the operation is set to ON, and if it is not in operation (in the stopped state (standby state)), the operation of the accessory A720 is executed. Therefore, a process of setting a value of “1000” (corresponding to 1 second) to the accessory A operation timer 223ac is executed.

  Next, the accessory B action setting process 2 (S1910) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 203 is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory B action setting process 2 (S1910).

  The eleventh control example is different in that the accessory B action setting process (see FIG. 195 (a)) of the tenth control example is changed to the accessory B action setting process 2 (see FIG. 203).

  In the accessory B action setting process 2, it is first determined whether or not the value of the accessory B action timer 223ad is “0” (S3811). When it is determined that the value of the accessory B action timer 223ad is not “0” (“1” or more) (S3811: No), the invalid flag 223af is set to ON (S3812), and this process ends. To do.

  On the other hand, when the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is “0” (S3811: Yes), it is determined whether or not the invalid flag 223af is set to ON (S3813). When it is determined that the invalid flag 223af is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S3813: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory B delay timer 223ba is “0”. (S3814). When it is determined that the value of the accessory B delay timer 223ba is not "0" ("1" or more) (S3814: No), the value of the accessory B delay timer 223ba is set to "0" ( The process proceeds to S3815) and S3816. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3814 that the value of the accessory B delay timer 223ba is “0” (S3814: Yes), the process of S3815 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3816.

  In the process of S3816, “2000” is set to the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad (S3816), and this process ends.

  In the process of S3813, if it is determined that the invalid flag 223af is set to ON (is ON) (S3813: Yes), the value of the accessory B delay timer 223ba is set to “100” ( S3817), the invalid flag 223af is set to OFF (S3818), and this process ends.

  As described above, in the accessory B action setting process 2 (S1910 in FIG. 203), the accessory B 740 can be operated or delayed based on the operation timing of the frame button 22, and the delay When the frame button 22 is operated at the time of processing (the value of the accessory B delay timer 223ba is “1” or more), the delay processing is ended and processing for operating the accessory B 740 is executed.

  Next, the accessory C action setting process 2 (S1911) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 204 is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory B action setting process 2 (S1911).

  The eleventh control example is different from the tenth control example in that the accessory C action setting process (see FIG. 195 (b)) is changed to the accessory C action setting process 2 (see FIG. 204).

  In the accessory C action setting process 2 (S1911), it is first determined whether or not the accessory C action timer 223ae is “0” (S3911). When it is determined that the accessory C action timer 223ae is not “0” (“1” or more) (S3911: No), the invalid flag 223af is set to ON (S3912), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the accessory C action timer 223ae is “0” (S3911: Yes), it is determined whether or not the invalid flag 223af is on (S3913). When it is determined that the invalid flag 223af is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S3913: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory C delay timer 223bb is “0” (S3914). ).

  In the process of S3914, when it is determined that the value of the accessory C delay timer 223bb is not “0” (“1” or more) (S3914: No), the value of the accessory C delay timer 223bb is set to “0”. The setting is made (S3915), and the process proceeds to S3916. On the other hand, in the process of S3914, when the value of the accessory C delay timer 223bb is “0” (S3914: Yes), the process of S3915 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3916.

  In the process of S3916, “3000” is set as the value of the accessory C action timer 223ae (S3916), and this process ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S3913 that the invalid flag 223af is set to ON (S3913: Yes), the value of the accessory C delay timer 223bb is set to “200” (S3917), and the invalid flag 223af Is set to OFF (S3918), and this process ends.

  Next, the accessory operation process 2 (S1561) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 205 is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory operation 2 (S1561).

  The eleventh control example is different in that the accessory action process (see FIG. 196) of the tenth control example is changed to the accessory action process 2 (see FIG. 205).

  In this accessory action process 2 (S1561), it is first determined whether or not the value of the accessory A action timer 223ac is “0” (S2531). When it is determined that the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is greater than “0” (“1” or more) (S2531: Yes), the operation content corresponding to the operation type “normal” in the accessory A scenario table 222ab1 is displayed. Reading (S2532) and the process proceeds to S2533. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2531 that the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is “0” (S2531: No), the process of S2532 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2533.

  In the process of S2533, it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is greater than “0” (S2533). When it is determined that the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is greater than “0” (“1” or more) (S2533: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory B delay timer 223ba is greater than “0”. It is determined (S2534). When it is determined that the value of the accessory B delay timer 223ba is greater than “0” (“1” or more) (S2534: Yes), the operation content corresponding to the operation type of the accessory B scenario table 222ab2 is read ( S2535) and the process proceeds to S2536.

  On the other hand, when the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is determined to be “0” in the processing of S2533 (S2533: No), or the value of the accessory B delay timer 223ba is determined to be “0” in the processing of S2534. If it is determined (S2534: No), the process of S2535 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2536.

  In the processing of S2536, it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory C action timer 223ae is greater than “0”. In the processing of S2536, when it is determined that the value of the accessory C action timer 223ae is greater than “0” (“1” or more) (S2536: Yes), then the value of the accessory C delay timer 223bb is “ It is determined whether or not it is greater than “0” (S2537).

  In the process of S2537, when it is determined that the value of the accessory C delay timer 223bb is greater than “0” (“1” or more) (S2537: Yes), the operation corresponding to the operation type of the accessory C scenario table 222ab3 The contents are read (S2538), and the process proceeds to S2539.

  On the other hand, when the value of the accessory C action timer 223ae is determined to be “0” in the processing of S2536 (S2536: No), or the value of the accessory C delay timer 223bb is determined to be “0” in the processing of S2537. If (S2537: No), the process of S2538 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2539.

  In the process of S2539, an operation command is set based on the read operation content (S2539), and this process ends.

  As described above, in this control example, the timing at which each accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) is driven in response to the operation of the frame button 22 is different. It is possible to shorten the period during which the A720 to the accessory C460) is simultaneously driven, and any one of the actors (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) based on the operation of the frame button 22 during the accessory driving effect. Can be easily driven, and the production effect during the accessory driving production can be enhanced.

  In this control example, when the frame button 22 is operated while the driving timing of the accessory is delayed (for example, the driving timing of the accessory C460 is delayed by 0.2 seconds), the delay is delayed. It is set so that the state is released and the driving of the target accessory (the accessory C460) is started based on the operation of the frame button 22. Thereby, it can be made easy to drive any of the respective items (the item A 720 to the item C 460) based on the operation of the frame button 22, and the production effect during the item driving effect can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, in this control example, the delay process is executed for the accessory B 740 (operation period 2 seconds) and the accessory C 460 (operation period 3 seconds) that are longer than the accessory A 720 (operation period 1 second). It is configured as follows. In other words, when a plurality of actors are driven at the same time, the delay process is executed for the actors having a long operation period. As a result, the action of the accessory having a short operation period is executed while the delay process is being executed, and therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to further shorten the period in which a plurality of accessories operate simultaneously. .

  Note that this control example uses a configuration in which when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the delay period, the action of the accessory for which the delay process is being executed is started without waiting for the delay period to elapse. However, even if the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the delay period, the operation of the accessory B may not be started until the delay period elapses.

  In this case, the accessory cannot be driven based on the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 during the delay period. However, since the accessory starts to operate after the delay period has elapsed, Based on the operation (pressing) of the middle frame button 22, it can be assumed that the action of the accessory has been executed (started).

  Further, in this control example, while it is possible to execute delay processing for a plurality of accessories (the accessory B 740 and the accessory C 460), the delay processing can be simultaneously performed on a plurality of accessories by one frame button operation. Since it is configured not to be executed, it is possible to suppress delay processing from being simultaneously executed for a plurality of items (the item B 740 and the item C 460). Thereby, it can suppress that the situation where a delay process is simultaneously performed with respect to a some accessory, and the period when the some accessory operate | moves simultaneously is not shortened generate | occur | produces.

  Further, in this control example, since the delay period set in the delay process is made different for each accessory, it is possible to further suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the period during which a plurality of accessories operate simultaneously is not shortened. it can.

  In this control example, the delay period in the delay process is set to a short period (0.1 seconds or 0.2 seconds), but the length of the delay period is not limited to this. A delay period longer than the operation period during which the accessory operates may be set. By doing in this way, it can suppress more that a some accessory acts simultaneously.

  Further, in this control example, only one type of delay period in the delay process is defined for each accessory, but a plurality of delay periods may be set for each accessory. In this case, it is preferable to determine a combination to be executed at the same time and select a delay period based on the determination result. By comprising in this way, there exists an effect that the period when a several accessory acts simultaneously can be shortened more.

  Further, in this control example, in order to execute delay processing in a series of accessory driving effects, a delay condition is established based on the operation of the frame button 22 during the accessory driving effects (the invalid flag 223af is set to ON). In addition to this, for example, based on the operation status (the number of operations, the operation interval, etc.) of the frame button 22 in the period before the series of accessory driving effects are executed, You may use the structure which delays a thing operation previously.

  By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to set a delay pattern in the first accessory action in a series of accessory driving effects, and in a series of accessory driving effects, a role corresponding to an operation on the frame button 22 It is possible to easily increase the number of times that an object operation is executed.

<Twelfth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 206 to 210. The twelfth control example is different from the tenth control example described above in that control for changing an operation command to an accessory being operated in the accessory driving effect is added.

  Specifically, in the above-described tenth control example, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the accessory driving effect, a predetermined driving pattern (normal driving pattern or shortened driving pattern) is set and set. It was the structure which operates each accessory (object A720-accessory C460) based on the made drive pattern.

  On the other hand, in the present twelfth control example, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed), the operating status of each active accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) is determined, and the active role is determined. When an object (an accessory A720 or an accessory B740) satisfies a predetermined condition (when it is determined that the object is driving in the forward direction), the accessory is moved from the current position to the standby position ( An operation command to be operated (toward the negative direction) (hereinafter referred to as repetitive operation) is set.

  As described above, by changing the operation command in the middle of the active accessory (the accessory A 720 or the accessory B 740) and executing the repeated operation, the operation period of one accessory operation is shortened. It is possible to make any one of the features (acts A720 to C460) easier to operate based on the operation of the frame button 22 during the accessory driving effect. The effect can be enhanced.

  In addition, since it is configured to perform repetitive motion only when it is determined that the motion state is driving in the positive direction, it is possible to reliably shorten the motion period of the accessory whose motion command has been changed in the middle Can do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 206, the repetitive operation in the accessory driving effect of this control example will be described. FIG. 206 (a) schematically shows the operation (drive) range (maximum drive range) and the repetitive operation possible range (repeatable region) of the accessory A720 operated in the accessory drive effect in this control example. FIG. 206 (b) schematically shows a state in which the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the accessory driving effect and the accessory A720 is moving in the forward direction (forward movement). FIG. 206 (c) is a repetitive operation in which the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the accessory A720 is operating in the positive direction, and the accessory A720 operates (reverse operation) in the negative direction. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the accessory A720 by which was performed.

  As shown in FIG. 206 (a), the accessory A720 located at the retreat position (standby position) is arranged around the display area P of the third symbol display device 81, as in the tenth control example described above. For convenience of explanation, the combination B 740 and the combination C 460 are not shown in FIG. 206A, but the combination B 740 and the combination B are actually placed in the same place as the tenth control example (see FIG. 182A) described above. An object C460 is provided.

  The accessory A720 of this control example is set to be driven by the same operation command as the operation command defined in the operation type “normal” of the tenth control example described above (the operation period is 1 second (forward operation 0.0)). The second slide member 720a and the right slide member 720b of the accessory A720 are moved to approximately the center of the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. 206 (a). It is configured to overhang (maximum drive range).

  As shown in FIG. 206 (a), the left slide member 720a and the right slide member 720b of the accessory A 720 are driven by the accessory A motors 771 and 772 as shown in FIG. The movement is started toward the substantially central direction of the third symbol display device 81 (driven in the forward direction). FIG. 206 (b) shows a state in which the accessory A720 starts to drive in the forward direction and 0.25 seconds have elapsed. In the state shown in FIG. 206 (b), when executed based on a normal operation command, the remaining forward operation is executed for 0.25 seconds, and then the backward operation of 0.5 seconds is executed.

  When the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) in the state shown in FIG. 206 (b), as shown in FIG. 206 (c), the timing when the frame button 22 is operated (the forward operation is 0.25). The recovery operation (operation period 0.25 seconds) is executed at the timing (second execution time) (the repetitive operation is executed).

  As a result, the operation of the accessory A 720 having an operation period of 1 second (outward operation 0.5 seconds, reverse operation 0.5 seconds) is normally changed to 0.5 second (outward operation 0.25 seconds). , 0.25 seconds) (repetitive motion), and any of the actors (acts A720 to C460) based on the operation of the frame button 22 during the accessory driving effect Can be made easier to operate, and the effect of the effect driving effect can be enhanced.

  FIG. 206 shows an example of the repetitive operation when the forward button is operated and the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) when 0.25 seconds elapses. When the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the period of (forward movement), a repetitive movement is executed. Therefore, for example, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) at the timing when the forward movement is performed for 0.1 seconds, the backward movement is performed for 0.1 seconds, and the operation period of the accessory A720 is set to 0. .Variable to 2 seconds.

  In FIG. 206, the repetitive operation of this control example is described using the accessory A720. However, the accessory B740 is also configured to be able to perform the repetitive operation in the same manner, and the operation period of the accessory B740 (2 seconds). ) During the period in which the forward movement (1 second) is being executed (for example, the timing at which the forward movement is being executed for 0.5 seconds), if the frame button 22 is operated, then the backward movement of 0.5 seconds Is executed. As a result, the accessory action in the operation period (2 seconds) can be changed to the operation period (1 second).

  As described above, in the twelfth control example, when the frame button 22 is operated during the operation of the accessory operating based on the operation on the frame button 22, the operation content of the active accessory being operated. The (operation period) can be varied. Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of actions of the accessory based on the operation of the frame button 22.

  In the present control example, the frame button 22 is operated in a state in which the accessory that operates based on the operation on the frame button 22 is driven, thereby shortening the operation period of the driven accessory. ing. As a result, it becomes easy for the accessory to be positioned at the retreat position (standby position), so that the number of operations of the accessory based on the operation of the frame button 22 can be increased.

  Furthermore, in this control example, it is determined whether or not the accessory is moving in the forward direction (from the retracted position to the extended position), and is determined to be moving in the forward direction. In this case, since the operation content of the accessory is changed so that the accessory moves in the negative direction (toward the retracted position), the operation period of the accessory can be surely shortened.

  In this control example, when the frame button 22 is operated while the accessory is operating, it is configured to execute an operation (repetitive operation) that shortens the operation period. For example, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed), the movement of the active accessory is temporarily stopped (the count of each accessory operation timer is stopped), and then the frame button 22 is operated. It may be configured such that the operation of the accessory is resumed (the count of the accessory operation timer is restarted) when the is operated. With this configuration, it is possible to vary the operation mode of the active accessory based on the operation of the frame button 22, and increase the number of operations of the accessory based on the operation of the frame button 22. Further, instead of temporarily stopping the movement of the accessory during operation, an operation of returning a predetermined amount (for example, 10 ms) in the return direction (negative direction) may be executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 207, the flow of the operation of the frame button 22 and the operation of each accessory (the accessory A 720 to the accessory C 460) in the “button repeated striking effect” that is the accessory driving effect in this control example will be described. do. FIG. 207 is a timing chart showing the flow of the accessory driving effect in this control example. Note that the detailed description of the same contents as those in FIG. 185 of the tenth control example described above is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 207, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) in the “button repeated striking effect”, each accessory (the accessory A 720 to the accessory C 460) starts operating as in the tenth control example described above. (See point a and point b in FIG. 207). Next, the flow of repetitive operations in this control example will be described with reference to point c to point g in FIG.

  When the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) at the point c in FIG. 207, the action of the accessory B740 located in the stopped state (standby state) is executed (operation period 2 seconds). Then, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) after 0.8 seconds from the point c, the operation of the accessory A720 is started (point d in FIG. 207). This point d is 0.8 seconds after the accessory B 740 starts operating, and is a period in which the accessory B 740 operates in the positive direction. Therefore, the repetitive operation is executed and 0 in the negative direction. An operation command that moves for 8 seconds is set.

  Then, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) 0.25 seconds after the point d, a repetitive operation is executed for the accessory A720, and an operation command for moving 0.25 seconds in the negative direction is set. At the point d, since the accessory B 740 is moving in the negative direction, the operation content is not changed based on the operation (action) of the frame button 22.

  Then, the accessory A 720 for which the repetitive operation has been executed 0.25 seconds after the point e completes the operation (point f in FIG. 207), and the accessory B 740 for which the repetitive operation has been executed 0.8 seconds after the point d. Completes the operation (point g in FIG. 207).

  Further, the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) 0.6 seconds after the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) at a timing (point h in FIG. 207) at which both the accessory A720 and the accessory B740 can execute the operation. ), The accessory A 720 is in a state in which half of the operation period (1 second) has passed (a state of moving in the negative direction), so that the repetitive operation is not executed, and the accessory B 740 Since half of (2 seconds) has not elapsed (state of moving in the positive direction), a repetitive operation (repetitive operation in which the total operation period is 1.2 seconds) is executed (point i) ). Then, the repetitive operation of the accessory B740 is completed 0.6 seconds after the point i.

<Regarding Control Processing in the 12th Control Example>
Next, control processing in the twelfth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 208 to 210. The control process in the twelfth control example is different from the tenth control example in that the repeated hit button process 3 (see FIG. 208) is executed instead of the repeated hit button process (see FIG. 192). Are the same as in the tenth control example, and a detailed description thereof is omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 208, the repeated hit button process 3 (S1851) will be described. FIG. 208 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuous hit button process 3 (S1851). When the consecutive hit button process 3 (S1851) is executed, the processes of S1901 to S1908 are executed in the same manner as the consecutive hit button process of the tenth control example (see FIG. 192). Execute (see S1909 in FIG. 209), execute the accessory B action setting process 3 (see S1910 in FIG. 210), execute the accessory C action setting process 3 (see S1911 in FIG. 211), and end this process To do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 209, the accessory A action setting process 3 (S1909) will be described. FIG. 209 is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory A operation setting process 3 (S1909). When the accessory A action setting process 3 (S1909) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory A action timer 223ac is “0” (S3721). When it is determined that the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is “0”, that is, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the accessory A 720 is not operating (S3721: Yes), Next, “1000” is set to the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac (S3723), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S3721, when it is determined that the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is not “0” (“1” or more), that is, the frame button 22 is operated while the accessory A720 is operating. If pressed (S3721: No), it is determined whether the value of the accessory A action timer 223ac is greater than “500” (S3724), and the value of the accessory A action timer 223ac is equal to or less than “500”. If it is determined (S3724: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the accessory A action timer 223ac is greater than “500” (S3724: Yes), the value obtained by subtracting the accessory A action timer 223ac from “1000” is set to the value of the accessory A action timer 223ac. The value is set (S3726), and this process ends.

  That is, according to the accessory A action setting process 3 (S1909), when the value of the accessory A action timer 223ac has not reached half ("500") of the set value ("1000"), that is, the accessory When it is determined that A is operating in the positive direction (the direction away from the standby position), the current value of the accessory A action timer 223ac is set from the set value (“1000”) of the accessory A action timer 223ac. By setting the subtracted value (that is, the value for performing the operation in the negative direction corresponding to the operation amount that has already been operated in the positive direction) in the accessory A operation timer 223ac, the repetitive operation using the accessory A scenario table 222ab1 Can be executed.

  Note that, as in this control example, when performing control to change the operation period by changing the value of the timer (counter) that advances the operation scenario table without changing the operation scenario table that operates the accessory May be provided with a position detection sensor for detecting the actual operating position of the accessory.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 210A, the accessory B action setting process 3 (S1910) will be described. FIG. 210A is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory B action setting process 3 (S1910). When the accessory B action setting process 3 (S1910) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the value of the accessory B action timer 223ad is “0” (S3821). When it is determined that the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is “0”, that is, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the accessory B 740 is not operating (S3821: Yes), The value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is set to “2000” (S3823), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3821, when it is determined that the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is not “0”, that is, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the accessory B 740 is operating. (S3821: No), it is determined whether the value of the accessory B action timer 223ad is greater than "1000" (S3824), and if it is determined that the value of the accessory B action timer 223ad is less than "1000" ( S3824: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the accessory B action timer 223ad is greater than “1000” (S3824: Yes), the value obtained by subtracting the accessory B action timer 223ad from “2000” is set to the value of the accessory B action timer 223ad. The value is set (S3826), and this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 210 (b), the accessory C action setting process 3 (S1911) will be described. FIG. 210 (b) is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory C action setting process 3 (S1911). In the twelfth control example, the accessory C action setting process (see FIG. 195) of the tenth control example is changed to the accessory C action setting process 3 (see FIG. 210), and the value of the accessory C action timer 223ae And “500” is set (S3922), and other processes are the same as those in the tenth control example, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, in the twelfth control example, when the frame button 22 is operated during the operation of the accessory operating based on the operation on the frame button 22, the operation content of the active accessory being operated. The (operation period) can be varied. Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of actions of the accessory based on the operation of the frame button 22.

  In the present control example, the frame button 22 is operated in a state in which the accessory that operates based on the operation on the frame button 22 is driven, thereby shortening the operation period of the driven accessory. ing. As a result, it becomes easy for the accessory to be positioned at the retreat position (standby position), so that the number of operations of the accessory based on the operation of the frame button 22 can be increased.

  Furthermore, in this control example, it is determined whether or not the accessory is moving in the forward direction (from the retracted position to the extended position), and is determined to be moving in the forward direction. In this case, since the operation content of the accessory is changed so that the accessory moves in the negative direction (toward the retracted position), the operation period of the accessory can be surely shortened.

  In this control example, when the frame button 22 is operated while the accessory is operating, it is configured to execute an operation (repetitive operation) that shortens the operation period. For example, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed), the movement of the active accessory is temporarily stopped (the count of each accessory operation timer is stopped), and then the frame button 22 is operated. It may be configured such that the operation of the accessory is resumed (the count of the accessory operation timer is restarted) when the is operated. With this configuration, it is possible to vary the operation mode of the active accessory based on the operation of the frame button 22, and increase the number of operations of the accessory based on the operation of the frame button 22.

<13th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 211 to 216. In the thirteenth control example, in contrast to the tenth control example described above, all the combinations (combinations A720 to C460) that operate based on the operation of the frame button 22 in the combination driving effect are all given at a specific timing. The difference is that control for positioning at the retracted position (standby position) is added.

  In the configuration of the tenth control example described above, when the frame button 22 is operated during the accessory driving effect, the control for operating the operable accessory (the accessory positioned at the retreat position (standby position)) is performed. It is executed during a period (effective period) in which 22 operations are determined effectively. Here, for example, in the end stage of the above-mentioned accessory driving effect, when an effect of operating each accessory (the accessory A 720 to the accessory C 460) at the same time is set as an effect effect that informs the expectation degree of jackpot Includes a period until the operation of each of the objects (objects A720 to C460) operated at different timings and in different operation periods is reliably completed (in the case of the tenth control example, the operation of the object C460). The period of 3 seconds) needs to be set as a period (invalid period) during which the operation of the frame button 22 is not effectively determined.

  As described above, if the same invalid period is set for each accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460), there is a possibility that the player may misunderstand that the accessory driving effect has ended. There has been a problem that the effect of the entire accessory driving effect is reduced.

  On the other hand, in the thirteenth control example, it is possible to set an invalid period for determining the operation of the frame button 22 to be invalid for each of the accessories having different operation periods (the accessory A 720 to the accessory C 460). The invalid period to be set is set so as to correspond to the operation period of each accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460).

  In this way, by setting the invalid period corresponding to the operation period for each accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460), that is, each driven based on the operation of the frame button 22 once. Shortening the invalid period (invalid period set for all the actors) set during the accessory driving effect by setting different invalid periods for the accessory (the accessory A 720 to the accessory C 460). There is an effect that it is possible to enhance the production effect of the entire accessory driving production.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 211, the operation mode of each accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) in the accessory driving effect of this control example will be described. FIG. 211 (a) is a period (hereinafter referred to as a free motion period) in which each of the objects (object A720 to object C460) is driven based on the operation of the frame button 22 set in the early stage of the accessory driving effect. FIG. 211 is a schematic diagram showing a point c in FIG. 212 to be described later as an example of the operation of each accessory (an accessory A720 to an accessory C460). FIG. 211 (b) shows each accessory ( The schematic diagram which shows typically the simultaneous operation | movement which each accessory (object A720-accessory C460) operate | moves all at once in the state which positioned the accessory A720-accessory C460) in the retreat position (standby position) intentionally. It is.

  As shown in FIG. 211 (a), during the free movement period, each accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) is operated at different timings. Therefore, at the point c in FIG. 212 to be described later, the accessory A720 (left The slide member 720a and the right slide member 720b) are moving in the negative direction (a state in which about 0.8 seconds have elapsed from the start of the operation), and the accessory B740 (the upper slide member 740a and the lower slide member 740b) is in the negative direction. (The state in which about 1.1 seconds have elapsed since the start of the operation), and the accessory C460 has not started the operation.

  In this way, during the free movement period, each accessory (object A720 to accessory C460) starts operating at a different timing depending on the operation timing of the frame button 22, and further each accessory (object A720 to accessory C720). Since C460) performs an operation in different operation periods, each accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) hardly ends the operation at the same timing.

  By configuring in this way, during the free movement period, it is possible to execute various accessory action effects in response to the player's frame button operation, and to prevent the player from getting bored early in the game. ing.

  FIG. 211 (b) shows the simultaneous operation set at the end of the accessory driving effect. This simultaneous operation is that all the actors perform the operation at the same timing, and it is possible for the player to operate a plurality of actors provided in the pachinko machine 10 (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) at the same time. It is a production that gives an impact.

  For example, in the third symbol display device 81, a display effect suggesting whether or not a special symbol is won in the jackpot is an example of an accessory driving effect having such a free movement period and a period in which a simultaneous operation is performed. During the period of execution, the third symbol is in a reach state (for example, of the three third symbols, two third symbols stop at the same symbol, and the remaining one third symbol fluctuates. State), a free motion period is set as an accessory driving effect, and in the 3rd symbol display device 81, a simultaneous motion is performed around the timing when one 3rd symbol that is changing in the reach state stops. It may be configured to be set.

  As a result, it is possible to execute a variety of actor movements during the free movement period as a hit in the reach state, and to execute a simultaneous action at the timing indicating the result of the special symbol success / failure determination, thereby improving the interest of the game. There is an effect that can be.

  As described above, according to this control example, the free operation period is executed in the early stage of the accessory driving effect, and the simultaneous operation can be executed in the final stage of the accessory driving effect. Further, when shifting from the free movement period to the simultaneous movement period, the invalid period of the period corresponding to the movement period of each accessory (the accessory A 720 to the accessory C 460) is set. Based on the above, it is possible to shorten the period during which all the items (the item A 720 to the item C 460) cannot operate.

  In this control example, the operation period of each accessory (the accessory A 720 to the accessory C 460) is constant, but the control for shortening the operation period of the accessory as in the tenth control example described above may be used. It is also possible to use control for delaying the operation timing of the accessory as in the eleventh control example described above, or control for varying the operation content of the active accessory as in the twelfth control example described above. It may be used. Moreover, you may combine the control used in each control example mentioned above. Thereby, the free drive operation performed in the early stage of the accessory drive effect can be diversified.

  Further, in this control example, the simultaneous operation executed at the end of the accessory driving effect is configured to be executed based on the player's frame button operation. The simultaneous operation may be automatically executed when the remaining period is 1 second).

  Further, in this control example, the operation timing of each accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) is made the same as the simultaneous operation. For example, the operation range of each accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) is the maximum. May be set to be the same (timing when the accessory is most distant from the standby position).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 212, the operation of the frame button 22 and the operation flow of each accessory (the accessory A 720 to the accessory C 460) in the “button repeated hitting effect” which is the accessory driving effect in this control example will be described. do. FIG. 212 is a timing chart showing the flow of the accessory driving effect in this control example. Note that detailed description of the same elements as those in the timing chart of the tenth control example (see FIG. 185) is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 212, the “button repeated striking effect” in this control example is a free motion period in which each of the actors (actors A720 to C460) is driven based on the operation of the frame button 22 at the beginning of the effective period. It is set, and a simultaneous operation period is set for operating all the objects (object A720 to object C460) at the end of the effective period.

  Then, at the timing when the free movement period ends (point h in FIG. 212), each play is performed in order to place each play (work A A20 to play C 460) that has been freely moved at the retreat position (stop state). An invalid time is set for each of (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460). Specifically, for the accessory C460 having an operation period of 3 seconds, an invalid period of 3 seconds that is the same as the operation period is set (period from point d to point h in FIG. 212), and the operation period is 2 seconds. For the accessory B 740, an invalid period of 2 seconds that is the same as the operation period is set (the period from the point f to the point h in FIG. 212), and for the accessory A 720 having the operation period of 1 second, the operation is performed. An invalid period of 1 second that is the same as the period is set.

  As described above, in order to position each accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) at the retreat position (standby position) at the point h, a different invalid period is provided for each accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460). By setting, the length of the invalid period in which all of the objects (acts A720 to C460) are not driven in response to the operation of the frame button 22 is set to the operation period (3 seconds) of the longest operation period C460. ) Instead of the operation period (1 second) of the accessory A720 having the shortest operation period.

  Therefore, when the frame button 22 is operated at the timing when the invalid period is set for the accessory C460 (point e in FIG. 212), the accessory A720 and the accessory B740 can be driven. It is possible to enhance the effect of “sequential strike production”.

  Then, the frame buttons 22 are operated during the simultaneous operation period (point h to point j in FIG. 212) in which each accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) is located at the retreat position (standby position). It is possible to simultaneously operate the accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) (point j in FIG. 212).

  In this control example, only the control for positioning each accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) at the retreat position (standby position) at the timing when the simultaneous operation period starts (point h in FIG. 212) is used. However, for example, each accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) is set so that the end timings of the actors (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) to be driven at the end of the free movement period are close (same). The operation period and the operation start timing may be controlled, and a period from the timing when the frame button 22 is operated until the simultaneous operation period starts or a period until the invalid time is set It is possible to discriminate, and based on the discrimination result, the operation content of each accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) may be determined.

  For example, the batch stop timing is set as a predetermined timing (for example, the timing between the point d and the point h in FIG. 212) before the timing at which the simultaneous operation period starts (the point in FIG. 212), and the frame button 22 compares the driving period of the accessory driving executed when 22 is operated with the remaining period until the simultaneous operation period is started or the remaining period until the invalid time is set. When the operation period) is stopped and displayed at a location away from the collective stop timing described above, the driving start time of the accessory is shifted or the driving content of the accessory is variable (extended or shortened). Thus, it becomes possible to select the operation content of each accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) in the direction in accordance with the collective stop timing.

<Regarding Control Processing in the 13th Control Example>
Next, control processing in the thirteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 213 to 216. In the control process in the thirteenth control example, the contents of the sound lamp control device 113 are changed with respect to the tenth control example. The other processes are the same as in the tenth control example, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The thirteenth control example is different from the tenth control example in that the repeated hit button process (see FIG. 192) is changed to the repeated hit button process 4 (see FIG. 213).

  First, a control process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 213 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuous hit button process 4 (S1851) in the thirteenth control example. In addition, about the part same as the continuous hit button process (refer FIG. 192) in a 10th control example, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the description is abbreviate | omitted and only a different part is demonstrated.

  When the consecutive hit button process 4 (S1851 in FIG. 213) is executed, the processes in S1901 to S1908 are executed in the same manner as the consecutive hit button process in the tenth control example (see FIG. 192). When it is determined that 22 is ON (S1908: Yes), the accessory A action setting process 4 (S1909), the accessory B action setting process 4 (S1910), and the accessory C action setting process 4 (S1911) are executed. Then, this process ends. For detailed description of the accessory A action setting process 4 (S1909), the accessory B action setting process 4 (S1910), and the accessory C action setting process 4 (S1911), refer to FIGS. 214 to 216, respectively. Will be described later.

  Next, the accessory A action setting process 4 (S1909) in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory A action setting process 4 (S1909). When the accessory A action setting process 4 (S1909) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the value of the continuous hitting valid timer 223ab is “1000” or less, that is, whether or not it is a simultaneous action period (see FIG. 212). (S3731). If it is determined that the value of the continuous hitting valid timer 223ab is not equal to or less than “1000” (greater than “1000”), that is, it is determined that it is not the simultaneous operation period (S3731: No), then the continuous hitting effective timer 223ab It is determined whether or not the value of “2000” is equal to or less than “2000”, that is, whether or not it is during the invalid time (see FIG. 212) (S3732). If the value of the continuous hitting effective timer is “2000” or less (S3732: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is, and the processing returns to the continuous hitting button processing 4 (see FIG. 213).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3732 that the value of the continuous hitting valid timer 223ab is not equal to or less than “2000” (S3732: No), the process proceeds to S3733. Also, in the process of S3731, when it is determined that the value of the continuous hitting valid timer 223ab is “1000” or less (S3731: Yes), the process proceeds to S3733.

  In the process of S3733, it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is “0” (S3733). If the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is not “0”, that is, if the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the accessory A 720 is operating (S3733: No), this process is terminated. To do. On the other hand, when the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is “0”, that is, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the accessory A 720 is not operating (S3733: Yes), the accessory A The value of the operation timer 223ac is set to “1000” (S3734), and then this process is terminated and the process returns to the continuous hit button process 4.

  Next, the accessory B action setting process 4 (S1910) in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 215 is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory B action setting process 4 (S1910). In addition, about the same part as the accessory B operation | movement setting process (refer FIG. 195 (a)) in a 10th control example, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the description is abbreviate | omitted and only a different part is demonstrated.

  When the accessory B action setting process 4 (S1910) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous hitting valid timer 223ab is “1000” or less, that is, whether or not it is a simultaneous action period (see FIG. 212). (S3831). When it is determined that the value of the continuous hitting effective timer 223ab is not “1000” or less, that is, when it is determined that the period is not the simultaneous operation period (S3831: No), then, whether the value of the continuous hitting effective timer 223ab is “3000” or less. It is discriminated whether or not it is during the invalid time (see FIG. 212) (S3832). If the value of the continuous hitting valid timer is equal to or less than “3000” (S3832: Yes), this process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the continuous hitting button process 4 (see FIG. 213).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3832 that the value of the continuous hitting valid timer 223ab is not equal to or less than “3000” (S3832: No), the process proceeds to S3833. Also, in the process of S3831, when it is determined that the value of the continuous hitting valid timer 223ab is “1000” or less (S3831: Yes), the process proceeds to S3833.

  In the process of S3833, it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is “0” (S3833). If the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is not “0”, that is, if the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the accessory B 740 is operating (S3833: No), this process is terminated. To do. On the other hand, when the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is “0”, that is, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the accessory B 740 is not operating (S3833: Yes), the accessory B The value of the operation timer 223ad is set to “2000” (S3834), and then this process is terminated and the process returns to the continuous hit button process 4.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 216, the accessory C action setting process 4 (S1911) in this control example will be described. FIG. 216 is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory C action setting process 4 (S1911). In addition, about the same part as the accessory C operation | movement setting process (refer FIG. 195 (b)) in a 10th control example, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the description is abbreviate | omitted and only a different part is demonstrated.

  When the accessory C action setting process 4 (S1911) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous hitting valid timer 223ab is “1000” or less, that is, whether or not it is a simultaneous action period (see FIG. 212). (S3931). When it is determined that the value of the continuous hitting effective timer 223ab is not “1000” or less, that is, when it is determined that the period is not the simultaneous operation period (S3931: No), then, whether the value of the continuous hitting effective timer 223ab is “4000” or less. It is determined whether or not it is in an invalid time (see FIG. 212) (S3932). If the value of the continuous hitting valid timer is equal to or less than “4000” (S3932: Yes), this process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the continuous hitting button process 4 (see FIG. 213).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3932 that the value of the continuous hitting valid timer 223ab is not equal to or less than “4000” (S3932: No), the process proceeds to S3933. Also, in the process of S3931, when it is determined that the value of the continuous hitting valid timer 223ab is “1000” or less (S3931: Yes), the process proceeds to S3933.

  In the process of S3933, it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory C action timer 223ae is “0” (S3933). When the value of the accessory C operation timer 223ae is not “0”, that is, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the accessory C460 is operating (S3933: No), this process is terminated. To do. On the other hand, when the value of the accessory C operation timer 223ae is “0”, that is, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) in a state where the accessory C460 is not operating (S3933: Yes), the accessory C The value of the operation timer 223ae is set to “3000” (S3934), and then this process is terminated and the process returns to the continuous hit button process 4.

  As described above, according to the thirteenth control example, by setting an invalid period corresponding to the operation period for each accessory (an accessory A720 to an accessory C460), that is, one time By setting a different invalid period for each of the objects operated based on the operation of the frame button 22 (an object A 720 to an object C 460), an invalid period (all the combinations set during the accessory driving effect) is set. (Invalid period set for the object) can be shortened, and the effect of the overall effect driving effect can be enhanced.

  Further, according to this control example, the free operation period is executed in the early stage of the accessory driving effect, and the simultaneous operation can be executed in the final stage of the accessory driving effect. Further, when shifting from the free movement period to the simultaneous movement period, the invalid period of the period corresponding to the movement period of each accessory (the accessory A 720 to the accessory C 460) is set. Based on the above, it is possible to shorten the period during which all the accessories (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) cannot be driven.

  In this control example, the operation period of each accessory (the accessory A 720 to the accessory C 460) is constant, but the control for shortening the operation period of the accessory as in the tenth control example described above may be used. It is also possible to use control for delaying the operation timing of the accessory as in the eleventh control example described above, or control for varying the operation content of the active accessory as in the twelfth control example described above. It may be used. Moreover, you may combine the control used in each control example mentioned above. Thereby, the free drive operation performed in the early stage of the accessory drive effect can be diversified.

  Further, in this control example, the simultaneous operation executed at the end of the accessory driving effect is configured to be executed based on the player's frame button operation. The simultaneous operation may be automatically executed when the remaining period is 1 second).

  Further, in this control example, the operation timing of each accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) is made the same as the simultaneous operation. For example, the operation range of each accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) is the maximum. May be set to be the same (timing when the accessory is most distant from the standby position).

  In this control example, only the control for positioning each accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) at the retreat position (standby position) at the timing when the simultaneous operation period starts (point h in FIG. 212) is used. However, for example, each accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) is set so that the end timings of the actors (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) to be driven at the end of the free movement period are close (same). The operation period and the operation start timing may be controlled, and the period from when the frame button 22 is operated until the simultaneous operation period starts and the period until the invalid time is set are determined. Then, based on the determination result, the operation content of each accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) may be determined.

  For example, the batch stop timing is set as a predetermined timing (for example, the timing between the point d and the point h in FIG. 212) before the timing at which the simultaneous operation period starts (the point in FIG. 212), and the frame button 22 compares the driving period of the accessory driving executed when 22 is operated with the remaining period until the simultaneous operation period is started or the remaining period until the invalid time is set. When the operation period) is stopped and displayed at a location away from the collective stop timing described above, the driving start time of the accessory is shifted or the driving content of the accessory is variable (extended or shortened). Thus, it becomes possible to select the operation content of each accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) in the direction in accordance with the collective stop timing.

<14th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 217 to 225. In the fourteenth control example, the motor driver MD1 (see FIG. 219) constituting the accessory A motors 771 and 772 outputs the stepping motor M1 (see FIG. 219) to the tenth control example described above. This is different from the point that a plurality of output signals are provided in that a control for changing the operation content of the accessory A 720 based on the operation interval of the frame button 22 in the accessory driving effect is added.

  In the tenth control example described above, an operation command is set for each accessory (object A720 to accessory C460) based on the operation content of the frame button 22 during the accessory driving effect, and the accessory corresponding to the operation command is set. By performing the operation, the effect of the effect driving effect based on the operation of the frame button 22 is enhanced.

  However, since the rotation speed of the stepping motor (for example, M1) that is driven based on the set operation command is always constant (see, for example, FIG. 188) and the operation speed of the accessory becomes constant, further effects Improvement of the effect was demanded.

  In contrast, in the fourteenth control example, as an output signal output from the motor driver MD1 to the stepping motor M1, a strong output signal for rotating the stepping motor M1 at a high speed (200 pps) and a high speed (200 pps) for the stepping motor M1. And a weak output signal that is rotated at a lower speed (100 pps).

  Thereby, the operating speed of the accessory A720 can be varied by the output signal output from the motor driver MD1 when the accessory A720 is operated. That is, when the signal output from the motor driver MD1 is a strong output signal, the amount of movement in the same period can be doubled compared to the case of a weak output signal. In other words, the period required to move the same distance can be halved.

  Therefore, it is possible to further diversify the effect mode of the accessory in the accessory driving effect, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

  Further, in this control example, the type of output signal (strong output signal or weak output signal) output by the motor driver MD1 is set based on the interval at which the frame button 22 is operated (pressed). Yes. More specifically, if the interval at which the frame button is operated (pressed) is within a predetermined period (within 3 seconds), a weak output signal is output, and the interval at which the frame button is operated (pressed) is the predetermined period. If it is longer (longer than 3 seconds), a strong output signal is output.

  With this configuration, when the player operates the frame button 22 a plurality of times at short intervals (intervals within 3 seconds), the effect effect based on the weak output signal is executed a plurality of times, and a long interval ( When an operation is performed at an interval longer than 3 seconds), an effect effect based on the strong output signal is executed. Therefore, an effect effect is generated based on the operation content (operation interval) to the frame button 22 executed by the player. Can be varied, and the player can be actively involved in the game.

  In the present control example, the period during which the accessory is operated based on the operation of the frame button 22 is set to a certain period (1 second) regardless of the type of the output signal output from the motor driver MD1. In this way, by changing the type of the output signal that drives the accessory without changing the period during which the accessory operates, it is possible to execute various accessory operations while reducing the control load of the accessory operation. it can.

  Further, a period during which the accessory operates based on the operation of the frame button 22 is set to a certain period (1 second), and an interval in which the frame button is operated (pressed) is set as an accessory operation executed during the certain period. If it is within a predetermined period (within 3 seconds), the action of the accessory based on the weak output signal is longer than the predetermined period (when it is longer than 3 seconds) when the frame button is operated (pressed). For example, for a player who operates the frame button 22 only once during an accessory driving effect, an accessory operation with a large operation range is performed based on the strong output signal. , And for a player who operates the frame button 22 a plurality of times during the accessory driving effect, the accessory operation with a small operation range is executed a plurality of times. Thereby, it becomes possible to execute the associated action according to the operation content of the player on the frame button 22, and the player can actively participate in the game.

  In this control example, a configuration is used in which the type of the output signal output by the motor driver MD1 is set based on the operation interval of the frame button 22. However, other configurations may be used, for example, an accessory drive The type of output signal output by the motor driver MD1 may be varied based on the number of times the frame button 22 has been operated during the performance. In this case, for example, a strong output signal may be set when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) more than a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times) during an accessory driving effect.

  As a result, as the number of times the player operates the frame button 22 increases, the accessory action can be increased (the operation speed is increased and the operation range is increased), so that the player is actively participating in the game. be able to.

  In this control example, the types of output signals output from the motor driver MD1 are two types (strong and weak), but more types than this may be output.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 217, the accessory A operation in the accessory driving effect of this control example will be described. FIG. 217 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the driving range of the accessory A720 when a weak output signal is output from the motor driver MD1, and FIG. 217 (b) is a strong output from the motor driver MD1. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the drive range of the accessory A720 when a signal was output.

  As shown in FIG. 217 (a), the operating range of the accessory A720 when the weak output signal is output (the operating range in the operating period of 1 second) is the maximum operating range of the accessory A720 (see FIG. 183 (b)). When the strong output signal is output as shown in FIG. 217 (b), the operating range of the accessory A720 (the operating range in the operating period of 1 second) is the maximum operating range of the accessory A720 (FIG. 183). It is set to be in the same range as (b).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 218, the operation of the frame button 22 and the operation of each accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) in the “button repeated hitting effect” which is the accessory driving effect in the fourteenth control example. Will be explained. FIG. 218 is a timing chart showing the flow of the accessory driving effect in this control example.

  As shown in FIG. 218, when the “button repeated striking effect” is started, an “effective period” in which the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 is valid is set (for example, 10 seconds). Then, when the player operates the frame button 22 during the “valid period” (“button press” ON), in the stop state (state in the standby position) as in the tenth control example described above. The operation is started with respect to each of the accessories (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) (point a in FIG. 218). It should be noted that during the period from when the “button repeated striking effect” is started until the frame button 22 is operated (pressed), the value of the timer for measuring the operation interval of the frame button 22 (the accessory A interval timer 223ca) is “0”. Therefore, a strong output signal is output to the accessory A720 (point a in FIG. 218).

  Next, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) (point b in FIG. 218), the interval from the timing (point a in FIG. 218) at which the previous frame button 22 was operated (pressed) is determined (T1 = 3.6 seconds), since the determination result exceeds a predetermined value (3 seconds in this control example), a strong output signal is output to the accessory A 720 (point b in FIG. 218).

  Further, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the “valid period” of the “button repeated effect” (point c in FIG. 218), the timing at which the previous frame button 22 was operated (pressed) (point b in FIG. 218). ) Is determined (T2 = 2.2 seconds), and since the determination result does not exceed a predetermined value (3 seconds in this control example), a weak output signal is output to the accessory A720 (FIG. 218 point c).

  Hereinafter, when the frame button 22 is similarly operated (pressed) and the accessory A 720 is operated, it is output to the accessory A 720 based on the interval from the previous operation (press) of the frame button 22. The type of output signal is determined.

  Next, the flow of control when the frame button 22 is operated while the accessory A720 is operating will be described with reference to the points d to f in FIG. First, when the frame button 22 is operated at a point d in FIG. 218, the interval (T4 = 3.2 seconds) from the previous frame button operation timing exceeds a predetermined value (3 seconds in this control example). Therefore, a strong output signal is output to the accessory A720.

  Then, when a new frame button operation is executed while the accessory A720 is operating based on the frame button operation (pressing) at the point d (point e in FIG. 218), it is based on the frame button operation. The operation of the accessory A720 is not executed, and the value of the timer (the accessory A interval timer 223ca) for measuring the operation interval of the frame button 22 is continuously measured without being reset.

  Then, when the operation of the accessory A 720 based on the operation (pressing) of the frame button at the point d in FIG. 218 is completed, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) (the point f in FIG. 218), the point in FIG. A strong output signal is output to the accessory A 720 based on the interval with d (T5 = 4.8 seconds). That is, in this control example, the type of output signal (strong output signal or weak output signal) output to the accessory A 720 is set based on the operation interval of the frame button 22. The interval is configured not to include an operation of the frame button 22 that does not operate the accessory A 720 (that is, an operation of the frame button 22 during the operation of the accessory A).

  By configuring in this way, the type of output signal (strong output signal or weak output signal) to be output to the accessory A720 is set based on the frame button operation interval corresponding to the interval at which the accessory A720 actually operates. can do. Therefore, there is an effect that an easy-to-understand presentation can be provided to the player.

  In this control example, the operation interval of the frame button 22 is determined without including the operation of the frame button 22 that does not operate the accessory A 720 (that is, the operation of the frame button 22 during the operation of the accessory A). However, other configurations may be used. For example, the operation intervals of the frame buttons 22 may be determined for operations on all the frame buttons 22.

  In this control example, the type of output signal (strong output signal or weak output signal) to be output to the accessory A 720 is set based on the operation interval of the frame button 22, but under other conditions The type of output signal may be set. For example, the interval at which the accessory A actually operates (interval at which the operation command is output to the accessory A 720) may be determined, and the type of the output signal may be set based on the determination result. Even if comprised in this way, there can exist an effect similar to this control example.

  Further, the type of output signal (strong output signal or weak output signal) to be output to the accessory A 720 is set based on the number of times the frame button 22 has been operated during the “valid period” of the “button repeated effect”. Alternatively, the type of output signal (strong output signal or weak output signal) to be output to the accessory A 720 may be set based on the lottery result of the special symbol. Further, the type (strong output signal or weak output signal) of the output signal output to the accessory A 720 may be set based on the operation interval with another accessory (the accessory B 740 or the accessory C 460).

<About the electrical configuration in the 14th control example>
Next, an electrical configuration in the fourteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 219 to 221. In the fourteenth control example, the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are changed and the input / output port 225 of the sound lamp control device 113 is connected to the tenth control example. The difference is that the contents of the drive motor group are described in detail. Since the other configuration is the same as that of the tenth control example, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, the contents of the drive motor group connected to the input / output port 225 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 219 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drive motor group. In FIG. 219, some of the same elements as those in the tenth control example described above are omitted from the audio lamp control device 113.

  The accessory A motors 771 and 772 provided in the drive motor group in this control example include a motor driver MD1 and a stepping motor M1. Specifically, the accessory A motor 771 includes a motor driver MD1 and a stepping motor M1, and the accessory A motor 772 includes a motor driver MD2 (not shown) and a stepping motor M2 (not shown). It consists of and.

  In the present control example, the accessory A motor 771 and the accessory A motor 772 are configured so as to be driven in response to the same operation command except for the rotation direction of the motor. 771 will be described only, and detailed description of the accessory A motor 772 will be omitted. Further, since the configurations of the accessory B motors 773 and 774, the accessory C motor 441, and other motors are the same as those of the accessory A motor 771, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the motor driver MD1 provided in the accessory A motor 771 will be described. The motor driver MD1 controls at least the rotation direction (forward / reverse rotation), rotation speed (acceleration / deceleration), and rotation amount (number of steps) of the stepping motor M1 based on the operation command output from the sound lamp control device 113. When the operation command corresponding to the content of the operation scenario table 222ab defined in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 is received, the stepping motor M1 performs driving corresponding to the operation scenario. Electric power is output to the stepping motor M1 to be executed.

  In this control example, one motor driver MD1 is provided for a single stepping motor M1, but the operation can be set for a plurality of drive motors (stepping motors) with a single motor driver. May be adopted. In this case, the operation command such as the number of rotation steps may be output by including information for specifying the type of the drive motor (stepping motor).

  The stepping motor M1 is a known stepping motor, and detailed description thereof is omitted. However, the rotation control (rotation direction, rotation speed, rotation amount) of the motor is controlled by the number of pulses of a constant angle (basic step angle) and its frequency. The motor to be controlled is configured such that the rotational speed of the motor increases as the frequency of the output signal output from the motor driver MD1 increases. The accessory A720 is operated based on the driving mode of the stepping motor M1.

  As described above, in this control example, the motor driver performs the accessory operation (high-speed accessory operation) for operating the accessory A720 at high speed and the accessory operation (low-speed accessory operation) for operating the accessory A720 at low speed. Since it is configured to be controllable depending on the type of output signal output from MD1, for example, compared to a configuration in which the operation speed of the accessory is varied by switching between a high-speed rotation drive motor and a low-speed rotation drive motor. Thus, the number of parts used for the accessory operation can be reduced, and the space of the apparatus can be saved. In addition, it is possible to simplify the operation control content related to the accessory operation.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 220 and 221. FIG. 220 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourteenth control example. The ROM 222 in the fourteenth control example is different from the ROM 222 in the tenth control example described above in that a second operation scenario table 222ab is provided instead of the operation scenario table 222ab. Since other configurations are the same as those in the tenth control example, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Here, the second operation scenario table 222ab will be described with reference to FIG. 221 (a). FIG. 221 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second operation scenario table 222ab. The second operation scenario table 222ab is provided with an accessory A second scenario table 222ab4 instead of the accessory A scenario table 222ab1 with respect to the operation scenario table 222ab (see FIG. 187 (b)) of the tenth control example described above. The other elements are the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

  Next, the accessory A second scenario table 222ab4 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 221 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the accessory A second scenario table 222ab4. This accessory A second scenario table 222ab4 is a table in which an operation scenario for the accessory A720 executed during the “button repeated stroke effect” in this control example is set, and the operation speed of the accessory A720 is low (100 pps). ) An operation scenario and an operation scenario in which the operation speed of the accessory A 720 is high (200 pps) are set.

  Specifically, an operation scenario (weak operation scenario) executed when the value of the accessory A selection value 223cb is “1” (operation type is “weak”) and the value of the accessory A selection value 223cb is “ An operation scenario (weak operation scenario) executed when “2” (operation type is “strong”) is set.

  Here, the accessory A selection value 223cb is set based on the operation interval of the frame button 22 operated during the “button repeated striking effect”, and the operation interval of the frame button 22 is equal to or longer than a predetermined period (3). “2” is set as the selection value in the case of (seconds or more), and “1” is set as the selection value in the case of less than the predetermined period (less than 3 seconds). The details of the accessory A selection value 223cb will be described later with reference to FIG. 220 (b).

  The contents specified in the action type “weak” in the accessory A second scenario table 222ab4 are the contents specified in the action type “normal” in the accessory A action scenario table 222ab1 of the tenth control example described above. The detailed description is omitted. On the other hand, the content specified for the operation type “strong” specifies information for increasing the operation speed (rotational speed) of the stepping motor M1 with respect to the content specified for the operation type “weak”.

  Specifically, the value “01H” of the action pointer is set corresponding to the value “1000” of the accessory A action timer 223ac. The operation pointer “01H” is defined with an operation speed of “200 pps”, a step number of “100”, and an operation direction of “positive direction”. Thereafter, the value “02H” of the action pointer is set corresponding to the value “500” of the accessory A action timer 223ac. The operation pointer “02H” is defined with “200 pps” as the operation speed, “100” as the number of steps, and “negative direction” as the operation direction.

  Then, the action pointer value “03H” is set corresponding to the value “0” of the accessory A action timer 223ac. The operation pointer “03H” defines “END” information indicating the end of the operation scenario.

  That is, in the accessory A second scenario table 222ab4, an operation scenario for operating the accessory A720 for one second is defined regardless of the operation type (“weak”, “strong”), and the operation type is “weak”. Information is defined so that the action range of the action A with the action type “strong” is doubled (the number of steps is double) with respect to the action A720.

  Returning to FIG. FIG. 220 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 222 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourteenth control example. The RAM 223 in the fourteenth control example is different from the RAM 223 in the tenth control example in that an accessory A interval timer 223ca and an accessory A selection value 223cb are added. Since other configurations are the same as those in the tenth control example, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the accessory A interval timer 223ca, the interval at which the frame button 22 is operated (the interval at which the accessory A 720 is operated) in the accessory driving effect (“button repeated stroke effect”) is within a predetermined value (3 seconds in this control example). A timer that is referred to when determining whether or not there is a timer that is subtracted every 1 millisecond after a value indicating a predetermined value (3 seconds in the present control example) is set. The accessory A interval timer 223ca is set to a predetermined value (“3000”) after “1000” is set as the value of the accessory A operation timer in the accessory A operation setting process 5 (S1909 in FIG. 224) (S3745). Is set (S3746), and is subtracted until the value of the accessory A interval timer 223ca becomes “0” in the interval timer subtraction processing (S1931 in FIG. 223) of the continuous hit button processing 5 (S1851 in FIG. 222) (FIG. 223). S2362), which is referred to when selecting an accessory A selection value 223cb, which will be described later, in the accessory A operation setting process 5 (S1909 in FIG. 224).

  The accessory A selection value 223cb is referred to when one operation scenario is selected from the accessory A second scenario table 222ab4 of the second operation scenario table 222ab. This accessory A selection value 223cb is set to “2” when the value of the accessory A interval timer 223ca is determined to be “0” in the accessory A operation setting process 5 (S1909 in FIG. 224). When it is determined that the value of the object A interval timer 223ca is not “0” (“1” or more), “1” is set. Then, in the accessory operation process 3 (S1561 in FIG. 225), the information set when the operation of the accessory A720 is completed is referred to when reading the operation scenario of the accessory A720 (S2551 in FIG. 225). It is cleared (S2554 in FIG. 225).

  As described above, in this control example, the value of the accessory A selection value 223cb is set based on the value of the accessory A interval timer 223ca, and the combination based on the set value of the accessory A selection value is set. A strong operation scenario or a weak operation scenario is set as the operation scenario of the object A 720. With this configuration, the operation content of the accessory A720 can be varied based on the operation interval of the frame button 22 (the operation interval of the accessory A720).

<Regarding Control Processing in the 14th Control Example>
Next, control processing in the fourteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 222 to 225. In the control process of the fourteenth control example, the contents of the sound lamp control device 113 are changed with respect to the tenth control example. The other processes are the same as in the tenth control example, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the fourteenth control example, the repeated hit button process (see FIG. 192) in the tenth control example is changed to the repeated hit button process 5 (see FIG. 222), and the accessory action process (see FIG. 196) is an accessory. The difference is that it is changed to operation processing 2 (see FIG. 225).

  First, the repeated hit button process 5 (S1851) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 222 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuous hit button process 5 (S1851). When the continuous hit button process 5 (S1851) is executed, the processes of S1901 to S1907 are executed similarly to the continuous hit button process (see FIG. 192) of the tenth control example described above. An interval timer subtraction process (S1931) is executed. This interval timer subtraction process (S1931) is a process of subtracting the value set in the above-mentioned accessory A interval timer 223ca, and will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S1931 is completed, the processing of S1908 to S1911 is then executed in the same manner as the continuous hitting button processing (see FIG. 192) of the tenth control example described above, and this processing ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 223, the interval timer subtraction process (S1931) executed in the continuous hit button process 5 (S1851 in FIG. 222) will be described. FIG. 223 is a flowchart showing the contents of the interval timer subtraction process (S1931). This interval timer subtraction processing (S1931) is provided in the main processing of the sound lamp control device 113, and the processing interval is set to 1 millisecond. That is, every time this process is executed, a process of subtracting “1” corresponding to 1 millisecond from the value of the accessory A interval timer 223ca is executed.

  When the interval timer subtraction process (S1931) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory A interval timer 223ca is larger than “0” (“1” or more) (S2361). If it is determined in the processing of S2361 that it is larger than “0” (“1” or more) (S2361: Yes), the value of the accessory A interval timer 223ca is decremented by 1 (S2362), and this processing ends. . On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the accessory A interval timer 223ca is not greater than “0” (“0”) (S2361: No), the process of S2362 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, the accessory A action setting process 5 (S1909 in FIG. 224) executed in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory A operation setting process 5 (S1909). In this accessory A operation setting process 5 (S1909), when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed), the operation content of the accessory A720 is set and the operation (press) interval of the frame button 22 (object A720) is set. The operation interval) is set to a predetermined value ("3000") in the accessory A interval timer 223ca that is referred to when it is determined whether or not it is within a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds).

  When the accessory A action setting process 5 (S1909) is executed, it is first determined whether the value of the accessory A action timer 223ac is “0”, and not “0” (“1” or more). If it has been performed (S3741: No), since the accessory A720 is in operation, the present process is terminated without performing a new operation setting.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is “0” (S3741: Yes), the accessory A 720 has finished its operation and is located at the retreat position (operation Next, it is determined whether the value of the accessory A interval timer 223ca is “0” (S3742). In the process of S3742, when it is determined that the value of the accessory A interval timer 223ca is “0” (S3742: Yes), a predetermined period (3 seconds) has elapsed from the previous frame button operation (the accessory A operation). Since it has elapsed, the accessory A selection value 223cb is set to “2” (S3744), and the process proceeds to S3745.

  In the processing of S3742, when it is determined that the value of the accessory A interval timer 223ca is not “0” (“1” or more) (S3742: No), the previous frame button operation (the accessory A operation) Since the predetermined period (3 seconds) has not elapsed (because the interval is short), the accessory A selection value 223cb is set to “1” (S3743), and the process proceeds to S3745.

  In the process of S3745, “1000” is set to the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac (S3745), and then “3000” is set to the value of the accessory A interval timer 223ca (S3746). The process ends.

  In the above-described accessory A operation setting process 5 (S1909 in FIG. 224), when setting the operation content of the accessory A720, is the interval between the previous frame button operation (the accessory A operation) within a predetermined value? Is determined with reference to the value of the accessory A interval timer 223ca, and the operation content (strong operation, weak operation) of the present accessory A720 is set based on the determination result. As a result, it is possible to execute an action (an accessory A720) corresponding to the player's frame button operation, and it is possible to provide an actor with a variety of actions.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 225, the accessory operation process 3 (S1561 in FIG. 225) will be described. FIG. 225 is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory operation process 3 (S1561). When the accessory operation process 3 (S1561) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is larger than “0” (“1” or more) (S2511). Is also larger ("1" or more) (S2511: Yes), it is next determined whether or not the feature selection value 223cb is set to "1" (S2551).

  In the process of S2551, when it is determined that the accessory selection value 223cb is set to “1” (S2551: Yes), the operation content corresponding to the operation type “weak” in the accessory A second scenario table 222ab4 Is read (S2552), and the process proceeds to S2516.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2551, when it is determined that the takuba selection value 223cb is not set to “1” (set to “2”) (S2551: No), the accessory A second scenario table The operation content corresponding to the operation type 222ab4 “strong” is read (S2553), and the process proceeds to S2516. If it is determined in the processing of S2511 that the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is “0” (S2511: No), then the accessory selection value 223cb is cleared (reset) (S2554). The process proceeds to S2516.

  When the process proceeds to S2516, the processes from S2516 to S2520 are executed in the same manner as the accessory operation process (see FIG. 196) in the tenth control example described above, and this process ends.

  As described above, according to the fourteenth control example, as the output signal output from the motor driver MD1 to the stepping motor M1, the strong output signal for rotating the stepping motor M1 at a high speed (200 pps) and the stepping motor M1 are output. A weak output signal that rotates at a low speed (100 pps) than at a high speed (200 pps) can be output.

  Thereby, the operating speed of the accessory A720 can be varied by the output signal output from the motor driver MD1 when the accessory A720 is operated. That is, when the signal output from the motor driver MD1 is a strong output signal, the amount of movement in the same period can be doubled compared to the case of a weak output signal. In other words, the period required to move the same distance can be halved.

  Therefore, it is possible to further diversify the effect mode of the accessory in the accessory driving effect, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

  Further, in this control example, the type of output signal (strong output signal or weak output signal) output by the motor driver MD1 is set based on the interval at which the frame button 22 is operated (pressed). Yes. More specifically, if the interval at which the frame button is operated (pressed) is within a predetermined period (within 3 seconds), a weak output signal is output, and the interval at which the frame button is operated (pressed) is the predetermined period. If it is longer (longer than 3 seconds), a strong output signal is output.

  With this configuration, when the player operates the frame button 22 a plurality of times at short intervals (intervals within 3 seconds), the effect effect based on the weak output signal is executed a plurality of times, and a long interval ( When an operation is performed at an interval longer than 3 seconds), an effect effect based on the strong output signal is executed. Therefore, an effect effect is generated based on the operation content (operation interval) to the frame button 22 executed by the player. Can be varied, and the player can be actively involved in the game.

  In the present control example, the period during which the accessory is operated based on the operation of the frame button 22 is set to a certain period (1 second) regardless of the type of the output signal output from the motor driver MD1. In this way, by changing the type of the output signal that drives the accessory without changing the period during which the accessory operates, it is possible to execute various accessory operations while reducing the control load of the accessory operation. it can.

  Further, a period during which the accessory operates based on the operation of the frame button 22 is set to a certain period (1 second), and an interval in which the frame button is operated (pressed) is set as an accessory operation executed during the certain period. If it is within a predetermined period (within 3 seconds), the action of the accessory based on the weak output signal is longer than the predetermined period (when it is longer than 3 seconds) when the frame button is operated (pressed). For example, for a player who operates the frame button 22 only once during an accessory driving effect, an accessory operation with a large operation range is performed based on the strong output signal. , And for a player who operates the frame button 22 a plurality of times during the accessory driving effect, the accessory operation with a small operation range is executed a plurality of times. Thereby, it becomes possible to execute the associated action according to the operation content of the player on the frame button 22, and the player can actively participate in the game.

  In this control example, a configuration is used in which the type of the output signal output by the motor driver MD1 is set based on the operation interval of the frame button 22. However, other configurations may be used, for example, an accessory drive The type of output signal output by the motor driver MD1 may be varied based on the number of times the frame button 22 has been operated during the performance. In this case, for example, a strong output signal may be set when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) more than a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times) during an accessory driving effect.

  As a result, as the number of times the player operates the frame button 22 increases, the accessory action can be increased (the operation speed is increased and the operation range is increased), so that the player is actively participating in the game. be able to.

  In this control example, the types of output signals output from the motor driver MD1 are two types (strong and weak), but more types than this may be output.

  Furthermore, in this control example, in order to simplify the accessory operation control, a configuration is used in which a constant accessory operation period is always set regardless of the type of output signal output by the motor driver MD1. For example, in the case where a strong output signal (200 pps) is output, the accessory operation period may be set to 0. 0, depending on the type of the output signal output by the driver MD1. When the weak output signal (100 pps) is output for 5 seconds, the accessory operation period may be set to 1 second. Accordingly, the operating range of the accessory is made constant regardless of the type of the output signal output from the motor driver MD1, and the operating period of the accessory is variable (the operating period of the strong output signal is that of the weak output signal) The production effect can be enhanced.

  When the configuration described above is used in this control example, the motor driver MD1 outputs a strong output signal when the operation interval of the frame button 22 is short, and the motor driver MD1 outputs a weak output signal when the operation interval is long. It may be configured to do so.

  As described above, in the tenth control example to the fourteenth control example, the various control processes for the accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) operated based on the operation of the frame button 22 by the player have been described. The configuration of each control example may be partly or entirely combined. For example, in the configuration capable of executing the shortening operation pattern of the above-described tenth control example, the delay processing of the eleventh control example, the repetitive operation of the twelfth control example, and the operation speed variable processing of the thirteenth control example, Content executed based on the player's operation details (operation timing, number of operations, operation interval, etc.) on the button 22 and game status (special symbol or normal symbol success / failure determination result, probability variation state, absence / presence status, etc.) It is good to comprise so that may differ. Thereby, more various effects can be executed.

  Also, in the configuration capable of executing the above-described shortening operation pattern of the tenth control example, delay processing of the eleventh control example, repetitive operation of the twelfth control example, and variable operation speed processing of the thirteenth control example. The content to be played may be selectable by the player.

  Moreover, in each control example mentioned above, although the player operates the frame button 22, each composition provided in the pachinko machine 10 (the combination A720 to the combination C460) is used. Any configuration may be used as long as the presentation mode is variable based on the player's operation. For example, the voice mode output from the audio output device 226 when the player operates predetermined operation means (such as the frame button 22). May be used, a sound effect that varies the light emission mode of the lamp display device 227, a display effect that changes the display mode displayed on the display device such as the third symbol display device 81, or the like. You may make it the structure which combined each aspect.

  Further, in each control example described above, the configuration of the frame button 22 is used as an operation means that can be operated by the player, but other configurations may be used, for example, that the player has touched or approached. A sensor device that detects and reacts, a dial device that can be rotated by the player, a lever device that can be operated by the player in front and rear, left and right, and the like may be used. Further, the number of means for the player to operate is not limited to one, and a plurality of operation means may be provided. In this case, when a plurality of operation means are operated, the player can actively participate in the production by changing the production mode.

  In addition, as a configuration having the same effects as those of the tenth control example to the fourteenth control example described above, the operation status (whether or not the operation is in progress or the remaining operation period) of each accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) is determined. A possible accessory action state determination means and a storage means for storing the determination result are provided, and an operation of a predetermined accessory (any one of the accessories (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460)) is executed. In doing so, a configuration may be used in which the operation pattern of the accessory is set based on the driving situation of the other accessory.

  This control will be described with reference to the control for each accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) used in the tenth control example described above. When the accessory A720 is operated, the other accessory (the accessory B740 and It is preferable to determine whether or not the accessory C 460) is in operation, and to set the operation of the accessory A 720 to the shortened operation pattern when it is determined that the other accessory is operating. Thereby, it is possible to shorten the period during which all the items (the item A 720 to the item C 460) are operating.

  In addition, when other objects are operating, the remaining operation period of the active object is determined, and the operating object of the operating object is shorter than the operation period of the shortened operation pattern of the currently executed object. A shortened operation pattern should be set only when the remaining operation period is long.

  Furthermore, it is preferable to set priorities for a plurality of actors and to determine an actor whose operation pattern can be varied based on the priorities in a state where a plurality of actors can be driven simultaneously. In this case, for example, priority may be set for a plurality of accessories in association with the effect pattern executed by the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, the display effect and the accessory operation executed on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed without a sense of incongruity.

  In addition, as a method for setting priorities for a plurality of items, other methods may be used. For example, the priorities may be set according to the length of the operation period of the items, or a plurality of items may be set. The priority order may be set based on the arrangement (front-rear position) of the object, or the priority order may be set based on the driving speed set for a plurality of accessories.

  Furthermore, when the control with respect to each accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) used in the eleventh control example is described as an example, at least two or more of each accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) are operated simultaneously. In addition, it is preferable to set so that the operation of the long set operation period (the combination C 460 if the combination A 720 and the combination C 460 operate simultaneously) is delayed. Thereby, it is possible to shorten a period in which a plurality of simultaneously operated objects are operating together. Moreover, the same control as the content demonstrated to the example with respect to the control with respect to each accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) of the tenth control example described above may be executed, or the respective controls may be combined.

  Furthermore, when the control with respect to each accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) used in the twelfth control example is described as an example, at least two or more of each accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) are operated simultaneously. In addition, when the repetitive operation is executed, it is preferable to set the repetitive operation to be executed only for the accessory having a short operation period until returning to the standby position. As a result, it is possible to prevent the repeated operation from being performed unnecessarily. Moreover, the same control as the content demonstrated to the example with respect to the control for each accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) in the tenth control example and the eleventh control example may be executed. You may combine.

  In addition, in the tenth control example to the fourteenth control example described above, a configuration is used in which a plurality of accessories operate simultaneously based on the operation of the frame button 22, but each accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) is used. For example, the accessory A 720 is operated every time the frame button 22 is operated (the operation condition is one button operation), and the accessory B 740 is a frame. The button 22 may be operated when the button 22 is operated twice (the operation condition is two button operations), and the accessory C460 may be set so as to be operated when the frame button 22 is operated five times. By setting in this way, various accessory actions can be executed based on the operation content of the frame button 22.

  Furthermore, the following configuration may be used as a configuration that exhibits the same effects as those of the tenth control example to the fourteenth control example.

<Modified example of determining the priority order of a shortened / delayed item corresponding to the type of repetitive strike>
A main movable accessory may be determined corresponding to the type of repeated hitting effect, and the operation of the main movable accessory may be configured so as not to be shortened or delayed. In other words, the operations other than the main movable accessory may be shortened or delayed. As a result, the action of the main actor in the production is not shortened / delayed in the repetitive striking effect being executed (or executed), so that the action of the accessory is shortened without impairing the production effect. Can be delayed.

  Specifically, as a type of repetitive strike effect, “repetitive strike effect A” in which the character A is defined as the main movable character, “repetitive force effect B” in which the character B is defined as the main movable character, and the character C Is provided as a “continuous hitting effect C” that defines as a main movable accessory. Then, when the success / failure determination result is a big hit, the repeated hitting effect A is easily selected, and when the hit / failure determination result is unfavorable, the repeated hitting effect C is easily selected. Thereby, it is possible to suggest that the expectation level that is a big hit is high by displaying the repetitive strike effect in which the main movable accessory is the accessory A, and the player's interest can be improved.

  In each consecutive hit effect, the objects A to C are moved in a predetermined order every time the frame button 22 is pressed five times during the button pressing effective period. For example, in the continuous striking effect A, when the frame button 22 is pressed five times, first, the movement of the accessory A, which is the main movable accessory, is started. When the frame button 22 is further pressed five times, the movement of the accessory B is started. Thereafter, when the frame button 22 is further pressed five times, the movement of the accessory C is started. Therefore, when the frame button 22 is pressed 15 times in a short period, all the objects A to C are movable.

  As described above, in each of the continuous hit effects in this modification, in order to determine which of the actors A to C is the main movable accessory, it is necessary to execute the continuous hit operation in the continuous hit effect. Can be executed eagerly, and the player's willingness to participate can be improved.

<15th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 226 to 236. In the fifteenth control example, the panel configuration of the pachinko machine 10 is changed with respect to the first control example described above, and the solenoid 209 (the power solenoid 209d, the open solenoid 65f2, The difference is that the content of the control of the road solenoid 65k) is changed and the content of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is changed.

  In the first embodiment described above, the solenoid is moved and held based on a certain output as the operation control of the solenoid that drives the various electric accessories. In such operation control of the solenoid, the state of the solenoid is maintained by using electric power necessary for starting (sucking) the solenoid, so that electric power is used more than necessary and power consumption increases. There was a risk of excessive heat generation.

  On the other hand, in the fifteenth control example, the electric power corresponding to the state (suction state, holding state) can be supplied to the solenoid for driving various electric accessories. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the electric power used when holding the solenoid. Furthermore, it is possible to suppress the solenoid from generating excessive heat by suppressing the electric power used excessively.

  First, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 226 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example. In addition, about the structure same as the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of 1st Embodiment mentioned above, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 226, in this control example, a first winning port 64 is provided in a lower area of the game board 13 (below the third symbol display device 81), and a second winning port 640 and a second winning port are provided on the lower right side thereof. An electric accessory 640a associated with the mouth 640 is provided. The electric accessory 640a is opened in a predetermined pattern when the result of the second symbol winning lottery (ordinary drawing lottery) executed based on the passing of the ball through the through gate 67 is a winning. The electric accessory 640a is driven by a normal power solenoid 209d.

  Further, in the same place as in the first embodiment described above, that is, on the downstream side of the area (so-called right hit area) through which the game ball passes the center frame 86 among the game balls launched on the game board 13, A variable winning device 65 is provided. Since this variable winning device 65 has the same configuration as the variable winning device 65 (see FIGS. 49 to 51) of the first embodiment described above, detailed description thereof is omitted, but the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is omitted. Is driven by the opening solenoid 65f2, and the switching member 65h of the variable winning device 65 is driven by the flow path solenoid 65k.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example is provided with the general-purpose solenoid 209d, the open solenoid 65f2, and the flow path solenoid 65k as solenoids for which the main controller 110 performs drive control. A control signal corresponding to the gaming state is output to the solenoid.

<Electric Configuration in Fifteenth Control Example>
Next, an electrical configuration in the fifteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 227 to 231. In the fifteenth control example, the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are changed from the first control example, and the input / output port 205 and the solenoid 209 of the main control device 110 are connected to a solenoid drive circuit. It is different in that it is connected through 1200. Since other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 227 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. 227, in this control example, a solenoid drive circuit 1200 is connected to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110.

  Solenoid drive circuit 1200 is based on the types of output signals for solenoid control output from main controller 110 (output signals that cause each solenoid to operate strongly and output signals that cause each solenoid to operate weakly). 209d, an opening solenoid 65f2, and a flow path solenoid 65k). A detailed description of the solenoid drive circuit 1200 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 228 and 229.

  Next, referring to FIG. 228 and FIG. 229, various solenoids 209 (general power solenoid 209 d, open solenoid 65 f 2, flow path solenoid 65 k) are turned on / off based on an instruction from MPU 201 of main controller 110. The electrical configuration will be described.

  228 shows an input / output port 205 connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via the bus line 204, a solenoid drive circuit 1200 connected to the input / output port 205, and a solenoid drive circuit 1200 connected thereto. 6 is a schematic diagram schematically showing various solenoids 209 (general power solenoid 209d, open solenoid 65f2, flow path solenoid 65k).

  As shown in FIG. 228, various solenoids 209 (general power solenoid 209d, open solenoid 65f2, flow path solenoid 65k) are connected to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110 via the solenoid drive circuit 1200. The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 227). By switching the output signal of the MPU 201, the solenoid drive circuit 1200 can be driven and various solenoids 209 can be turned on and off.

  Specifically, a solenoid drive IC 1201 provided in the solenoid drive circuit 1200 is connected to the input / output port 205. Here, the solenoid driving IC 1201 is an IC that can output a signal input to the input port from the output port at the rising edge of the clock and then hold the output of the output port until a clear signal is input. is there.

  The solenoid driving IC 1201 has input terminals (ports) D1 to D6, output terminals (ports) Q1 to Q6, a clock input terminal CK, a clear signal input terminal CLR, a power input terminal Vcc, and a ground terminal GND.

  By applying a voltage of 2 to 6 V between the power input terminal Vcc and the ground terminal GND, the solenoid driving IC 1201 can be operated. In this control example, a voltage of 5 V is applied between the power input terminal Vcc and the ground terminal GND by connecting the power supply 5 V to the power input terminal Vcc and connecting GND to the ground terminal GND (grounding). It is configured. A capacitor C1 having a capacitance of 10 μF is provided on a circuit between the power input terminal Vcc and the ground terminal GND. The capacitor C1 can remove noise from the external power supply to the solenoid driving IC 1201, and can suppress (prevent) destruction or malfunction of the solenoid driving IC 1201. Naturally, the capacitance of the capacitor C1 may be appropriately changed.

  When 5 V is applied between the power input terminal Vcc and the ground terminal GND, the input signals to the clock input terminal CK and the clear signal input terminal CLR are controlled to be input to the input ports D1 to D6. Signals can be output from the output ports Q1 to Q6. Specifically, a rectangular wave (clock signal) having a frequency of 10 kHz is input to the clock input terminal CK, and an ON signal (5 V) is input to the clear signal input terminal CLR. In this case, the signals input to the input ports D1 to D6 are output to the output ports Q1 to Q6 at the rising edge of the clock signal input to the clock input terminal CK. Since the frequency of the clock signal input to the clock input terminal CK is 10 kHz, the input signals to the input ports D1 to D6 are referred to once every 0.1 ms, and the output signals of the output ports Q1 to Q6 are updated. Will be. In this control example, the frequency of the clock signal input to the clock input terminal CK is 10 kHz. However, the frequency is not limited to this, and may be 5 kHz or 20 kHz. Further, instead of inputting a periodic clock to the clock input terminal CK, a signal may be input to the clock input terminal CK only at the timing of updating the output signals of the output ports Q1 to Q6.

  On the other hand, if an OFF signal (0 V) is input to the clear signal input terminal CLR even if a clock signal having a frequency of 10 kHz is input to the clock input terminal CK, the signal input to the input ports D1 to D6. Regardless of the output signal, each output signal of the output ports Q1 to Q6 is OFF (0 V). Therefore, by inputting the OFF signal (0 V) to the clear signal input terminal CLR, the solenoid driving IC 1201 can be deactivated and the operations of the various solenoids 209 can be stopped.

  The plus terminal of the capacitor C2 is connected to the signal line connecting the input / output port 205 and the clear signal input terminal CLR, and the minus terminal of the capacitor C2 is connected to GND (grounded). The capacitor C2 can reduce noise mixed in the signal line connecting the input / output port 205 and the clear signal input terminal CLR, and can suppress (prevent) the solenoid driving IC 1201 from operating erroneously.

  The input ports D1 to D6 are ports to which signals are input from the input / output port 205, and either an OFF signal (0V) or an ON signal (5V) is input. Signals input to the input ports D1 to D6 are transmitted as serial data from the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to the input / output port 225 via the bus line 224, and serial-parallel conversion is performed at the input / output port 225 for transmission. A signal is input to each of the input ports D1 to D6 based on the serial data.

  As described above, when the solenoid driving IC 1201 is in an operating state, the output port Q1 is based on the signals input to the input ports D1 to D6 at the rising timing of the clock signal input to the clock input terminal CK. The output signal of .about.Q6 is updated.

  The output port Q1 corresponds to the input port D1, the output port Q2 corresponds to the input port D2, the output port Q3 corresponds to the input port D3, the output port Q4 corresponds to the input port D4, and the output port corresponds to the input port D5. Q5 corresponds, and output port Q6 corresponds to input port D6. If the signal input to the input port is an OFF signal (0V), the signal output from the corresponding output port is the OFF signal (0V), and the signal input to the input port is the ON signal (5V). If there is, the signal output from the corresponding output port is an ON signal (5 V).

  As described above, the output of the output ports Q1 to Q6 is changed based on the input signals input to the input ports D1 to D6. Based on the signal input to the input ports D1 to D6 at the rising timing of the clock signal input to the clock input terminal CK, the output signals of the output ports Q1 to Q6 are updated and input to the clock input terminal CK. The updated output signal is held at the falling timing of the clock signal. That is, the output signals of the output ports Q1 to Q6 are held until the rising timing of the clock signal input to the next clock input terminal CK.

  Here, a general power solenoid drive circuit 1202 connected to the output ports Q1 and Q2 and a general power solenoid 209d driven by the general power solenoid drive circuit 1202 will be described.

  The output ports Q1 and Q2 are connected to the gate terminals of the FET 1-1 and FET 1-2 of the normal power solenoid drive circuit 1202, respectively. Here, the FET 1-1 and the FET 1-2 are configured by n-channel FETs (Field Effect Transistors), and by applying a predetermined voltage (5 V) to the gate terminal, the drain terminal to the source terminal In this state, a current flows through (conductive state). On the other hand, when no voltage is applied to the gate terminal, no current flows from the drain terminal to the source terminal (non-conductive state).

  One terminal of a normal power solenoid 209d is connected to the drain terminals of the FET 1-1 and FET 1-2, and a 5V power source is connected to the other terminal of the general power solenoid 209d. Further, GND is connected (grounded) to the source terminals of FET1-1 and FET1-2. Therefore, when the FET 1-1 or the FET 1-2 is in a conductive state, a current flows from the 5 V power source connected via the general power solenoid 209d to the GND, and a current flows through the general power solenoid 209d. It will be. As a result, the ordinary power solenoid 209d is changed to the ON state, and the ordinary electric accessory 640a is moved.

  The FET 1-1 is turned on when the ON signal is input from the input / output port 205 to the input port D1 of the solenoid driving IC 1201, and the output of the output port Q1 is output at the rising timing of the signal input to the clock input terminal CK. This is the case when turned ON. That is, by inputting an ON signal from the input / output port 205 to the input port D1 of the solenoid driving IC 1201, the normal power solenoid 209d can be driven to the ON state using the FET 1-1.

  Further, the FET 1-2 is turned on when an ON signal is input from the input / output port 205 to the input port D2 of the solenoid driving IC 1201, and the output port Q2 is turned on at the rising timing of the signal input to the clock input terminal CK. This is when the output is turned ON. That is, by inputting an ON signal from the input / output port 205 to the input port D2 of the solenoid driving IC 1201, the general-purpose solenoid 209d can be driven to the ON state using the FET 1-2.

  Here, the drain terminal of the FET 1-1 is directly connected to the general power solenoid 209d, while the drain terminal of the FET 1-2 is connected to the general power solenoid 209d via the resistor R1. That is, the resistor R1 is connected in series between the drain terminal of the FET1-2 and the general-use solenoid 209d. The resistance value of the resistor R1 is 10 ohms, which is the same as the resistance value of the ordinary power solenoid. Therefore, when the current flows through the normal power solenoid 209d by changing the FET 1-1 to the conductive state, a voltage of 5 V is applied to the general power solenoid 209d. On the other hand, the same voltage (2.5 V) is applied to the resistor R1 and the general power solenoid 209d when the current flows through the general power solenoid 209d by changing the FET1-2 to the conductive state. become.

  Thus, a difference can be provided in the driving force between the case where the FET 1-1 is used to drive the general power solenoid 209d and the case where the FET 1-2 is used to drive the general power solenoid 209d. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 229. In this control example, the ordinary electric accessory 640a, which needs to increase the driving force of the general-purpose solenoid 209d, is changed to the open state, and the normal It is configured to change the driving force of the general-purpose solenoid 209d when the variable ordinary electric accessory 640a is held open without any problem even if the driving force of the solenoid 209d is weak. As a result, since the driving force of the ordinary power solenoid 209d can be suppressed to the minimum necessary, the electric power necessary for driving the ordinary power solenoid 209d can be suppressed.

  Further, a free-wheeling diode D1 is provided in parallel with the ordinary power solenoid 209d. The cathode terminal of the reflux diode D1 is connected to the terminal side connected to the power supply side of the general power solenoid 209d, and the anode terminal is connected to the ground side of the general power solenoid 209d (FET1-1 or FET1-2 is connected). Connected side). Therefore, no current flows from the power supply side to the ground side of the power solenoid 209d, but a current flows from the ground side to the power supply side. As a result, when the FET 1-1 or FET 1-2 is turned off, the current generated by the back electromotive force of the general power solenoid 209d is consumed by the general power solenoid 209d through the freewheeling diode D1, and the general power solenoid It can suppress (prevent) that FET1-1 and FET1-2 are destroyed by the back electromotive force of 209d.

  It should be noted that a switching element such as an FET may be employed in place of the freewheeling diode D1, and the switching element may be rendered conductive when a back electromotive force is generated in the general-purpose solenoid 209d. Further, the back electromotive force of the solenoid 209d may be stored in a capacitor or the like. By using the stored energy of the capacitor for the next operation of the solenoid 209d or driving of other solenoids and motors, power consumption can be reduced. If a capacitor having a voltage lower than the back electromotive force of the solenoid 209d is used, the energy of the solenoid 209d is immediately stored in the solenoid 209d. The operation speed of the off operation can be increased.

  As described above, when the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 inputs input signals to the input ports D1 and D2 of the solenoid drive IC 1201, and the general power solenoid drive circuit 1202 is driven, the general power solenoid 209d becomes the input port. It is driven with two types of driving force according to the above. As a result, the normal electric accessory 640a, which needs to increase the driving force of the normal power solenoid 209d, can be changed to the open state, and there is no problem even if the driving force of the normal power solenoid 209d is weaker than that. In the case where the ordinary electric accessory 640a is held in an open state, the driving force of the general-purpose solenoid 209d can be changed, and the driving force of the general-purpose solenoid 209d can be suppressed to the necessary minimum. Electric power required for driving the solenoid 209d can be suppressed.

  The open solenoid drive circuit 1203 is a circuit driven by output ports Q3 and Q4 that are updated based on signals input to the input ports D3 and D4 of the solenoid drive IC 1201. By driving the open solenoid driving circuit 1203, the open solenoid 65f2 is driven. The open solenoid drive circuit 1203 has the same configuration as the ordinary power solenoid drive circuit 1202 and can drive the open solenoid 65f2 with two types of driving forces. The detailed contents are the same as those of the general-purpose solenoid drive circuit 1202, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The flow path solenoid drive circuit 1204 is a circuit driven by output ports Q5 and Q6 that are updated based on signals input to the input ports D5 and D6 of the solenoid drive IC 1201. When the flow path solenoid drive circuit 1204 is driven, the flow path solenoid 65k is driven. The flow path solenoid drive circuit 1203 has the same configuration as the ordinary power solenoid drive circuit 1202, and can drive the flow path solenoid 65k with two types of driving forces. The detailed contents are the same as those of the general-purpose solenoid drive circuit 1202, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 229, the relationship between the input / output signals in the solenoid driving IC 1201 and the operation of the universal solenoid 209d with respect to the output signal of the solenoid driving IC will be described.

  In this control example, when the general-purpose solenoid 209d is varied, there is a normal period in which the electric combination 640a is changed from a closed state to an open state and a holding period in which the electric combination 640a is held in an open state. A difference is provided in the driving force for driving the solenoid 209d. More specifically, less energy is required when the electric combination 640a is maintained in the open state than when the electric combination 640a is changed from the closed state to the open state. Therefore, the electric combination 640a is driven with a large driving force (strong operation) during the suction period, and the electric combination 640a is driven with a small driving force (weak operation) during the subsequent holding period. Reduced.

  First, immediately after the power is turned on, when the input signal to the clear signal input terminal CLR of the solenoid driving IC 1201 is OFF (0 V), even if the ON signal is input to the clock input terminal CK, the input port D1, Based on the input signal to D2, the output signals of the output ports Q1 and Q2 are not updated, and the output signals of the output ports Q1 and Q2 are both OFF (0 V). Thus, by setting the input signal to the clear signal input terminal CLR to OFF (0 V), even if the ON signal is input to the clock input terminal CK due to noise or the like, the output signals of the output ports Q1 and Q2 Does not become ON (5V), so that malfunction of the ordinary power solenoid 209d can be prevented (suppressed).

  Thereafter, the output signal of the output ports Q1 and Q2 is updated based on the input signal to the input ports D1 and D2 by turning on the input signal of the clear signal input terminal CLR of the solenoid driving IC 1201 to 5 (V). It becomes.

  In this case, when the signal of the clock input terminal CK rises from OFF (0V) to ON (5V), the output signals of the output ports Q1 and Q2 are updated based on the input signals to the input ports D1 and D2. When driving the general electric solenoid 209d, that is, when opening the electric accessory 640a, first, the input signal of the input port D1 is turned ON (5 V). When the input signal of the input port D1 becomes ON (5V), the output signal of the output port Q1 is updated to ON (5V) at the rising timing of the clock signal to the clock input terminal CK.

  When the output signal of the output port Q1 is turned on (5 V), the FET 1-1 (see FIG. 228) is driven, and the ordinary solenoid 209d is driven with a strong operation (2.5 W) by applying 5 V. . Since the input signal of the input port D1 is maintained ON (5V) for 80 ms, the general-purpose solenoid 209d is driven with a strong operation (2.5 W) for 80 ms. This period of 80 ms is referred to as a suction period. During this suction period, the electric accessory 640a is changed from the closed state to the open state.

  In the suction period, since the input signal to the input port D2 remains OFF (0V), the output signal of the output port Q2 also remains OFF (0V), and the FET 1-2 (see FIG. 228) is not driven.

  When the suction period of 80 ms is completed, the operation shifts to a holding period in which the main solenoid 209d is held for 320 ms in the open state. When shifting to the holding period, first, the input signal to the input port D1 is turned OFF (0 V). Then, after the predetermined period (2 ms in this control example), the input signal to the input port D2 is turned ON (5 V). When the input signal of the input port D2 is turned on (5 V), the FET 1-2 is driven, and the ordinary solenoid 209d is driven. As described above with reference to FIG. 228, when the general-purpose solenoid 209d is driven using the FET 1-2, the voltage applied to the general-purpose solenoid 209d is low because the resistor R1 is provided on the circuit. (2.5V), the current flowing through the ordinary solenoid 209d decreases (0.25A). Therefore, the driving power of the ordinary power solenoid 209d decreases (0.625 W), and the power consumed by the ordinary power solenoid 209d decreases. Thereby, the power consumption can be reduced by minimizing the driving force of the ordinary power solenoid 209d during the holding period.

  In a predetermined period (2 ms) from when the input signal to the input port D1 is turned OFF to when the input signal to the input port D2 is turned ON, the period is sufficiently short. There is no change to the closed state. Further, the frequency of the input signal input to the clock input terminal CK is 10 kHz, and the input signal to the input port can be referred to at an interval of 0.1 ms and reflected on the output of the output port. After the input signal to D1 is turned off (that is, after the output of the output port Q1 is turned off), the output of the output port Q2 can be turned on after elapse of a predetermined period (2 ms).

  In this control example, the input signal to the input port D1 is turned OFF and then the input signal to the input port D2 is turned ON. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the input signal to the input port D1 may be turned off and the input signal to the input port D2 may be turned on at the same time, or the input signal to the input port D2 may be turned on and then to the input port D1. The input signal may be turned off. When the input signal to the input port D2 is turned OFF after the input signal to the input port D2 is turned ON, when the input signal to the input port D2 is turned ON, the FET 1-1 and the FET 1-2 are simultaneously turned on. It will be in the state driven. In this case, the voltage applied to the general-purpose solenoid 209d is lower than the voltage (5V) when only the FET 1-1 is driven, and the voltage (2.5V) when only the FET 1-2 is driven. Higher than. Therefore, when the FET 1-1 is driven and a high voltage is applied to the general electric solenoid 209d, the FET 1-2 is driven and the low voltage is applied to the general electric solenoid 209d. -1 and FET1-2 are driven at the same time, so that the voltage applied to the general-purpose solenoid 209d can be reduced smoothly. As a method of varying the voltage applied to the general electric solenoid 209d, a method of varying the applied voltage by causing the FET to perform a switching operation and varying the period of the switching operation, so-called PWM control may be employed. Naturally good.

  In this control example, a periodic clock signal is input to the clock input terminal CK, and the output signal of the output port is updated at the rising cycle of the clock signal. However, the present invention is not limited to this. . When the input signal to the input port is varied, the output signal of the output port may be updated by inputting a pulse signal to the clock input terminal CK. In this case, the input signal to the input port is changed, and then the input signal to the input port is monitored to check whether it is the designated input signal, and then the pulse signal is input to the clock input terminal CK. By doing so, the output signal of the output port becomes unintended, and it is possible to prevent (suppress) various solenoids from malfunctioning.

  When the holding period of 320 ms elapses, the input signal to the input port D2 is changed to OFF (0 V), and the drive of the FET 1-2 is stopped, so that the general-purpose solenoid 209d is changed from the open state to the closed state. The operation of opening the electric accessory for a total of 0.4 seconds is completed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 230, the flow of the operation of the ordinary power (electric utility) in this control example will be described. FIG. 230 is a timing chart showing the flow of operations of the gaming state (short-time state and normal state) and the ordinary electric (electrical power) 640a.

  In this control example, as the opening operation of the ordinary electric (electrical accessory) 640a, the short opening that opens the ordinary electric (electrical accessory) 640a for 0.08 seconds in one operation, and the long opening that opens 0.4 seconds. Are provided so that a long opening is set when the gaming state is a short-time state, and a short opening is set when the gaming state is a normal state.

  In the long open state during the short time, the signal output to the general electric solenoid 209d is set based on the operation interval of the general electric (electrical utility) 640a. When the operation interval of 640a is equal to or longer than a predetermined period (for example, 300 milliseconds), a strong output signal for strongly operating the general-purpose solenoid 209d is output during the open period (400 milliseconds) (see point a in FIG. 230). When the operation interval of the ordinary electric (electrical accessory) 640a is shorter than a predetermined period (for example, 300 milliseconds) (see the points a and b in FIG. 230), the ordinary electric (electrical accessory) 640a A strong output signal is output during the period (80 milliseconds) during which the power is released (see suction point) (see point c and point d in FIG. 230). Keep state It is output during the lifting period (320 ms) (see point d and the point e of FIG. 230).

  By comprising in this way, when the ordinary electric power (electric utility) 640a operates frequently, the electric power holding an open state can be suppressed. In this control example, as the open state of the ordinary electric (electrical accessory) 640a, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (the game state in which the long release is executed, that is, whether or not the time is short), and the operation interval Is set so that the type of signal output to the general-purpose solenoid 209d is switched based on the determination result, but other configurations may be used. For example, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is generally When it is determined that the game state in which the electric (electrical accessory) 640a is frequently opened and closed is selected, the type of signal to be output may be switched, or the total of the electric power (electrical accessory) 640a per unit time The type of signal to be output may be switched based on the open period.

  Further, a thermistor capable of detecting the temperature of the general electric solenoid 209d may be provided, and the type of signal to be output may be switched when the temperature of the general electric solenoid 209d exceeds a predetermined temperature (for example, 60 degrees).

  Next, the contents of the RAM 203 in the main controller 110 in the fifteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 231 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifteenth control example. The RAM 203 in the fifteenth control example is different from the RAM 203 in the first control example in that a weak output standby timer 203da, a standby completion flag 203db, a weak output timer 203dc, a strong output timer 203dd, and a power transmission interval timer 203de are provided. It differs in that it has been added. Since other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The weak output standby timer 203da is a timer for counting a period until a weak output signal is output to the general electric solenoid 209d when the general electric (electrical accessory) 640a performs an opening operation. A value (for example, “40”) set in the timer is subtracted every 2 milliseconds, and when the timer value becomes “0”, a weak output signal is output to the general-purpose solenoid 209d. Has been. This weak output standby timer 203da is determined to be in a short time in the normal power operation setting process (see S654 in FIG. 235) (S711: Yes), and then the value of the normal power interval timer 203de is not “0”. Is determined (S712: No), the value of “40” is set, and the timer value becomes “0” each time the general power timer subtraction process (see S264 of FIG. 237) is executed. 1 is subtracted (S852 in FIG. 237).

  When it is determined that the value of the weak output standby timer 203da is “0” in the normal power timer subtraction process (S264 in FIG. 237) (S853: Yes), the standby completion flag 203db is set to ON. .

  The standby completion flag 203db indicates a state in which a weak output signal is output to the general electric solenoid 209d when the general electric (electrical accessory) 640a performs an opening operation, and the value of the weak output standby timer 203da Is set to ON when becomes “0”. The standby completion flag 203db is set to ON when the value of the weak output standby timer 203da is determined to be “0” in the normal power timer subtraction process (S264 in FIG. 237) (S853: Yes). S854), referred to when determining whether or not to output a weak output signal in the ordinary power switching process (S263 in FIG. 236) (S813), and the value of the weak output timer 203dc is determined to be “0”. In the case (S816: Yes), it is set to off (S820).

  The weak output timer 203dc is a timer that counts a period during which a weak output signal is output to the ordinary solenoid 209d, and a predetermined value (for example, “160”) is set at a timing at which the weak output signal is output, and a predetermined interval ( 1 is subtracted every 2 milliseconds). The weak output signal is output until the value of the weak output timer 203dc becomes “0”.

  The weak output timer 203 dc is set to a value of “160” when it is determined that the standby completion flag 203 db is set to ON in the normal power switching process (S 263 in FIG. 236) (S 813: Yes). (S814) Every time the ordinary power timer subtraction process (see S264 in FIG. 237) is executed (every 2 milliseconds), 1 is subtracted until the timer value becomes “0” (S856 in FIG. 237).

  The strong output timer 203dd is a timer that counts a period during which a strong output signal is output to the general-purpose solenoid 209d, and a predetermined value (for example, “40”) is set at a timing at which the strong output signal is output. 1 is subtracted every 2 milliseconds). The strong output signal is output until the value of the strong output timer 203dd becomes “0”.

  The strong output timer 203dd is set to a value of “200” when the value of the power transmission interval timer 203de is determined to be “0” in the normal power operation setting process (S654 in FIG. 235) (S712: Yes). When it is determined that the value of the power transmission interval timer 203de is not “0” (i.e., “1” or more) (S712: No), a value of “40” is set (S714). .

  Each time the ordinary power timer subtraction process (S264 in FIG. 237) is executed (every 2 milliseconds), 1 is subtracted until the timer value becomes “0” (S858 in FIG. 237). If it is determined in S263 of FIG. 236 that the value of the strong output timer 203dd is “0” (S811: Yes), the output of the strong output solenoid signal is stopped (set to OFF) (S812). ).

  The general electric interval timer 203de is a timer for counting the interval at which the opening operation of the electric power (electric utility) 640a is executed, and the electric power solenoid for the opening operation of the electric power (electric accessory) 640a. This is referred to when setting the type of output signal (strong output signal or weak output signal) to 209d and the output period.

  The normal power interval timer 203de is set to a value of “200” (S819) after the normal symbol is set to the standby state (S818) in the normal power open / close processing (S263 of FIG. 236), and the general power timer subtraction processing Every time (S264 in FIG. 237) is executed (every 2 milliseconds), 1 is subtracted until the timer value becomes “0” (S860 in FIG. 237).

  Then, in the ordinary power operation setting process (S654 in FIG. 235), it is referred to when determining the type and output period of the output signal output to the ordinary power solenoid 209d (S712).

<Regarding Control Processing in Fifteenth Control Example>
Next, control processing in the fifteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 232 to 236. In the control process in the fifteenth control example, the contents of the main control device are changed with respect to the first control example. Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The fifteenth control example differs from the first control example in that a normal symbol control process (see S155 in FIG. 232) is executed instead of the normal symbol variation process (see S106 in FIG. 63) in the timer interrupt process. To do. Since the other points are the same, the same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, a timer interrupt process executed by the main controller 110MPU201 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 232 is a flowchart showing the contents of the timer interrupt process in the fifteenth control example. In addition, about the same part as the timer interruption process (refer FIG. 63) in a 1st control example, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the description is abbreviate | omitted and only a different part is demonstrated.

  When the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 232) is executed, the processes of S101 to S105 are executed in the same manner as the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63) of the first control example described above, and then the normal symbol control process ( S155) is executed. The normal symbol control process (S155) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

  When the normal symbol control process (S155) is completed, the processes of S107 to S109 are executed in the same manner as the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63) of the first control example described above, and this process is terminated.

  Next, the normal symbol control process (S155) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 233 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal symbol control process (S155). In the normal symbol control process (S155), the normal symbol variation process 2 (S262) for executing the variation of the normal symbol (second symbol) and the lottery result of the normal symbol (second symbol) are released. A normal power switching process (S263) for performing a switching process for the electric utility (general power) 640a, and various timers (a weak output waiting timer 203da, a weak output timer 203dc, a strong output) set when the general power switching process is executed. A normal power timer subtraction process (S264) for subtracting the timer 203dd) is executed.

  When the normal symbol control process (S155) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the current symbol is being hit (S261). If it is determined that it is not hit in the process of S261 (is changing or waiting) (S261: No), then the normal symbol change process 2 (S262) is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the process is in the process of S261 (S261: Yes), then a normal power open / close process (S263) is executed, and then a general power timer subtraction process (S264) is executed. The process ends.

  Here, the normal symbol variation process 2 (S262) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 234 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal symbol variation process 2 (S262). This normal symbol variation process 2 (S262) differs from the normal symbol variation process (see S106 in FIG. 68) of the first control example described above in that the variation time of the normal symbol is changed, ) It is different in that a normal operation setting process (S625) for setting the operation content of 640a is provided. Note that the same parts as those in the normal symbol variation process (see S106 in FIG. 68) of the first control example described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof is omitted, and only different parts are described.

  When the normal symbol variation process 2 (S262 in FIG. 234) is executed, the processing from S602 to S611 is executed in the same manner as the normal symbol variation process (see S106 in FIG. 68) of the first control example described above. If it is determined that the time is short in the process of S608 (S608: Yes), after executing the process of S610, the variation time of the normal symbol is set to 0.1 second (S652), and the process proceeds to S612. The process proceeds to steps S612, S613, and S618 in the same manner as the normal symbol variation process (see S106 in FIG. 68) in the first control example described above, and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the time is not short in the process of S608 (S608: No), after executing the process of S611, the variation time of the normal symbol is set to 0.5 seconds (S653). Transition to processing.

  Further, in the process of S602, when it is determined that the normal symbol is changing (S602: Yes), S622 to S624 are performed similarly to the normal symbol change process (see S106 of FIG. 68) of the first control example described above. This process is terminated after executing the ordinary power operation setting process (S654).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 235, the ordinary power operation setting process (S654) will be described. FIG. 235 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ordinary power operation setting process (S654). In this normal power operation setting process (S654), a process of setting an output solenoid signal to be output to the general power solenoid 209d based on the gaming state (whether or not time is short) and the normal power operation interval is executed.

  When the power transmission operation setting process (S654) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current time is short (S711). If it is determined that the time is short (S711: Yes), then, It is determined whether the value of the electric interval timer 203de is “0” (S712), and when it is determined that the value of the general interval timer 203de is not “0” (is equal to or greater than “1”) (S712: No), “40” is set to the value of the weak output standby timer 203da (S713), and the process proceeds to S714. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S711 that the time is not short (S711: No), the process directly proceeds to step S714.

  In the process of S714, “40” is set to the value of the strong output timer 203dd (S714), then a strong output solenoid signal is output (set to ON) (S715), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S712, when it is determined that the value of the normal power interval timer 203de is “0” (S712: Yes), the value of the strong output timer 203dd is set to “200” (S716), and S715. Move on to processing.

  Next, referring to FIG. 236, the ordinary power switching process (S263) will be described. FIG. 236 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ordinary power switching process (S263). When the ordinary power switching process (S263) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the strong output timer 203dd is “0” (S811), and it is determined that the value of the strong output timer 203dd is “0”. If it is detected (S811: Yes), the output of the strong output solenoid signal is stopped (set to OFF) (S812), and the process proceeds to S813. On the other hand, in the process of S811, when it is determined that the value of the strong output timer 203dd is not “0” (“1” or more) (S811: No), the process of S812 is skipped and the process proceeds to S813. .

  In the process of S813, it is determined whether or not the standby completion flag 203db is set to ON (S813). If it is determined that the standby completion flag 203db is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S813: No), it remains as it is. This process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S813 that the standby completion flag 203db is set to ON (S813: Yes), then the value of the weak output timer 203dc is set to “160” (S814). The weak output solenoid is output (set to ON) (S815).

  When the processing of S815 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the value of the weak output timer 203dc is “0” (S816), and when it is determined that the value of the weak output timer 203dc is “0” (S816). Next, the output of the weak output solenoid signal is stopped (set to OFF) (S817), the normal symbol is set to the standby state (S818), and the value of the power transmission interval timer 203de is set to “200”. It is set (S819), the standby completion flag 203db is set to OFF (S820), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S816, when it is determined that the value of the weak output timer 203dc is not “0” (S816: No), the process of S814 to S816 is skipped, and this process ends.

  FIG. 237 is a flowchart showing the contents of the general power timer subtraction process (S264) executed in the normal symbol control process (S155 in FIG. 233). In the ordinary power timer subtraction process (S264), various timer subtraction processes set when executing the normal symbol control process are executed.

  When the general electric timer subtraction process (S264) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the weak output standby timer 203da is larger than “0” (S851). In the process of S851, when it is determined that the value of the weak output standby timer 203da is larger than “0” (“1” or more) (S851: Yes), the value of the weak output standby timer 203da is decremented by 1 (S852). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the subtracted weak output standby timer 203da is “0” (S853). In the process of S853, when it is determined that the value of the weak output standby timer 203da is “0” (S853: Yes), the standby completion flag 203db is set to ON (S854), and the process proceeds to S855. On the other hand, in the process of S853, when it is determined that the value of the weak output standby timer 203da is not “0” (“1” or more) (S853: No), the process of S854 is skipped and the process proceeds to S855. Transition. Also, in the process of S851, if it is determined that the value of the weak output standby timer 203da is not greater than “0” (is “0”), the process proceeds to S855 as it is.

  In the process of S855, it is determined whether or not the value of the weak output timer 203dc is larger than “0” (S855). In the process of S855, if it is determined that the value of the weak output timer 203dc is larger than “0” (“1” or more) (S855: Yes), then the value of the weak output timer 203dc is decremented by 1 ( S856), the process proceeds to S857. On the other hand, if it is determined in S855 that the value of the weak output timer 203dc is not larger than “0” (“0”) (S855: No), the process of S856 is skipped and the process of S857 is performed. Migrate to

  In the process of S857, it is determined whether or not the value of the strong output timer 203dd is larger than “0” (S857). In the process of S857, if it is determined that the value of the strong output timer 203dd is larger than “0” (“1” or more) (S857: Yes), then the value of the strong output timer 203dd is subtracted by 1 (S858). ), The process proceeds to S859. On the other hand, in the process of S857, when it is determined that the value of the strong output timer 203dd is not greater than “0” (“0”) (S857: No), the process of S858 is skipped and the process of S859 is performed. Transition to processing.

  In the process of S859, it is determined whether or not the value of the common power interval timer 203de is larger than “0” (S859). In the process of S859, when it is determined that the value of the power transmission interval timer 203de is larger than “0” (“1” or more) (S859: Yes), the value of the power transmission interval timer 203de is then decremented by 1. (S860), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the power transmission interval timer 203de is not greater than “0” (“0”) in the process of S859 (S859: No), the process of S860 is skipped, The process ends.

  As described above, according to the fifteenth control example, it is configured to be able to supply electric power according to the state (suction state, holding state) to the solenoid for driving various electric accessories. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the electric power used when holding the solenoid. Furthermore, it is possible to suppress the solenoid from generating excessive heat by suppressing the electric power used excessively.

  Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example is configured such that a control signal corresponding to the gaming state is output to each solenoid, and therefore, for example, the utility power (electric utility) 640a is frequently opened. The type of the output signal to the solenoid can be varied between a gaming state (for example, a short time state) and a gaming state (normal state) in which the opening of the electric power (electric utility) 640a is not frequent.

  In the present control example, when the ordinary power (electric utility) 640a operates frequently, the power for maintaining the open state can be suppressed. In this control example, as the open state of the ordinary electric (electrical accessory) 640a, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (the game state in which the long release is executed, that is, whether or not the time is short), and the operation interval Is set so that the type of signal output to the general-purpose solenoid 209d is switched based on the determination result, but other configurations may be used. For example, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is generally When it is determined that the game state in which the electric (electrical accessory) 640a is frequently opened and closed is selected, the type of signal to be output may be switched, or the total of the electric power (electrical accessory) 640a per unit time The type of signal to be output may be switched based on the open period.

  With this configuration, various solenoids (general power solenoid 209d, open solenoid 65f2, flow path solenoid 65k) may output in advance before excessive heat is generated in a state where excessive heat may be generated. The type of signal can be switched.

  In this control example, a push-type solenoid is used in which the movable iron core protrudes when power is supplied and excitation current flows. However, other configurations may be used, for example, power is supplied and excitation current flows. Thus, a pull-type solenoid in which the movable iron core is buried may be used.

  In the fifteenth control example described above, a circuit capable of outputting a strong output signal for strongly operating the solenoid and a weak output signal for weakly operating the solenoid is used as the solenoid drive circuit 1200 (see FIG. 228). For example, the configuration shown in FIG. 238 (a) may be used.

  Next, another example of the solenoid drive circuit 1200 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 238 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a second solenoid drive circuit which is another example of the solenoid drive circuit 1200 of the fifteenth control example described above. Note that the description of the same elements as those of the solenoid drive circuit 1200 described above is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 238 (a), the second solenoid drive circuit is configured to vary the supply voltage during energization in order to vary the power of the general-purpose solenoid 209d, and the switch (SW) 1 and In a state in which the switch (SW) 2 is turned on (closed), the power transmission solenoid 209d operates (strongly operates) at a voltage of 30 V, the switch (SW) 1 is turned on (closed), and the switch (SW) 2 Is turned off (opened), the normal-use solenoid 209d operates at a voltage of 20 V (weak operation 1), the switch (SW) 1 turns off (opens), and the switch (SW) 2 turns on (closes) ), The normal power solenoid 209d is operated (weak operation 2) at a voltage of 10V.

  In addition, each switch (SW1, SW2) provided in the second solenoid drive circuit described above is configured to be switched on and off based on a signal output from the main controller 110, and the contents thereof are described above. Since it is the same as the solenoid drive circuit 1200, detailed description is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 238 (b), an operation mode of the general-purpose solenoid 209d when the above-described second solenoid drive circuit is used will be described. FIG. 238 (b) is a timing chart showing the relationship between the second solenoid drive circuit and the general-purpose solenoid 209d.

  As shown in FIG. 238 (b), when both the switch (SW) 1 and the switch (SW) 2 are on, the ordinary solenoid 209d performs a strong operation, and when the switch (SW) 1 is on, the switch (SW) When 2 is off, the ordinary solenoid 209d performs weak operation 1 (L1). When the switch (SW) 1 is off and the switch (SW) 2 is on, the ordinary solenoid 209d is weakly operated 2 (L2). When the switch (SW) 1 and the switch (SW) 2 are both off, the ordinary solenoid 209d does not execute the operation.

  By configuring the solenoid drive circuit as in this modification, for example, when opening the ordinary electric (electrical accessory) 640a, both the switch (SW) 1 and the switch (SW) 2 are turned on, and the ordinary electric solenoid In the case where 209d is executed with a strong action and the open state of the ordinary power (electrical accessory) 640a is maintained, the weak action 1 and the weak action 2 can be used separately.

  As a method of selectively using weak action 1 and weak action 2, in a state where a ball is likely to enter the second winning opening 640 (for example, in a short time state), the electric power is applied by the impact of the ball entering the second winning opening 640. Since there is a possibility that a force against the holding force of the solenoid 209d may be generated, the weak operation 1 is set. On the other hand, in a state where it is difficult for the ball to enter the second winning port 640 (for example, a non-short-time state), the weak operation is performed. 2 may be set. As a result, power consumption can be reduced, and excessive heat can be prevented from being generated by the ordinary electric solenoid 209d.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 239, the operation of the general-purpose solenoid 209d using a second solenoid drive circuit which is a modification of the solenoid drive circuit 1200 will be described. FIG. 239 is a timing chart showing the operation flow of the general-purpose solenoid 209d when the second solenoid drive circuit is used. The detailed description of the same elements as those in the operation flow (see FIG. 230) of the ordinary solenoid 209d in the fifteenth control example is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 239, in the opening operation (long opening) of the general-purpose solenoid 209d when the game state is short-time (short-time operation), a strong output signal (switch ( SW) 1), weak output signal (switch (SW) 2) is both turned on (80 ms) (see point c and point d in FIG. 239), and the open state of the utility (electrical power) 640a is maintained. Furthermore, when only the strong output signal (switch (SW) 1) is turned on, and when only the weak output signal (switch (SW) 2) is turned on (see point d and point e in FIG. 239). Are executed alternately. Thereby, it can suppress that the circuit which conduct | electrically_connects in order to operate the general electric solenoid 209d will be biased.

  In addition, as a method of using the weak action 1 and the weak action 2 properly, in a state where a ball easily enters the second winning opening 640 (for example, in a short time state), the impact of the ball entering the second winning opening 640 Since there is a possibility that a force against the holding force of the general electric solenoid 209d may be generated, the weak operation 1 is set, while in a state where it is difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640 (for example, a non-short-time state) You may comprise so that the weak operation | movement 2 may be set. As a result, power consumption can be reduced, and excessive heat can be prevented from being generated by the ordinary electric solenoid 209d.

  As described above, in this control example, the same standard is used for a plurality of solenoids. However, the specifications of the solenoids may be appropriately determined according to the operating environment of each solenoid.

  Further, in this control example, the configuration has been described using the solenoid drive circuit of the ordinary electric solenoid 209d, but the drive circuits of other solenoids (open solenoid 65f2, flow path solenoid 65k) also have the same configuration. It is.

<Regarding a modification of the accessory driving effect>
In the above-mentioned tenth control example to the fourteenth control example, each accessory used in the accessory driving effect (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) is an operation to the operating means (the frame button 22 or the like). Based on the above, the driving means (solenoid or the like) is driven to perform the accessory operation. On the other hand, the present modification is different in that a driven accessory 725, 726 is provided which is movable in accordance with the operation of each of the above-mentioned accessories (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460). About another structure, it is the same as the structure used for the accessory drive effect performed in the 10th control example to the 14th control example mentioned above. Therefore, the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As in the present modified example, by providing the driven actors 725 and 726, the movement of each accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) that is executed when the driving means (motor or the like) is driven follows. Thus, it is possible to move the accessory (the driven accessory 725, 726), so that it is possible to execute the accessory operation with a high production effect, and each accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) Since it becomes possible to operate the accessory (the driven accessory 725, 726) at a timing different from the timing at which it operates, it is possible for the player operating the operating means (the frame button 22) a plurality of times. Based on the operation of (the frame button 22), it can be made to think that the accessory (the driven accessory 725,726) act | operated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 240, the structure and operation | movement flow of the driven thing 725,726 used for this modification are demonstrated. 240 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the driven actors 725 and 726, and FIGS. 240 (b) and (c) show the movement of the driven actors 725 and 726 following the operation of the accessory A720. It is a schematic diagram.

  As shown in FIG. 240 (a), the follower role 725, 726 is provided with a follower role 725 of the left slide member 720a of the accessory A720, and a follower role 725 is provided with the right slide member 720b. . Here, the configuration of the driven object 725 will be described.

  The driven member 725 is pivotally fixed to the left slide member 720a by a shaft support portion 725a provided at the upper end portion thereof, and when the left slide member 720a stops operating (see FIG. 240 (b)), the inertia is obtained. It is configured to be rotatable around a shaft support portion 725a by force.

  Further, when the driven member 725 provided on the left slide member 720a and the driven member 726 provided on the right slide member 720b rotate together, the leading end portion 725b of each driven member comes into contact. The tip 725b of the driven member 725 is provided with a magnet as a holding means for holding the state where each driven member (driven member 725, driven member 726) is in contact. Yes. The holding means is not limited to a magnet as long as it can hold the state in which each driven accessory (driven accessory 725, driven accessory 726) is in contact. For example, the tip portion 725b may be made of an adhesive material or a material having a high friction coefficient.

  Further, the left slide member 720a is provided with a regulating member 725c for regulating the rotational movement of the driven accessory 725. The restricting member 725c is variable by a driving means (solenoid or the like) not shown into a protruding position for restricting the rotation of the driven member 725 and an embedded position (allowable position) for allowing the rotation of the driven member 725. It is composed of possible pins, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when a special symbol wins a big win), the driven accessory 725 is configured to be changed to an allowable position where the driven accessory 725 can be rotated. Yes.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 240 (b) and (c), the flow of operation of the driven objects 725 and 726 will be described. As shown in FIG. 240 (b), when the operation of the accessory A is stopped (or suddenly decelerated), the driven accessories 725 and 726 rotate around the shaft support portions 725a and 726a by the inertial force. And when each front-end | tip part 725b and 726b contact | abut, the substantially V-shaped shape (form combination form) is comprised in the position which covers the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. In addition, this combination form is hold | maintained by the holding means (magnet etc.) provided in each front-end | tip part 725b, 726b. Further, the restriction member 725c is configured to be changed to an allowable position when the operation of the accessory A is executed. However, while the accessory A is executing the forward operation, the operation of the accessory A is performed. The propulsive force generated by the rotation restricts the turning operation, and the accessory A is turned when it stops (or suddenly decelerates).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 240 (c), by performing the operation in the direction in which the accessory A is separated (by executing the reverse operation), the tip portions 725b and 726b of the driven agents 725 and 726 are separated. The driven objects 725 and 726 return to the standby position (position shown in FIG. 240 (a)) by their own weight. In addition, since the restricting member 725c is configured to be changed to the restricting position at the timing when the driven actors 725 and 726 return to the standby position, the reaction of the operation in which the driven actors 725 and 726 return to the standby position Again, it is suppressed from jumping out from the accessory A720.

  The configuration of this modified example described above may be combined with the configuration of each control example described above. For example, the player can use the operation means (frame button 22) in combination with the repetitive operation in the above twelfth control example. In operation, when the accessory A720 starts a repetitive motion, the restricting members 725c and 726c may be changed to the allowable position. As a result, the driven accessory does not rotate in the normal accessory operation, and the driven accessory can be rotated only when the repetitive operation is executed. Therefore, based on the operation of the operation means (frame button 22) by the player, it becomes possible to provide a new accessory action, and the player is eager to operate the operation means (frame button 22). There is an effect that can be.

  In addition, in combination with the configuration of the 14th control example described above, the driven actors 725 and 726 are provided only when the accessory action (strong action) that increases the operation speed of the driving means (motor or the like) is stopped (or suddenly decelerated). You may comprise so that it may rotate.

  Further, in this modification, the rotation of the driven roles 725 and 726 is restricted by changing the restricting member 725b. However, as another configuration, for example, the driven roles 725 and 726 are positioned at the standby position. As a member for holding this, a holding member (magnet) or the like may be provided for each of the left slide member 720a and the right slide member 720b. In this case, it can hold | maintain that the driven member 725,726 is located in a standby position with the holding means (magnet etc.) provided in each front-end | tip part 725b, 726b of the driven member 725,726. Therefore, it becomes possible to use the holding means provided at the tip of the driven accessory 725, 726 both when holding the standby position and when holding the completed accessory form, thereby reducing the number of parts. Is possible.

  Furthermore, it is good to provide the driven part 725,726 on the back side (part where a player is difficult to visually recognize) of the part A720. As a result, the driven actors 725 and 726 in the standby position can be covered with the accessory A720, so that even if the driven actors 725 and 726 swing around the standby position, the player is prevented from being noticed. It can suppress and it can suppress that a production effect falls. In addition, what is necessary is just to provide the structure which makes it difficult for a player to visually recognize the driven thing 725,726 located in a stand-by position, and you may use structures other than the accessory A720.

  Moreover, when using the structure which variably controls the regulating member as in this control example, both the driven members 725 and 726 can be rotated, or either one can be rotated. Therefore, the production effect can be enhanced. For example, when a special symbol is won, the driven actors 725 and 726 are both rotatable (both the regulating members 725c and 726c are changed to allowable positions), and a completed accessory form is configured. If the special symbol is not won by the jackpot (if the winning symbol is not notified), only one of the followers can be rotated and the effect of scolding the player is executed. Can be.

  As described above, in the modified example described above, the actors 725 and 726 are provided as the accessory A720, but other actors (the actor B740 and the actor C460) may be provided as the assistant. In this control example, the left slide member 720a and the right slide member 720b are operated at the same timing, but may be operated at different timings. Thus, by complicating the operation of the accessory driven by the driving means (motor or the like), the operation of the driven accessory can be made more complex, and the effect of rendering can be enhanced.

  Moreover, in this modification, although the structure using an inertia force and gravity was demonstrated as a follower which performs the operation | movement which does not use a drive means, other structures may be used, for example, restoration of an elastic member You may comprise a driven object using force.

  You may combine all or one part of each above-mentioned embodiment and each control example, respectively.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<An example of the technical idea of a moving member that is moved only by an urging force>
An urging device that generates an elastic urging force in one direction, and the display region of the liquid crystal display device from a retreat position that is located outside the display region of the liquid crystal display device by the urging force generated by the urging device A movable member formed to be movable to a predetermined position located on the front side of the head, a position restricting device formed to be able to restrict movement of the moving member at the retracted position, and release for releasing the restriction by the position restricting device A gaming machine A1 comprising the apparatus.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a moving member formed to be movable between a first position and a second position, and a driving motor that generates a driving force for moving the moving member, There is a gaming machine provided (see, for example, JP 2011-120640 A). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the moving member is moved by motor driving, it is easy to gradually accelerate the moving member to increase the speed, but it is not possible to move the moving member at high speed from the start. There was a problem that it was difficult.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the movement member formed to be movable from the retracted position to the predetermined position by the biasing force in one direction is restricted (stopped) by the position restricting device at the retracted position. ). And when the restriction | limiting by a position control apparatus is cancelled | released by a cancellation | release apparatus, a movement member will be started to move by the urging | biasing force accumulate | stored by arrange | positioning in a retracted position.

  Therefore, the force applied to the moving member can be formed at the target value from the start of starting the movement of the moving member from the retracted position, and the moving member can be started at a high speed.

  Examples of the urging device include a device that uses the repulsive force of a magnet, a device that uses spring elasticity, etc., and examples of the releasing device include a driving device that applies a driving force that mechanically moves the position regulating device, Examples thereof include a device for canceling electromagnetic adsorption of the position regulating device.

  The gaming machine A1 includes a driving device having a function of generating a driving force for moving at least the moving member from the predetermined position toward the retracted position, and the releasing device is configured by the driving device. A gaming machine A2.

  Here, when the moving member is moved by the urging force in one direction, a device for generating a driving force for returning the moving member against the urging force is necessary in order to repeatedly perform an effect. Therefore, a space for arranging a device for generating a driving force is required. However, since the space for disposing the moving member and the driving device is limited inside the gaming machine, there is a possibility that the space for disposing the moving member cannot be sufficiently secured by adding the driving device.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A1, since the release device is constituted by the drive device, the drive device is released from the restriction of the moving member and the retracted position from the predetermined position of the moving member. Can also be used to return to Therefore, the arrangement space of the release device and the drive device can be suppressed as compared with the case where the drive device is prepared separately.

  In addition, after the moving member has moved from the retracted position to the predetermined position, the moving member can be moved to the retracted position by the driving force of the driving device, so that the effect by the moving member can be repeatedly performed.

  Examples of the driving device include a motor and an air cylinder.

  In the gaming machine A2, the moving member is rotatably supported on the base end side, and the position restricting device is protruded from the first rotating body rotated about the first axis, and the first rotating body. And a pin member positioned eccentrically with respect to the first shaft, the pin member being connected to the moving member on the base end side of the moving member, and the moving member being disposed at the retracted position. A direction connecting the first shaft and the pin member is orthogonal to a direction connecting the rotation shaft formed on the base end side of the moving member and the pin member. .

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, when the pin member of the position regulating device is connected to the moving member and the moving member is disposed at the retracted position, the first shaft and the pin member are connected. The direction is formed in such a manner that the direction is orthogonal to the direction connecting the rotation shaft and the pin member formed on the base end side of the moving member.

  Therefore, when the moving member is moved to the retracted position, the pin member can be automatically positioned at the dead point in the relationship between the first rotating body and the moving member, and the moving member is mechanically held at the retracted position. it can. Thereby, for example, a structure in which the moving member is detected at the retracted position and the position restricting device is operated to restrict the moving member becomes unnecessary.

  In addition, since the moving member is mechanically held by the positional relationship between the first shaft, the rotating shaft on the proximal end side of the moving member, and the pin member, the moving member is brought into the retracted position even if there is no driving force such as a driving motor. It is possible to secure a large force to regulate. Therefore, a large urging force accumulated in the urging device can be secured, and the effect of starting the moving member at a high speed can be made remarkable.

  In the gaming machine A3, the moving member includes a guide portion that guides the pin member, and at least one of the retracted position and the predetermined position, a straight line that connects the pin member and the first axis of the position regulating device. The position restricting device is engaged with the driving device and a driving force generated by the driving device is transmitted. The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that the pin member is formed to be movable along the guide portion by being rotated.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A3, when the moving member starts to rotate from the retracted position or the predetermined position, the moving direction of the pin member and the extension of the guide portion Since the directions coincide with each other, it is possible to suppress the resistance that the pin member receives from the guide portion when the rotation of the first rotating body is started.

  Therefore, in order to release the restriction of the position restricting device with respect to the moving member, it is necessary when shifting the positional relationship between the first shaft, the rotating shaft on the proximal end side of the moving member, and the pin member (rotating the position restricting device). The driving force of the driving device can be reduced.

  In any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, an engagement state in which the position restriction device and the drive device are engaged with each other and a non-engagement state in which the position restriction device and the drive device are disengaged are formed. The gaming machine A5 is characterized in that the disengaged state is formed at least when the moving member starts from the retracted position.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A4, when the moving member starts from the retracted position, the position regulating device and the driving device form a non-engaged state, so that the resistance applied to the position regulating device As a result, it is possible to reduce the resistance at the start of the moving member. In this case, the resistance applied to the position regulating device by forming the engagement state between the driving device and the position regulating device does not occur when the moving member starts from the retracted position. Therefore, even if a large drive device is selected to counter the urging force of the urging device, the high speed at the start of the moving member can be ensured, so the degree of freedom in designing the urging device can be improved. That is, it becomes possible to select an urging device having a larger urging force.

  In addition, as an aspect which forms a non-engagement state with a position control apparatus and a drive device, for example, a gear is engraved on the side surface of the first rotating body of the position control device, and the gear meshed with the gear is partially The second rotating body formed on the driving device is disposed in the driving device, and when the driving force of the driving device is transmitted by the gear engagement between the first rotating body and the second rotating body, A second rotating body in which a magnetic body is formed on a side surface of one rotating body and a magnetic body to be attracted to the magnetic body is partially formed is disposed in the driving device, and the first rotating body and the second rotating body. The case where a drive device is transmitted by suction is exemplified.

  More specifically, when the first rotating state and the second rotating body transmit the driving force by the meshing of the gears, at least one gear of the first rotating body or the second rotating body is partially formed. Thus, the position restricting device and the drive device form an engaged state in the region where the gear is engaged, and the position restricting device and the drive are operated in a region where the gear is disengaged (region where the gear is not formed). The device forms a disengaged state.

  In the gaming machines A1 to A5, the game machine includes an effect member that is pivotally supported by the moving member and arranged at a front side of the liquid crystal display device when the moving member is disposed at least at a predetermined position. The member extends from the base end side to the swing end side which is an end portion on the opposite side of the base end side, and is formed in a mode in which the extending direction is a longitudinal direction, and the base end side is the liquid crystal The display member is pivotally supported outside the display area of the display device, and the effect member has a length in the first direction longer than a length in the second direction orthogonal to the first direction. In the retracted position, the first direction is set along the longitudinal direction of the moving member, and at the predetermined position, the first direction is a tangential direction of the rotation locus of the moving member. And one of the first directions Gaming machine A6 but characterized by taking the posture that projects on the opposite side of the retracted position.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, when the production member is arranged at the retracted position, the production member changes its first direction to the longitudinal direction of the moving member. It is assumed that the attitude is in line. Therefore, even when it is difficult to form a space in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the moving member outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device at the retracted position, the effect member is arranged outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device. It can be easy to install.

  Further, when the effect member is arranged at a predetermined position, the posture is changed so that the first direction is directed to the tangential direction of the rotation direction of the moving member, and one end of the effect member in the first direction is the effect end. Since the projection extends to the opposite side of the retracted position, the display area of the liquid crystal display device can be effectively used to produce an effect.

  An example of a case where it is difficult to form a sufficient space in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the moving member outside the liquid crystal display device is, for example, a case where a retracted position is arranged below the display area of the liquid crystal display device. Is done.

  The gaming machine A6 includes a first guide portion formed on a plane perpendicular to the swing shaft formed on the base end side of the moving member, and the effect member is guided by the first guide portion. A gaming machine A7 comprising a first projecting portion, wherein the change in the posture of the effect member is caused by the first projecting portion being guided by the first guiding portion.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A6, the change in the orientation of the effect member occurs when the projecting portion of the effect member is guided by the first guide portion. The degree of freedom can be improved.

  That is, for example, in the case where the change in the posture of the effect member is a change in which the effect member is tilted as the moving member is moved up, whether the effect member is gradually tilted in the process of moving the moving member up Depending on the design of the first guide part, it can be arbitrarily selected whether the effect member is suddenly tilted when the moving member is arranged at the ascending movement end.

  The first guide part is exemplified by a slot formed so as to penetrate and having a longitudinal direction, a groove formed as a recess having a longitudinal direction, and the like. As an aspect, the aspect in which the first protrusion is slid on the first guide part, the aspect in which the rotating body is disposed on the first protrusion, and the rotor is rolled on the first guide part, etc. Illustrated.

  In the gaming machine A7, the first guide portion is centered on a posture changing portion formed along a straight line extending radially from the swing shaft of the moving member and the swing shaft of the moving member. And a concentric circular portion extending along the circle, wherein the concentric circular portion is formed on the predetermined position side, and the posture changing portion is formed on the retracted position side. Game machine A8.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A7, by shortening the period during which the effect member changes its attitude with respect to the moving member, the moving member and the effect member can be changed without changing the attitude with respect to the moving member. It is possible to lengthen the period of movement as a unit.

  That is, since the posture changing portion is formed along a straight line extending radially from the rotation axis of the moving member, when the end of the effect member is guided through the posture changing portion, the end of the effect member and the end of the effect The distance from the circle formed by the movement locus of the shaft portion is greatly changed, and the change in the posture of the effect member can be increased with respect to the rotation angle of the moving member.

  On the other hand, since the concentric circle portion extends along a circle centering on the rotation axis of the moving member, when the first projecting portion of the effect member is guided through the concentric circle portion, the first projecting portion of the effect member and the effect The effect member is moved in a state where the relative positional relationship between the member and the shaft support position of the moving member is maintained. Therefore, a change in posture of the effect member with respect to the moving member can be suppressed.

  In this case, since the concentric circle part is formed on the predetermined position side, the player can visually recognize the effect member and the moving member as a unit over a long period of time during the rotational movement of the moving member.

  In the gaming machine A7, the first guide portion is centered on a posture changing portion formed along a straight line extending radially from the swing shaft of the moving member and the swing shaft of the moving member. And a concentric circle part extending along the circle, wherein the posture changing part is formed on the predetermined position side.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A7, by shortening the period during which the effect member changes its attitude with respect to the moving member, the moving member and the effect member can be changed without changing the attitude with respect to the moving member. It is possible to lengthen the period of movement as a unit.

  That is, since the posture changing portion is formed along a straight line extending radially from the rotation axis of the moving member, when the end of the effect member is guided through the posture changing portion, the end of the effect member and the end of the effect The distance from the circle formed by the movement locus of the shaft portion is greatly changed, and the change in the posture of the effect member can be increased with respect to the rotation angle of the moving member.

  On the other hand, since the concentric circle portion extends along a circle centering on the rotation axis of the moving member, when the first projecting portion of the effect member is guided to the first guide portion, the first projecting portion of the effect member and The effect member is moved in a state where the relative positional relationship between the effect member and the pivot support position of the moving member is maintained. Therefore, a change in posture of the effect member with respect to the moving member can be suppressed.

  In this case, since the posture changing portion is formed on the predetermined position side, the posture of the effect member can be quickly changed while the effect member is visually recognized by the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines A6 to A9, the game machine includes a second guide portion that is formed on a plane perpendicular to the swing axis of the moving member and extends along a rotation trajectory of the moving member. The member includes at least one second projecting portion guided by the second guide portion, and the second projecting portion is formed integrally with the moving member, and the moving member is disposed at the predetermined position. In this case, the second projecting portion is brought into contact with one end of the second guide portion.

  Since the moving member is moved by the urging force of the urging device, the motor cannot be stopped and the momentum of the moving member cannot be reduced as in the case of driving the motor, and the stopper is used to reduce the momentum of the moving member. A mechanism needs to be formed.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A6 to A9, when the moving member is arranged at a predetermined position, the second projecting portion contacts the end of the second guide portion. By being in contact, the movement of the moving member can be reliably stopped at a predetermined position.

  In addition, since the second protrusion is guided by the second guide that extends along the rotation trajectory of the moving member, the second guide and the second protrusion optimize the rotation of the moving member. The wobbling of the moving member in the swing axis direction can be suppressed.

  Here, the first projecting portion and the first guide portion of the effect member can be brought into contact with each other to serve as a stopper, but since the effect member is rotatably supported by the moving member, the shaft support portion There is a problem with strength. On the other hand, since the second projecting portion is integrally projected from the moving member, the strength problem is small and the reliability as a stopper can be improved.

  In addition, by forming a plurality of sets of the second projecting portion and the second guide portion, it is possible to disperse the force required when the moving member reaches a predetermined position. Thereby, durability of a 2nd protrusion part can be improved. Further, examples of the second guide portion include a slot formed so as to penetrate and have a longitudinal direction, a groove formed as a recess having a longitudinal direction, and the like. As an aspect, the aspect in which the second protrusion is slid on the second guide, the aspect in which the rotating body is disposed on the second protrusion, and the rotor is rolled on the second guide, etc. Illustrated.

  In the gaming machine A10, the second guide portion has a groove in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction at the one end portion than at the other end portion which is the end portion on the opposite side of the one end portion. A gaming machine A11 that is formed in a manner in which the width is reduced.

  According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A10, the second guide portion is formed in such a manner that the groove width is reduced at one end compared to the other end. That is, since a large gap is formed between the second protrusion and the second guide when the moving member is disposed at the retracted position, it is possible to suppress resistance when the moving member is started. Moreover, the clearance gap formed by the 2nd protrusion part and 2nd guide part when a moving member is arrange | positioned in a predetermined position can be made small, and the wobble of a 2nd protrusion part can be suppressed.

  Here, as a mode in which the groove width of the second guide portion is reduced, the groove width is gradually reduced from one end portion of the second guide portion to the other end portion, or the second guide portion. A case where the groove width is abruptly reduced at a part of (a degree of reduction of the groove width is formed by at least two kinds) is exemplified.

  In addition, when the second guide portion is formed by a through-hole, the second protrusion is inserted into the second guide portion, and the retaining member is fastened and fixed to the tip of the second protrusion, the second guide portion is perforated. Even if the thickness in the installation direction is formed in such a manner that one end is reduced as compared with the other end, the same effect can be obtained. In this case, in addition, when the moving member is disposed at the overhang position, it is possible to suppress the moving member from wobbling particularly in the drilling direction of the second guide portion.

  In the gaming machine A11, the swing of the moving member from the retracted position to the predetermined position is formed by ascending movement, and the second guide portion has a small-diameter side surface extending from the one end to the other end. The gap with the second protrusion is reduced over the vicinity of the part, and the gap with the second protrusion is increased at the other end compared to the gap, and the side surface on the large diameter side is The gap between the first protrusion and the second protrusion is reduced at the one end, and the second protrusion extends from the vicinity of the one end to the vicinity of the other end as compared with the gap. A gaming machine A12 characterized in that the gap is increased.

  According to the gaming machine A12, since the swing of the moving member from the retracted position to the predetermined position is formed by the upward movement, the moving member swings when the moving member is swinged from the retracted position to the predetermined position. When moving slightly in the direction perpendicular to the axis due to play with the shaft, the second projecting portion tends to abut on the small diameter side of the second guide portion. Here, the gap between the second guide portion and the second projecting portion is reduced in the initial stage of the process in which the moving member swings from the retracted position to the predetermined position. Thereby, the swing of the moving member from the retracted position to the predetermined position can be smoothed.

  Further, when swinging from the predetermined position to the retracted position, the second projecting portion is likely to abut on the large diameter side of the second guide portion. Here, the gap between the second guide portion and the second projecting portion is reduced only when the moving member is swung to a predetermined position. Thereby, the frictional resistance received from the second guide portion when the moving member swings from the predetermined position to the retracted position can be reduced. Therefore, the design freedom of the drive device can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines A6 to A12, the moving member has a gap between the main body portion extending from the base end side to the swing end side and a gap slightly larger than the thickness of the effect member. When the direction member is provided with a decorative portion that is spaced apart on the front side, and the orientation member changes in posture, at least one of the one end in the first direction or the other end opposite to the one end is the main body portion and the A gaming machine A13, which is stored between the decorative portion.

  According to the gaming machine A13, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A6 to A12, when the effect member changes the posture, at least one of both ends in the first direction of the effect member is the main body part and the decoration part. It is stored with a slight gap between and. Therefore, when the production member changes its posture, if the production member becomes largely movable in the swing axis direction with respect to the main body for some reason, the main body and the decoration serve as a guide that prevents the movement. The large movement of the effect member in the swing axis direction can be restricted.

  According to this, in the case where the effect member and the other accessory are arranged in a stacked relationship, it is possible to prevent the effect member from interfering with the other accessory.

  In the gaming machine A13, the movement trajectory of any part of the effect member and the movement trajectory of any part of the decoration member are within the display area of the liquid crystal display device, and the fluctuation of the effect member. A gaming machine A14 that overlaps when viewed in the direction of the dynamic axis.

  According to the gaming machine A14, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A13, the effect member can be reliably stored between the main body portion and the decoration portion inside the display area of the liquid crystal display device. Thereby, compared with the case where the production member is stored between the main body part and the decoration part for the first time outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device, as in the case of preventing the displacement in the front-rear direction with the fixed plate, A guide function for restricting the movement of the effect member in the swing axis direction from an earlier stage can be exhibited.

  Thereby, when a plurality of moving units are stacked, not only the interference between the moving members of the moving units outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device, but also the movement units inside the display area of the liquid crystal display device. Interference between moving members can be prevented.

<An example of a technical idea for suppressing wobbling of the moving member>
A moving member formed to be slidable between a retracted position and a predetermined position, a first driving device that generates a driving force for driving the moving member, an effect member disposed on the moving member, and the effect member And a second driving device that generates a driving force for driving the game machine, wherein the retracted position is a position spaced apart from the predetermined position by a predetermined distance in a lateral direction of the gaming machine and from the predetermined position. The effect member is a position spaced apart by a predetermined distance upward in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine, at least the predetermined position is a moving end of the moving member, and at least the moving member is disposed at the predetermined position. A gaming machine B1 that is driven.

  Here, a moving member formed so as to be slidable and an effect member which is arranged on the moving member and is driven independently of the moving member are slid in the horizontal direction. There is a gaming machine (see, for example, JP 2012-085811 A). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the moving member receives the force due to the reaction of the driving of the effect member, and the moving member is moved in the sliding direction. Therefore, in order to keep the moving member in a predetermined position, the effect member There is a problem that it is necessary to continue to apply a force resisting the force due to the reaction of the drive to the moving member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the predetermined position that is the moving end of the moving member is formed obliquely below the retracted position. Therefore, even if the effect member is driven by the driving force of the second driving device at the predetermined position and the moving member receives the reaction force, the force due to the weight of the moving member works toward the predetermined position, and the moving member is moved to the predetermined position. Therefore, even if the driving force applied to the moving member from the first driving device is unnecessary, the moving member can be maintained at a predetermined position.

  The longitudinal direction of the gaming machine means a direction along the vertical direction when the gaming machine is installed in the hall, and the lateral direction of the gaming machine means a direction substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine. To do.

  As a method for transmitting the driving force of the first driving device to the moving member, a rack gear is formed on the base end side of the moving member, and the pinion gear meshing with the rack gear is rotated by the driving force of the first driving device. Examples thereof include a method and a method of attaching a belt to the proximal end side of the moving member and winding the belt.

  In the gaming machine B1, an auxiliary member is provided that is spaced apart by a predetermined distance in a direction perpendicular to a plane in which the moving member slides, and the moving member is a liquid crystal display at least in the predetermined position. A projecting portion formed inward of a display area of the apparatus, and in a state where the moving member is disposed at least at the predetermined position, the projecting portion is perpendicular to a plane in which the moving member slides. A game machine B2 which is brought into contact with the auxiliary member when swinging to the right.

  Here, since the protruding portion of the moving member is formed to protrude inward of the display area of the liquid crystal display device when the moving member is disposed at a predetermined position, it prevents interference with other objects. Therefore, it is required to suppress the swing in the direction perpendicular to the sliding plane.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, the auxiliary member is arranged at a predetermined distance in the direction perpendicular to the plane on which the moving member slides, and the moving member is at the predetermined position. In the disposed state, when the overhanging portion swings in a direction perpendicular to the plane in which the moving member slides, the auxiliary member and the overhanging portion of the moving member are brought into contact with each other. Therefore, the wobbling of the overhanging portion can be suppressed, and the collision between the other accessory and the overhanging portion can be prevented.

  In the gaming machine B2, a gaming machine B3, wherein the overhang portion has a weaker base side rigidity than a tip side.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2, the rigidity on the base side is weakened compared to the leading end side of the overhanging portion, so that wobble generated at the leading end of the overhanging portion is The degree of transmission to the root side can be weakened.

  Here, examples of the method for weakening the rigidity include a case where the overhang portion is formed of a resin material partially different in rigidity by two-color molding, and a case where the thickness of the overhang portion is partially changed. .

  When the overhanging portion is formed with a thin thickness in a direction substantially perpendicular to the plane on which the moving member slides, the moving member can be prevented from wobbling in the sliding movement direction due to the bending deformation of the overhanging portion.

  In addition, when the base side of the overhanging portion is formed to be thinner than the tip end side, the wobble at the front end side of the overhanging portion is converted into a bending deformation with the base side of the overhanging portion as a fulcrum. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the horizontal movement of the moving member in the direction perpendicular to the plane in which the moving member slides on the base side of the overhanging portion.

  In the gaming machine B2 or B3, one end of the auxiliary member is pivotally supported by the moving member, and the other end which is the end opposite to the one end is a display area of the liquid crystal display device When the moving member is arranged at the retracted position, the auxiliary member is arranged outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2 or B3, one end of the auxiliary member is pivotally supported by the moving member, and the other end of the auxiliary member is outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device. When the moving member is disposed at the retracted position, the auxiliary member is disposed outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device. Therefore, when the moving member is disposed at the retracted position, the auxiliary member can be retracted from the inside of the display area of the liquid crystal display device.

  Thus, another moving member is disposed on the same layer as the moving member, and when the moving member is disposed at the retracted position, the other moving member protrudes inward of the liquid crystal display device. It is possible to produce a variety of effects in a limited space.

  In addition, as a mode in which the auxiliary member is pivotally supported by the base member, a mode in which the auxiliary member is pivotally supported by the rotating shaft, or a mode in which the protruding portion is inserted into the long hole and the protruding portion is guided in the long hole Is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine B4, the overhang portion extends along a direction from the shaft support portion of the one end portion of the auxiliary member toward the other end portion in a state where the moving member is disposed at the predetermined position. A gaming machine B5 comprising an extended contact portion.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B4, the overhanging portion of the moving member includes the abutting portion, and the abutting portion of the auxiliary member is in a state where the moving member is disposed at a predetermined position. It extends along the direction from the axial support part of one edge part to the other edge part. Therefore, in the state where the moving member is disposed at a predetermined position, an area where the moving member and the auxiliary member are in contact can be secured by the contact portion.

  In the gaming machine B5, the overhanging portion has a hand portion that is bent and extended from the extending tip of the contact portion, and the effect member is disposed at the tip of the hand portion, and the movement As the member slides to the retracted position, the overlapping position of the overhang portion and the auxiliary member moves to the tip side of the hand portion.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B5, the effect member is disposed at the hand portion of the overhanging portion, and the extension member and the auxiliary member are moved as the moving member slides to the retracted position. The overlapping position is moved to the tip side of the hand portion. For this reason, as the moving member is slid to the retracted position, it is possible to shorten the protruding amount (the protruding distance) of the protruding portion that extends to the effect member with the auxiliary member as a reference. Thereby, even if the leading end side of the overhanging portion is wobbled by driving the effect member, the overhanging portion can be brought into contact with the auxiliary member from the stage where the wobble is small. Thereby, when a moving member is arrange | positioned in a retracted position, the effect which suppresses wobbling in the direction perpendicular | vertical to the plane which a moving member slides can be made remarkable.

  In the gaming machines B4 to B6, the effect member is disposed below the moving member, and one end portion thereof is pivotally supported by the moving member so as to be pivoted from one end portion to the opposite side. When the moving member is arranged at the predetermined position as compared with the case where the moving member is arranged at the retracted position, the direction connecting the other end of the moving member is formed as a longitudinal direction. However, the gaming machine B7, wherein the longitudinal direction of the effect member is inclined in the horizontal direction.

  Since the moving member is moved obliquely downward as it goes to the predetermined position, in order to form the effect member on the front side of the display area of the liquid crystal display device even when the moving member is arranged at the predetermined position, the moving member is In the case of being arranged at the retracted position, it is necessary to arrange the lower end of the effect member at a position elevated from the lower end of the display area of the liquid crystal display device by a distance by which the moving member is moved downward from the retracted position toward the predetermined position. It was. For this reason, when the moving member is disposed at the retracted position, the lower portion of the effect member is wasted as a dead space.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B3 or B4, the effect member is disposed below the moving member and the moving member is disposed at the retracted position. When the moving member is arranged at the predetermined position, the angle formed between the longitudinal direction of the effect member and the horizontal direction is formed smaller. Therefore, when the moving member is arranged at the predetermined position, the effect member is Take a posture that falls down horizontally.

  Therefore, when the moving member is disposed at the retracted position, the moving member moves downward from the retracted position toward the predetermined position even if the effect member is disposed at the lower end of the display area of the liquid crystal display device. Can be absorbed by the posture change of the effect member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lower portion of the effect member when the moving member is disposed at the retracted position from being wasted as a dead space, and to form the effect member as a larger member that is longer in the longitudinal direction.

  The gaming machine B7 includes a connecting member that connects the other end of the effect member and the auxiliary member, and the auxiliary member moves compared to a case where the moving member is disposed at the retracted position. The gaming machine B8 is characterized in that when the member is disposed at the predetermined position, the gaming machine B8 is inclined in the horizontal direction.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B5, the auxiliary member is more horizontally oriented when the moving member is disposed at a predetermined position than when the moving member is disposed at the retracted position. Since the other end of the effect member is connected to the auxiliary member via the connecting member, the effect member is inclined in the horizontal direction as the auxiliary member is inclined in the horizontal direction. Can be made.

  In addition, since the effect member is connected not only to the moving member but also to the connecting member via an auxiliary member that is pivotally supported by the moving member, it is supported by a plurality of members. The effect of suppressing the wobbling of the effect member and the moving member can be remarkably distributed.

  In the gaming machine B8, the center of gravity of the effect member is formed on the other end side of the effect member.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B8, the center of gravity of the effect member is formed on the other end side of the effect member, so that the weight of the effect member acts on the connecting member effectively. Can be made. Therefore, when the moving member is arranged at a predetermined position, a force directed in a direction in which the auxiliary member is further tilted with respect to the auxiliary member is effectively applied, so that wobbling of the auxiliary member can be suppressed. As a result, wobbling of the moving member and the effect member connected to the auxiliary member can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine B8, the center of gravity position of the effect member is formed above the gaming machine longitudinal direction above the position where the effect member is pivotally supported by the moving member.

  According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B8, the center of gravity of the effect member is formed on the upper side in the vertical direction of the game machine at the position where the effect member is pivotally supported by the moving member. Can be evenly allocated in the horizontal direction with the pivotal support position between the moving member and the effect member as a boundary.

  Therefore, the wobbling of the effect member when the effect member is driven by the second drive device can be easily transmitted to the auxiliary member through the connecting member. As a result, the moving member and the effect member connected to the auxiliary member It can generate wobble. Thereby, when the effect member is driven, an effect of wobbling the moving member and the effect member can be performed.

<An example of a technical idea that reduces assembly man-hours>
A base member having a pair of wall portions that are formed to project in the same direction, a lid member that is in contact with an overhanging end of at least one of the pair of wall portions, and both ends of the pair of wall portions. A plurality of reflecting members pivotally supported by the portion, and a light source that emits light toward at least one of the plurality of reflecting members, and at least one of the pair of wall portions The wall portion is formed with a plurality of shaft support grooves on the end surface of the projecting end, and the reflecting member is supported by being projected from the body portion and fitted into the shaft support groove. At least one rotation shaft portion, and the rotation shaft portion fitted into the shaft support groove is fitted from the open ends of the plurality of shaft support grooves, and the open ends of the shaft support grooves are attached to the lid member. A gaming machine C1 that is pivotally supported by being closed.

  Here, there is a gaming machine that includes a movable body that is pivotally supported at both ends and is formed so that its posture can be changed in order to change the traveling direction of light emitted from the LED light source (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2008-272332). reference). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when a plurality of LED light sources are provided, a plurality of movable bodies are required, and the work of inserting the movable body through the hole to support the movable body, Thus, it is necessary to perform the work of attaching the parts for fixing the movable body so that it cannot be pulled out from the hole, so that the number of assembly steps increases.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, a plurality of shaft support grooves are formed in the wall portion of the base member, the rotation shaft portion of the reflecting member is fitted into the shaft support groove, and the open end of the shaft support groove is the lid member. The plurality of reflecting members can be pivotally supported so as to be closed. By rotating these reflecting members, the direction of light emitted from the light source toward the reflecting members can be changed.

  This eliminates the need to insert the reflective member into the hole for pivotal support, and then attach parts (screws, retaining stoppers, etc.) for fixing the reflective member so that it cannot be pulled out of the hole. It is possible to prevent the assembly man-hours from increasing in proportion to the number of.

  In the case where the shaft support groove is formed only in one of the pair of wall portions, for example, a hole is formed in the other side opposite to the one, and the shaft portion of the reflecting member is inserted obliquely into the hole. After that, when the reflecting member is tilted, the shaft portion formed on the other opposite one is fitted into the shaft support groove, or the shaft pin is projected on the other opposite one, and the shaft Examples include a case in which after the reflective member is fitted on the pin, the reflective member is tilted so that the shaft portion formed on the other side of the opposite side is fitted into the shaft support groove.

  In the gaming machine C1, the gaming machine C2 is characterized in that the lid member is fastened to a side surface of the wall portion.

  Here, when it is desired that the wall portion of the base member is formed thin, for example, when the lid member is fastened and fixed to the overhanging end surface of the wall portion, the diameter of the head of the fastening screw is less than the thickness of the wall portion. This is the lower limit, and the degree of freedom in design is reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, the lid member is fastened to the side surface of the wall portion, so that the wall portion is formed thin without being limited to the diameter of the head of the fastening screw. can do.

  In this case, for example, when the wall portion and the display area of the liquid crystal display device are adjacent, the presence of the wall portion can be made inconspicuous, and the display area of the liquid crystal display device and the reflecting member are combined to produce The production effect can be improved.

  In the gaming machine C2, the lid member includes a plurality of shaft support holes that support the rotating shaft portion of the reflecting member.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2, the rotating shaft portion of the reflecting member is inserted into the shaft support hole formed in the lid member, so that the area for supporting the rotating shaft portion is reduced to the wall portion. Can be sufficiently ensured by the area corresponding to the thickness supporting the rotating shaft portion and the area corresponding to the length of the shaft support hole.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, at least one of the pair of wall portions includes an extending portion that extends from between adjacent shaft support grooves, and the lid member includes the extending portion. In the state where the fitting part is fitted to the installation part and the lid member is attached to the base member, the fitting part is at least in the direction adjacent to the shaft support groove and the rotation of the extension part. A gaming machine C4 that is in contact with the axial direction of the shaft portion.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the fitting portion of the lid member and the extending portion of the wall portion are in contact with each other in the direction adjacent to the shaft support groove. It is possible to easily align the wall portion in the adjacent direction of the shaft support groove and the lid member.

  In addition, since the fitting portion of the lid member and the extending portion of the wall portion are in contact with each other in the axial direction of the rotating shaft portion, the wall portion and the lid member are aligned in the axial direction of the rotating shaft portion, and the wall The rigidity of the part can be reinforced by the lid member.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C4, a closed state in which a region formed by the respective axis centers of the pair of wall portions and the adjacent pair of reflecting members is closed by the main body portions of the pair of reflecting members. The game machine C5 is characterized in that, in the closed state, the pair of reflecting members are in contact with each other in the rotational direction.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the region formed by the pair of wall portions and the respective axial centers of the pair of adjacent reflecting members is a pair of reflecting members. Therefore, the light emitted from the light source can be shielded by a plurality of reflecting members.

  Further, in the closed state, the surfaces in the rotational direction of the pair of reflecting members are in contact with each other, so that the gap formed between the main body portions of the adjacent reflecting members can be closed, and the gap between the reflecting members can be closed. Light leakage can be suppressed.

  Here, suppression of light leakage can also be achieved by, for example, sliding a plate-shaped shutter member and disposing the shutter member between the light irradiated to the player and the player. In this case, if the shutter member is fully opened, the player can visually recognize the entire light emitted. However, in the middle of the sliding movement of the shutter member from the state where the shutter member is disposed between the light irradiated to the player and the player, the light overlapping the shutter member cannot be visually recognized. That is, the period until the player visually recognizes the entire light becomes longer.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C5, the reflection member allows light irradiated to the player to pass through by rotating the reflection member from the closed state while suppressing light leakage in the closed state. Here, the plurality of reflecting members can have the same role as the single shutter member described above as an example. That is, each reflecting member can be made smaller than the shutter member. Therefore, compared with the case where the shutter member is slid, the time until the player visually recognizes the entire light can be shortened when the reflecting member is rotated.

  Further, since the end portions of the reflection surface portions of the adjacent reflection members are formed so as to be able to contact each other, the deviation of the posture of the reflection member can be corrected by another reflection member. Therefore, even if there is a reflection member with a poor rotation angle accuracy among the plurality of reflection members, the posture of the rotated reflection member is corrected by being in contact with another reflection member. Therefore, the quality of the production of the reflecting member can be ensured.

  In the gaming machine C5, the reflecting member is chamfered at the contact portions of the surfaces facing each other.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C5, the abutting portions of the reflecting members facing each other are chamfered, so that the reflecting member can be further tilted toward the adjacent reflecting member. Therefore, the surface formed by the plurality of reflecting members in the closed state can be made flatter. In this case, for example, when a pattern is formed by combining side surfaces in the rotation direction of a plurality of reflecting members, it is possible to suppress a shift of the pattern at the boundary of the reflecting members.

  Examples of the chamfering method include a method of cutting a curved surface (R is attached), a method of cutting a flat surface, and the like.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the game machine includes a driving device that generates a driving force for rotating the plurality of reflecting members, and a transmission member that is slid by the driving device. The plurality of reflecting members are formed so as to be slidably movable in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the shaft portion. The gaming machine C7 is characterized in that the transmitting member and the reflecting member can be rotated by sliding the transmitting member.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the transmission member moved by the driving device is formed in a manner that slides in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the rotating shaft portion. Then, the transmitted portions respectively formed on the rotating shaft portions of the plurality of reflecting members are brought into contact with the transmitting member. Here, when the transmission member is slid, the transmission part is rotated and the reflection member is rotated in conjunction with the transmission part. Therefore, the plurality of reflection members can be rotated by the sliding movement of one transmission member. .

  Examples of the transmission member include a belt and a rack gear. When the transmission member is a belt, a cylindrical portion is exemplified as the transmitted portion, and when the transmission member is a rack gear, a rotary gear-shaped portion is illustrated as the transmitted portion.

  In the gaming machine C7, the transmission member includes a rack gear portion whose teeth are engraved on a side surface facing the transmitted portion, and the transmitted portion has teeth that can mesh with the rack gear portion. A gaming machine C8 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C7, the transmission member includes a rack gear portion, and teeth formed so as to be meshed with the rack gear portion of the transmission member are formed in the transmitted portion. As a result, when the transmission member is slid, the transmitted portions of the plurality of reflecting members meshed with the rack gear portion are rotated, thereby preventing slippage between the transmitting member and the reflecting member. Can do. Therefore, a plurality of reflecting members can be rotated synchronously.

  In the gaming machine C8, at least one of the teeth formed in the rack gear portion or the transmitted portion of the transmission member is formed with a width larger than the interval between adjacent teeth of the transmitted portion or the rack gear portion facing each other. A gaming machine C9 in which expansion teeth are formed.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C8, at least one of the teeth formed in the rack gear part or the transmitted part of the transmission member is larger than the interval between adjacent teeth of the opposed transmitted part or the rack gear part. Since the expansion teeth formed with a large width are formed, the transmission resistance of the driving force from the rack gear portion to the transmitted portion can be temporarily increased when the expansion teeth are meshed.

  Thereby, the sliding movement of the transmission member can be mechanically stopped. Therefore, even when the sensor at the moving end of the transmission member is abnormal, it is possible to prevent over-rotation of the reflecting member rotated by the transmission member.

<An example of the technical idea of moving the mating member with its own drive device>
An inner surface that is disposed on the front side of the liquid crystal display device and is formed so as to be capable of reciprocating sliding movement between the outer side and the inner side of the display region of the liquid crystal display device and in the moving direction inside the display region. And a drive device that drives the pair of moving members, the movable range of one of the pair of moving members being movable. Interferes with the movable range of the other moving member that is the moving member on the opposite side of the one moving member, and moves the one moving member to contact the other moving member, and further The gaming machine D1 is configured to move by moving one of the moving members in the same direction so that the other moving member is pushed forward.

  Here, a game machine that makes the liquid crystal display device invisible by moving a pair of actors from the outside of the display area of the liquid crystal display device toward the inside of the display area of the liquid crystal display device and coming into contact with each other Is known (see, for example, JP-A-2005-040413). However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that the operation of the pair of objects is monotonous.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, since one moving member abuts on the other moving member, and the other moving member moves, the other moving member is formed to be movable. Unexpected movement that is difficult to form with only the driving device that drives the moving member can be formed.

  For example, when the moving member is driven by a single driving device, a delay associated with the deceleration time occurs when the driving direction is reversed, causing the monotonousness of the moving member. Therefore, as the driving direction of the driving device of one moving member is changed, the other moving member is brought into contact with one moving member, and the other moving member is moved in the same direction. Thereby, the driving force of the other moving member can be used as an auxiliary force for moving one moving member, and the period required for changing the direction of one moving member can be shortened. Therefore, it is possible to form an unexpected movement that is difficult to form with only the driving device that drives the other moving member.

  In addition, since the pair of moving members can be moved without the synchronization operation of the driving device that drives the pair of moving members, the power consumption of the driving device can be suppressed and the control burden on the driving device can be reduced. .

  In the gaming machine D1, the moving direction of the pair of moving members is a substantially vertical direction, the gaming machine D2.

  Here, when one moving member moves downward from the retracted position, the one moving member receives a downward force due to the action of gravity. Therefore, the driving force required when one moving member changes direction is increased by the amount of gravity, and it is difficult to shorten the deceleration time of the moving member when changing the direction of the moving member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1, the moving member is formed so as to be slidable in a substantially vertical direction, so that one of the movements that abut in the process of moving downward from the retracted position. When changing the direction of a member, the one moving member is brought into contact with the other moving member moving upward from the retracted position, and the other moving member is moved in the same direction, thereby changing the direction of one moving member. It is possible to shorten the period required for the operation. The substantially vertical direction is not limited to the vertical direction and means a direction that allows a slight horizontal component.

  In the gaming machine D1, the gaming machine D3 is characterized in that a moving direction of the pair of moving members is a substantially horizontal direction.

  When one moving member is in contact with the other moving member in the process of moving, and the other moving member is moved by moving the other moving member in the same direction, the driving device of the one moving member is a pair of Since the moving members are moved together, the burden on the driving device increases.

  Here, when a pair of moving members are arranged up and down, the burden on the driving device that drives the moving member arranged below is more burden on the driving device that drives the moving member arranged above. Compared to this, there is a difference in the life of the driving device. Therefore, the replacement period of one drive device is shorter than that of the other drive device, and the maintenance schedule becomes difficult compared to the case where a pair of drive devices are replaced simultaneously.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1, the pair of moving members are formed so as to be slidable substantially in the horizontal direction, thereby reducing the difference in load on the pair of driving devices. be able to.

  That is, when the moving member is formed so as to be movable in a substantially horizontal direction, the moving member does not receive a force due to gravity in the movable direction, so the burden on the driving device does not depend on the direction of movement. Therefore, the replacement time for each driving device can be adjusted.

  Note that the direction of the sliding movement of the moving member does not need to coincide with the horizontal direction, and an inclination from the horizontal direction to allow the moving member to be stopped by the frictional force with the driving device is allowed.

  One of the gaming machines D1 to D3 includes a base member on which the moving member is disposed, and a shaft rod that guides the moving member to be slidable is fixed to the base member. Game machine D4.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the rigidity of the base member can be improved by the shaft rod fixed to the base member. The shaft rod has a role of guiding the moving member so as to be slidable.

  Thus, the shaft rod can be used both as a member that guides the moving member so as to be slidable and a member that improves the rigidity of the base member.

  In the gaming machine D4, the gaming machine D4 is arranged in such a manner as to sandwich the shaft rod, and includes a cart unit having at least both ends of a pair of wheel units formed so as to be able to roll with respect to the shaft rod. A gaming machine D5, which is fixed to at least one end of the moving member.

  According to the gaming machine D5, the carriage part is fixed to at least one end of the moving member, and the carriage part has a wheel part that can roll on the shaft rod, so that the frictional resistance generated when the moving member slides is suppressed. can do.

  Moreover, since a pair is arrange | positioned by the aspect which pinches | interposes a shaft rod and they are arrange | positioned at the both ends of a trolley | bogie part, the wheel part can maintain the attitude | position of a shaft bar and a trolley | bogie part uniformly.

  In the gaming machine D5, when the pair of moving members are in contact with each other, the wheel portions respectively disposed on the pair of moving members are in contact with each other.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D5, the wheel portions respectively disposed on the pair of moving members are brought into contact with each other when the pair of moving members are in contact with each other. Thereby, since the resistance concerning a wheel part at the time of contact of a pair of moving members can be raised, the impact at the time of contact of a pair of moving members can be eased.

  In addition, you may form a pair of wheel part which contact | abuts mutually different diameter. In this case, the resistance applied to the wheel portion can be further increased by sandwiching the small-diameter wheel portion between the large-diameter wheel portion and the shaft rod.

  In the gaming machine D6, the moving member includes a transmission portion to which the driving force of the driving device is transmitted and is elongated in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the shaft rod. The gaming machine D7 is characterized in that the transmission part and the carriage part are arranged at the end of the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D6, a transmission portion to which the driving force of the driving device is transmitted is formed at one end where the carriage portion is disposed. Since the carriage unit is guided and slid by the shaft rod, the engagement relationship between the transmission unit and the driving device can be optimized.

  That is, since the moving member is formed in a long shape, it is easy to bend, and the bend is generated using one end portion where the carriage portion guided by the shaft bar is disposed as a fulcrum. When the transmission unit is formed at the other end, which is the end opposite to the one end where the carriage unit is disposed, the position of the transmission unit is likely to change due to the bending of the moving member. Deviations are likely to occur in the engagement relationship between the transmission portion of the member and the driving device. When a shift occurs in the engagement relationship between the transmission unit of the moving member and the driving device, there is a problem in that resistance generated between the transmission unit and the driving device during sliding movement of the moving member increases.

  On the other hand, if the transmission portion is formed at one end portion where the carriage portion is disposed, the transmission position of the driving force and the support position of the moving member are both formed at one end portion, and the moving member is Even if it bends, the position of the transmission part of a moving member is not changed by it. Therefore, the engagement relationship between the transmission unit of the moving member and the driving device can be maintained, and resistance generated between the transmission unit and the driving device when the moving member slides can be suppressed.

  In addition, as an aspect of a transmission part, when the rotation gear is formed from the drive device side, the rack gear part formed in one edge part is illustrated, for example.

  In the gaming machine D7, the gaming machine D8 is characterized in that the contact of the pair of moving members occurs on the transmission unit side.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D7, it is not necessary to consider the displacement due to the bending of the moving member in the calculation of the contacting position of the pair of moving members. It can be calculated accurately.

  In the gaming machine D7, the abutment of the pair of moving members occurs at an end portion on the opposite side to the transmission portion side.

  According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D7, the contact of the pair of moving members occurs at the end on the opposite side to the transmitting unit side, so that when the pair of moving members are in contact, the transmitting unit The impact on the side can be reduced. Thereby, the load which a drive device receives when a pair of moving member contact | abuts can be reduced.

  In the gaming machines D7 to D9, the moving member extends in parallel with the direction in which the moving member slides, and the other end of the moving member opposite to the one end is connected to the shaft rod. A guide wall portion that is abutted from a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the shaft, and the moving member is rotatably supported at the other end portion and a pair of abutments against the guide wall portion A gaming machine D10 comprising a rotating body, the pair of rotating bodies being provided side by side in the sliding direction of the moving member, and being rotated as the moving member is slid.

  According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D7 to D9, the guide wall portion extends in parallel to the sliding direction of the moving member and is pivotally supported by the other end portion of the moving member. A pair of rotating bodies are brought into contact with the guide wall portion.

  Here, when the moving member suddenly stops and the moving member greatly bends and vibrates around one end as a fulcrum, the moving member of the pair of rotating bodies pivotally supported at the other end of the moving member. The rotating body on the opposite side to the direction of bending is pressed against the guide wall. Therefore, resistance is applied in the direction opposite to the direction of the bending vibration of the moving member, so that it is possible to easily suppress the bending vibration of the moving member as compared with the case where the other end of the moving member is formed as a free end. .

  In addition, since the rotating body and the guide wall are smoothly brought into contact with each other when the moving member is started, it is possible to suppress frictional resistance generated between the guide wall and the moving member when the moving member is started.

  In addition, as an aspect of contact | abutting with a guide wall part and a rotary body, the aspect by which a rack gear is formed in a guide wall part and the gear meshed | engaged with the rack gear of a guide wall part is engraved on the side surface of a rotary body. Is done.

  In the gaming machine D10, the rotating body includes a gear-shaped tooth portion carved on a side surface, and the guide wall portion includes a rack gear portion meshed with the tooth portion. .

  According to the gaming machine D11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D10, a tooth portion is formed on the side surface of the rotating body, and a rack gear portion meshed with the tooth portion is formed on the guide wall portion. Therefore, the contact area between the guide wall portion and the rotating body can be increased, and the bending vibration of the moving member can be further suppressed.

  Any one of the gaming machines D1 to D11 includes a detection device capable of detecting the position and speed of the pair of moving members, and the moving speed of the pair of moving members is determined based on the detection result of the detection device. D12.

  Here, for example, when the moving member is moved by an electric motor, the speed of the moving member may become unstable due to instability of the voltage of the electric motor. This may cause the pair of moving members to collide at an unexpected speed.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D12, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines D1 to D11, the gaming machine D12 includes a detection device that can detect the position and speed of the pair of moving members. Since the moving speed of the pair of moving members is determined, it is possible to prevent the pair of moving members from colliding at an unexpected relative speed and being damaged.

  For example, the speed of the other moving member is adjusted based on the detection result of the detection device capable of detecting the position and speed of one moving member in a state where the pair of moving members are close to each other, and the pair of moving members are almost unaffected during a collision A constant speed state can be formed. Thereby, the impact at the time of a collision of a pair of moving member can be relieved.

<Characteristic E group> (Deviates attention from the V-accuracy attacker during V-accuracy operation)
The lottery means for executing the lottery based on the establishment of the lottery condition, the display means for displaying the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means, and the identification information indicating that the display means is a predetermined lottery result In the gaming machine having variable winning means that can be changed from a closed state in which a game ball is difficult to enter to an open state in which it is easy to enter based on the display of An opening / closing means for opening and closing a specific area in which the game ball that has entered the variable winning means can enter, and a ball entry detecting means for detecting that the game ball has entered the specific area, A privilege state granting unit for granting a privilege state advantageous to a player based on the fact that a game ball is detected by the entrance detection unit, and at least when the opening / closing unit is operated. Production of directing Gaming machine E1, characterized in that those having a means.

  The gaming machine E1 has the following effects. That is, based on the establishment of the lottery condition, identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed by the display means. Based on the fact that identification information indicating that the result is a predetermined lottery result is displayed on the display means, the variable winning means changes the game ball from a closed state where it is difficult to enter to an open state where it is easy to enter. In the variable winning means, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, a specific area in which a game ball that has entered the variable winning means can enter is opened and closed by the opening and closing means. Then, based on the fact that the incoming ball detecting means detects that the game ball has entered the specific area, the privilege state giving means gives a privilege state advantageous to the player. Further, at least when the opening / closing means is operated, a predetermined effect is performed by the effect executing means. Thereby, the operation of the opening / closing means can be made inconspicuous by a predetermined effect. Therefore, there is an effect that a sense of discomfort in the game can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine E1, the effect executing means causes the display means to display a specific display mode.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1, since the specific display mode is displayed on the display means by the effect execution means, there is an effect that the player's attention can be diverted from the opening / closing means.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the effect executing means notifies the notification mode indicating that the hand is held on the front side of the variable winning means as the effect.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine E1 or the gaming machine E2, a notification mode indicating that the hand is held on the front side of the variable winning means as an effect is notified by the effect executing means. This has the effect of making it difficult for the player to discern the movement.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the effect executing means is executed at least over a period in which the opening / closing means is operated from a predetermined period before the opening / closing means is operated.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, at least the effect execution means is executed over a period of operation from a predetermined period before the opening / closing means is operated. There is an effect that the player can hardly notice the operation of the opening and closing means.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the variable winning means enters the opening in which the game ball can enter, the closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter and the open state in which the game ball is difficult to enter A regulating member that is variable to a possible state, and the opening and closing means has a short opening time shorter than a time required for the game ball to flow down from the opening to the specific area, and the opening from the opening A gaming machine E5, wherein either one of a long opening time longer than a time required for a game ball to flow down to a specific area is executed based on a predetermined condition.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the following effects are produced. In other words, the variable winning means includes an opening that allows a game ball to enter, and a regulating member that changes the opening between a closed state where the game ball is difficult to enter and an open state where the game ball can enter. And, either the short opening time shorter than the time required for the game ball to flow down from the opening to the specific area, or the long opening time longer than the time required for the game ball to flow down from the opening to the specific area, On the other hand, the opening / closing means is executed based on a predetermined condition. Thereby, it is possible to control whether or not a game ball enters the opening with an easy configuration. Therefore, there is an effect that the game control can be easily configured.

  In the gaming machine E5, a special game executing means for executing a special game for changing the variable winning means to the open state based on the fact that the lottery means that the specific lottery result is obtained; and the lottery means When the lottery is determined to be a specific lottery result, a type determining means for determining the type of the special game is provided, and the opening / closing means is based on the type of the special game determined by the type determining means. The game machine E6 is characterized in that one of the short opening time and the long opening time is determined.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E5, the following effects are produced. That is, when the special game is executed by the special game executing means to change the variable winning means to the open state based on the fact that the lottery means that the result is a specific lottery result, the type determining means The type is determined. In the opening / closing means, either the short opening time or the long opening time is determined based on the type of the special game determined by the type determining means. Thereby, the privilege given to the player can be easily varied depending on the type of the privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that a fair game can be provided to the player.

<Feature F group> (V-root is formed with one attacker)
The lottery means for executing the lottery based on the establishment of the lottery condition, the display means for displaying the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means, and the identification information indicating that the display means is a specific lottery result Is displayed, variable winning means that can be changed from a closed state in which a game ball is difficult to enter to an open state in which it is easy to enter, and a probability that the lottery means to draw the predetermined lottery result at a normal time In a gaming machine having a probability setting means for setting one of a normal probability and a special probability that is higher than the normal probability, the variable winning means is configured to enter a ball when the game ball is in the open state. A possible opening, a first specific area through which a game ball entering the opening can pass, a second specific area different from the first specific area, the first specific area, and the second specific area The region and either A distribution unit that distributes game balls that have entered the mouth, and the probability setting unit sets the special probability on the condition that the game ball has passed through the first specific area. A gaming machine F1 characterized by

  The gaming machine F1 has the following effects. That is, based on the establishment of the lottery condition, identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed by the display means. When identification information indicating that the result is a specific lottery result is displayed on the display means, the variable winning means changes the game ball from a closed state where it is difficult to enter to an open state where it is easy to enter. Then, the probability setting means sets either the normal probability at the normal time or the special probability that is higher than the normal probability as the lottery probability of the predetermined lottery result by the lottery means. In the variable winning means, the game balls are distributed by the allocating means to either the first specific area through which the game balls entering the opening can pass and the second specific area different from the first specific area. Is distributed. In the probability setting means, the special probability is set on condition that the game ball has passed through the first specific area. Therefore, it can be determined whether or not the special probability is set by the variable winning means, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine F1, based on the display of the identification information indicating the specific lottery result, a special game that makes it easy to change the variable winning means to the open state until a predetermined condition is satisfied. Special game execution means to be executed; and, when the lottery means and the specific lottery result, the type determination means for determining the type of special game executed by the special game execution means, Based on the type of the special game determined by the type determining means, either the first state in which game balls are easily distributed to the first specific area or the second state in which game balls are easily distributed to the second specific area. A gaming machine F2 including distribution setting means set within the period of the one special game.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1, the following effects are produced. In other words, based on the display of the identification information indicating a specific lottery result, a special game that makes it easy for the variable winning means to be changed to the open state is executed by the special game executing means until a predetermined condition is satisfied. The When the lottery means draws a specific lottery result, the type of special game executed by the special game executing means is determined by the type determining means. Further, one of the first state in which the game balls are easily distributed to the first specific area and the second state in which the game balls are easily distributed to the second specific area is based on the type of the special game determined by the type determining means. It is set by the distribution setting means within the period of one special game. Thereby, since the distribution means can be controlled by the type of the special game determined by the type determination means, the control can be easily configured. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be controlled more simply.

  In the gaming machine F1, the distribution setting means sets a first time shorter than a time required for the game ball to reach the first specific area from the opening as the second state from the open state, A gaming machine F3 characterized in that a second time that is longer than a time required for a game ball to reach the first specific area from the opening is set as the first state from the open state.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine F1, the distribution setting means has a first time shorter than a time required for the game ball to reach from the opening to the first specific area in the second state. The second time that is longer than the time required for the game ball to reach the first specific region from the opening is set as the first state from the open state. Thereby, it can be easily controlled whether or not the special probability is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the control load of the game can be reduced.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the variable winning means is variable a plurality of times in the opened state when the identification information indicating the specific lottery result is displayed, and the distributing means The gaming machine F4 is operated for a certain period in a state in which the game balls are distributed to the second specific area in a predetermined open state among the plurality of open states.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the following effects are produced. That is, in the variable winning means, when the identification information indicating a specific lottery result is displayed, the variable winning means is changed to an open state a plurality of times. The distribution means is operated for a certain period of time in a state where game balls are distributed to the second specific area in a predetermined open state among a plurality of open states. Thereby, it can be made to expect a player to distribute a game ball to the 2nd specific field. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be further improved.

  Any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4 has a payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game balls to the player based on the game balls passing through the first specific area or the second specific area. A gaming machine F5 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, a predetermined number of gaming balls are given to the player based on the passing of the gaming balls through the first specific area or the second specific area. Since the payout means pays out, there is an effect that the player can be more interested in the game.

<Feature G group> (Long press production)
Based on the establishment of the lottery condition, the lottery means for executing the lottery, the effect execution means for executing the effect based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the operation means that can be operated by the player, and the operation Based on the operation of the means, a signal output means for outputting an operation signal, a determination means for determining whether the operation signal output by the signal output means has been received, and the operation signal by the determination means. And an effect varying means for varying the effect executed by the effect executing means based on a release timing at which it is determined that the operation signal has not been received since it is determined that the operation signal has been received. A gaming machine G1.

  The gaming machine G1 has the following effects. That is, based on the establishment of the lottery condition, the effect is executed by the effect executing means based on the lottery result of the lottery means to be executed. Further, based on the player's operation by the operation means, it is determined that the operation signal output by the signal output means has not been received after the determination means has determined that the operation signal has been received. Based on the release timing, the effect executed by the effect executing means is varied by the effect varying means. Thereby, various effects can be varied by the player's operation. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine G1, the effect varying means determines whether the release timing is within a predetermined allowable period, and when it is within the allowable period, it is more than when it is outside the allowable period. A gaming machine G2 characterized in that it can be changed to an effect that is advantageous to the player.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine G1, the effect changing means determines that the release timing is within a predetermined allowable period, as compared with the case where it is outside the allowable period. Since the effect is changed to be advantageous to the player, there is an effect that the player can be interested by operating the operation means.

  In the gaming machine G1 or G2, the gaming machine G3 has a notifying means for notifying the timing of the allowable period when it is determined that the operation signal is received by the determining means. .

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G1 or G2, the timing of the allowable period is notified by the notification means when the determination means determines that the operation signal is received. There is an effect that the game can be played in an easy-to-understand manner.

  In the gaming machine G3, when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result, the notifying unit notifies that the permissible period is easier to identify than other lottery results. Characteristic gaming machine G4.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G3, the notification means allows the notice period to be more easily identified than other lottery results when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play a game by predicting the lottery result according to the notification mode.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the effect changing unit receives the operation signal after it is determined that the operation signal has been continuously received for a predetermined period or more after the operation unit receives the operation signal. A gaming machine G5, which is configured to change the production when it is lost.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the effect changing means continuously receives the operation signal for a predetermined period or more after the determination means receives the operation signal. When it is determined that the operation signal is no longer received, the effect is varied, so that the operation of the operation means can be more enjoyed.

<Feature H group> (SW production)
Based on the display means for displaying the game effect, the operation means operable by the player, the operation determination means for determining that the operation means has been operated, and the determination result by the operation determination means, the effect Based on the operation of the operation means, the effect setting means for setting the effect contents that are changed by the effect changing means at the timing of operating the operation means, and the operation means are advantageous. Period setting means for setting at least a first period in which the production contents are set and a second period in which the production contents are set to be more disadvantageous to the player than the first period, the first period and the first period The first notification mode for reporting the two periods in a distinguishable manner and the second notification mode for reporting the first period and the second period in a distinguishable manner are different from the first notification mode. Period Gaming machine H1, characterized in that the informing means for informing, and has a.

  The gaming machine H1 has the following effects. That is, based on the determination result of the player's operation by the operation means determined by the operation determination means, the game effect displayed by the display means is varied by the effect varying means. Next, based on the timing at which the player operates the operating means, the effect contents that are varied by the effect varying means are set by the effect setting means. Then, based on the operation of the operating means, a first period in which the contents of the effects advantageous to the player are set, and a second period in which the contents of the effects more disadvantageous to the player than the first period are set. Are set at least by the period setting means. A first notification mode for reporting the first period and the second period in a distinguishable manner and a second notification mode for reporting the first period and the second period in a distinguishable manner different from the first notification mode. Is notified by the notification means at least during the same period. Thereby, a player can play a game in an easy-to-understand manner by notification from the notification means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easier to understand for the player.

  In the gaming machine H1, the period setting means sets a plurality of the first periods within an effective period in which the operation of the operation means is valid.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1, the period setting means sets a plurality of first periods within the effective period during which the operation of the operating means is valid. There is an effect that it can be easily configured.

  In the gaming machine H2, the first notification mode is to display a change of a symbol with respect to a transition of a period according to a predetermined rule and notify a set current period. H3.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine H2, in the first notification mode, the transition of the period is displayed with the symbol changed in accordance with a predetermined rule, and the set current period is notified. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game easily.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the second notification mode is to notify the change of the period based on a randomly set rule by changing the symbol.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines H1 to H3, in the second notification mode, the transition of the period is notified based on a randomly set rule, so the game is changed. There is an effect that it is possible to provide a variety of effects to the person.

<Feature I group> (Overflow control)
Based on the entrance where a game ball can enter, information acquisition means for acquiring information based on the game ball entering the entrance, and the information acquired by the information acquisition means Lottery means for lottery upon the establishment of the lottery conditions, display means for displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, A player when a dynamic display mode determining unit that determines a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display unit and the identification information indicating a specific lottery result are displayed on the display unit. A bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the storage, a storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of the information acquired by the acquiring means until the lottery condition is satisfied; The first game balls are easy to enter And a second variable state that makes it difficult to enter the ball than the first state, and the variable ball entering unit is set to the first state so as to be more variable than the normal state in the normal state. In a gaming machine having a state setting means for setting a special state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, the dynamic display mode determination means is based on the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means. The dynamic display mode is determined so that the dynamic display period of the identification information can be easily changed. When the special state is set, at least the information stored in the storage unit is equal to or less than a predetermined number. In the case of the gaming machine I1, the establishment of the lottery condition has a delay means that is delayed for a predetermined period.

  The gaming machine I1 has the following effects. That is, information is acquired by the information acquisition means based on the game ball entering the entrance. Based on the information, the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means on the display means for displaying the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means when the lottery condition is satisfied. The dynamic display mode to be dynamically displayed is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. When the identification information indicating a specific lottery result is displayed on the display means, a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means. Next, until the lottery condition is satisfied, the information acquired by the acquisition unit is stored by the storage unit up to a predetermined number. Further, the first state in which a game ball is likely to enter the entrance and the second state in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than the first state are varied by the entrance variable means. Then, based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, a special state that is more easily changed to the first state than the normal state is set by the state setting means. Furthermore, in the dynamic display mode determination means, the dynamic display mode is determined based on the number of information stored in the storage means so that the dynamic display period of the identification information can be easily changed, and the special state is set. If it is set and at least the information stored in the storage means is less than or equal to a predetermined number, establishment of the lottery condition is delayed by a delay means for a predetermined period. Thus, since the delay means delays, the dynamic display period can be determined in a state where a lot of information is stored in the storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that a stable game can be provided to the player.

  In the gaming machine I1, the dynamic display mode determination unit determines that the dynamic display mode with a long dynamic display period is greater than the set number when the number of the information stored in the storage unit is equal to or less than the set number. The game machine I2 is characterized in that it is easier to determine than a case where a large number of them are stored.

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine I1, the dynamic display mode determination unit stores more than the set number when the number of information stored in the storage unit is equal to or less than the set number. Since the dynamic display mode having a longer dynamic display period is more easily determined than in the case where the dynamic display is performed, there is an effect that the period during which the dynamic display is not performed can be set shorter.

  In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the delay means delays a period longer than a period in which the ball changing means is changed from the second state to the first state. .

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I1 or I2, the delay means delays a longer period than the period during which the ball entering variable means is changed from the second state to the first state. There is an effect that the dynamic display period can be determined in a state where a lot of information is stored.

  In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I3, when the entry variable means is changed to the first state, a period during which a predetermined number or less of game balls in which the information is stored in the storage means can be entered The gaming machine I4 is maintained in the first state below.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, when the ball changing means is changed to the first state, the number of games stored below the predetermined number of information stored in the storage means Since the ball is maintained in the first state within a period during which the ball can enter, there is an effect that the game can be performed more efficiently.

<Characteristic group J> (Hiding fluctuation fluctuation)
By lottery means for executing lottery, display means for displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and dynamic display means A dynamic display mode determination unit that determines a dynamic display mode to be dynamically displayed, and a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the display unit displays the identification information indicating a specific lottery result In the gaming machine having the bonus game executing means, the identification information indicates a lottery result by the lottery means by a combination of a plurality of identification symbols, and is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. The display mode includes a quasi-continuous dynamic display mode in which, as the dynamic display of one lottery result, the identification symbol is temporarily stopped and then dynamically displayed again. In when said identification symbols is temporarily stopped, the gaming machine is characterized in that with a stationary symbol display means for displaying overlapping the stationary pattern to the front side of the identification symbols J1.

  The gaming machine J1 has the following effects. That is, the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means on the display means for displaying the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means. The dynamic display mode to be dynamically displayed is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. And when the identification information which shows a specific lottery result is displayed on a display means, the privilege game advantageous to a player is performed by a privilege game execution means. The identification information indicates a lottery result by a lottery means by a combination of a plurality of identification symbols. In addition, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit includes a pseudo continuous dynamic display mode in which the identification symbol is temporarily stopped and then dynamically displayed as a dynamic display of one lottery result. If the identification symbol is temporarily stopped in the pseudo continuous dynamic display mode, the stationary symbol is displayed on the front side of the identification symbol by the stationary symbol display means. As a result, the temporarily stopped identification symbol can appear as if it has been fixedly stopped by the stationary symbol. Therefore, there is an effect that various effects can be provided to the player.

  In the gaming machine J1, the gaming machine J2 is characterized in that, when temporarily stopped, the identification symbol is dynamically displayed by slightly changing the display position periodically.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J1, when the identification symbol is temporarily stopped, the display position is slightly changed periodically and dynamically displayed. The effect is that it is possible to report easily.

  In the gaming machine J1 or J2, the stationary symbol is displayed based on the temporary stop of the identification symbol, and is hidden before the identification symbol starts dynamic display again. A gaming machine J3 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine J1 or J2, the stationary symbol is displayed based on the temporary stop of the identification symbol, and is hidden before the dynamic display of the identification symbol is started. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily configure the identification symbol.

  In any one of the gaming machines J1 to J3, the identification symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined order.

  According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines J1 to J3, the identification symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined order, so that there is an effect that it is possible to provide an easily understandable game for the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the dynamic display mode determination unit determines one dynamic display mode based on a lottery result by the lottery unit, and the pseudo continuous display mode is A gaming machine J5, which is easily set when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific lottery result.

  According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the following effects are produced. That is, in the dynamic display mode determination means, one dynamic display mode is determined based on the lottery result by the lottery means. And in the quasi-continuous display mode, it is set easily when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result, so that the player can expect a specific lottery result by the pseudo-continuous display mode. effective.

<Characteristic K group> (When the winning rate of the Chuden Chucker and the Attacker is the same, if the attacker is narrowed down, the Puden winning will be higher)
An entrance that allows a game to enter, an entrance variable means that can be changed between a first state in which a game ball can easily enter the entrance and a second state in which it is less likely to enter the entrance than the first state. Acquisition means for acquiring information based on the game ball entering the game ball at the entrance, lottery means for executing lottery based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the lottery means And a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the game ball has been determined to be a specific lottery result. And an opening variable means for changing the opening between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a difficult closed state, and the privilege game executing means sets the variable means to the open state. The opening and the entrance are front and variable. When the opening is in the closed state and the entrance is in the first state, the game balls entering the opening are arranged at positions where the entrance can easily enter the entrance. A gaming machine K1 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine K1, lottery is executed by the lottery unit based on the information of the acquisition unit acquired based on the game ball entering the entrance. Based on the fact that the lottery means determines that the result is a specific lottery, a special game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the special game executing means. A first state in which a game ball can easily enter the entrance and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than the first state are varied by the entrance variable means. The opening is varied by an opening variable means that varies between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a difficult closed state. In the privilege game executing means, the variable means is varied to an open state for a predetermined period. Furthermore, when the opening is in the closed state and the entrance is in the first state, the game ball entering the opening becomes easier to enter the entrance. Placed in each position. Thereby, a game can be performed efficiently. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be further improved.

  In the gaming machine K1, the opening changing means is configured by a wall member that can open and close the opening, and in the closed state, the game ball is received by the upper surface of the wall member and played to the entrance side. A gaming machine K2 configured to guide a ball.

  According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1, the opening variable means is configured by a wall member that can open and close the opening, and in the closed state, the game ball is received by the upper surface of the wall member and enters the ball. Since the game ball is guided to the mouth side, the game ball can be configured to easily enter, and the game efficiency can be improved.

  In the gaming machine K2, a gaming machine K3 is provided with guidance means for guiding the gaming ball from the wall member to the entrance.

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K2, there is an effect that it is possible to more efficiently enter the gaming ball into the entrance.

In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K3, launching means for launching the game ball to the game area;
A launch force adjusting means capable of adjusting a launch force of a game ball fired by the launch means based on a player's operation, and a game ball fired by the launch means in the game area At least a first area where the game ball can flow down and a second area different from the first area are formed, and the opening is a position where a game ball flowing down the second area can enter And the entrance is arranged at a position where game balls flowing down either the first area or the second area can be entered in common. Game machine K4.

  According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines K1 to K3, it is possible to change the state of entering by the firing force adjusting means, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine K4, a special entrance that allows a game ball flowing down the second area to enter, and a privilege grant that gives a privilege advantageous to the player when the game ball enters the special entrance And a first setting state in which the game ball flowing down the second region is easily guided to the opening and difficult to be guided to the special entrance, and is difficult to be guided to the opening, to the special entrance A gaming machine K5, characterized by comprising setting means that can be set to either the second setting state that is easy to guide.

  According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K4, the game state can be varied, and there is an effect that a fresh game can be provided to the player.

  In the gaming machine K5, the setting means is configured to be able to be set from outside the gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K5, the setting can be varied by the setting means, and the game taste can be adjusted.

  In any one of the gaming machines K4 to K5, the game ball that has flowed down the second region is easily guided to the opening, and is difficult to be guided to the entrance, and difficult to be guided to the opening. The gaming machine K7 has adjusting means that can be adjusted to the second adjusting state that is easily guided to the entrance side. According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines K4 to K5, there is an effect that the gambling of the game can be adjusted by adjusting the adjusting means.

<Characteristic L group> (loop twice with V attacker)
First entry means capable of entering a game ball, second entry means capable of changing from a first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter to a second state in which the game ball is easy to enter, and the first entry Based on the first determination means for making a determination based on the game ball entering the means and the determination result of the first determination means being the first determination result, the second entry means is the second determination means. Special state setting means for setting a special state that can be easily changed to a state, second determination means for making a determination based on a game ball entering the second ball entry means, and the determination result of the second determination means are If the result is the second determination result, the third ball entry means that allows the ball to enter, a specific area through which the game ball that has entered the third ball input means can pass, and the game ball passes through the specific area A privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the result, and the special state setting means. Whether the special state is set by the special state setting means based on the right storage means capable of storing at least two rights to be determined by the second determination means and the determination result of the second determination means A game machine L1 having a determination means for determining whether or not.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has been known in which various effect images including a variable effect are displayed on a display means such as a liquid crystal display device to improve the interest of the game. The variation effect is an effect performed when a start condition such as a game medium such as a game ball winning at the start opening (start winning prize) is established. For example, the effective display area has three or three or three in the effective display area. A total of nine symbols, etc., displayed on the grid of × 3 are displayed in a variable manner, and when the variable display is stopped, the symbols, etc. that are stopped and displayed at a predetermined stop position are a predetermined combination. In this case, a predetermined game value such as jackpot is given to the player.

  Many such gaming machines have a probability variation function (probability variation) that increases the probability that a predetermined game value such as jackpot will be given if a predetermined condition is satisfied, and some of them have entered into certain probability once. Then, there is a game that is given a predetermined game value such as a jackpot at least twice (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 9-140880) to improve the interest of the game.

  However, the above-mentioned gaming machine is only novel in that it hits twice once entering into certainty, and other gaming characteristics are not different from conventional gaming machines, and further enhancement of the interest of gaming is required. It was.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, the first determination unit selects a predetermined first determination result, thereby providing a special state that makes the determination by the second determination unit easier to receive. Further, the second determination unit After the predetermined second determination result is selected by the above, the game is rich in fun that the jackpot is awarded only when the game ball is passed through the specific area, and then the determination by the second determination means is executed. By storing the right to perform the determination, it is possible to execute the determination by the stored second determination means even once the state is shifted from the special state to the normal state. Therefore, when the gaming state is far from the jackpot (from the special state to the normal state), at least a chance to win the jackpot is given again, so that the player can enjoy the jackpot to the end, It has the effect of improving the fun of gaming.

  In the gaming machine L1, the second entry means is disposed upstream of the third entry means, and in at least a part of a period during which a game ball can enter the third entry means. The gaming machine L2 is variable to the first state.

  In the gaming machine L1 described above, in the special state, in order to ensure the determination by the second determination means, the second entry means is controlled to be in the second state in which it is easy to enter. The problem that the entrance to the 3rd entrance means was hindered by the 2nd entrance means in the state surfaced.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L1, the second incoming ball means is closed (retracted) during the period when the third incoming ball means can enter. There is an effect that it is possible to perform smoothly without disturbing the entry into the third entry means.

  In the gaming machine L2, a display capable of dynamically displaying identification information indicating a determination result of the third determination unit and a third determination unit that determines whether or not the second ball entry unit is changed to the second state. And a dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, wherein the dynamic display period determining means is set with the special state. Based on this, the gaming machine L3 is characterized in that a dynamic display period shorter than usual is easily set until a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  The gaming machine L2 described above can smoothly enter the game ball into the third ball entry means. However, in the gaming machine of this technical idea, in addition to the second special during the special state. A configuration for securing the reserved memory of the symbols had to be achieved at the same time.

  On the other hand, the gaming machine L3 has a control for setting the dynamic display period for changing the second pitching means to the second state shorter than the normal state in the special state.

  By this control, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine L2, predetermined conditions (for example, opening of the third ball entry means, passage of a predetermined time, a predetermined number of balls entering the second ball entry means, reaching the upper limit of the stored memory, etc.) It is possible to prioritize the entry of game balls into the second entry means until is established, and prioritize entry of game balls into the third entry means after the predetermined condition is established. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be performed smoothly.

  In the gaming machine L2, a display capable of dynamically displaying identification information indicating a determination result of the third determination unit and a third determination unit that determines whether or not the second ball entry unit is changed to the second state. Means, a dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and a dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means, When the identification information indicating the determination result to be changed to the second state is displayed, the variable control means for changing the second ball entry means to the second state, the variable control means, The gaming machine L4 is characterized in that, based on the setting of the special state, the second entering means is changed to the second state for a period longer than usual until a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  In addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L2, the gaming machine L4 has a control for changing the second entry means to the second state for a long period until a predetermined condition is satisfied. The effect similar to the machine L3 can be produced.

  In the gaming machine L3 or L4, the predetermined condition is established before the third ball entry means can enter the ball.

  According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine L3 or L4, it is possible to reliably establish a predetermined condition before the third entering means can enter, so the third entering It is possible to smoothly enter the means.

  In any of the gaming machines L3 to L5, the second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the determination result of the second determination means on the display means, and the second dynamic display means Second dynamic display period determining means for determining a period during which the second identification information is dynamically displayed, wherein the second dynamic display period determining means is at least first time after the special state is set. The game machine L6 is characterized in that a period longer than the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means is set.

  The above-described gaming machine L5 enables a smooth game to enter the third entrance means. However, in the gaming machine of the present technical idea, it is possible to store at least two rights for the determination by the second determination means in the game in the special state, but the determination of each determination means in the special state Depending on the timing, a new problem has arisen that it is not possible to store at least two rights to execute the determination by the second determination means. That is, if the jackpot based on the determination result of the second determination means is provided before the second entering means is set to the second state as the determination result of the third determination means during the special state, the special game is There is a problem in that the right to perform the determination by the second determination unit cannot be stored anew because the two entering units are terminated before the second entry unit enters the second state.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L6, in addition to the effects played by any of the gaming machines L3 to L5, the second dynamic display (first time) at least once after the special game (short-time game) is started. 2) The period of the special symbol variation display) is set longer than the dynamic display (ordinary symbol variation display) time, so that the dynamic display is completed before the first second dynamic display is completed. The two ball entry means can be changed to the second state. Therefore, it is possible to solve the above-mentioned new problem and to secure the characteristic game characteristics possessed by the gaming machine of the present technical idea.

  In the gaming machines L1 to L6, the third ball entry means is such that when a predetermined number or more of game balls have entered, the game ball passes through the specific area.

  According to the gaming machine L7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine L1 to the gaming machine L6, the player can play a game aiming at the third entering means until a predetermined number of gaming balls are entered. In other words, it is possible to prevent the situation where the third entering means is finished immediately and the player is awakened and to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine L7, the third ball entry means is a state in which the game ball passes through the specific area when the predetermined number or more of the game balls have entered in a state where the ball can be entered. A gaming machine L8 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine L8, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine L1 to the gaming machine L6, the player can play a game aiming at the third entering means until a predetermined number of gaming balls are entered. In other words, it is possible to prevent the situation where the third entering means is finished immediately and the player is awakened and to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine L7 or L8, the third ball entry means includes a restriction means for restricting the passing of the game ball to the specific area, and the restriction means is configured by the predetermined number of game balls entering. A gaming machine L9 having variable means for changing to a released state in which a game ball can pass into a specific area.

  According to the gaming machine L9, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine L7 or L8, the number of game balls that have entered the third ball entry means will not pass through the specific area until the predetermined number is reached. It is possible to prevent the situation where the player is immediately awakened and to awaken the player, and to improve the interest of the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines L1 to L6, a variable member that can be varied between an open state in which a game ball can enter the specific area and a restricted state in which the game ball is prevented from entering the specific area; Based on the variable control means for changing the variable member and the determination result of the first determination means being a specific determination result, it is possible to enter the third entry means, and the first determination means When it is determined as the specific determination result, the variable control means controls the variable member to change to the restricted state for a period during which the variable member can enter the third ball entry means, When the second determination means determines that the second determination result is obtained, the variable control means changes the variable member to the open state for a period during which the game ball can enter the specific area. Is Gaming machine L10 characterized and.

  According to the gaming machine L10, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines L1 to L6, it is possible to enter the third entering means even when the first judging means results in a specific judgment result. Therefore, it is possible to play a game for entering the third ball entry means according to any of the determination results of the first determination means and the second determination means, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines L1 to L10, the determining means determines whether or not to set the special state by the special state setting means based on the second determination result. Characteristic gaming machine L11.

  According to the gaming machine L11, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines L1 to L10, when the determination result of the second determination means is the second determination result, it is determined whether or not to set a special state Therefore, the player can have a sense of expectation for the previous game by grasping that there is a possibility that it will be in a special state because the third entry means can be entered, The fun of gaming can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines L1 to L11, the second determination means determines either the second determination result or the determination result that the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means for all the determinations. A gaming machine L12 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine L12, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines L1 to L11, the state itself in which the determination by the second determination means is performed is advantageous for the player, so it is interesting. A gaming machine can be provided.

  In any one of the gaming machines L1 to L12, the gaming machine L13 is characterized in that the bonus game executing means executes the bonus game even if it is based on the first determination result.

  According to the gaming machine L13, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines L1 to L12, the award gaming is executed even with the first determination result, so that it is possible to provide an amusing gaming machine.

  In any one of the gaming machines L1 to L13, the privilege game execution means is configured to allow a game ball to enter a fourth entrance means different from the third entrance means as the benefit game. Characteristic gaming machine L14.

  According to the gaming machine L14, in addition to the effects played by any of the gaming machines L1 to L13, in addition to the effects played by any of the gaming machines L1 to L13, the game is played toward the four entry means. Since a game of launching a ball is performed, an amusing gaming machine can be provided.

  In any one of the gaming machines L1 to L14, the second ball entry means includes a ball entrance portion into which the game ball can enter, and a guidance position that can be guided so that the game ball enters the ball entrance portion. A gaming machine L15, comprising: a guide member that is variable to a non-guide position where it is difficult for a game ball to enter the entrance portion.

  In order to make use of the gaming characteristics of the gaming machine of the present technical idea, there is a problem that the second entry means must be configured such that the first state is difficult to enter and the second state is easy to enter.

  According to the gaming machine L15, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines L1 to L14, the second entry means is provided with a guide member, and the guide member can be changed between a guide position and a non-guide position. Thus, the first state is difficult to enter, and the second state is easy to enter, and there is an effect that it is possible to make use of the gaming characteristics of the gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine L15, the guide member includes a first region in which a falling game ball can be received, and a second region in which a game ball that rolls from the first region can roll into the entrance portion. The gaming machine L16 is configured such that a game ball that has been rolled into the second region is capable of entering the entrance portion.

  According to the gaming machine L16, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L15, the guiding member is composed of the first region and the second region, and the second member can enter the ball entry portion. Even if a ball entry part is provided at a position where it is difficult for a game ball falling on the game board to enter the non-guide position, it is difficult to enter the ball entry part when the guide member is at the guide position. It is easy to use, and there is an effect that it is possible to make use of the gaming characteristics of the gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine L16, in the special state, the guide member is in the second state in a period longer than a rolling period required for the game ball received in the first region to enter the entrance part. When the special state is not set, the gaming machine L17 is changed to the second state in a period shorter than the rolling period.

  According to the gaming machine L17, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine L16, when a special state is set for the period during which the guiding member is changed from the non-guidance position to the guidance position, the game ball on the guidance member enters It is possible to set a period during which it is easy to enter the club and a period during which it is difficult for the game ball on the guide member to enter the bowl when the special state is not set. There is an effect that it is possible to make use of the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines L1 to L17, a second dynamic display unit capable of dynamically displaying second identification information indicating a determination result of the second determination unit, and the second identification by the second dynamic display unit A second dynamic display period determining unit that determines a period during which information is dynamically displayed, and a privilege from when the determination result of the second determination unit becomes the second determination result until the privilege game is executed Pre-privilege game execution means for executing a previous game, wherein the second dynamic display period determination means is a length of a dynamic display period when the determination result of the second determination means is the second determination result And the total length of the pre-privilege game period is determined to be equal to the length of the dynamic display period when the determination result of the second determination means is a predetermined determination result other than the second determination result. To do. A gaming machine L18 characterized by that.

  In the gaming machine of the present technical idea, when the determination result of the second determination means is the second determination result, the jackpot game is not provided immediately, but the jackpot game is provided only after passing through the specific area. . In such a gaming machine, when dynamically displaying the identification information indicating the determination result of the second determination means, there is a problem that the player wants to have an expectation as much as possible just before the jackpot game is provided. Surfaced. That is, if all the determination results of the second determination means are displayed at the same timing, the determination result of the second determination means is displayed before the determination result of the second determination means executes the pre-privilege game based on the second determination result. There is a problem that the player recognizes the game, and the fun of the game becomes poor while the pre-privilege game is executed.

  According to the gaming machine L18, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines L1 to L17, the length of the dynamic display period when the determination result of the second determination means is the second determination result, and before the privilege The total length of the game period, that is, the period from the start of dynamic display based on the second determination result until the jackpot game is provided, and the determination result of the second determination means are the second determination result The length of the dynamic display period when the predetermined determination result is other than that, that is, the period from the start to the end of the dynamic display based on the determination result (other than the second determination result) of the second determination means By making equal, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the determination result of the second determination means until the pre-privilege game ends, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  A second privilege game executing means for executing a second privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the first determination means being the first determination result; The gaming machine L19, wherein the determination result of the second determination means is a determination result of execution of the second privilege game.

  According to the gaming machine L19, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine L18, the jackpot display based on the determination by the second determination means can be made at the same timing, and the player can enjoy the dynamic display to the end. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, it becomes possible to improve the interest of a game further by making the privilege given to a player differ by the jackpot based on a 2nd determination result, and the jackpot based on a predetermined determination result.

  The gaming machine L19 includes an effect execution unit that executes an effect display corresponding to the dynamic display of the second dynamic display unit, and a display body that displays an effect executed by the effect execution unit, The effect execution means displays the second determination result effect corresponding to the second determination result and the pre-privilege game effect corresponding to the pre-privilege game on the display body, and the second special game is executed. In the case where an effect corresponding to the determination result is displayed on the display body, at least a part of the second determination result effect is used.

  Generally, in a gaming machine, an effect display based on identification information indicating the results of various determinations is executed using a display body (for example, a liquid crystal device) so that the player can grasp it. Then, the player feels anxious while grasping the contents of the effect display displayed on the display body. Also in the gaming machine of this technical idea, there is a demand for an effect display suitable for game play.

  According to the gaming machine L20, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L19, a part of the effect display based on the determination result that the privilege game is executed is based on the determination result that the second privilege game is executed. By using the effect display, the player cannot grasp which privilege game will be executed by only a part of the effect content displayed on the display body, and the effect content displayed to the player There is an effect that it is possible to give interest to all of the above and improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine L20, the second determination result effect includes a second determination result dynamic display effect corresponding to the second identification information while the second identification information is dynamically displayed, and the second identification information is confirmed and displayed. A second determination result dynamic display finalizing effect corresponding to the event, and when the effect executing means executes an effect corresponding to the determination result of the second privilege game being executed, a part thereof A gaming machine L21, wherein at least the second determination result dynamic display effect is used.

  According to the gaming machine L21, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L20, in the case where an effect corresponding to the determination result in which the second privilege game is executed is executed, the second determination result dynamic display effect is partially displayed. By using this, a common effect will be performed for a while after the effect based on the determination result of the second determination means is started, and the player only has to start the effect content displayed on the display body. It is not possible to grasp whether or not the bonus game will be executed, it is possible to give interest to all the contents of the presentation displayed to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game is there. Moreover, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the program capacity by using a common performance.

  In the gaming machine L20, the pre-privilege game effect includes a pre-special game effect during the pre-special game, and a special game final effect corresponding to a game ball passing through the specific area. In the case where an effect corresponding to the determination result that the second privilege game is executed is executed by the effect executing means, at least the effect during the pre-game play is used as a part thereof. Game machine L22.

  According to the gaming machine L22, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines L20 to L21, in the case of performing an effect corresponding to the determination result that the second privilege game is executed, the pre-privilege game effect is used as a part thereof. As a result, a common performance is performed in the final stage immediately before the determination result of the second determination means is displayed, and the player can select which of the bonus games only in the final stage portion of the content displayed on the display body. It is not possible to grasp whether it will be executed, it is possible to give interest to all the contents of the effects displayed to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Moreover, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the program capacity by using a common performance.

  In the gaming machines L20 to L22, the effect executing means has a first notification effect informing that the determination result by the second determination means is the second determination result, and a determination result by the second determination means is A second notification effect for notifying that the second privilege game is executed is executed, and after the effect execution means executes the effect, the first notification effect or the second notification effect. The gaming machine L23 is characterized by having the same timing to execute.

  According to the gaming machine L23, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines L20 to L22, the timing at which the effect that the determination result of the second determination means is displayed is made the same, so the player grasps the determination result at different timings. This has the effect of preventing the game from being played and improving the fun of the game.

  By providing two or all of the configurations from the gaming machines L21 to L23, more effective effects can be achieved.

<Characteristic M group> (Hidden production is performed during Let's Mambo)
Based on the establishment of the first condition, an acquisition unit that acquires information, an information storage unit that stores information acquired by the acquisition unit, and a determination based on the information stored in the information storage unit A determination means; a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating a determination result by the determination means on a display means based on the establishment of the second condition; and the identification information indicating a specific determination result on the display means. A privilege granting unit for granting a privilege that is advantageous to the player when the message is displayed, a prior determination unit for determining information stored in the information storage unit before the second condition is satisfied, Based on the determination result determined by the prior determination means, a specific effect determination means for determining whether or not to execute a specific effect in the dynamic display for the information already stored in the information storage means, and Special A determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied for the information determined to execute the specific effect by the effect determination means, and information determined by the determination means that the predetermined condition is satisfied Specific production regulation means for regulating the execution of the specific production with respect to the information stored later and stored before the information that triggers the execution of the specific production. A gaming machine M1 characterized by being.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has been known in which various effect images including a variable effect are displayed on a display means such as a liquid crystal display device to improve the interest of the game. The variation effect is an effect performed when a start condition such as a game medium such as a game ball winning at the start opening (start winning prize) is established. For example, the effective display area has three or three or three in the effective display area. A total of nine symbols, etc., displayed on the grid of × 3 are displayed in a variable manner, and when the variable display is stopped, the symbols, etc. that are stopped and displayed at a predetermined stop position are a predetermined combination. In this case, a predetermined game value such as jackpot is given to the player. Many such gaming machines have a probability variation function (probability variation) that increases the probability that a predetermined game value such as jackpot will be given if a predetermined condition is satisfied, and some of them have entered into certain probability once. Then, there is a game that is given a predetermined game value such as a jackpot at least twice (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 9-140880) to improve the interest of the game. However, the above-described gaming machine only gives the player an interest in the jackpot, and there is a problem that the interest of the game is reduced with respect to fluctuation display that is out of place. There was a need for further enhancement of entertainment.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, information is acquired by the acquisition unit based on the establishment of the first condition. Information acquired by the acquisition unit is stored in the information storage unit. Determination is performed by the determination unit based on the information stored in the information storage unit. Based on the establishment of the second condition, identification information indicating the determination result by the determination unit is dynamically displayed on the display unit by the dynamic display unit. A privilege that is advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed on the display means is given by the privilege giving means. Prior to the second condition being satisfied, the information stored in the information storage means is determined by the pre-determination means. Based on the determination result determined by the prior determination means, the specific effect determination means determines whether or not to execute the specific effect by dynamic display on the information already stored in the information storage means. With respect to the information determined to execute the specific effect by the specific effect determining means, it is determined by the determining means whether a predetermined condition is satisfied. The information stored after the information determined by the determining means that the predetermined condition is established and stored before the information that triggers the execution of the specific effect The execution of the effect is restricted by the specific effect restricting means.

  This restricts the execution of the specific effect on the information stored after the information for which the predetermined condition is satisfied among the information for which the specific effect is determined. After making it feel that the effect to be executed is finished, the specific effect can be executed again. Therefore, it is possible to provide an unexpected effect to the player and improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine M1, as a dynamic display mode dynamically displayed by the dynamic display unit, one dynamic display mode is determined based on the information stored in the information storage unit Means for determining that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the dynamic display mode determining unit determines that the specific dynamic display mode is determined as the information. A featured gaming machine M2.

  According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine M1, the following effects are achieved. That is, as the dynamic display mode dynamically displayed by the dynamic display unit, one dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit based on the information stored in the information storage unit. When it is determined that the specific dynamic display mode is information determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit, the determination unit determines that a predetermined condition is satisfied. Thereby, there exists an effect that a player can be made to think that the specific production was complete | finished by displaying a specific dynamic display mode.

  In the gaming machine M2, the specific effect determining unit determines execution of the specific effect based on the fact that the prior determination unit determines that the specific dynamic display mode is the information. A gaming machine M3, which is characterized by

  According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine M2, the execution of the specific effect is performed based on the fact that the prior determination unit determines that the specific dynamic display mode is determined. Since it is determined by the determining means, when a specific performance is executed, the player can recognize early that a specific dynamic display mode will be executed with any of the continuous fluctuations, improving the interest of the game There is an effect that can be done.

  In any of the gaming machines M1 to M3, when the specific effect determining means determines to execute the specific effect, the execution of the specific effect is started with respect to the already stored information. A gaming machine M4 characterized by having start information determining means for determining information by a predetermined lottery.

  According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines M1 to M3, when it is determined that the specific effect is executed by the specific effect determining means, the information that has already been stored Since the information for starting the execution of the specific effect is determined by the start information determining means by a predetermined lottery, it is possible to provide the player with various effects by randomizing the number of times the specific effect is continuously executed. There is an effect.

  In any one of the gaming machines M1 to M4, the specific effect restricting means is stored after the information determined by the determining means that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and execution of the specific effect is determined. Of the information stored before the triggering information, the information stored continuously a predetermined number of times from the information stored next to the information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition On the other hand, the gaming machine M5 is characterized by restricting the specific performance.

  According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines M1 to M4, the specific effect regulating means is stored after the information determined by the determining means that the predetermined condition is established. Of the information stored prior to the information that triggered the execution of the specific performance, the information stored next to the information that is determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is continued a predetermined number of times. Since the specific effect is restricted by the specific effect restricting means with respect to the stored information, the specific effect is restricted for a continuous number of times, and the player can be expected to execute the specific effect again. There is an effect.

  In the gaming machine M5, the specific effect regulating means determines the predetermined number of times by lottery.

  According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine M5, since the predetermined number of times is determined by the specific restricting means by lottery, the number of times that the specific performance is restricted can be made random, and the interest of the player is improved. There is an effect that can be done.

  In any one of the gaming machines M1 to M6, there is suggested suggestion execution means for executing a predetermined suggestion effect on the dynamic display for the information in which the specific effect is restricted by the specific effect restriction means. Game machine M7.

  According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines M1 to M6, the predetermined suggestion effect suggests the dynamic indication for the information whose specific effect is restricted by the specific effect restricting means. Since it is executed by the execution means, there is an effect that it is possible to give the player an expectation that the specific effect is continued by the suggestion effect.

<Characteristic N group> (Determining the number of incubation after Let's Mambo is based on the number of holds at the start of Let's Mambo execution)
Based on the establishment of the first condition, an acquisition unit that acquires information, an information storage unit that stores information acquired by the acquisition unit, and a determination based on the information stored in the information storage unit A determination means; a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating a determination result by the determination means on a display means based on the establishment of the second condition; and the identification information indicating a specific determination result on the display means. A privilege granting means for granting a privilege that is advantageous to the player when is displayed;
Prior to the establishment of the second condition, a prior determination unit that determines information stored in the information storage unit and a determination result determined by the prior determination unit are already stored in the information storage unit. When the dynamic presentation of the identification information is executed with respect to the information that is being performed, the production determining means for determining execution of the continuous production that executes the specific production, and the continuous production is executed by the production determination unit. Suggestion for the dynamic display of the information stored in the information storage means stored after the determined information at a predetermined timing until the end of the dynamic display of the determined information A game machine N1 having suggestion effect determining means for determining whether or not to execute an effect.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has been known in which various effect images including a variable effect are displayed on a display means such as a liquid crystal display device to improve the interest of the game. The variation effect is an effect performed when a start condition such as a game medium such as a game ball winning at the start opening (start winning prize) is established. For example, the effective display area has three or three or three in the effective display area. A total of nine symbols, etc., displayed on the grid of × 3 are displayed in a variable manner, and when the variable display is stopped, the symbols, etc. that are stopped and displayed at a predetermined stop position are a predetermined combination. In this case, a predetermined game value such as jackpot is given to the player. Many such gaming machines have a probability variation function (probability variation) that increases the probability that a predetermined game value such as jackpot will be given if a predetermined condition is satisfied, and some of them have entered into certain probability once. Then, there is a game that is given a predetermined game value such as a jackpot at least twice (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 9-140880) to improve the interest of the game. However, the above-described gaming machine only gives the player an interest in the jackpot, and there is a problem that the interest of the game is reduced with respect to fluctuation display that is out of place. There was a need for further enhancement of entertainment.

  According to the gaming machine N1, information is acquired by the acquisition unit based on the establishment of the first condition. Information acquired by the acquisition unit is stored in the information storage unit. Determination is performed by the determination unit based on the information stored in the information storage unit. Based on the establishment of the second condition, identification information indicating the determination result by the determination unit is dynamically displayed on the display unit by the dynamic display unit. A privilege that is advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display means is given by the privilege giving means. Prior to the second condition being established, the information stored in the information storage means is determined by the prior determination means. Based on the determination result determined by the prior determination means, execution of a continuous effect that executes a specific effect every time dynamic display of identification information is performed on information already stored in the information storage means Is determined by the effect determining means. The movement of the information stored in the information storage means stored after the determined information at a predetermined trigger until the end of the dynamic display of the information determined to execute the continuous effect by the effect determining means. Whether or not to execute the suggestion effect on the target display is determined by the suggestion effect determination means. As a result, the suggestion effect is executed even after the continuous effect is finished, so that the player can think that the continuous effect is continuing. Therefore, it is possible to make the continuous production appear to be more times than the actual number of continuous times, and there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the gaming machine N1, as a dynamic display mode dynamically displayed by the dynamic display unit, a dynamic display mode in which one dynamic display mode is determined based on the information stored in the information storage unit And when the predetermination unit determines that the specific dynamic display mode is the information determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit, the production determination unit includes the determination unit. A gaming machine N2 that is determined to execute an effect.

  According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N1, the following effects are produced. That is, as the dynamic display mode dynamically displayed by the dynamic display unit, one dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit based on the information stored in the information storage unit. When the prior determination unit determines that the specific dynamic display mode is information determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit, the continuous production is executed by the production determination unit. Thus, there is an effect that it is possible to recognize early that the specific dynamic display mode is executed by the start of the continuous performance.

  In the gaming machine N1 or N2, the suggestion effect is an effect that is also executed during a predetermined period before the start of the effect of the continuous effect.

  According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine N1 or N2, the suggestion effect is executed during a predetermined period before the start of the effect of the continuous effect. Can be expected from the player.

  In any of the gaming machines N1 to N3, when the suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect determination means, the game machine has a number of times determination means for determining the number of consecutive times by lottery. N4.

  According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effects played by any of the gaming machines N1 to N3, when the suggestion effect is determined by the suggestion effect determination means, the number of consecutive times is determined by the number determination means by lottery. Therefore, the number of times the suggestion effect is performed can be made random, and the player's interest can be improved.

<Characteristic P group> (A series of performance modes is started by operating a button, and the performance mode is varied by an invalid operation)
Effect means capable of executing an effect, effect execution means capable of causing the effect means to execute a specific effect in a predetermined first effect pattern, operation means capable of being operated by a player, The signal output means for outputting a predetermined signal based on the operation of the operation means, the signal determination means for determining the signal output by the signal output means, and the predetermined signal is determined by the signal determination means Based on the above, the possible state determining means for determining whether or not it is possible to cause the effect means to start execution of the specific effect by the effect executing means, and the possible state by the possible state determining means. On the basis of the fact that it is determined, the effect control means for starting execution of the specific effect by the effect execution means, and the possible state determination means in the possible state Specific condition determining means for determining whether the specific condition is satisfied based on information based on the determination that the specific condition is satisfied, and the first effect of the specific effect based on the determination that the specific condition is satisfied by the specific condition determining means A gaming machine P1 having an effect changing means for changing the pattern to a different second effect pattern.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an accessory driving effect for operating a decorative body from a standby position to a predetermined operation position by a player operating an operating means (such as an effect button) is executed. (For example, JP-A-2015-97827).

  In such a conventional gaming machine, even if the player operates the operation means (the effect button or the like) while the decorative body is operating (that is, during the accessory driving effect), a new accessory driving effect can be obtained. There is a problem that the effect of the effect driving effect that is executed based on the operation on the operation means (such as the effect button) is reduced. Further, there is a problem that the operation of the decorative body (for example, the operation time) cannot be matched with the player's preference and the interest of the player cannot be improved.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine P1, a specific effect is executed in a predetermined first effect pattern by the effect executing means on the effect means capable of executing the effect, and the player can operate it. A predetermined signal is output by the signal output means based on the operation of the operation means, and the signal output by the predetermined signal output means is determined by the signal determination means. Based on the determination of the predetermined signal by the signal determination unit, the variable state determination unit determines whether or not it is possible to cause the production unit to start executing the specific production. Based on the determination that the variable state determination unit is in a possible state, the production control unit starts execution of the specific production by the production execution unit. On the other hand, the first effect pattern of the specific effect is generated by the effect variable means based on the fact that the specific condition is determined to be satisfied by the specific condition determination means based on the information based on the determination that the possible condition determination means is not in the possible state. It can be changed to a different second effect pattern.

  Thereby, it is possible to vary the effect pattern of the specific effect from the first effect pattern to the second effect pattern based on the determination that the specific effect based on the operation of the operation unit cannot be executed. Therefore, since the effect pattern of the specific effect to be executed next can be varied based on the operation of the operation means that could not execute the specific effect, the effect executed based on the operation of the operation means can be changed. There is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine P1, the second effect pattern is set with a shorter effect period than the first effect pattern.

  According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine P1, the following effects are achieved. That is, since the second effect pattern is set with an effect period shorter than the first effect pattern, the effect period of the specific effect can be shortened by executing the second effect pattern. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the number of times that the specific performance is executed by the performance execution means in a single period, it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the performance executed based on the operation of the operation means. is there. Furthermore, even when the operation means is operated continuously for a short period of time, the chance that the execution of the specific effect is increased, and the player can start the specific effect by operating the operation means. Can be given more, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine P1 or P2, the effect means includes a plurality of effect units capable of executing an effect, and the effect pattern includes at least two or more effect units of the plurality of effect units. A gaming machine P3 characterized in that the production is executed.

  According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P1 or P2, the following effects are produced. In other words, the production means has a plurality of production units capable of producing the production, and the production pattern causes the production to be performed on at least two production units among the plurality of production units. Various effects can be executed based on the operation of the means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

  In the gaming machine P1 or P2, the effect unit has a plurality of effect units capable of executing an effect, and the effect execution unit includes the effect unit in any one of the effect units. A gaming machine P4 that is capable of executing a specific performance.

  According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P1 or P2, the following effects are produced. In other words, the effect means has a plurality of effect parts capable of executing the effect, and the effect effect means executes a specific effect on an arbitrary effect part among the plurality of effect parts.

  Thereby, various effects can be executed based on the operation of the operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

  In the gaming machine P4, the possible state determination unit determines the possible state when there is at least one production unit capable of starting production with the production pattern by the production execution unit. A gaming machine P5 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P4, the following effects are produced. In other words, when there is at least one effect section that can start the effect with the effect pattern by the effect execution means, the possible state determination means determines that the state is possible.

  Thereby, a specific effect can be performed when at least one effect part is in a possible state among a plurality of effect parts. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the number of times that the specific performance is executed by the performance execution means in a single period, it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the performance executed based on the operation of the operation means. is there.

  In any one of the gaming machines P1 to P5, the specific condition is that the number of times determined by the possible state determination means that the state is not the possible state is set as at least one of the establishment conditions. Game machine P6.

  According to the gaming machine P6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines P1 to P5, the following effects are produced. That is, the number of times that the possible state determination unit determines that the specific state is not satisfied is set as at least one of the satisfied conditions that satisfy the specific condition.

  Accordingly, the specific condition is established based on the number of times that the possible state determination unit determines that the state is not possible, that is, the number of times that the specific execution is not executed by the effect execution unit despite operating the operation unit. Is possible. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation means can be actively operated by the player, and the player's willingness to play can be enhanced.

  In any one of the gaming machines P1 to P6, the specific condition is set to at least one of the established conditions as the number of times that the possible state determination unit determines that the state is not the possible state within a predetermined period. A gaming machine P7 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the gaming machine P7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines P1 to P6, the following effects are produced. That is, the number of times that the possible state determination unit determines that the state is not in a possible state within a predetermined period is set as at least one of the satisfaction conditions that the specific condition is satisfied.

  As a result, the specific performance is executed by the performance execution means even though the operation means is operated within the predetermined period, that is, the number of times determined as not being possible by the possible state determination means within a predetermined period. The specific condition can be established based on the number of times that it has not been performed. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation means can be actively operated by the player, and the player's willingness to play can be enhanced.

  In any one of the gaming machines P1 to P7, an effect pattern selection for selecting one effect pattern from a plurality of different second effect patterns based on the determination that the specific condition is satisfied by the specific condition determining means A gaming machine P8 having means.

  According to the gaming machine P8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines P1 to P7, the following effects are produced. In other words, based on the determination that the specific condition is established by the specific condition determining means, one effect pattern is selected by the effect pattern selecting means from a plurality of different second effect patterns.

  Thereby, when the production pattern of the specific production changes, a plurality of production patterns can be executed, so that various productions can be executed based on the operation of the operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

  In the gaming machine P8, the effect pattern selecting means selects a second effect pattern corresponding to information based on the determination that the state is not possible.

  According to the gaming machine P9, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine P8, the second effect pattern corresponding to the information based on the determination that the state is not possible is selected, so that the effect based on the operation on the operation means is This can be executed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player, and the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

  In the gaming machine P8 or P9, the plurality of different second effect patterns are set so that at least the effect period is different.

  According to the gaming machine P10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P8 or P9, a plurality of different second performance patterns are set with at least different performance periods, so that the specific performance is executed by the executed performance pattern. Different periods can be used. This makes it possible to vary the number of times that the specific effect can be executed in a single period, and thus has the effect of enhancing the effect of the effect executed based on the operation of the operation means.

  In any one of the gaming machines P1 to P10, the effect means has at least a movable member that can be moved, and the effect execution means moves the movable member to each of the first effect pattern and the second effect pattern. A gaming machine P11 that is movable in a corresponding movable pattern.

  According to the gaming machine P11, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines P1 to P10, the following effects are produced. That is, the effect means has at least a movable member that can be moved, and the effect execution means moves the movable member in a movable pattern corresponding to each of the first effect pattern and the second effect pattern.

  Thereby, since the first effect pattern and the second effect pattern can be executed on the movable member that is movable based on the operation on the operation means, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game for the player. There is an effect.

  In the gaming machine P1 or P2, the effect unit has a plurality of effect units capable of executing the effect, and the effect execution unit performs the specific effect for each of the plurality of effect units. A gaming machine P12 that is capable of being executed, and wherein the plurality of performance units are set with different performance periods as the specific performance.

  According to the gaming machine P12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P1 or P2, the following effects are produced. That is, the effect means has a plurality of effect parts capable of executing the effect, and the effect execution means executes the specific effect for each of the plurality of effect parts. Different production periods are set for the plurality of production units.

  Thereby, it is possible to execute a specific effect on a plurality of effect units having different effect periods based on the operation of the operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

  In the gaming machine P12, the gaming machine P12 includes an elapsed period determination unit that determines an elapse of the operation period set in each of the plurality of presentation units, and the possible state determination unit includes the elapsed period determination among the plurality of presentation units. The gaming machine P13, wherein the effect section for which the operation period has elapsed is determined as the possible state by means.

  According to the gaming machine P13, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P12, the following effects are produced. That is, the elapsed period determining means determines the progress of the effect period set for each of the plurality of effect parts, and the effect part determined to have passed the operation period is determined to be in the possible state by the possible state determining means. Thereby, it is possible to start the operation at the timing when the operation means is operated in the effect part in which the operation period has elapsed among the plurality of effect parts in which different effect periods are set. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an invalid state where the performance is not executed on the machine side.

<Characteristic Q group> (Production execution timing is variable by invalid button operation)
An operation means that can be operated by the player, a signal output means for outputting a predetermined signal based on the operation of the operation means, and a signal determination means for determining a signal output by the signal output means And at least one of the plurality of rendering means in a predetermined first rendering pattern based on the plurality of rendering means capable of performing the rendering and the predetermined signal determined by the signal determining section. An effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect on two or more of the effect means, and the effect execution means is executed in advance when the specific effect is executed by the two or more effect means. At least one of the two or more effecting means is made to wait for execution of the effect for a predetermined waiting period, and the predetermined signal is determined by the signal determining means during the waiting period. Gaming machine Q1, characterized in that on the basis of the reception of the signals is intended to initiate the execution of the effect for at least 1 of the presentation unit in standby.

  In a gaming machine such as a gaming machine or a pachinko machine, a player operates a manipulation means (such as a production button) to execute an accessory driving effect that moves a plurality of decorative bodies from a standby position to a predetermined operating position. There are some (for example, JP, 2015-97827, A).

  In such a conventional gaming machine, even if the player operates the operation means (the effect button or the like) while the decorative body is operating (that is, during the accessory driving effect), a new accessory driving effect can be obtained. There is a problem that the effect of the effect driving effect that is executed based on the operation on the operation means (such as the effect button) is reduced. Further, it is conceivable that, among the plurality of decorative bodies, when the operating means is operated while one decorative body is operating, the other decorative body is operated. Even in this case, even if the player operates the operation means (such as a production button) when all the decorative bodies are operated, such as the operation of the operation means being executed a plurality of times in a short period of time, There was a problem in that it was not possible to execute a new role driving effect, and the player's interest could not be improved.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine Q1, a predetermined signal is output from the signal output means based on the operation means that can be operated by the player. The signal output from the signal output means is determined by the signal determination means. Based on the determination of the predetermined signal by the signal determination means, the specific effect is provided to at least two or more effect means of the plurality of effect means capable of executing the effect with the predetermined first effect pattern. It is executed by the effect execution means.

  And when performing a specific production | presentation with two or more production | presentation means, the execution of production | production is made to wait with respect to the predetermined | prescribed standby | waiting period, at least 1 production | production means of two or more production | presentation means, Based on the fact that the predetermined signal is received by the signal discriminating means during the standby period, the execution of the effect is started by the effect executing means with respect to at least one effect means waiting.

  Thus, even when the execution of the specific effect is started for the plurality of effect means by the operation of the operation means, at least one effect means is waiting for the execution of the specific effect, and the operation means is in the standby period. Because the operation is finished and the specific effect is executed, even if the player operates the operation means, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an invalid period in which the execution of the specific effect is not started. It is possible to enhance the effect of the effect executed based on the operation of the means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be further improved.

  In the gaming machine Q1, the waiting period is a period longer than the shortest period during which the signal output means can output the predetermined signal for each operation when the operation means is operated continuously. A gaming machine Q2 that is set in the above.

  According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q1, during the standby period, when the operation means is operated continuously, the signal output means can output a predetermined signal for each operation. Since the period is set longer than the shortest period, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the generation of an invalid period even when the operating means is operated continuously.

  In the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, an interval determination unit that determines an interval at which the signal determination unit determines the predetermined signal, a storage unit that can store information determined by the interval determination unit, and a storage unit that stores the information And a period setting means for variably setting the waiting period based on the information thus obtained.

  According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the following effects are produced. That is, the interval for determining the predetermined signal by the signal determining unit is determined by the interval determining unit. Information determined by the interval determination unit is stored in the storage unit. Based on the information stored in the storage means, the waiting period is variably set by the period setting means.

  Thus, the interval at which the player operates the operating means differs depending on the player, but the operated interval is determined by the interval determining means and the information is stored, so that the player operates the operating means. , Frequency, etc. can be stored. Further, since the waiting period is variably set by the setting means based on the information stored in the storage means, the waiting period is varied according to the situation in which the player operates the operating means, so that it is more suitable for the player. It can be in a gaming machine state. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be further improved. Note that. Even if the information is not stored in the storage means, the setting means variably sets the standby period directly based on the information determined by the interval determination means so that a suitable standby period is set for each operation. Even if it comprises, there exists an effect that it can set so that more optimal production can be performed.

  In any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, when the predetermined signal is discriminated by the signal discriminating unit, an effective period setting unit for setting an effective period for validating the discrimination, and the valid period setting unit The gaming machine Q4, comprising: an invalidity determining means for determining the information determined by the signal determining means before the period is set.

  According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, the following effects are produced. That is, when a predetermined signal is discriminated by the signal discriminating means, an effective period for validating the discrimination is set by the effective period setting means. Before the effective period is set by the effective period setting means, information obtained by determining the predetermined signal by the signal determining means is determined by the invalidity determining means.

  Thus, when the operating means is operated, the determination is made by the invalidity determining means even when the operating means is operated before the effective period for determining that the operation is valid. There is also an effect that it can be determined that there is a habit of starting the operation of the operating means from the front.

  In the gaming machine Q4, the gaming machine Q5 is characterized by having a restricting means for restricting standby by the effect executing means based on the information determined by the invalidity determining means being specific information.

  According to the gaming machine Q5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine Q4, the standby by the performance executing means is restricted by the restricting means based on the information determined by the invalidity determining means being specific information. If the information determined by the means is specific information (for example, invalidity is not determined in a period before a predetermined period (such as 5 seconds) before the start of the effective period), the waiting is restricted by the restriction means. It is determined in advance that there is a high possibility that the player does not operate the means continuously, and the specific effect is started by operating the operation means at the same timing without setting the effect means waiting for the specific effect. Thus, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a player with a sense of unity.

  In any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q5, the presentation means includes at least a plurality of movable members movable within a predetermined range, and the presentation execution means includes at least two or more movable members among the plurality of movable members. Can be moved based on the first performance pattern. A gaming machine Q6.

  According to the gaming machine Q6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q5, the following effects are produced. That is, a plurality of movable members that can move at least within a predetermined range are provided as the rendering means. Among the plurality of movable members, at least two or more movable members are moved by the effect executing means based on the first effect pattern.

  Thereby, since several movable member can be moved by one operation, there exists an effect that a powerful production can be provided to a player.

<Feature R group> (Rewinding control of a series of effects by button operation)
An operation means that can be operated by the player, a signal output means for outputting a predetermined signal based on the operation of the operation means, and a signal determination means for determining a signal output by the signal output means And an effect means capable of executing an effect, and causing the effect means to execute a specific effect in a predetermined first effect pattern based on the determination of the predetermined signal by the signal determination means. In a gaming machine having a possible performance executing means, when the specific performance is executed by the performance executing means, the signal determining means determines the predetermined signal based on the determination of the predetermined signal. A gaming machine R1 characterized in that it has an effect variable means for causing the effect execution means to execute the specific effect in a second effect pattern different from the one effect pattern.

  In a gaming machine such as a gaming machine or a pachinko machine, an accessory driving effect for operating a decorative body from a standby position to a predetermined operating position is executed by a player operating an operating means (such as an effect button). (For example, JP-A-2015-97827).

  In such a conventional gaming machine, even if the player operates the operation means (the effect button or the like) while the decorative body is operating (that is, during the accessory driving effect), a new accessory driving effect can be obtained. There is a problem that the effect of the effect driving effect that is executed based on the operation on the operation means (such as the effect button) is reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine R1, a predetermined signal is output by the signal output means based on operation of the operating means that can be operated by the player. The signal output from the signal output means is determined by the signal determination means. Based on the determination of the predetermined signal by the signal determination means, the effect execution means executes a specific effect by the effect means capable of executing the effect with the predetermined first effect pattern.

  Then, when the specific effect is being executed by the effect executing means, at least the first effect pattern in the reverse direction from the predetermined effect position of the first effect pattern based on the determination of the predetermined signal by the signal determining means. It is varied by the effect varying means so that the specific effect is executed by the effect executing means in the second effect pattern that executes a part.

  Thereby, when the specific effect is executed by the operation of the operation means in the first effect pattern, even if the operation means is further operated, the specific effect is executed by changing to the second effect pattern. It is possible to suppress the generation of an invalid state that does not react to the operation of the operation, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect performed based on the operation of the operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be further improved.

  In the gaming machine R1, the second effect pattern is constituted by an effect pattern that executes at least a part of the first effect pattern in the reverse direction.

  According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine R1, the second effect pattern is composed of an effect pattern that executes at least a part of the first effect pattern in the reverse direction. It can be executed by setting the data in the reverse direction, and there is an effect that different effects can be easily executed.

  In the gaming machine R1 or R2, the effect varying means is configured to change the first effect pattern in the reverse direction from the effect position of the first effect pattern being executed at the timing when the predetermined signal is determined by the signal determining means. A gaming machine R3, wherein at least a part is executed as the second performance pattern.

  According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R1 or R2, the effect changing means is in the reverse direction from the effect position of the first effect pattern that is executed at the timing when the predetermined signal is determined by the signal determining means. Since at least a part of the first effect pattern is executed as the second effect pattern, it is smoothly connected to the second effect pattern at the timing when the operation means is operated, and the uncomfortable feeling given to the player can be suppressed. effective.

  In any one of the gaming machines R1 to R3, when the specific effect is executed by the signal determining unit when the specific effect is being executed in the second effect pattern, The gaming machine R4, wherein the specific effect is executed with the first effect pattern from the effect position of the first effect pattern corresponding to the effect position being executed with the second effect pattern.

  According to the gaming machine R4, in any of the gaming machines R1 to R3, when the specific effect is executed in the second effect pattern, the effect varying means is when the predetermined signal is determined by the signal determining means. Since the specific effect is executed with the first effect pattern from the effect position of the first effect pattern corresponding to the effect position being executed with the second effect pattern, the first is performed in accordance with the player's operation. The second production pattern corresponding to the rewinding of the production pattern is finished, and the first production pattern in the forward direction is obtained. The execution direction of the first production pattern can be switched by the player's operation, and the entertainment of the game can be further improved. There is an effect.

  In any one of the gaming machines R1 to R4, the second effect pattern is set as a pattern in which the first effect pattern is executed in the reverse direction during an effect period of a predetermined period, and the effect variable Based on the execution of the second effect pattern for the specified period, the means specifies the first effect pattern from the effect position of the first effect pattern corresponding to the effect position at which the second effect pattern ends. A gaming machine R5 characterized in that it produces an effect.

  According to the gaming machine R5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines R1 to R4, the following effects are produced. In other words, the second effect pattern is set as a pattern in which the first effect pattern is executed in the reverse direction during an effect period of a predetermined specific period. Since the specific effect is executed by the first effect pattern from the effect position of the first effect pattern corresponding to the effect position at which the second effect pattern is ended based on the execution, the first effect pattern is more There is an effect that it is possible to smoothly switch to the second effect pattern and provide an effect with a sense of incongruity suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines R1 to R5, there is an execution period determining unit that determines an elapsed period in which the specific effect is being executed by the effect executing unit, and the effect variable unit is a determination result of the execution period determining unit The gaming machine R6 is characterized in that the specific effect is executed in the second effect pattern based on the game.

  According to the gaming machine R6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines R1 to R5, the elapsed period in which the specific effect is being executed by the effect executing means is determined by the execution period determining means. The effect changing means is for causing the second effect pattern to execute the specific effect based on the determination result of the execution period determining means, and therefore can automatically switch from the first effect pattern to the second effect pattern. , There is an effect that it can provide a player with a fresh production.

  In the gaming machine R6, the effect means is a movable means capable of moving within a predetermined range, and the effect execution means has a predetermined first effect position and a second effect position different from the first effect position as the specific effect. An effect that reciprocates between the effect positions is caused to be executed by the movable means, and the effect changing means is configured such that the specific effect is directed from the first effect position to the second effect position by the execution period determining means. The gaming machine R7 is characterized in that the specific effect is executed with the second effect pattern when it is determined that the effect is being executed.

  According to the gaming machine R7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R6, the following effects are produced. That is, the effect executing means causes the movable means to execute an effect that reciprocates between a predetermined first effect position and a second effect position different from the first effect position as the specific effect. The effect changing means is configured such that when the execution period determining means determines that the specific effect is a period in which the effect is being executed from the first effect position to the second effect position, the specific effect is generated in the second effect pattern. Since it is executed, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the gaming machine R6 or R7, the variable restriction that restricts the execution of the effect varying means when the execution period determining means determines that the elapsed period in which the specific effect is being executed has not passed a predetermined period. A gaming machine R8 characterized by having means.

  According to the gaming machine R8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine R6 or R7, the effect variable when the execution period determining means determines that the elapsed period in which the specific effect is being executed has not passed the predetermined period. Since the execution of the means is restricted by the variable restriction means, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the trouble that the effect pattern is frequently switched and the interest of the effect is impaired.

  In any one of the gaming machines R5 to R8, the effect execution means executes the specific effect on a plurality of the effect means, and the effect variable means determines the execution period among the plurality of effect means. The gaming machine R9 is characterized in that the specific effect is executed in the second effect pattern with respect to at least one of the effect means based on the determination result by the means.

  According to the gaming machine R9, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines R5 to R8, the following effects are achieved. That is, the specific effect is executed by the effect execution means for the plurality of effect means. The effect varying means causes at least one effect means to execute the specific effect with the second effect pattern based on the determination result by the execution period determining means among the plurality of effect means.

  Thereby, a plurality of effect means can be changed to the second effect pattern based on the determination result of the execution period determination means, and various effects can be provided to the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines R1 to R9, the effect executing means executes the specific effect for a plurality of the effect means, and the effect changing means is the second effect of the plurality of effect means. The gaming machine R10 is characterized in that the specific effect is executed in the second effect pattern with respect to the effect means having a short effect period executed as a pattern.

  According to the gaming machine R10, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines R1 to R9, the following effects are achieved. That is, the effect execution means executes a specific effect for a plurality of effect means, and the effect variable means for an effect means with a short effect period that is executed as the second effect pattern among the plurality of effect means. Since the specific effect is executed by the second effect pattern, there is an effect that an invalid state when the operation means is operated can be suppressed.

<Characteristic S group> (Multiple movable positions and movable non-execution timings are matched in accordance with the production)
The effect means capable of executing the effect, the specific effect executing means for causing the effect means to execute the specific effect for a predetermined period, the operation means operable by the player, and the operation means are operated. A signal output unit that outputs a predetermined signal based on the signal, a signal determination unit that determines a signal output by the signal output unit, a plurality of movable members that are movable within a predetermined movable range, Movable means for moving at least one movable member of the plurality of movable members based on the determination of the predetermined signal by the signal determining means when the specific effect is being executed; and the signal When the predetermined signal is determined by the determination means, the movable mode of the movable member that is moved when the specific effect production elapsed period that is being executed is within the specific elapsed period is variable. And a prohibiting unit that prohibits movement by the moving unit based on the fact that the signal determining unit has determined the predetermined signal when the specific elapsed period is exceeded. A gaming machine S1 characterized by:

  In a gaming machine such as a gaming machine or a pachinko machine, an accessory driving effect for operating a decorative body from a standby position to a predetermined operating position is executed by a player operating an operating means (such as an effect button). (For example, JP-A-2015-97827).

  In such a conventional game machine, there is a problem that, if the decorative body is operated based on the operation of the operation means regardless of the effect lapse period, the game is not sharp and the interest of the player cannot be improved. Also, if all the decorative bodies provided are in the operating state, even if the player operates the operation means (such as a production button), the operation of a new decorative body cannot be executed. There has been a problem in that the effect of producing the effect of operating the decorative body that is executed based on the operation on the means (such as the production button) is reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine S1, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means in a period predetermined for the effect means capable of executing the effect. A predetermined signal is output by the signal output means based on the operation means that can be operated by the player. The signal output from the signal output means is determined by the signal determination means.

  When the specific effect is being executed, at least one movable member of the plurality of movable members is moved by the movable unit based on the determination of the predetermined signal by the signal determining unit. When the predetermined signal is discriminated by the signal discriminating means, the movable aspect of the movable member that is moved when the effect lapse period of the specific effect being executed is within the specific elapsed period is varied by the movable aspect varying means. On the other hand, the movement by the movable means based on the fact that the signal discriminating means discriminates the predetermined signal when the specific elapsed period is exceeded is prohibited by the prohibiting means.

  As a result, when the performance lapse period of the specific effect is within the specific lapse period, the movable mode of the movable member is varied based on the operation of the operation means. Since the movement of the movable member is prohibited, it is possible to produce an effect in which the movable member is moved only within a specific elapsed period. Therefore, a sharp effect can be provided. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine S1, when the predetermined signal is determined by the signal determining unit within the specific elapsed period, the movable mode varying unit sets the plurality of movable members to predetermined predetermined positions. A game machine S2 that is movable by a movable means.

  According to the gaming machine S2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine S1, the movable mode varying means determines a plurality of movable members in advance when a predetermined signal is determined by the signal determining means within a specific elapsed period. Since each of the predetermined positions is moved by the movable means, the operation means is operated within the specific production period within the specific production period, thereby allowing the movable member to perform a certain operation. There is an effect that a novel impression can be given to the player.

  In the gaming machine S1 or S2, the movable means is at least one movable member among the plurality of movable members based on the fact that the predetermined signal is not determined by the signal determining means even if the predetermined period within the specific elapsed period elapses. Is moved to a predetermined position. A gaming machine S3.

  According to the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine S1 or S2, the movable means is based on the fact that the predetermined signal is not discriminated by the signal discriminating means even if the predetermined period within a specific elapsed period elapses. Since at least one movable member of the plurality of movable members is moved to a predetermined position, even a player with a low operation frequency of the operation means can effectively enjoy a specific performance. There is an effect that can be done.

  In any of the gaming machines S1 to S3, a determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, and a benefit advantageous to the player based on the determination result determined by the determination means as a specific determination result. A gaming machine S4, characterized in that a notification effect based on a determination result by the determination unit is executed.

  According to the gaming machine S4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines S1 to S3, the following effects are produced. That is, the determination is executed by the determination unit based on the establishment of the determination condition. On the basis of the determination result determined by the determination means, a privilege advantageous to the player is granted by the privilege grant means. The notification effect based on the determination result by the determination means is executed as the specific effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to be interested in the notification effect executed in the specific effect, and to increase the player's interest in the specific effect.

  In the gaming machine S4, the specific effect is that the notification effect is executed within a predetermined period after the specific elapsed period has elapsed.

  According to the gaming machine S5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine S4, the specific effect is that the notification effect is executed within a predetermined period after the elapse of a specific elapsed period, so the notification effect is executed. There is an effect that it is possible to notify the player that the effect by the movable member is executed in accordance with the timing and the notification effect is about to be executed.

  In any one of the gaming machines S1 to S5, the movable means that has been moved is moved by the movable means to the initial position before the movement based on the prohibition being executed by the prohibition means. A gaming machine S6 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine S6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines S1 to S6, the movable means is moved to the initial position before the movement by the movable means based on the prohibition being executed by the prohibiting means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to easily notify the player that the effect using the movable member has ended.

<Characteristic T group> (The stroke is variable by changing the output to drive the button by hitting it high and low.)
An operation means that can be operated by the player, a signal output means for outputting a predetermined signal based on the operation of the operation means, and a signal determination means for determining a signal output by the signal output means And a movable member capable of moving within a predetermined movable range, and a movable means for moving the movable member based on the determination of the predetermined signal by the signal determining means. The movable signal output means for outputting a movable signal for changing the movable amount for moving the movable member in a unit period by the movable means, and the predetermined signal is determined by the signal determining means, And a selection means for selecting the type of the movable signal output by the movable signal output means.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an accessory driving effect for operating a decorative body from a standby position to a predetermined operation position by a player operating an operating means (such as an effect button) is executed. (For example, JP-A-2015-97827).

  In such a conventional game machine, there is a problem that the effect of the effect driving effect is lowered because the operation mode of the decorative body is monotonous. Further, even if the player operates the operation means (the effect button or the like) while the decorative body is operating (that is, during the accessory driving effect), the new accessory driving effect is not executed. There is a problem that the effect of the effect driving effect executed based on the operation on the operation means (the effect button or the like) is reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine T1, a predetermined signal is output by the signal output means based on the operation means that can be operated by the player. The signal output from the signal output means is determined by the signal determination means. Based on the determination of the predetermined signal by the signal determination means, a movable member that can move within a predetermined movable range is moved by the movable means.

  The movable signal output means outputs a movable signal that varies the amount of movement by which the movable member can be moved in a unit period by the movable means. Based on the determination of the predetermined signal by the signal determination means, the type of the movable signal output by the movable signal output means is selected by the selection means.

  Accordingly, since the type of the movable signal is selected and the movable amount of the movable member is varied based on the operation of the operation means, the movable modes of the movable member can be various. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine T1 includes an interval determination unit that determines an interval at which the predetermined signal is determined by the signal determination unit, and the selection unit has a predetermined interval at which the predetermined signal is determined by the interval determination unit. When the distance is equal to or shorter than the interval, the game machine T2 selects a movable signal having a smaller movable amount than when the distance is equal to or greater than the predetermined interval.

  According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine T1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the interval at which the predetermined signal is discriminated by the signal discriminating unit is determined by the interval discriminating unit. When the interval at which the predetermined signal is determined by the interval determination unit is equal to or smaller than the predetermined interval, the selection unit selects a movable signal having a smaller movable amount than when the interval is equal to or greater than the predetermined interval.

  Thereby, when the operation frequency of an operation means is high, there exists an effect that the malfunction that a movable member is damaged can be suppressed by making the movable amount of a movable member small.

  In the gaming machine T2, when the specific condition is satisfied, the selection unit is a movable signal having a large movable amount even if the interval determined by the interval determination unit is equal to or less than the predetermined interval. A gaming machine T3, characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine T2, when the specific condition is satisfied, the movable amount is not limited even if the interval determined by the interval determining unit is not more than the predetermined interval. Since a large movable signal is selected by the selection means, even when the operation frequency is high, a movable signal having a larger movable amount is selected when a specific condition is satisfied, so that the effect of the movable member becomes monotonous. There is an effect that can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines T1 to T3, the movable means is composed of at least a stepping motor, and the movable signal is composed of a signal composed of a predetermined frequency. .

  According to the gaming machine T4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines T1 to T3, the movable means is composed of at least a stepping motor, and the movable signal is composed of a signal composed of a predetermined frequency. There is an effect that the movable control can be easily performed.

  In the gaming machine T4, the movable signal is such that the movable amount is increased by a signal having a high frequency, and the movable amount is decreased by a signal having a low frequency.

  According to the gaming machine T5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine T4, the amount of movement is increased by a signal having a high frequency, and the amount of movement is decreased by a signal having a low frequency, so that the amount of movement can be easily controlled. .

  Any one of the gaming machines T3 to T4 includes a plurality of the movable members, the movable means capable of moving each of the plurality of movable members, and the movable signal output means includes the signal determination means When the predetermined signal is determined by the game machine T6, the movable member to be moved is determined based on a preset movable condition and the movable signal is output.

  According to the gaming machine T6, in addition to the effect produced by either the gaming machine T3 or T4, each of the plurality of movable members is moved by the movable means, and is set in advance when a predetermined signal is determined by the signal determining means. Since the movable member to be moved is determined based on the movable condition and the movable signal is output by the movable signal output means, there is an effect that the movable member can be easily controlled.

  In the gaming machine T1 or T2, the movable means is composed of at least a solenoid, and the movable signal is a signal composed of a predetermined power value.

  According to the gaming machine T7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine T1 or T2, the movable means is composed of at least a solenoid, and the movable signal is a signal composed of a predetermined power value. There is an effect that it can be easily executed.

  In the gaming machine T7, when the predetermined signal is discriminated by the signal discriminating unit, the selecting unit uses a first power value and the first power as the power value of the movable signal output to the movable unit. When at least a second power value lower than the second power value is selected and a predetermined condition is satisfied when the predetermined signal is received by the signal discriminating means, the first power value and the second power value are A gaming machine T8 that is alternately selected.

  According to the gaming machine T8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine T7, the selecting means uses the first power as the power value of the movable signal output to the movable means when a predetermined signal is determined by the signal determining means. A first power value and a second power value when a predetermined condition is satisfied when at least a second power value lower than the first power value is selected and a predetermined signal is received by the signal determination means Are alternately selected. Therefore, even when the operating means is operated continuously, the movable amount of the movable member can be varied, and the movable member can be moved in various ways.

<Feature U group> (Prevents heat generation by varying the solenoid drive power at the start and after the drive)
A driving member capable of driving at least a first position and a second position different from the first position, and the driving member is supplied with electric power equal to or higher than a first power value, so that at least the second position from the first position. Driving means for driving to a position and when the supplied power value is equal to or lower than the second power value, driving means for driving from the second position to the first position, and power supply for supplying power to the driving means And when the drive member is started to be driven from the first position to the second position, the power value supplied to the drive means by the power supply means is set to a drive start power equal to or higher than the first power value. In a state where the driving member is driven between the first position and the second position, the power value supplied by the power supply means is less than the second power value and less than the driving start power. Supply power controlled to power value Gaming machine U1, characterized in that those having a control means.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is one that moves a movable body (such as an accessory) from a standby position to a predetermined operation position by driving a solenoid, and holds it at the predetermined operation position (for example, JP, 2008-301906, A).

  In such a conventional game machine, the solenoid is driven with the same electric power when the movable body is operated from the standby position to the predetermined operation position and when the movable body is held at the predetermined operation position. In this case, the movable body is moved from the standby position to the predetermined operation position even though less energy (electric power) is required to be held at the predetermined operation position than to move the movable body from the standby position to the predetermined operation position. The movable body is held with the same energy (electric power) as when operating to the position. As a result, when the holding time of the movable body becomes long, energy (electric power) is unnecessarily supplied to the solenoid, which causes problems such as an increase in power consumption and heat generation / breakage of the solenoid.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine U1, the driving member is driven from the first position to the second position when the driving means is supplied with electric power equal to or higher than the first electric power value, and is supplied to the driving means. When the value becomes equal to or less than the second power value, the drive member is driven from the second position to the first position. When the drive member is started to be driven from the first position to the second position by the supply power control means, the power value supplied from the power supply means to the drive means is controlled to drive start power equal to or higher than the first power value. In a state where the driving member is driven between the first position and the second position, the power value supplied from the power supply means is controlled to a power value that is equal to or higher than the second power value and less than the driving start power.

  As a result, when the drive member starts to be driven from the first position to the second position, the drive start power equal to or higher than the first power value for driving the drive member from the first position to the second position is the drive means. To be supplied. On the other hand, in a state in which the driving member is driven between the first position and the second position, a power value that is greater than or equal to the second power value that is not driven to the first position and less than the driving start power is in the driving means. Supplied. Therefore, the drive member can be driven from the first position to the second position, and the drive member can be held at the second position with less power than that required for driving, thereby reducing power consumption. effective.

  The gaming machine U1 includes a ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, and a grant means capable of giving a predetermined game value based on the game ball entering the ball entry means. When the driving member is driven to the first position, it becomes difficult for a game ball to enter the ball entry means, and when the driving member is driven to the second position, The gaming machine U2 is characterized in that it is easier for a game ball to enter the ball entry means than when the driving member is driven to the first position.

  According to the gaming machine U2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine U1, the following effects are achieved. That is, a predetermined game value is given by the granting unit based on the game ball entering the ball entry unit into which the game ball can enter. The ball entry means is difficult to enter when the drive member is driven to the first position, and is easy to enter when the drive member is driven to the second position. Thereby, it can be noted whether the driving member is driven to the first position or the second position, and there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the gaming machine U1 or U2, the power supply means includes first power supply means for supplying the drive means with the drive start power, and less than the drive start power that is greater than or equal to the second power value to the drive means. Second power supply means for supplying a power value, wherein the power supply control means is configured to supply the first power when starting to drive the drive member from the first position to the second position. Power is supplied from the second power supply means to the drive means in a state where the drive member is driven between the first position and the second position. A game machine U3 that is controlled so as to supply the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine U3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine U1 or U2, the following effects are produced. That is, the power supply means includes a first power supply means for supplying drive start power to the drive means, and a second power supply for supplying power values less than the drive start power that are equal to or greater than the second power value to the drive means. Means. When starting to drive the drive member from the first position to the second position, power is supplied from the first power supply means to the drive means by the supply power control means, and the drive member is between the first position and the second position. In a state in which is driven, power is supplied from the second power supply means to the drive means by the supply power control means. Thereby, the supply power control means may control to select the power supplied to the drive means to be supplied from either the first power supply means or the second power supply means depending on the case. There is an effect that the control load can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine U3, the supply power control means supplies power from the first power supply means to the drive means when the holding period for holding the drive member at the second position is shorter than a predetermined period. After the control, the power supplied to the drive means is controlled to a power value equal to or lower than the second power value without controlling the power supply from the second power supply means to the drive means. A gaming machine U4 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine U4, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine U3, when the holding period for holding the driving member at the second position is shorter than the predetermined period, the driving power control means drives the driving means from the first power supply means. After the electric power is supplied to the driving means, the electric power supplied to the driving means becomes a power value equal to or lower than the second electric power value without supplying electric power from the second electric power supply means to the driving means. Thereby, since the control which supplies electric power to a drive means from a 2nd electric power supply means can be abbreviate | omitted, there exists an effect that processing load can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine U3 or U4, the supply power control means controls the power supply from the first power supply means to the drive means, and then supplies power from the second power supply means to the drive means. In the case of controlling in such a manner, the control is performed so that power is not supplied from the first power supply means to the drive power means before control is performed so that power is supplied from the second power supply means to the drive means. Characteristic gaming machine U5.

  According to the gaming machine U5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine U3 or U4, after the power is supplied from the first power supply means to the drive means by the supply power control means, the first power supply means to the drive power means. After the power is no longer supplied, power is supplied from the second power supply means to the drive means. Thereby, it can prevent (suppress) that electric power is simultaneously supplied to a drive means from a 1st electric power supply means and a 2nd electric power supply means, and it can prevent (suppress) that a drive means is destroyed. effective.

  In any one of the gaming machines U3 to U5, the supply power control means outputs first instruction means for supplying power from the first power supply means to the drive means, and the first instruction means First supply control means for controlling the supply of power from the first power supply means to the drive means based on an instruction signal from the first power supply means, and for supplying power to the drive means from the second power supply means Second instruction means for outputting an instruction signal, second supply control means for controlling the supply of power from the second power supply means to the drive means based on the instruction signal from the second instruction means, A game characterized by comprising timing instruction means for instructing control timing of the first supply control means and the second supply control means based on instruction signals from the first instruction means and the second instruction means. U6.

  According to the gaming machine U6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines U3 to U5, the following effects are produced. That is, the supply power control means is based on the instruction signal from the first instruction means, the first supply control means for controlling the supply of power from the first power supply means to the drive means, and the instructions from the second instruction means And a second supply control means for controlling the supply of power from the second power supply means to the drive means based on the signal, and the control timing of the first supply control means and the second supply control means is the timing. Instructed by the instruction means. As a result, even if the instruction signals of the first instruction means and the second instruction means are not synchronized (deviation), the first supply control means and the second supply control means are instructed by the instruction from the timing instruction means. Control timing can be synchronized, and there is an effect that power can be supplied to the driving means at an appropriate timing.

  In the gaming machine U6, the timing instruction means instructs the control timing of the first supply control means and the second supply control means at predetermined intervals.

  According to the gaming machine U7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine U6, the timing instruction means instructs the control timing of the first supply control means and the second supply control means at every predetermined period. As a result, the control timing can be instructed to the first supply control means and the second supply control means at predetermined intervals, so that the control of the first supply control means and the second supply control means is executed without delaying more than the predetermined period. There is an effect that can be done.

  In the gaming machine U6 or U7, a clear signal output means for outputting a clear signal instructing to forcibly turn off the instruction signals of the first instruction means and the second instruction means, and the clear signal output means A gaming machine U8, comprising: clear means for forcibly turning off the instruction signals of the first instruction means and the second instruction means based on receiving the clear signal.

  According to the gaming machine U8, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine U6 or U7, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the clear signal is output from the clear signal output means and the clear signal is received by the clear means, the instruction signals of the first instruction means and the second instruction means are forcibly turned off. Thereby, the instruction signals of the first instruction means and the second instruction means can be turned off collectively, and the control of the first supply control means and the second supply control means can be stopped collectively. is there.

  In the gaming machine U8, the gaming machine U9 includes noise removing means capable of removing noise of a signal output from the clear signal means to the clearing means.

  According to the gaming machine U9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine U8, it is possible to remove the noise of the signal output from the clear signal means to the clearing means by the noise removing means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the clearing unit from malfunctioning due to noise and erroneously stopping the control of the first supply control unit and the second supply control unit.

  In any one of the gaming machines U6 to U9, the first supply control means, when the voltage of the instruction signal from the first instruction means is equal to or higher than a predetermined voltage, from the first power supply means to the drive means When the voltage of the instruction signal from the second instruction means is equal to or higher than a predetermined voltage, the second supply control means is connected with the second power supply means. The gaming machine U10 is in a conductive state in which power is supplied to the driving means.

  According to the gaming machine U10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines U6 to U9, the following effects are produced. That is, when the first supply control unit receives the first instruction signal that is a voltage equal to or higher than a predetermined voltage, the first supply control unit is in a conductive state, and power is supplied from the first power supply unit to the driving unit. Is done. Further, when the second supply control means receives the second instruction signal having a voltage equal to or higher than a predetermined voltage, the second supply control means becomes conductive, and power is supplied from the second power supply means to the drive means. Is done. Thereby, since the first supply control means and the second supply control means can be controlled by voltage, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the electric power necessary for the control for supplying electric power to the driving means.

  In any one of the gaming machines U1 to U10, the supply power control means operates when supplied with a predetermined range of power, and a control power supply means for supplying power to the supply power control means, and its supply And a noise removing means capable of removing noise of power supplied from the means to the supplied power control means.

  According to the gaming machine U11, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines U1 to U10, the following effects are produced. In other words, noise of power supplied from the control power supply means is removed by the noise removal means with respect to the supply power control means that is operated by supplying a predetermined range of power. Thereby, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the supply power control unit from being destroyed by supplying power of a predetermined range or more to the supply power control unit. In addition, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent a predetermined range of power from being supplied to the supply power control means due to noise and malfunction of the supply power control means.

  In any one of the gaming machines U1 to U11, the driving means generates a magnetic force when power is supplied, and a coil capable of driving the driving member and one end of the coil to the power supply means. A power line that is connected and grounded at the other end, and a degaussing line that is connected to the power line in parallel with the coil, the degaussing line from the other end side to the one end side of the coil. A gaming machine U12 comprising rectifying means for rectifying current in the direction of travel.

  According to the gaming machine U12, in addition to the effects produced by any of the games U1 to U11, the following effects are produced. When electric power is supplied to the coil of the driving means, a magnetic force is generated, and the driving member is driven. As a power supply line for the drive means, one end of the coil is connected to the power supply means, and the other end is grounded. A demagnetization line is connected to the power supply line in parallel with the coil. The current flowing through the degaussing line is rectified in the direction from the other end side of the coil toward the one end side by the rectifying means. As a result, when power is supplied from the power supply means, power is supplied to the coil without current flowing through the degaussing line, and magnetic force is generated in the coil. On the other hand, when the power supply to the coil is cut off, the magnetic energy generated in the coil can be consumed as power through the demagnetization line, and the supplied power control means is damaged by the magnetic energy generated in the coil. There is an effect that can be prevented (suppressed).

  In any one of the gaming machines U1 to U12, the power supply means includes a second power supply means for supplying a power value equal to or higher than the second power value and less than the drive start power, and the second power supply means. Third power supply means for supplying a power value that is the drive start power in total with the supplied power value, and the supply power control means moves the drive member from the first position to the first position. When driving to two positions is started, control is performed so that power is supplied to the driving means from both the second power supply means and the third supply means, and the first position and the second position are The gaming machine U13 is controlled so that power is supplied from the second power supply means to the drive means while the drive member is driven therebetween.

  According to the gaming machine U13, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines U1 to U12, the following effects are produced. That is, the second power supply means of the power supply means supplies a power value that is equal to or greater than the second power value and less than the drive start power to the drive means, and the third power supply means and the second power supply means of the power supply means The power value that is the drive start power is supplied to the drive means in total. When the drive member is started to be driven from the first position to the second position by the supply power control means, power is supplied to the drive means from both the second power supply means and the third power supply means, and the first position In the state where the driving member is driven between the first position and the second position, power is supplied to the driving means from the second power supply means. As a result, the drive member can be driven from the first position to the second position, and the drive member can be held at the second position with less power than that required for driving, thereby reducing power consumption. There is an effect.

  In any of the above-described embodiments or gaming machines in each control example, the gaming machine is a slot machine, and the gaming machine Z1. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  In any one of the above-described embodiments or control examples, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine Z2. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  In any of the game machines in each of the above-described embodiments or control examples, the game machine is a combination of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
22 Frame button (operation means)
113 Sound lamp control device (movable means)

Claims (5)

Operation means that can be operated by the player;
Signal output means for outputting a predetermined signal based on the operation means being operated;
Signal discriminating means for discriminating a signal output by the signal output means;
A movable member capable of moving within a predetermined movable range;
In a gaming machine having a movable means for moving the movable member based on the determination of the predetermined signal by the signal determining means,
A movable signal output means for outputting a movable signal for changing a movable amount for moving the movable member in a unit period by the movable means;
And a selection unit that selects a type of the movable signal output by the movable signal output unit based on the determination of the predetermined signal by the signal determination unit. . An interval determination unit that determines an interval in which the predetermined signal is determined by the signal determination unit;
The selection unit selects a movable signal having a smaller movable amount than the case where the predetermined signal is equal to or greater than the predetermined interval when the interval at which the predetermined signal is determined by the interval determination unit is equal to or smaller than the predetermined interval. The gaming machine according to claim 1.   The selection unit selects a movable signal having a large movable amount even when the interval determined by the interval determination unit is equal to or less than a predetermined interval when a specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein there is a gaming machine.   4. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the movable means is composed of at least a stepping motor, and the movable signal is composed of a signal composed of a predetermined frequency. .   The gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein the movable signal is such that the movable amount is increased by a signal having a high frequency and the movable amount is decreased by a signal having a low frequency.

Images